Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the V302SH.

^ For proper handset use, read this manual

beforehand.

^ For instructions on how to use Vodafone live!, see

Vodafone live! manual.

^ Keep this manual in a convenient place for

reference.

^ Accessible Vodafone services may vary by service

area, subscription, etc.

V302SH transmits at 1.5 GHz and is compatible with the Vodafone K.K. network.

This product is exclusively for use in Japan.

Note

^ Copying this manual in whole or part without

authorization is prohibited.

^ Manual content is subject to change without prior

notice.

^ Efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy and

clarity of this manual. Please contact Customer

Service, General Information (see P.14-20) concerning unclear or missing information.

Symbols

Multi Selector

Use Multi Selector to select menu items, move cursor, scroll, etc.

In this manual, Multi Selector operations are indicated as shown to the right.

Basic Multi Selector Operations

B

E: Press C or D

B

F: Press B or A

B

G: Press C, D, B or A

C

B

Side Key

Use Side Key to activate specified functions with handset closed or to release shutter. In this manual,

Side Key is indicated as shown to the right.

"S" is not inscribed on the actual Shutter Key.

b

A

D

Side Key h

,

^ In this manual, most operations are described with handset open.

^ Sample screen shots, etc. are provided for reference only. Actual handset windows, menus, etc. may differ in appearance.

i

ii

Page References

When I appears next to a page reference, indicated pages are in Vodafone live!

Manual. When only the page numbers appear, indicated pages are in Basic

Operations Manual.

Abbreviated Steps

Handset operations starting from Index Menu are abbreviated as follows:

Press b

Press e to open Handy Features menu

Perform the operation such as opening a window

Index Menu

H

Menu Item

A

Handy (

e)

A

Selection

A

Operation

A

Menu (

●

Select menu item and press b

Select the folder or file and press b

Press the corresponding key in parentheses

CBattery (SHBAD1)

*

(Type 1 lithium-ion battery)

Accessories

CRapid Charger (SHCQ01)

*

*May also be purchased separately.

Optional Accessories

C Headphones C In-Car Charger

+

For accessory-related information, please contact Vodafone Customer Center,

General Information (see P.14-20).

iii

iv

Contents

Symbols....................................................................................................................... i

Accessories............................................................................................................... iii

Contents .................................................................................................................... iv

Safety Precautions ................................................................................................. xiii

General Notes ........................................................................................................ xxii

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) .......................................................................... xxiv

1

2

Getting

Started

Basic

Handset

Operations

Function & Feature Preview ........................................... 1-2

Handset Parts & Functions............................................. 1-4

C Handset...................................................................... 1-4

C Display Indicators....................................................... 1-7

C Sub Display Indicators ............................................... 1-9

Battery & Charger .......................................................... 1-10

C Getting Started......................................................... 1-10

C Installing & Removing Battery.................................. 1-14

C Rapid Charger.......................................................... 1-16

C In-Car Charger ......................................................... 1-17

Handset Power On/Off................................................... 1-18

C Key Guard................................................................ 1-19

Clock Settings................................................................ 1-20

Handset Menus .............................................................. 1-21

C Index Menu .............................................................. 1-21

C Functions Menu ....................................................... 1-22

C Soft Keys.................................................................. 1-23

C Quick Operations ..................................................... 1-24

C Guide ....................................................................... 1-25

Handset Codes............................................................... 1-26

C Security Code .......................................................... 1-26

C Center Access Code ................................................ 1-26

Initiating a Call ................................................................. 2-2

C Redial......................................................................... 2-4

C International Call & Send With Code ......................... 2-5

●

Setup Preset .......................................................... 2-5

●

International Call & Send With Code ..................... 2-5

C Emergency Calls........................................................ 2-5

Incoming Call ................................................................... 2-6

C Call History................................................................. 2-7

Handling Incoming Calls................................................. 2-8

C Placing Callers on Hold.............................................. 2-8

C Quick Recorder .......................................................... 2-9

Delayed Ringer............................................................... 2-10

3

Manner

Mode

4

Entering

Characters

Engaged Call Operations...............................................2-11

C Earpiece Volume ......................................................2-11

C Voice Memo..............................................................2-12

C Notepad Memory ......................................................2-13

●

Opening Entries....................................................2-13

Redial & Call History ......................................................2-14

●

Delete ...................................................................2-14

Simple Mode ...................................................................2-16

C Activating/Canceling Simple Mode ...........................2-16

C Simple Mode Operations ..........................................2-17

Call Time .........................................................................2-19

●

Reset ....................................................................2-19

●

Instant Display......................................................2-19

Call Charge .....................................................................2-20

●

Reset ....................................................................2-20

●

Instant Display......................................................2-20

My Number & Owner Profile..........................................2-21

●

Edit, Delete & Copy ..............................................2-21

Minding Mobile Manners .................................................3-2

Manner Mode ....................................................................3-3

C Activating & Canceling................................................3-3

C Manner Mode Settings ...............................................3-4

●

Message Recorder .................................................3-4

●

Ring Tone Level .....................................................3-4

●

Vibration .................................................................3-4

●

LED Indicator..........................................................3-5

●

Whisper Mode ........................................................3-5

●

Sound Volume........................................................3-5

●

V-Appli Volume.......................................................3-5

●

V-Appli Vibration.....................................................3-5

Off-Line Mode ...................................................................3-6

Character Selection..........................................................4-2

C Entry Modes ...............................................................4-2

C Key Assignments........................................................4-3

Entering Characters .........................................................4-4

C Kanji, Hiragana & Katakana .......................................4-4

C Entering Alphanumerics .............................................4-6

C Symbols, Pictographs & Emoticons............................4-7

C Mail & Web Extensions...............................................4-8

C Copying from Phone Book..........................................4-9

C Character Code ..........................................................4-9

C Pager Code ..............................................................4-10 v

vi

4

Entering

Characters

5

Phone Book

Conversion Methods (Japanese Only) ........................ 4-12

C Phonetic Conversion................................................ 4-12

C One-Hiragana Conversion ....................................... 4-12

C Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion .. 4-13

C Quick Conversion (for Hiragana) ............................. 4-13

C Conversion Settings................................................. 4-14

●

Disable Predictive/Previous Usage...................... 4-14

●

Reset Learning .................................................... 4-14

Dictionaries (Japanese Only) ....................................... 4-15

C User Dictionary ........................................................ 4-15

●

New Entry ............................................................ 4-15

●

Edit....................................................................... 4-15

C V302SH Download Dictionary.................................. 4-15

●

Acquire Dictionary................................................ 4-15

●

Cancel.................................................................. 4-16

Editing Characters......................................................... 4-16

C Deleting.................................................................... 4-16

C Replacing ................................................................. 4-16

C Copy/Cut & Paste .................................................... 4-17

C Deleting Text Before or After Cursor........................ 4-17

Text Memo ...................................................................... 4-18

●

Edit/Delete ........................................................... 4-18

Overview........................................................................... 5-2

Saving to Phone Book..................................................... 5-3

C Phone Book Entry Items ............................................ 5-3

C New Phone Book Entries ........................................... 5-4

C Photo.......................................................................... 5-6

C Saving Secret Mode Entries ...................................... 5-7

C Saving from Redial or Call History ............................. 5-8

C Phone Book Memory Status ...................................... 5-8

Option Settings ................................................................ 5-9

C Overview .................................................................... 5-9

C Setting Options ........................................................ 5-10

●

Personal Ring Tone & Incoming Notice............... 5-10

●

Mail Folder ........................................................... 5-10

Using Phone Book......................................................... 5-11

C Dialing from Phone Book ......................................... 5-11

C Phone Book Search ................................................. 5-12

●

Memory No. Search............................................. 5-13

●

Katakana Search ................................................. 5-13

●

Group Search ...................................................... 5-13

●

Search by Reading .............................................. 5-13

C Speed Dial ............................................................... 5-14

C Show Photo.............................................................. 5-14

6

Mobile

Camera

Editing Phone Book .......................................................5-15

C Correction/Change ...................................................5-15

C Deleting Entries ........................................................5-15

Group Settings ...............................................................5-16

C Changing Group Name.............................................5-16

C Group Ring Tone ......................................................5-16

Getting Started .................................................................6-2

C File Formats & Save Locations...................................6-2

C Mobile Camera Basics................................................6-2

C Camera Display Indicators .........................................6-3

C Viewfinder & Key Assignments...................................6-4

Still Images .......................................................................6-5

C Still Image Modes .......................................................6-5

C Capturing Still Images ................................................6-7

●

Add to Phone Book ................................................6-7

●

Save As Thumb......................................................6-7

●

Rotate Thumb.........................................................6-7

C Still Image Functions ..................................................6-8

C Self Timer ...................................................................6-9

C Adding Frames .........................................................6-10

C Lens Effects..............................................................6-11

C Burst Mode ...............................................................6-11

Video................................................................................6-13

C Video Mode ..............................................................6-13

C Recording Video .......................................................6-14

C Video Recording Operations ....................................6-15

Shooting Options ...........................................................6-16

●

Toggle Preview.....................................................6-16

●

Shutter Click .........................................................6-16

●

Mobile Light ..........................................................6-17

●

Anti-Flicker ...........................................................6-17

Image Settings................................................................6-18

●

Brightness ............................................................6-18

●

Soft Focus ............................................................6-18

●

Image Size ...........................................................6-18

●

Image Quality .......................................................6-18

●

Save As ................................................................6-19

●

Mic Settings..........................................................6-19

Additional Settings.........................................................6-20

●

Select Mode .........................................................6-20

●

Save to .................................................................6-20

●

Auto Reset............................................................6-20

●

Key Ops Guide .....................................................6-20 vii

viii

6

7

Mobile

Camera

Display

8

Sounds &

Related

Functions

Opening Images & Playing Video................................. 6-21

C Opening Still Images................................................ 6-21

C Playing Video ........................................................... 6-21

Memory Status ............................................................... 6-22

Sending Still Images...................................................... 6-22

C Sha-mail Mode Images ............................................ 6-22

C Wallpaper Mode Images .......................................... 6-23

C Camera Mode Thumbnails....................................... 6-24

Postcard & Calendar ..................................................... 6-25

C Postcard................................................................... 6-25

C Calendar .................................................................. 6-26

Wallpaper.......................................................................... 7-2

Clock & Calendar ............................................................. 7-3

C Clock Display ............................................................. 7-3

C Calendar .................................................................... 7-3

Display Images................................................................. 7-5

Fonts ................................................................................. 7-6

Display Patterns............................................................... 7-6

Light Settings................................................................... 7-7

●

Brightness.............................................................. 7-7

●

In-Car Backlight ..................................................... 7-7

Sub Display Settings ....................................................... 7-8

●

Sub Display On/Off ................................................ 7-8

●

Backlight Settings .................................................. 7-8

●

Adjust Contrast ...................................................... 7-8

●

Recipient Display ................................................... 7-8

Other Display Settings .................................................... 7-9

●

Language............................................................... 7-9

●

Power On Message ............................................... 7-9

●

Vodafone live! Animation ....................................... 7-9

●

Mail Background .................................................... 7-9

●

Screen Animation ................................................ 7-10

●

Disney Style......................................................... 7-10

●

Incoming Light ..................................................... 7-10

Call Functions .................................................................. 8-2

C Ring Tone Level......................................................... 8-2

C Ring Tone .................................................................. 8-3

C Handset Vibration ...................................................... 8-3

C Mobile/Small Light...................................................... 8-4

C Ring Time................................................................... 8-5

Sound Effects................................................................... 8-5

C Sounds....................................................................... 8-5

C Basic Sound Settings................................................. 8-6

●

Sound Volume/Set LED to Sound ......................... 8-6

Original Voice................................................................... 8-7

9

Managing Files

(Data Folder)

Original Ring Tones .........................................................8-8

C Basics .........................................................................8-8

C Creating an Original Ring Tone ................................8-12

C Editing an Original Ring Tone...................................8-14

C Deleting an Original Ring Tone ................................8-16

Instrument Effects..........................................................8-16

C Basics .......................................................................8-16

C Creating Instrument Effects ......................................8-20

Other Sound Related Functions ...................................8-21

●

Speaker Phone/Speaker ......................................8-21

●

Tone Octave.........................................................8-21

File Organization ..............................................................9-2

Data Folder........................................................................9-3

C Contents .....................................................................9-3

C Window Description....................................................9-3

C Icons ...........................................................................9-4

C Display Settings..........................................................9-5

Opening Files....................................................................9-6

C Handset Data Folder ..................................................9-6

C Sending Files via Long Mail........................................9-7

C Properties ...................................................................9-8

Animation File...................................................................9-8

C Simple Animation........................................................9-8

C Opening Animation Files ..........................................9-10

Using Images & Animation............................................9-10

C Changing Display Size .............................................9-10

C Setting Image & Animation as Wallpaper .................9-11

C Setting Image & Animation as Display Images.........9-11

C Saving Burst Shot Images ........................................9-11

C Slide Show................................................................9-12

Editing Images................................................................9-12

C Enlarging/Reducing Image .......................................9-12

C Changing Image Size ...............................................9-13

C Marker Stamp ...........................................................9-14

C Visual Effects............................................................9-15

C Face Arrange............................................................9-16

C Additional Picture Effects..........................................9-18

●

Frame ...................................................................9-18

●

90° turn.................................................................9-18

●

Moving Photo Frame ............................................9-19

●

Change File Format..............................................9-19

Combining Images .........................................................9-19

C Split Screen ..............................................................9-19

C Panorama Images ....................................................9-21

C Combining Split Mail Images ....................................9-22 ix

x

9

Managing Files

(Data Folder)

10

11

12

Infrared

Handset

Security

Additional

Functions

Melody Files ................................................................... 9-22

C Playback Volume ..................................................... 9-22

C Using for Incoming Tone/Sound Effects .................. 9-23

Editing Files & Folders.................................................. 9-23

●

Changing Folder/File Name................................. 9-23

●

Secret Mode ........................................................ 9-24

●

Copy/Move........................................................... 9-24

●

Delete .................................................................. 9-24

Getting Started............................................................... 10-2

C Available Files.......................................................... 10-2

C Precautions .............................................................. 10-3

Set IR Password............................................................. 10-3

Transferring Files .......................................................... 10-4

C One File Transfer ..................................................... 10-4

C All File Transfer........................................................ 10-5

Changing Security Code ............................................... 11-2

Handset Locks ............................................................... 11-2

C Keypad Lock ............................................................ 11-2

C Auto Key Lock.......................................................... 11-3

C Phone Book Lock..................................................... 11-3

C Restrict Dial.............................................................. 11-4

Accept Call & Reject Call .............................................. 11-4

C Saving Entries.......................................................... 11-4

C Accept Call............................................................... 11-5

C Reject Call................................................................ 11-5

C Rejecting Other Calls ............................................... 11-6

Secret Mode ................................................................... 11-6

C Activating Secret Mode ............................................ 11-6

C Opening Secret Mode Entries.................................. 11-6

Reset ............................................................................... 11-7

C Reset Defaults ......................................................... 11-7

C Reset All................................................................... 11-7

Handy Call Functions .................................................... 12-2

C Signal Alert............................................................... 12-2

C Push Tones.............................................................. 12-2

Side Key Settings .......................................................... 12-3

C For Incoming Calls ................................................... 12-3

C Standby h............................................................ 12-3

Message Recorder......................................................... 12-4

C Activating ................................................................. 12-4

C Deactivating ............................................................. 12-5

C Playing Messages.................................................... 12-5

Voice Memos.................................................................. 12-6

Alarm ...............................................................................12-7

C Setting Alarm ............................................................12-7

C Alarm Options...........................................................12-9

C Canceling & Reactivating Alarm .............................12-10

●

Cancel ................................................................12-10

●

Delete .................................................................12-10

●

Settings ..............................................................12-10

Auto Power On/Off .......................................................12-11

C Auto Power On .......................................................12-11

C Auto Power Off .......................................................12-12

Schedule .......................................................................12-13

C Saving Entries ........................................................12-13

C Setting Alarm ..........................................................12-14

●

Alarm ..................................................................12-14

C Schedule & Action Item Options.............................12-16

C Opening Entries......................................................12-17

C Editing Entries ........................................................12-18

C Deleting Entries ......................................................12-18

●

Delete Item .........................................................12-18

●

One Day Schedules ...........................................12-18

●

Delete All ............................................................12-19

C Other Schedule Settings.........................................12-19

●

Auto Delete.........................................................12-19

●

Secret Mode .......................................................12-19

●

Set Color ............................................................12-19

●

View....................................................................12-19

●

Event List............................................................12-19

Useful Diary ..................................................................12-20

C Saving Entries ........................................................12-20

C Opening Entries......................................................12-21

C Editing Entries ........................................................12-22

C Deleting Entries ......................................................12-22

●

Delete Item .........................................................12-22

●

Delete All ............................................................12-23

Stopwatch .....................................................................12-23

Kitchen Timer ...............................................................12-24

Barcode .........................................................................12-25

Create QR Codes..........................................................12-27

Battery Saving ..............................................................12-28

C Power Saving .........................................................12-28

C Panel Saving ..........................................................12-28

Calculator......................................................................12-29

Spending Memo............................................................12-30

●

Entry ...................................................................12-30

●

Totals..................................................................12-30

●

Delete .................................................................12-30

●

New Item ............................................................12-31 xi

xii

12

Additional

Functions

13

14

Optional

Services

Appendix

Pen Light ...................................................................... 12-31

●

Illuminate ........................................................... 12-31

●

Pen Light Settings.............................................. 12-31

Headphones ................................................................. 12-32

C Initiating Calls......................................................... 12-32

C Answering Calls ..................................................... 12-32

C Ringer Out.............................................................. 12-33

Fax & PC Transmissions............................................. 12-33

●

FAX Transmissions............................................ 12-33

●

PC Transmissions.............................................. 12-33

Optional Services Overview ......................................... 13-2

Call Forwarding.............................................................. 13-3

●

Set Fwd Number.................................................. 13-3

●

Start Fwd ............................................................. 13-3

●

Cancel Secretary ................................................. 13-3

●

Check Secretary .................................................. 13-3

Voice Mail ....................................................................... 13-4

●

Voice Mail ............................................................ 13-4

●

Cancel Secretary ................................................. 13-4

●

Check Secretary .................................................. 13-5

●

Play Voice Mail .................................................... 13-5

Ring Time ....................................................................... 13-5

●

Ring Time ............................................................ 13-5

Call Waiting .................................................................... 13-6

●

Call Waiting On/Off .............................................. 13-6

●

Confirm Service ................................................... 13-6

●

Incoming Calls ..................................................... 13-6

3 Way Calling ................................................................. 13-7

●

Open Another Line............................................... 13-7

●

Switch Line .......................................................... 13-7

●

Break Away (while Switching Lines) .................... 13-7

●

3 Way Calling....................................................... 13-7

●

Break Away (from 2 Open Lines)......................... 13-8

Function List .................................................................. 14-2

Troubleshooting ............................................................ 14-6

Character Code List....................................................... 14-9

Specifications .............................................................. 14-13

Index ............................................................................. 14-15

Warranty & After-Sales Services................................ 14-19

Customer Service ........................................................ 14-20

Safety Precautions

^ Read safety precautions before using handset.

^ Observe precautions to avoid injury to self or others, or damage to property.

^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from use of this product.

Before Using Handset

C Symbols

Make sure you thoroughly understand these symbols before reading on.

Symbols and their meanings are described below:

!

DANGER

Great risk of death or serious injury from improper use

!

WARNING

Risk of death or serious injury from improper use

!

CAUTION

Risk of injury or damage to property from improper use

C Symbols

$(%+* #)

Prohibited Actions Compulsory Actions

!

Attention Required

xiii

!DANGER

Handset, Battery & Charger

Use only the specified battery or Charger (see P.iii).

Using non-specified equipment may cause malfunctions, electric shock or fire due to battery leakage, overheating or bursting.

#

Do not short-circuit Charger terminals.

Keep metal objects away from

Charger terminals. Keep handset away from necklaces, hairpins, etc.

Battery may leak, overheat, burst or ignite causing injury. Use a case to carry handset.

$

Battery

Prevent injury from battery leakage, breakage or fire.

Do not:

^ Heat or dispose of battery in fire

^ Disassemble, modify or break battery

^ Damage or solder battery

^ Use a damaged or deformed battery

^ Use non-specified charger (see P.iii)

^ Force battery into handset

^ Charge or place battery near fire, heat sources or expose it to extreme heat

^ Use battery for other equipment

$

If battery fluid contacts eyes, do not rub them. Rinse with clean water and consult a doctor immediately.

Eyes may be severely damaged.

#

!WARNING

Handset, Battery & Charger

Do not insert foreign objects into handset.

Do not place metal or flammable objects in handset or Charger. This may cause fire or electric shock. Keep handset out of the reach of children.

$

Keep handset out of rain or extreme humidity.

Fire or electric shock may occur.

%

Keep handset away from liquid-filled containers.

Keep handset and Charger away from chemicals/liquids.

Fire or electric shock may result.

$

Avoid sources of fire.

Prevent fire or explosion. Do not use handset in the presence of gas or fine particles (coal, dust, metal, etc.).

$

Do not use Mobile Light near people's faces.

Eyesight may be temporarily affected leading to accidents.

$

Keep battery, handset or

Charger away from microwave ovens.

Battery or handset may leak, burst, overheat or ignite and cause accidents.

$

Do not disassemble or modify handset.

^ Do not open housing of handset or

Charger; may cause electric shock or injury.

Contact Vodafone Customer Center,

Customer Assistance for repairs.

^ Do not modify handset or Charger.

Fire or electric shock may result.

(

If water or foreign matter is inside handset:

Discontinue handset use to prevent fire or electric shock. Turn handset power off, remove battery, unplug

Charger and contact Vodafone

Customer Center, Customer

Assistance.

)

Do not subject handset to shocks.

Subjecting handset or Charger to shocks may cause malfunction or injury.

Should the handset break, remove the battery and contact Vodafone

Customer Center, Customer

Assistance. Discontinue handset use.

Fire or electric shock may occur.

$

If an abnormality occurs:

Should there be unusual sound, smoke or odor, discontinue handset use to avoid fire or electric shock. Turn handset power off, remove battery and unplug Charger and contact Vodafone

Customer Center, Customer

Assistance.

) xiv xv

!WARNING

Handset

Preventing accidents

^ For safety, never use handset while driving. Pull over beforehand.

Mobile phone use while driving is prohibited by the revised Road

Traffic Law (effective November 1,

2004).

^ Do not use headphones while driving or riding a bicycle.

Accidents may result.

^ Moderate volume outside, especially at road/rail crossings to avoid accidents.

$

Do not swing handset by handstrap.

May result in injury or breakage.

$

Turn handset power off before boarding aircraft.

Using wireless devices aboard aircraft may cause electronic malfunctions or endanger aircraft operation.

#

Adjusting vibration and Ring

Tone settings:

Users with a heart condition/ pacemaker/defibrillator should adjust handset settings accordingly.

#

During thunderstorms, turn power off; find cover.

There is a risk of lightning strike or electric shock.

#

Charger

Use only the specified voltage.

Non-specified voltages may cause fire or electric shock.

^ Rapid Charger

100 VAC

^ In-Car Charger

12/24 VDC

$

Do not use In-Car Charger inside vehicles with a positive earth.

Fire may result.

Use In-Car Charger only inside vehicles with a negative earth.

$

Charger Care

^ Do not touch blades with wet hands.

Electric shock may occur.

^ Do not use multiple cords in one outlet. May generate excess heat or fire.

^ Do not bend, twist, pull or set objects on cord. Exposed wire may cause fire or electric shock.

+

$

Do not short-circuit Charger terminals.

Keep metal away from terminals.

May cause overheating, fire or electric shock.

$ xvi

!WARNING

Charger

Preventing accidents

Secure In-Car Charger to avoid injury or accidents.

#

If Rapid/In-Car Charger cord is damaged:

May cause fire or electric shock; contact Vodafone Customer Center,

Customer Assistance to replace.

#

During thunderstorms:

Unplug Charger to avoid damage, fire or electric shock.

)

Keep Charger out of the reach of children.

Electric shock or injury may occur.

#

Handset Use & Electronic Medical Equipment

This section is based on "Guidelines on the Use of Radio Communications Equipment such as Cellular Telephones and Safeguards for Electronic Medical Equipment"

(Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference, April 1997) and "Report of Investigation of the Effects of Radio Waves on Medical Equipment, etc." (Association of Radio

Industries and Businesses, March 2001).

People with implanted pacemakers/defibrillators should keep handset more than

22 cm away.

Implanted pacemakers or defibrillators may malfunction due to radio waves.

#

Turn handset power off in crowded places such as trains.

People with implanted pacemakers/defibrillators may be near.

Implanted pacemakers or defibrillators may malfunction due to radio waves.

#

Observe these rules when visiting medical facilities:

^ Do not take handset into operating rooms or Intensive or Coronary Care

Units.

^ Keep handset off in hospitals.

^ Keep handset off in hospital lobbies.

Electronic equipment may be near.

^ Obey rules regarding mobile phone use in medical facilities.

Consult manufacturer for radio wave effects on electronic medical equipment.

#

# xvii

!WARNING

Battery

^ If battery does not charge properly, stop charging. Battery may overheat, burst or ignite.

^ If there is leakage or abnormal odor, avoid fire sources.

It may catch fire or burst.

#

If there is abnormal odor, excessive heat, discoloration or distortion, remove battery from handset.

It may leak, overheat or explode.

!CAUTION

#

Handset, Battery & Charger

Handset care

^ Place handset on stable surfaces to avoid malfunction or injury.

^ Keep handset away from oily smoke or steam. Fire or accidents may result.

^ Cold air from air conditioners may condense, resulting in leakage or burnout.

^ Keep handset away from direct sunlight (inside vehicles, etc.) or heat sources.

Distortion, discoloration or fire may occur. Battery shape may be affected.

^ Keep handset out of extremely cold places to avoid malfunction or accidents.

^ Keep handset away from fire sources to avoid malfunction or accidents.

!

Usage environment

^ Excessive dust may prevent heat release and cause burnout or fire.

^ Avoid using handset on the beach.

Sand may cause malfunction or accidents.

^ Keep handset away from credit cards, phone cards, etc. to avoid data loss.

!

!CAUTION

Handset

Avoid leaving handset in extreme heat (inside vehicles, etc.).

Handset may heat up and lead to burns.

$

Inside vehicles:

Handset use may cause electronic equipment to malfunction.

!

Should skin irritation occur, discontinue handset use and consult a doctor.

See below for handset materials. Some materials may cause skin irritation, rashes, or itchiness depending on your physical condition.

#

Parts

Housing (Display/Keypad/Sub Display/battery side), battery cover, housing cover ornament (sides)

Display window, lens cover, Sub Display window

Multi Selector (cursor keys), Side Key, camera ornament

Vodafone live! Key, Mail Key, Power On/Off Key,

Start Key, Keypad, Clear Key, Schedule/Memo Key,

Text Key, Function Key, battery, screw cover

(above/below Display)

Screw cover (back side)

Headphone Connector cover, External Device

Connector cover

External Device Connector

Screw (Display/Keypad side)

Infrared port, Mobile Light cover, Small Light

Materials & Finishing

ABS resin/Acrylic UV curing painting

(sealer: acrylic painting)

Acrylic resin

ABS resin/Chrome plating

PC resin

Silicone rubber

Elastomeric resin

Nylon 6T/Brass, Au plating (sealer: nickel, copper)

SWCH12A/Ni plating

ABS resin xviii xix

!CAUTION

Charger

Charger & In-Car Charger

^ Grasp plug (not cord) to disconnect

Charger. May cause fire/electric shock.

^ Keep cord away from heaters.

Exposed wire may cause fire or electric shock.

^ Stop use if plug is hot or improperly connected.

May cause fire/electric shock.

^ Keep In-Car Charger socket clean.

May overheat and cause injury.

$

#

Use only the specified fuse.

1 A fuse for In-Car Charger.

Or may cause breakage/fire.

$

Always charge handset in a well-ventilated area.

Avoid covering/wrapping Charger.

May cause damage/fire.

$

Do not use In-Car Charger when engine is off.

Start engine before use. Or car battery may be weakened.

$

Long periods of disuse

Be sure to unplug Rapid/In-Car

Charger after use.

)

Handset maintenance

When cleaning, disconnect Rapid/

In-Car Charger to prevent shock/ injury.

)

Installing In-Car Charger

Properly position the cable for safe driving to avoid injury or accidents.

!

!CAUTION

Battery

Do not throw or abuse battery.

Battery may overheat, burst or ignite.

$

Do not leave battery in direct sunlight or inside vehicles.

Overheating/fire may occur; may reduce performance.

$

Do not expose battery to liquids.

Performance may deteriorate.

*

If battery fluid contacts skin or clothes, rinse with clean water immediately.

#

Do not dispose of exhausted batteries with ordinary refuse. Tape over battery terminals before disposal, or bring them to a Vodafone shop.

Follow local regulations regarding battery disposal.

$

Keep battery out of the reach of children.

#

^ Charge battery within a range of 5]C

- 35]C; outside this range, battery may leak/overheat and performance may deteriorate.

^ If your child is using handset, explain all instructions and supervise usage.

^ If there is abnormal odor or excessive heat, stop using battery and call Vodafone Customer Center,

Customer Assistance.

^ Do not leave battery uncharged.

Charge at least once every six months.

!

xx xxi

General Notes

General Use

^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from accidental loss/alteration of handset data. Please keep separate records of Phone Book entries, etc.

^ Handset transmissions may be disrupted inside buildings, tunnels or underground, or when moving into/out of such places.

^ Use handset without disturbing others.

^ Handsets are radios as stipulated by the Radio Law. Under the Radio Law, handsets must be submitted for inspection upon request.

^ Handset use near landlines, TVs or radios may cause interference.

^ Beware of eavesdropping.

Because this service is completely digital, the possibility of signal interception is greatly reduced. However, some transmissions may be overheard.

Eavesdropping

Deliberate/accidental interception of communications constitutes eavesdropping.

Inside Vehicles

^ Never use handset while driving.

^ Do not park illegally to use handset.

^ Handset use may affect a vehicle's electronic equipment.

Aboard Aircraft

Never use handset aboard aircraft (keep power off).

Handset use may impair aircraft operation.

Handset Care

^ If handset is left with no battery or an exhausted one, data may be altered/lost. Vodafone is not liable for any resulting damages.

^ Use handset within temperatures of 5]C to 35]C and humidity of 35% to 85%.

Avoid extreme temperatures/direct sunlight.

^ Exposing lens to direct sunlight may damage color filter and affect image color.

^ Do not drop or subject handset to shocks.

^ Clean handset with dry, soft cloth. Using alcohol, thinner, etc. may damage it.

^ Do not expose handset to rain, snow or high humidity.

^ Never disassemble or modify handset.

^ Avoid scratching handset Display.

^ When closing handset, keep straps, etc. outside to avoid damaging the Display.

^ Handset is not water-proof.

Avoid exposure to liquids and high humidity.

B Keep handset away from precipitation.

B Cold air from air conditioning, etc. may condense causing corrosion.

B Avoid dropping handset in damp places (restrooms, bath/shower rooms, etc.).

B On the beach, keep handset away from water and direct sunlight.

B Perspiration may seep inside handset causing malfunction.

^ Heavy objects or excessive pressure should be avoided.

May cause malfunction or injury.

B Do not sit down with handset in a back pocket.

B Do not place heavy objects on handset in a bag.

^ Connect only specified products to Headphone Connector. Non-specified devices may malfunction or cause damage.

^ Always turn off handset before removing battery.

If battery is removed while saving data or sending mail, data may be lost, changed, or destroyed.

Copyrights

Copyright laws protect sounds, images, computer programs, databases, other materials and copyright holders. Duplicated material is limited to private use only. Use of materials beyond this limit or without permission of copyright holders may constitute copyright infringement, and be subject to criminal punishment. Comply with copyright laws when using images captured with handset camera.

xxii xxiii

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)

^ V302SH meets the government's requirements for exposure to radio waves.

These requirements are based on scientific basis to assure that radio waves emitted from mobile phones and other handheld wireless devices do not affect human health. They require that the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), which is the unit of measurement for the amount of radiofrequency absorbed by the body, shall not exceed 2 W/kg

*

. This limit includes a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age or health, and meets the international standard set by International

Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) in cooperation with World

Health Organization (WHO).

^ The highest SAR value for V302SH is 0.86 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted with handset transmitting at its highest certified power level, and follow the testing methods set by the government. While there may be differences between the SAR levels for various handsets, they all meet the governmental requirements for safe exposure. The actual

SAR level of the handset while operating can be well below the highest value. This is because the handset is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the Network.

^ Additional information on SAR can be obtained on the following Websites:

B Ministry of Public Management http://www.tele.soumu.go.jp/j/ele/index.htm

B Association of Radio Industries and Businesses (ARIB) http://www.arib-emf.org/index02.html

*Requirements are stipulated in Radio Law (Ordinance Regulating Radio Equipment, Article 14-2).

xxiv

Getting Started

1-1

1

Function & Feature Preview

Simple Mode

Select a simplified menu, ideal for users who use only basic handset functions.

Manner Mode

Press a single key to mute ringer and activate Message

Recorder automatically.

Kanji Conversion

Use Predictive or Previous

Usage to reduce key strokes when entering Japanese text.

J

Q N

Simple Mode Menu

0My Number

1Phone Functions

n

E

P.2-16

Phone Book

Save up to 500 entries (with up to three phone numbers and mail addresses each).

P.3-3

Camera

Capture still images and

Action Snap video with built-in handset camera.

J

Q n

Input/Conversion 

E

[Kana ]

1Input Method

2Predictive

3Previous Usage

P.4-12

Postcard

Add text or calendar mask to still images to create original

Postcards or Calendars.

J

Q ssyy c n E

Ueda Mikio 005

1Friends dPattern 1 ePattern 2

P.5-2

Display Settings

Change Wallpaper, Display

Images, Fonts, et cetera to customize handset UI.

J

Q

Camera

1Sha-mail Mode n

2Wallpaper Mode

3Camera Mode

4Action Snap Mode

E

P.6-2

Display Language

Set menus, etc. to appear in

English or Japanese.

P.6-25

Data Folder

Access handset image and sound files from here; files are organized by file type.

J

Q

1Wallpaper

2Display Images

3Fonts n E

F4

*:Display Settings

[Off ]

P.7-2, P.7-5, P.7-6

J

Q

F

*

0My Number

1Sonuds

2Privacy

3Settings 1

P.7-9

n E

J

Q

Data Folder

Data Folder

ZCamera

IImages

HMelodies

P.9-3

n E

Infrared

Align handset IR port and a compatible device port for wireless file transfers.

One-Shot Mail

Instantly send a preset Sky

Mail message to a preset address with handset closed.

Schedule

Add entries for upcoming events with dates/times. Set

Alarms, etc. for each.

J

Q n E

Sky Mail

Y[No Address ]

G[No Body Text ]

Option Settings

Confirm Delivery

K

J

Q n G

P.10-2

Useful Diary

Create personal diary entries using both text and images.

Save up to 400 entries.

P.12-3

Mail Templates

Select default or customized templates by theme and fill in fields to create messages.

P.12-13

Vodafone live!

Exchange mail, access the

Mobile Internet, download

V-Applications via Web, and retrieve timely area-specific information via Station.

J

Q

F54:Useful Diary s2005Y 9M26D n

I was very lucky to find it in this seas on! I couldn't help

J

Q

元データ

1です。 n D

下記の通り

2を報告し

ます。

日時：

3から

P.12-20

Call Forwarding

Automatically direct incoming calls to a specified number.

Vodafone live! Manual

Optional Services

Voice Mail

Manually redirect or automatically direct incoming calls to VM.

Vodafone live! Manual

Call Waiting

Reduce missed calls!

Answer incoming call while line is engaged.

3 Way Calling

Switch between two lines or talk on both simultaneously.

1

P.13-3 P.13-4 P.13-6 P.13-7

1-2 1-3

1

Handset Parts & Functions

Handset

8

1

A

B

C

9

2

3

4

5

6

7 a b c d e

D

E

1 Display

2 Vodafone live! & Mobile Camera Key

^ Open Web menu or execute left Soft

Key functions. Press for 1+ seconds to activate mobile camera.

3 Start Key

Initiate or answer calls.

4 Clear Key

Delete entries or return to previous window.

5 Schedule/Memo & A/a Key

Save/check Schedule or record/play

Voice Memos. In text entry windows, toggle upper/lower case roman letters or standard/small hiragana/katakana.

Change image display sizes.

6 Keypad

+

These descriptions (P.1-4 - 1-6) are illustrative of general handset usage. For mobile camera and other specific key assignments, refer to the descriptions for each function.

1-4

7 U Key

While an image or message appears, press to open next one (newer one). In alphanumeric entry, open web/mail address prefixes & suffixes, and in kanji

(hiragana) entry, toggle Symbol/

Pictograph Lists.

8 Earpiece

9 Multi Selector

Select menu items, move cursor, scroll, etc. or use for the following: a Redial & Notepad Memory Key

^ Select dialed numbers or return to the previous window. Press for 1+ seconds to open Notepad Memory.

b Shortcut Key

^ Open list of shortcut keys (press indicated key to access assigned function). Press for 1+ seconds to adjust Earpiece volume.

c Phone Book Key

^ Open entries to make calls, send messages or open selected menu items. Press for 1+ seconds to save new entries.

d Function & Key Guard Key

^ Access Functions Menu in Standby or capture images with mobile camera. Press for 1+ seconds to toggle Key Guard.

e Call History Key

^ Open received call records. Press for 1+ seconds to adjust Earpiece

Volume.

A Mail Key

^ Open Mail menu or execute right Soft

Key functions. Press for 1+ seconds to open V-Appli Library.

B Power On/Off & End Key

^ End calls, place callers on hold or cancel operations. Press for 2+ seconds to turn handset power on/off.

C Text & Manner Key (

E)

^ Toggle between entry modes or create

Phone Book entries. Press for 1+ seconds to activate/cancel Manner

Mode.

D # Key

While an image or message appears, press to open previous one (older one).

In text entry windows, toggle Symbol/

Pictograph Lists.

E Microphone

1

1-5

1

F

G

H

F Strap Eyelet

Attach straps as shown.

G Small Light

Illuminates/flashes while charging, for incoming calls, etc.

H External Device Connector

Connect Charger here.

I Headphone Connector

J Infrared Port

Use for infrared data transmissions.

K Side Key

^ When camera is active, press to capture images. Press for 1+ seconds to activate the assigned function in

Side Key Settings (see P.12-3).

I

J

P

Q

K

P

L Camera (lens cover)

Capture still images and Action Snap video.

M Mobile Light

Flashes for incoming calls/mail. Serves as a strobe or Pen Light.

N Speaker

O Sub Display

P Internal Antenna Location

Q Battery Cover

,

Do not cover or place stickers, etc. over the area containing Internal Antenna.

L

M

N

O

1-6

Display Indicators

1 234 5 6 7 8 9

J zqSiABCDEk

G n

G

AB C D E

F G H I J K L h jlfh wd Q JPLQ

M N O

1 J Battery Strength u Pen Light

J and u flash when Pen Light is in use.

2 z Secret Mode Active

Flashes when a Secret Mode entry is open.

3 q Original p Enlarged

Mail, Web or Data Folder image display size

4 y Speaker Phone Active

S Speaker Active

I Line Active

Web communication is in progress.

D (gray) Station Menu Manual Update

5 A Mail

Unread mail except Long Mail

6 C Web

Unread Web information

7 E Delivery Report

New Delivery Report

8 n Signal Strength n: Strong o: Moderate p: Low q: Weak s: Out-of-Range

Z Infrared Transmission

9 G Scroll

The menu, information, etc. can be scrolled.

A G Active V-Application

F Paused V-Application

B i Manner Mode Active

C B Long Mail

Unread Long Mail

1

1-7

1

D D (red) Station

Unread Station information

E k Voice Mail

New Voice Mail s Off-Line Mode

F w Schedule (Alarm On) x Schedule (Alarm Off)

G d Alarm Set

H Entry Mode

Current character entry mode

I j Message Recorder Active

J f Vibration Active

K JPL Weather Indicators

Current forecast (A separate subscription is required.)

L

Q Key Guard Active

M

Q Keypad Lock Active

N l Message

Message Recorder messages

O h Silent

Ringer is Silent.

g Rising Tone

Ringer is set to Rising Tone.

,

Display is a precision device. However, some pixels may appear brighter or darker.

+

^ Although Vibration and Ring Tone Level for incoming calls and Vodafone live! functions are set separately, f, g and h are Incoming Call indicators.

^ When Wallpaper is set (see P.7-2), cancel Show Indicators to hide indicators (see

P.7-2).

Sub Display Indicators

Sub Display & Display indicators represent the same functions (see P.1-7 - 1-8).

N ny Q

1 2 3

1 N Battery Strength

N always appears in Standby. I, l, k, C, D or d appears with messages

4

3 y Information

Appears when there is a missed call, a

Message Recorder message, unread for Alarm, incoming calls, information, etc.

z Pen Light

N and z flash when Pen Light is in use.

2 y Signal Strength mail, etc.

^When y appears with Side Key

Settings for Standby (see P.12-3) set to

1Details, press h for 1+ seconds to see specific indicators.

mICDlk s Off-Line Mode

4 Time

Current time and corresponding indicator flash when Stopwatch or

Kitchen Timer is running.

+

When handset is closed, press h to illuminate Sub Display Backlight. Backlight stays off if Sub Display Backlight Settings (see P.7-8) is set to Off.

1

1-8 1-9

Battery & Charger

1

Getting Started

Charge a new battery before use or after a period of disuse.

Battery Life

^ Use specified Charger only. Other

chargers may damage handset, or cause battery to deteriorate, overheat or ignite.

^ Do not use or store battery at extreme temperatures. May shorten battery life.

Ideal working temperature is between 5]C

^ Charging takes approximately 115 minutes (with handset power off).

B Charging time may vary by ambient

temperature.

^ Charger and battery may become warm during charging.

^ Move Charger away from home TVs or radios if interference occurs.

Precautions

and 35]C.

^ Replace battery if operating time is noticeably shorter than normal.

Charging

^ Do not use Charger for other purposes.

^ Battery may short-circuit, overheat or burst from contact with metal objects.

^ Small Light illuminates red while charging.

(It may take a while for the light to illuminate when handset power is off.)

^ Use a dry cotton swab to clean handset, battery and Charger terminals.

^ Avoid:

B Extreme temperatures

B Humidity, dust and vibration

B Direct sunlight

^ Do not leave battery uncharged. Charge at least once every six months.

^ Use a case when carrying battery separately.

+

^ Battery must be inserted to charge handset.

^ Handset will charge with power on. J flashes and stays on when complete.

^ Handset will charge while open.

Estimated Hours of Use

(fully charged battery)

Continuous Call Time

140 minutes

Continuous Standby Time 450 hours

Continuous Operating Time 250 minutes

Above values are calculated with Backlight

Brightness set to Level 4 (default).

^ Continuous Call Time is an average measured with a new, fully charged battery, with both Power Saving and Panel

Saving off, with stable signals.

^ Continuous Standby Time is an average measured with a new, fully charged battery, with handset closed without calls or operations, in Standby with stable signals.

Standby Time may be less than half this value if handset is out-of-range or signal is weak.

Standby Time may vary by environment

(battery status, temperature, etc.).

^ Continuous Operating Time is measured while handset is operated without calls.

^ The above values (Battery Time) are nominal values, measured under stable signal conditions.

Battery Time

Battery Time may shorten when handset is used in poor conditions:

^ Poor Usage Conditions

B Extreme temperatures (use within a range of 5]C - 35]C)

B Dirty handset, battery or Charger terminals

(charging may be hampered)

B Weak signals or out-of-range

^ Operation

B V-Application is active

B Station service is in use

B Repeated mobile camera use

B Playing video images

B Frequent use of Pen Light

B Continuous Keypad use (Backlight stays on for long periods)

B Frequent infrared transfers

^ Setting

B Backlight/Keypad Light time is set longer

B Wallpaper is animated

B Screen Animation is used

B Panel Saving is Off

B Backlight is set brighter

1

1-10 1-11

1

Extend Battery Time

Adjust the following settings:

^ Backlight (see P.7-7)

^ Sub Display Backlight (see P.7-8)

^ Lighting Time of Mobile Light (see

P.6-17) or Pen Light (see P.12-31)

^ Panel Saving (see P.12-28)

Battery Strength

Strength Levels

J n

When Battery Runs Out

A message appears and short beeps sound. Handset shuts down after 20 seconds unless charged. Press g to stop short beeps. (Short beeps do not sound in Manner Mode.) If battery runs out during a call, short beeps sound every five seconds. After 20 seconds, the call ends and handset shuts down.

Battery Disposal

Do not dispose of exhausted batteries with ordinary refuse.

Tape over battery terminals before disposal, or bring them to a Vodafone shop.

Follow local regulations regarding battery disposal.

N n

Q

Sub Display

When battery runs out (M), Recharge Battery appears and short beeps sound.

Handset shuts down after 20 seconds.

C Indicator

Battery Strength indicator varies as shown.

Charge or replace when level is low.

Battery Strength indicator is for reference only.

Recharge Battery appears.

Charge or replace battery immediately.

J

Level 3

Approx. 70%

K

Level 2

L

Level 1

Approx. 20% Approx. 10%

Minimum Operating Voltage

M

Level 0

Hours of Use

Remaining Strength (at 25

]C)

C Battery Strength & Environment

At low temperatures, battery is consumed faster.

At high temperatures, battery lasts longer.

Small Light & Battery Strength Indicator

C Handset Power On

Small Light

Off

Flashes red

Illuminates red

Off

Indicator (J)

Flashes

Flashes

Flashes

Illuminates

C Handset Power Off

Small Light

Flashes red

Illuminates red

Off

Indicator (J)

Off

Off

Off

Conditions

Ambient temperature is outside the range of 5]C - 35]C

Battery life has ended, or battery defect

Charging

Charging completed

Conditions

Battery life has ended, or battery defect

Charging

Charging completed

1

1-12 1-13

1

Installing & Removing Battery

Inserting

1

Press down and slide cover as shown

e

3

Insert battery

f

2

Lift and remove cover as shown

^ With printed side up, fit tabs into

battery cavity slots.

4

Close cover

^ Position and slide the cover as shown

until it stops.

Removing

^ Turn handset power off before removing battery.

^ Do not remove battery immediately after saving files, sending messages, etc.

1

Press down and slide cover as shown

e

3

Remove battery

f e f

2

Lift and remove cover as shown

^ Take hold of Battery Tab here, push as shown in e, then lift as indicated in f.

1

+

This product requires a lithium-ion battery.

Lithium-ion batteries are a recyclable resource.

^ To recycle a used lithium-ion battery, take it to any shop displaying the symbol shown to the right.

^ To avoid fire or electric shock, do not:

B Short-circuit batteries

B Disassemble batteries

1-14 1-15

1

Rapid Charger

Use specified Charger only.

3

Small Light

100 VAC

Blades

2

AC Charger

Terminal Cover

Release Tabs

Printed Side Up

4

External Device Connector

1

1

Open Terminal Cover and insert Charger connector until it clicks

2

Plug in Charger

^ Charging starts and Small Light illuminates red (see P.1-13).

^ Extend Charger blades. (Fold back

when not in use.)

3

Charging is complete when light goes out

^ Charging takes approximately 115 minutes.

4

After Charging

Unplug Charger from the AC outlet, then handset

^ Squeeze release tabs and pull connector straight out.

^ Replace Terminal Cover to protect

External Device Connector.

,

Do not pull, bend or twist Rapid Charger cord.

1-16

In-Car Charger

Use specified In-Car Charger only.

4

Small Light

Terminal Cover

Release Tabs

2

Cigarette Lighter Socket

In-Car Charger

External Device Connector

1

Printed Side Up

Plug

5

3

1

Open Terminal Cover and insert Charger connector until it clicks

2

Plug in Charger

3

Start car engine

^ Charging starts and Small Light illuminates red (see P.1-13).

4

Charging is complete when light goes out

^ Charging takes approximately 115 minutes.

5

After Charging

Unplug Charger from cigarette lighter socket, then handset

^ Squeeze release tabs and pull connector straight out.

^ Replace Terminal Cover to protect

External Device Connector.

,

^ Use In-Car Charger inside vehicles with a negative earth only.

^ Disconnect Charger before leaving vehicle to prevent charging with engine off.

^ Avoid charging battery inside extremely hot vehicles.

^ Never use handset while driving.

+

^ For more information, see In-Car Charger manual.

^ Use optional In-Car Holder to secure handset.

1

1-17

1

Handset Power On/Off

1

Open handset

2

Press

g for 1+ seconds

J n

1

2

3

Backlight illuminates; after Power On Graphics, handset enters Standby (shown above).

3

Press

g for 2+ seconds to exit

After Power Off Graphic, handset shuts down.

Clock Settings

C If date and time have not been set, a confirmation appears after Power On Graphic.

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b A

Clock Settings window opens (see P.1-20)

B Choose

2No A

Press b A

Standby appears without date and time

+

^ Handset receives incoming mail or Web/Station information while closed.

^ Display shuts down after a period of inactivity (see P.12-28 "Panel Saving").

Key Guard

Use Key Guard to lock handset keys and prevent accidental operation/function activation.

Activating

1

Press

b for 1+ seconds

Q appears and Key Guard is set.

,

For Emergency Calls when Key Guard is active, see P.2-5.

1

+

When Key Guard is Active

^ Incoming calls temporarily cancel Key

Guard. To answer calls, press keys for

Anykey Answer (see P.2-6). Key Guard reactivates after the calls end.

^ Handset power does not turn off even if g is pressed for 2+ seconds.

Canceling

1

In Standby, press

b for 1+ seconds

Q disappears.

1

1-18 1-19

1

1

2

3

4

Clock Settings

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

1

Select

9Clock Settings and press b

2

Enter the year

J

--:-n

F59:Clock Settings

２００５Ｙ

ー ーＭーーＤ(ー)

 ーー：ーー

5

OK

Example: Year 2005

A 2005

3

Enter the month and day

Example: September 15

A 0915

4

Enter the time

Apply 24-hour clock format.

Example: 3:05 PM

A 1505

5

Press

b

Clock starts and handset returns to Standby.

The day of the week is set automatically.

Cursor

C Use

F or E to move cursor (C or highlight bar). Enter or edit characters at the cursor position.

,

When removing the battery for replacement, etc., Clock settings remain. However, should the handset go without power for an extended period of time (approximately one month), Clock will need to be reset.

+

^ When Clock has not been set, --/-- --:-- appears for date and time.

^ Choose a Clock type and layout or use Calendar for Standby (see P.7-3).

^ Clock can be set during calls.

1-20

Handset Menus

Index Menu

Access functions/operations from Index Menu.

1

Press

b

J

Q n

G

1

2

3

Index Menu opens.

Select

2

Use

G to select an item

C

To open Handy Features menu, press e.

C

To open V-Appli Library, press d.

3

Press

b

Menu for each item opens.

C Index Menu Items

Briefcase

Camera

Settings

Infrared

Functions

Tel Ops

Vodafone live!

My Files

Simple Mode

Use Schedule, Calculator, Alarm, etc.

Camera menu opens. Capture still images and record video.

Customize display, sounds, etc.

Exchange information and data via infrared

Functions Menu opens (see P.1-22). Check and change settings of various functions.

Create or search Phone Book entries. Check Redial and Call History.

Use Mail, Web, V-Application, Station, etc.

Open files saved in handset

Activate Simple Mode

1

1-21

1

Handy Features Menu

C In Index Menu, press e 3 to open Handy Features menu.

J

Q n G e

3

J

Q

Handy Features

1Simple Mode

2Pen Light

3Disney Style

4One-Shot Mail

5Useful Diary

6Chat Mail Log

7Mail Templates n E b

J

Q

Simple Mode

1On

2Off n

E

Select

Index Menu

Select

Handy Features

Select

Functions Menu

In Index Menu, select Functions and press b. Use Functions Menu to access handset functions and settings. A number is assigned to each function (see P.14-2).

C Selecting First Layer Items

Select an item with

E and press b.

J

Q

F

*

0My Number

1Sounds

2Privacy

3Settings 1

4Settings 2

5Clock

6Charges

7Services

8Vodafone live!

Select n E

Selected item is highlighted.

E

J

Q

F1_

0My Number

1Sounds

2Privacy

3Settings 1

4Settings 2

5Clock

6Charges

7Services

8Vodafone live!

Select n E

First Layer b

J

Q

F1

*:

0Call Functions

1Volume

3Sound Effects

5Ringer Out

6Speaker n E

7Original Tones

8Instrument Effects

9Tone Octave

Select

Related Functions

C Selecting Functions by Numbers

In Standby, press b to open Index Menu, then enter numbers. Corresponding function or menu opens.

J n b13

J

Q

F13:Sound Effects n E

[On ]

1Keypad Sound

2Error Tone

3Power On

4Power Off

5Sound Volume

6Set LED to Sound

Select

Return to Standby

C Press g to return to Standby (see P.1-18) from function windows, menus, etc.

^ When a confirmation appears, choose

1Yes and press b. Handset returns to

Standby.

Soft Keys

Soft Key functions appear at the bottom of Display.

J

Q n

G

When h Select appears, press b to open selected menu items, execute functions, etc.

When

B Convert appears, press D to convert kana to kanji, etc.

When

L Auto appears, press q to execute the function.

Press d to select or execute the assigned function or operation.

Select

Press e to select or execute the assigned function or operation.

When W appears while creating Original Ring Tone, etc., press j to execute the assigned operation.

1

1-22 1-23

1

Quick Operations

In Standby, enter numbers to access functions quickly.

Accessible functions vary by the number of digits entered.

(Functions shown to the right appear for single digits.)

To activate functions, press the key next to the function (press f for Speed Dial).

J

Q n

 :Speed Dial

  :Spending Memo

:Add to PhoneBook

:Entry Search

1

Long Calc Sky

Digits

Function

Speed Dial (see P.5-14)

Spending Memo (see P.12-30)

Add to Phone Book (see P.5-3)

Entry Search

1

(see P.5-12)

Calculator (see P.12-29)

Send 2-Touch Mail (see IP.3-12)

Set Alarm

2

(see P.12-7)

Schedule

3

(see P.12-7)

1

!

!

#

#

!

!

!

!

2

!

#

#

#

!

!

!

#

3

!

#

#

#

#

!

!

#

4

!

#

!

!

#

!

!

#

5 - 6 7 - 12 13 - 24

!

#

#

#

#

!

!

#

!

#

#

#

#

#

!

#

1

Only Katakana Search is available.

2

Enter four digits (24-hour format) to set Alarm. Full appears when there are five entries.

3

Enter four digits for month and day. Check entries for the next 12 months.

#

#

#

#

#

#

!

#

Guide

Open quick guides to functions inaccessible from Functions Menu.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

1

Select

0Guide and press b

Pen Light guide appears.

2

Use

E to toggle guides

3

Press

g to exit

1

2

3

CDisplay Content

J

Q

F3

*:Guide n

<Clamshell Open>

E

Redial

J

Q

F3

*:Guide n

Operations (Keys)

Hold

Function

<Clamshell Open>

Ringing

E

Situation

(Example: Incoming Call)

Show

Press b to use the function

(Available for some functions)

1

1-24 1-25

1

Handset Codes

Both Security Code and Center Access Code are needed for handset use.

Security Code

9999 or the 4-digit number selected at initial subscription.

Security Code is required to use/change some handset functions.

^

U appears when Security Code is entered.

^ If incorrect, Invalid Code appears. Enter correct Security Code.

^ Change Security Code as needed (see P.11-2).

Center Access Code

The 4-digit number in the contract, required to access Optional Services via landlines, and to subscribe to fee-based information.

Do not attempt to change Center Access Code.

Contact Vodafone Customer Center, General Information (see P.14-20) for details.

,

^ Write down Center Access Code. If lost, contact Vodafone Customer Center,

General Information (see P.14-20).

^ Do not reveal Security Code and Center Access Code. Vodafone is not liable for misuse or damages.

1-26

Basic Handset Operations

2-1

2

1

2

Initiating a Call

1

Confirm handset is on

^ Check signal.

^ Handset will not transmit when s, s, Q or

Q appears (see P.14-8).

2

Enter a phone number

J

Q n

 :Dial

:Add to PhoneBook

3

4

03123XXXX1

Calc

^ Include the area code, even for local numbers.

Sending/Blocking Caller ID

^ Press the following keys when placing a call.

B Send......

186

B Block......

184

3

Confirm the number and press

f

Correcting Numbers

^ Use

F to move cursor and press i to delete the digit above the cursor.

^ Press i for 1+ seconds to delete the entire number and return to Standby.

^ If you misdial, press g to hang up and try again.

Busy Numbers

^ Press g to end the call and try again later.

4

Press

g to end call

^ Alternatively, close handset.

Cancel Close to End Call to keep the line open with handset closed (see P.2-3).

Close to End Call

C Select whether or not to end calls by closing handset.

Press

b A

Select Functions

A

Press

b A

Select

1Sounds A

Press

b A

Select

0Call Functions A

Press

b A

Select

1Incoming Call A

Press

b A

Select

7Close to End Call A

Press

b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

On

Calls end

Off

^ Close to End Call is active by default.

The other party hears no sound

,

^ Do not cover handset microphone while talking on the phone.

^ Avoid covering area over Internal Antenna (see

P.1-6 P).

^ Voice quality is affected depending on how and where handset is used.

2

Microphone

+

^ Use Instant Display to see Call Time and Call Charge (see P.2-19, P.2-20).

^ Confirm Total Talk Time (see P.2-19) and Total Charges (see P.2-20).

^ To use Speaker Phone or Speaker during calls, see P.8-21.

^ For information on international calls, contact Vodafone Customer Center, General

Information (see P.14-20).

2-2 2-3

2

Redial

Place calls from Redial. Up to 20 recently dialed numbers are saved in Redial.

1

Press

B (F)

J

Q

Redial

2: 9/22 15:2

*

Ueda Mikio

1: 9/21 18:45

*3123XXXX2 n

E

1

3

2

 

XReceived

Memo

Select

Menu

Dialed numbers appear with date and time.

Name appears if saved in Phone Book.

2

Select a record and press

b

3

Press

f

Number is dialed.

+

^ When the same number is dialed more than once, only the last record appears.

^ Names in Secret Mode entries appear only in Secret Mode.

^ Records remain even after handset power is turned off.

^ When there are 20 records, oldest records are replaced by new ones. To delete records manually, see P.2-14.

International Call & Send With Code

Preset the number to add before dialing a phone number saved in Phone Book. Use

International Call to place international calls and Send With Code to add one prefix such as 186 (Send Caller ID) or 184 (Block Caller ID).

Setup Preset

Preset the number to add before a phone number

KInternational Call: 0046010, Send With Code: None

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Setup Preset

Select

1International Call or 2Send With Code A

Press a prefix

A

Press

b b A

Enter

C

To change the prefix, select

1International Call or 2Send With Code A

Press b A

Press i (Long Press) A

Enter a new prefix

A

Press b

^ Enter up to seven digits for International Call and up to six digits for Send With Code.

International Call

& Send With Code

Dial from Phone Book using the number set in Setup Preset above

Index Menu

H

Tel Ops

A

Entry Search

A

Open an entry

A

Menu (

b)

Select International Call or Send With Code

A

Press

b

Emergency Calls

Emergency calls (110, 119, 118, etc.) are possible even while some handset restrictions are active.

Active Restriction

Key Guard (see P.1-19)

Off-Line Mode (see P.3-6)

Keypad Lock (see P.11-2)

Emergency Calls

Not possible

Not possible

Possible

Auto Key Lock (see P.11-3)

Possible

Restrict Dial (P.11-4)

Possible

2

2-4 2-5

Incoming Call

2

1

When a call arrives, open handset

J

Q n

<<Incoming Call>>

1

2

3

03123XXXX1

Menu

Number appears when Caller ID is sent. Caller's name appears if saved in Phone Book.

When Message Recorder is Active

^ Outgoing message plays and recording starts

(see P.12-5).

2

Press

f

^ Alternatively, press any of the following keys

(Anykey Answer):

0 - 9, q, p, k, i, e, d, B, A

C

Handling Incoming Calls: see P.2-8 - 2-9

3

Press

g to end call

^ Alternatively, close handset.

Cancel Close to End Call to keep the line open with handset closed (see P.2-3).

Ring Tone Volume

C Press

C (up) or D (down) to adjust volume. (Cancel Manner Mode to adjust level.)

^ Ring Tone Level setting (see P.8-2) changes accordingly.

Quick Silent

C Press j to instantly mute Ring Tone for that call only.

C When Side Key Settings for Incoming Calls (see P.12-3) is set to

2Quick Silent, press h for 1+ seconds with handset closed during incoming calls to mute ringer.

2-6

+

^ Up to 20 incoming call details are saved (see P.2-14).

^ Activate Delayed Ringer (see P.2-10) to delay handset ringer for three seconds for incoming calls from numbers not saved in Phone Book or Owner Profile.

^ To customize Ring Tone and Mobile/Small Light pattern, see P.8-2 "Call Functions."

Call History

Up to 20 received calls are saved in Call History (see P.2-14). When Caller ID is sent, numbers appear. Place calls directly to those numbers.

1

3

2

1

Press

D

J

Q

Missed Call

3: 9/23 17:2

*

Suzuki Itirou

2: 9/22 11:2

*

Ueda Mikio

1: 9/21 12:45

*3123XXXX1 n E

XMemo

Redial Select Menu

Received numbers appear with date and time.

Name appears if saved in Phone Book.

2

Select a record and press

b

3

Press

f

Number is dialed.

2

+

^ Names in Secret Mode entries appear only in Secret Mode.

^ Records remain even after handset power is turned off.

^ When there are 20 records, oldest records are replaced by new ones. To delete records manually, see P.2-14.

2-7

Handling Incoming Calls

2

Placing Callers on Hold

Callers placed on hold hear a message explaining that you cannot answer their call right away and asking them to hold or call back later.

1

1

When a call arrives, open handset

2

Press

g

Hold tone sounds for five seconds.

^ No tone sounds when Ring Tone Level is set to

Silent.

3

Press

f to answer the call

^ Alternatively, press keys for Anykey Answer

(see P.2-6).

3

2

Hold or Reject with Handset Closed

C When Side Key Settings for Incoming Calls (see P.12-3) is set to

1Hold or 3Reject Call, press h for 1+ seconds during incoming calls to activate the function.

,

^ Press g or close handset to end calls on hold. However, if Close to End Call (see

P.2-3) is canceled, line remains engaged even if handset is closed.

^ Calls on hold end if callers hang up.

Quick Recorder

Activate Message Recorder (see P.12-4) for one time only to record caller messages on handset.

1

When a call arrives, open handset

2

Press

bj

Outgoing message plays and recording starts.

C

Press bk to play recorded messages

(see P.12-5).

1

2

2

,

Message recorder is disabled when recording capacity is full (see P.12-4 "Message

Recorder Disabled").

Voice Mail

C Unanswered calls are forwarded to Voice Mail (see P.13-4).

2-8 2-9

2

Delayed Ringer

Activate Delayed Ringer to help screen one-ring sales calls. Handset ringer is delayed for three seconds for incoming calls from numbers not saved in Phone Book or Owner Profile.

Delayed Ringer is Off by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Call Functions

A

Incoming Call

1

Select

6Delayed Ringer and press b

2

Choose

1On and press b

1

2

1

2

Engaged Call Operations

Earpiece Volume

Adjust Earpiece volume (5 levels). Earpiece volume is Level 5 by default.

1

During a call, press

C or D

2

Press

C (up) or D (down) to adjust

volume level

Each press changes volume by one level.

^ Wait five seconds or press b to save the level.

^ Volume level remains as set even after handset power is turned off.

2

2-10 2-11

2

Voice Memo

1

During a call, press

k for 1+

seconds

Recording starts.

2

Press

k again to stop

^ Recordings remain even after handset power is turned off.

^ To play or delete Voice Memo, refer to the description for Message Recorder on

P.12-5, P.12-6.

1

2

,

Closing handset ends a call and Voice Memo recording if Close to End Call (see

P.2-3) is active. (The remaining recording time will not appear.)

2-12

Notepad Memory

Save up to 3 sets of numbers during a call.

^ Use up to 24 digits (0 - 9, U and #) per entry.

^ When full, oldest entries are deleted to make room for new ones.

^ Save phone numbers from Notepad Memory to Phone Book.

1

During a call, use Keypad to enter digits

2

Press

k

Entered digits are saved to Notepad Memory.

^ When the current call ends or another call arrives before Step 2, entered digits are saved automatically.

2

2

1

Opening Entries

Open saved Notepad entries

Index Menu

H

Tel Ops

Select

6Notepad A

Press

b

^ Up to 3 sets of numbers appear, most recent first.

^ Press f to dial the number.

^ If there is no entry, Notepad Memory Not Found appears.

^ Alternatively, press

Be ? to open Notepad Memory.

C

Press g to exit.

C

To save to Phone Book, select an entry

A

Press d I A

Select Add to Phone Book

A

Press b A

See P.5-4 - 5-5 for more

C

To delete, select an entry

A

Press d I A

Select Delete or Delete All

A

Press b

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

2-13

2

1

Redial & Call History

1

Opening Redial Records

1

Press

B (F)

Dialed numbers appear with date and time.

Name appears if saved in Phone Book.

^ When there is no Redial record, Call History appears.

C

Press f to dial the number.

C

Press g to return to Standby.

Opening Call History Records

1

Press

D

Received numbers appear with date and time.

Name appears if saved in Phone Book.

C

Press f to dial the number.

C

Press g to return to Standby.

Delete

Delete Redial/Call History records

Index Menu

H

Tel Ops

Select

4Redial or 5Call History A

Press

b A

Select Delete or Delete All

A

Press

b A

Press

d I A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Call History Indicators

Call in Progress

Missed Call

Hold

Message Recorder

Forward Voice Mail

Reject

Payphone

No Caller ID

Answered call

Unanswered call (including calls screened by Delayed Ringer)

Disconnected after hold

Recorded on Message Recorder

Forwarded to Voice Mail Center

Rejected call

Call from payphone

Call without Caller ID

Missed Call Notice

For missed calls, one of the following notices appears. (X indicates the number of missed calls or recorded messages.)

Message Recorder

Voice Messages: X

Missed Call

Missed Calls: X

Message Recorder &

Missed Call

Voice Messages: X

Missed Calls: X

^ Press

D to open most recent first.

Press

C to open oldest first.

^ Press f to dial the number.

^ Press g to exit

^ Press g to close Missed Call notice.

^ See P.2-14 to reopen Missed Call details.

^ Reject appears for rejected calls.

^ For more about Message Recorder, see P.12-4 "Message Recorder."

2

2-14 2-15

2

Simple Mode

Activate Simple Mode to reduce available handset functions and simplify menus. Handset is limited to basic operations (see

P.2-17 - 2-18).

J

Q N

Simple Mode Menu

0My Number

1Phone Functions

2Mail

3Camera

Select n E

1

2

3

Activating/Canceling Simple Mode

Activating

1

Press

b

2

Select Simple Mode and press

b

3

Choose

1On and press b

^ Simple Mode remains active even after handset power is turned off.

Canceling

1

Press

b

2

Select

5Standard Mode and press b

3

Choose

1Yes and press b

+ ^ When Simple Mode is activated while any of the following are in use, a confirmation appears. Choose

1Yes and press b to activate Simple Mode.

B Off-Line Mode

1

(see P.3-6)

B Phone Book Lock

1, 2

(see P.11-3)

B Restrict Dial

1, 2

(see P.11-4)

B Reject Call

1, 2

(see P.11-5)

B Alarm

1

(see P.12-7)

B Accept Call

1, 2

B Secret Mode

2

(see P.11-5)

(see P.11-6)

B Auto Power On/Off

1

(see P.12-11, P.12-12)

B Schedule (Alarm is set)

1

(see P.12-13)

B Paused V-Application (see IP.10-6)

1

Cancel Simple Mode to reactivate.

2

Security Code is required.

^ In Simple Mode, Ring Tone sounds in Pattern 1 (for incoming calls) and Mail (for incoming mail) even when melody files in Data Folder are used.

2-16

Simple Mode Operations

Simple Mode Menu Operations

In Standby, press b to open Simple Mode Menu.

0My Number

1Phone Functions

2Mail

3Camera

4Tools & Settings

5Standard Mode

Show handset phone number (Owner Profile is not available)

Access Add to Phone Book, Entry Search, Incoming Tone, Manner

Mode, Message Recorder and Voice Mail (see below)

Create, reply, forward, resend and edit or delete messages (see P.2-18)

Capture images and open saved images (see P.2-18)

Access Keypad Lock, Auto Key Lock, Wallpaper, Font Weight,

Calculator, Alarm, Clock Settings and Instant Display (see P.2-18)

Exit Simple Mode (see P.2-16)

Sub menus:

C

1Phone Functions

1Add to Phone Book

Save entries (see P.5-3).

Enter name, reading, up to three phone numbers and mail addresses.

2Entry Search

1Incoming

Call

Search entries by katakana (see P.5-13 "Katakana

Search"). Only Katakana Search is available.

1Ring Tone Customize Ring Tone for incoming calls (see P.8-3)

2Ring Tone

Adjust volume (see P.8-2)

Level

3Incoming

Tone

2Incoming

1Ring Tone

Mail

2Ring Tone

Level

4Manner Mode

5Message

Recorder

1Recorder Settings

2Play

Customize Ring Tone for incoming mail messages

(see P.8-3)

Adjust volume (see P.8-2)

Activate or cancel Manner Mode (see P.3-3)

Activate or cancel Message Recorder (see P.12-4)

Play messages (see P.12-5)

6Voice Mail

1Activate

2Cancel

3Play Voice Mail

Initiate Voice Mail (see P.13-4)

Cancel Voice Mail (see P.13-4)

Check messages (see P.13-5)

2

2-17

2

C

2Mail

1Mail

2Write Mail

1Inbox

2Sent

Open received messages (see IP.4-2)

Open sent messages (see IP.4-2)

Send Sky Mail messages (see IP.3-3)

In Simple Mode, Mail Settings are disabled and cannot be changed.

C

3Camera

1Still Photo

2View Image

Capture Sha-mail mode or Wallpaper mode images (see P.6-7).

Press d | to toggle between the modes.

Access still images saved in Data Folder (see P.9-6)

Image size is W 120 x H 160 dots (Sha-mail mode) or W 240 x H 320 dots (Wallpaper mode) and only Brightness, Zoom and Mobile Light are available for image capture.

C

4Tools & Settings

1Keypad Lock

2Auto Key Lock

3Wallpaper

4Font Weight

5Calculator

6Alarm

7Clock Settings

8Instant Display

Restrict access to handset functions (see P.11-2)

Automatically activate Keypad Lock each time handset power is turned on (see P.11-3)

Show an image or animation in Standby (see P.7-2)

Change the weight of handset fonts (see P.7-6)

Use for basic arithmetic, percentage and tax calculation (see P.12-29)

Set Alarm to sound at a specific time.

To set, choose

1On A

Press b A

Enter time

A

Press b A

Choose

1On or 2Off (for Snooze) A

Press b A

Select

1Every Day or

2Weekdays (for Weekly) A

Press b A

Press e j

B To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b

Enter date and time (see P.1-20)

Show estimated Call Time and Call Charge after calls (see P.2-19, P.2-20)

Key Assignments

In Standby:

B

A

D j (Long Press) bj

Open Redial records (see P.2-4)

Search Phone Book (Katakana Search: see P.5-13)

Open Call History records (see P.2-7)

Activate/cancel Manner Mode (see P.3-3)

Activate/cancel Message Recorder (see P.12-4)

^ Other keys are disabled except for placing calls.

^ In Simple Mode, shortcuts by Keypad and Quick Operations (see P.1-24) are disabled.

2-18

Call Time

Check estimated Call Time of the most recent call or Total Talk Time.

Call Time appears for calls made and those received.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Charges

1

Select

3Call Time and press b

C

For Total Talk Time, select

2Total Talk Time

A

Press b

2

Press

g to exit

2

1

2

Reset

Reset Total Talk Time

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Charges

A

Total Talk Time

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Instant Display

Set Call Time to appear automatically after each call

KOff

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Charges

A

Instant Display

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

^ Call Charge also appears for calls you made.

+

^ Total Talk Time and Call Time remain even after handset power is turned off.

^ Ring time for incoming or outgoing calls is not counted. On hold time is counted.

2-19

2

Call Charge

Check estimated Call Charge of the most recent call or Total Charges.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Charges

1

Select

1Call Charge and press b

C

For Total Charges, select

0Total Charges A

Press b

2

Press

g to exit

1

2

Reset

Reset Total Charges

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Charges

A

Total Charges

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Instant Display

Set Call Charge to appear automatically after each call

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Charges

A

Instant Display

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

^ Call Charge will not appear after leaving a 3 Way Call (Break Away).

^ Call Time appears at the same time.

+

^ Total Charges and Call Charge remain even after handset power is turned off.

^ When the most recent call is a received call, -------Yen appears.

^ Sum of charges appears for 3 Way Calling (Optional Service).

^ Call Charge will not appear when calls are interrupted due to weak signal.

KOff

2-20

My Number & Owner Profile

Confirm handset phone number.

^ Save name, reading, phone numbers, mail addresses, postal code, personal data and photo.

^ To create QR Code from Owner Profile, see P.12-27.

^ Handset phone number cannot be changed or deleted on the handset.

Index Menu

H

Functions

1

Select

0My Number and press b

C

To open Owner Profile, press d w A

Enter Security Code

^ Owner Profile contents are similar to those of

Phone Book (see P.5-12).

2

Press

g to exit

2

1

2

Edit,

Delete & Copy

Add, edit, delete or copy Owner Profile items

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

My Number

A

Details (

d)

Enter Security Code

A

Press

b A

Select Edit

A

Press

b A

For more, see Steps 4 - 6 in "Editing Phone Book" on P.5-15

C

To delete Owner Profile (all items except handset number), enter Security Code and press b A

Press b A

Select Delete

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

C

To copy an item in Owner Profile, enter security code and press b A

Use

F to select an item

A

Press b A

Select Copy

A

Press b A

For more, see Step 5 and onward in

"Copy/Cut & Paste" on P.4-17

B Image for Photo cannot be copied.

2-21

Manner Mode

3-1

3

Minding Mobile Manners

Please use your handset responsibly. Use these basic tips as a guide. Inappropriate handset use can be both dangerous and bothersome. Please take care not to disturb others when using your handset. Adjust handset use according to your surroundings.

^ Turn it off in theaters, museums and other places where silence is the norm.

^ Refrain from using it in restaurants, hotel lobbies, elevators, etc.

^ Observe signs and instructions regarding handset use aboard trains, etc.

^ Refrain from use that interrupts the flow of pedestrian or vehicle traffic.

Manner-Related Features

C Manner Mode: see P.3-3

Press Manner Key to automatically mute all Ring Tones and activate Vibration mode for incoming calls, mail and information.

C Vibration Mode: see P.8-3

Activate Vibration mode to use handset vibration to alert you to incoming calls, mail, etc. in public places.

C Volume Settings: see P.8-2, IP.12-2

Decrease or mute Ring Tone volume for incoming calls/mail/information as well as tones for Web or V-Applications when carrying handset in public places.

C Whisper Mode: see P.3-5

Use Whisper Mode to increase microphone sensitivity, allowing you to lower your voice and speak softly when you must use handset in public places.

C Off-Line Mode: see P.3-6

Use Off-Line Mode to temporarily suspend all handset transmissions. In Off-Line

Mode, incoming/outgoing calls and Vodafone live! transmissions are blocked.

C Message Recorder: see P.12-4

Use Message Recorder to handle incoming calls when it is inappropriate or unsafe to answer.

Manner Mode

Activating & Canceling

Activate or cancel Manner Mode in Standby, Web information, mail windows (Mail Box, message window, etc.) or while using V-Applications.

Activating Manner Mode

1

Press

j for 1+ seconds i and Manner Mode Set appear. The following indicators appear as set in Manner Settings (see

P.3-4).

j Message Recorder f Vibration h

Silent g

Rising Tone

Canceling Manner Mode

1

Press

j for 1+ seconds i disappears and Manner Mode is canceled.

1

3

When Manner Mode is Active

C Power On/Off and error tone as well as Keypad Sound are muted. Beeps in Call

Waiting and 3 Way Calling are heard.

C Shutter Click and Self Timer tone sound even in Manner Mode.

C Settings for Manner Mode are applied to: Message Recorder, Ring Tone Level,

Vibration, LED Indicator, Whisper Mode, Sound Volume, V-Appli Volume and V-Appli

Vibration.

C When Message Recorder is recording messages, the other party's voice is heard through Earpiece.

3-2 3-3

3

Manner Mode Settings

Customize Manner Mode settings.

Default settings:

Message Recorder On

LED Indicator

Ring Tone Level

Silent (All) Vibration

Small Light Whisper Mode

V-Appli Volume

Silent

On

V-Appli Vibration On

Sound Volume

On (All)

Silent

Message Recorder

Activate or deactivate Message Recorder

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Manner Settings

A

Message Recorder

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

Ring Tone Level

Set Ring Tone volume

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Manner Settings

A

Ring Tone Level

Select from

1Incoming Call to 6Confirm Delivery A

Press

b A

Select

1Silent, 2Rising Tone or 3Level 1 A

Press

b

^ For Silent, Speaker is muted and sounds can be heard through headphones. Volume is fixed to Level 1.

Vibration

Set vibration to alert you to incoming calls/mail

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Manner Settings

A

Vibration

Select from

1Incoming Call to 6Confirm Delivery A

Press

b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

Rising Tone

C When Silent is set for Ring Tone Level (see P.8-2) or Alarm Tone Volume (see

P.12-15), no sound is heard. If Level 1 to Level 5 is set, Rising Tone is activated and sound will increase to the set level (Level 3 is set: Level 1 % Level 2 % Level 3 ).

Vibration

C Handset vibrates even when Vibration for Call Functions (see P.8-3) or Alarm (see

P.12-15) is set to Off or SMAF Link.

3-4

LED Indicator

Flash Mobile/Small Light for incoming communications

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Manner Settings

A

LED Indicator

Select from

1Normal to 3Off A

Press

b

Normal

Small Light

Off

Mobile/Small Light flashes as set in Call Functions (see P.8-2)

Small Light flashes

No lights

Whisper Mode

Activate or deactivate Whisper Mode

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Manner Settings

A

Whisper Mode

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

^ Activate Whisper Mode to increase microphone sensitivity, allowing you to lower your voice and speak softly when you must use handset in public places (i flashes).

+

Whisper Mode can be set On/Off during a call by pressing

After the call, Whisper Mode will be canceled.

j for 1+ seconds.

3

Sound Volume

Adjust sound volume

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Manner Settings

A

Sound Volume

Adjust level

A

Press

b

V-Appli Volume

Adjust V-Appli volume

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Manner Settings

A

V-Appli Volume

Select

1Silent or 2Level 1 A

Press

b

V-Appli Vibration

Handset vibrates while using V-Applications

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Manner Settings

A

V-Appli Vibration

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

3-5

3

Off-Line Mode

Use Off-Line Mode to temporarily suspend all handset transmissions.

^ In Off-Line Mode, incoming/outgoing calls and Vodafone live! transmissions are blocked.

^ Off-Line Mode is Off by default.

Activating Off-Line Mode

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Off-Line Mode

1

1

Choose

1On and press b s appears.

Canceling Off-Line Mode

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Off-Line Mode

1

Choose

2Off and press b s disappears and Off-Line Mode is canceled.

,

Emergency calls (110, etc.) are not possible in Off-Line Mode. For more, see P.2-5

"Emergency Calls."

+ ^ When Off-Line Mode is set while a Network V-Application is paused (see

IP.10-6), V-Appli Paused Cannot Connect to Network in Off-line Mode

Off-line Mode On? appears. Choose

1Yes and press b to enter Off-Line Mode.

(Network connection is disabled until Off-Line Mode is canceled.)

^ While handset is closed or Display shuts down for Panel Saving in Off-Line Mode,

Small Light flashes red, green and orange.

3-6

Entering Characters

4-1

4

Character Selection

Use Kana and Pager (see P.4-10) to enter alphanumerics, Symbols, hiragana, kanji, katakana and Pictographs. With the exception "Pager Code" on P.4-10, most text entry operations are described using Kana Mode.

Entry Modes

Press j to toggle between character entry modes as follows: n%o%p%h%i%j%l%n

Alternatively, use

F to toggle between entry modes after pressing j once.

Available Modes

h i j l n o

p

New Message

*/128 h

Kanji (hiragana) i

Double-byte katakana m

Single-byte alphanumerics

(upper/lower case) n

Single-byte alphanumerics

(lower case) o

Single-byte number

Text OK Menu

Current Entry Mode j

Single-byte katakana k

Double-byte alphanumerics

(upper/lower case) l

Double-byte alphanumerics

(lower case) p

Pictograph Code q

Character Code

Upper & Lower Case

C In double- or single-byte alphanumerics mode, press k to toggle between upper case and lower case. For Pager Mode (see P.4-10), in double- or single-byte entry mode, press k to toggle between upper and lower case.

k hij k nop hij l nop

Pictograph & Character Codes

C Press e to toggle as follows:

Pictograph Code 1 % Pictograph Code 2 % Pictograph Code 3 %

Pictograph Code 4 % Pictograph Code 5 % Pictograph Code 6 %

Character Code % Pictograph Code 1

^ Pictograph Code page number appears at the bottom.

+

^ Handset Character Codes correspond to 6,355 kanji.

^ Some characters are not available for mail addresses, etc.

4-2

Key Assignments

Multiple characters are assigned to each key. Press a key to toggle between character options for that key.

Example: In katakana entry, press

1 three times for ウ

When entering characters, press f to toggle between character options in reverse.

(Not available for entering single-byte numbers, Pictographs and Character Codes.)

Example: Enter

い f to return to あ

Key

Kanji (Hiragana)

[Double-byte]

Katakana Alphanumerics

[Double & Single-byte] [Double & Single-byte]

Numbers

[Single-byte]

Pictograph Code 1 - 6

& Character Codes

1

＠．／＿―１

X (space)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

わをんー、。 e(Line Break)

ワヲンー、。 e(Line Break)

，．０ e(Line Break)

0 k

゛゜, Log/Double-byte

Symbol/Pictograph List

1

゛゜P

2

Toggle Case (for some characters)

Single-byte Mail/

Web Extensions

3

Toggle Case + Toggle

Mode (upper/lower and lower case)

U-u (Pause) p

C

Log, Double-byte Symbol

Conversion (Up)

D

Conversion (Down)

B

5

/Pictograph List

Cursor Left

Cursor Up

#

Cursor Down e(Line Break)

A j

Cursor Right

Change Entry Mode

ーーーーーーー

4

i

Press i

Long

Press

Delete One Character/

Cancel Conversion f b

Delete One Character

Delete All

Recover up to 64 deleted characters

OK

6

1

2

7

8

3

4

5

6

9

0

ーーーーーーー

ーーーーーーー

ーーーーーーー

Delete Code/One

Character e

Phonetic

Conversion

ーーーーーーー

Toggle Pictograph

Code 1 - 6 and

Character Code d

Hiragana to Katakana/

Alphanumerics

Conversion

ーーーーーーー

Open list

7

for

Pictograph Code 1 - 6

1

Disabled until hiragana is converted.

2

- is available only in single-byte katakana entry.

3

Extensions are listed for easy entry.

4

- and P (Pause) are for phone number entry.

5

6

Single-byte for single-byte katakana/alphanumeric entry.

Press f once for each character to recover immediately after deleting. [Not available after deleting text with i (Long Press).]

7

List is not available for Character Codes.

4-3

4

4

Entering Characters

Kanji, Hiragana & Katakana

Following the example below, enter 鈴木 to learn how to enter characters in kanji

(hiragana) entry mode. Switch to double-byte or single-byte katakana mode to enter katakana. Alternatively, enter hiragana and then select katakana from the word suggestion list.

1

Press

3 three times

Word suggestions change as hiragana are entered.

J

Q h n

New Message

*/128

す

98すぐに

97すぐ

96する

95スケジュール

94すべて

Kanji Convert

InputMethod

2

Press

A

^ When the next character is on the same key, press

A first.

J

Q h n

New Message

*/128

す

3

4

Press

Press

3 three times and press q

2 twice

^ To enter hiragana without converting to kanji, skip to Step 6.

98すぐに

97すぐ

96する

95スケジュール

94すべて

Kanji Convert

InputMethod

J

Q h n

New Message

*/128

すず

61涼しい

6

*鈴

59鈴木

58珠洲

57錫

Kanji Convert

InputMethod

J

Q h n

New Message

*/128

すずき

*7鈴木

*6スズキ

*5鱸

*4鈴木京香

*3鈴木田

Kanji Convert

InputMethod

4-4

5

Press

D k and use E to select a word

6

C

To see other suggestions, press d J or e W.

C

To exit the list, press i.

C

To change segment, see "Segmenting Phrases" below.

Press

b

Learning Function

C The most recently used word appears first in the list.

Predictive & Previous Usage

C Use Predictive and Previous Usage to convert hiragana to kanji more quickly.

Predictive

Word suggestions change as up to 5 hiragana are entered

Previous Usage

Suggests words/characters likely to follow entry based on previous entries

^ Both functions are active by default (see P.4-14).

User Dictionary

C Save frequently used words/phrases to select from the word suggestion list (see

P.4-15).

C Segmenting Phrases

If the word is not in the list, press i after Step 5 to exit. Then use F to segment hiragana to convert separately.

Example: Segment

みち

B DEb DEb

みち み ち 三 ち 三智

J

Q h n E

New Message

*/128

鈴木

*7鈴木

*6スズキ

*5鱸

*4鈴木京香

*3鈴木田

Back Select Next

J

Q h n E

New Message

1

*/128

鈴木

21さん

2

*くん

19ちゃん

18君

17様

OK

Menu

4

4-5

4

C Selecting Multiple Converted Words

Press k

Example: To enter

西山大輔

D k

にしやまだいすけ

西山 大輔

西山大輔

Small Kana (

っ

Enter small hiragana

あ

1

Enter a character and press

k

つ

っ

つ k k

Adding

゛

or

゜

1

Enter a character and press

q

^ In kanji (hiragana)/double-byte katakana entry, press the key once to add

゛ か characters, and press twice to remove. For は (Ha) row characters, press once to add ゛ to remove.

は

ば

ぱ q q q

は

+

In Single-byte Katakana Entry

^ Press q once to add ﾞﾞﾞﾞ and twice for ﾟﾟﾟﾟ . Symbols are single-byte.

^ Press i to remove ﾞﾞﾞﾞ or ﾟﾟﾟﾟ .

Entering Alphanumerics

Enter alphanumerics in double-byte alphanumerics (upper & lower case) or single-byte alphanumerics (upper & lower case) mode. Alternatively, enter numbers in single-byte number mode.

3 a a d

^ In double-byte or single-byte alphanumerics mode, press k to toggle between upper and lower case.

^ When the next character is on the same key (example: entering A then B), press

A first to move cursor.

4-6

Symbols, Pictographs & Emoticons

Symbols & Pictographs

1

Press

p or q to open Log List (Log List is available in some

entry modes)

Recently used Symbols/Pictographs appear.

^ -- appears by default or when Log List is deleted (see below).

2

Use

G to select one and press b

^ Repeat Step 2 to enter more.

C

To see more lists, press p or e. The list toggles as follows:

Log List % Symbol List (1 - 3) % Pictograph List (6 - 1)

B Press q to toggle the list in reverse order.

B Press

D to scroll down.

J

Q h

New Message n

G

5/128

 

3

Press

d W to exit list

Symbol1 Select Back

Deleting Log List

C In a text entry window, press d I A

Select

9Input/Conversion A

Press

b

A

Select

5Clear Symbols A

Press

b A

Select

1OK A

Press

b

B Press i twice to return to the text entry window.

C Log List cannot be deleted in Pictograph Code mode.

In Pictograph Code Mode

C To enter a Pictograph directly, enter 2 digits (see IP.16-8 - 16-10).

B To edit a code mid-entry, press i to clear first digit then enter correct digits.

C To select from Pictograph List, follow these steps.

Press

d a A

Select a Pictograph

A

Press

b

^ To toggle through Page 1 - 6 and Log List, press e.

+

^ Single-byte Symbols do not appear in Log List.

^ Symbols are double or single-byte according to the entry mode. (Pictographs are all double-byte.)

^ Alternatively, enter きごう

D k. Some Symbols can be selected.

4

4-7

4

Emoticons

1

In a text entry window, press

d I

2

Select

8Emoticons and press b

3

Select an emoticon and press

b

^ Enter two digits (01 - 50) to jump to the emoticon assigned to the number.

,

Emoticons cannot be entered in Pictograph Code (1 - 6) mode.

+

^ For other emoticons, enter かお

D k.

わーい or うーん

D k.

Corresponding emoticons can be selected.

Space

1

In a text entry window, press

A

^ Alternatively in alphanumeric entries, press

1 seven times to enter a space.

Ueda

A

Ueda

Line Break

Insert line breaks in text, Text Memo, BBS, etc.

1

Press

D at the end of text

^ To insert line breaks in text, press

0 until e appears. For kanji

(hiragana) entry mode, then press b. Line break is inserted at the cursor position.

^ Keystroke count varies by character entry mode (see P.4-3).

Mail & Web Extensions

1

In alphanumeric entry, press

q

2

Select an extension and press

b

^ Mail addresses and URLs are single-byte.

Contact me at

D

Contact me at e

J

Q n

1.co.jp

2.ne.jp

3.ac.jp

4.or.jp

5http://

6www.

7.com

8@

9_

Select n

E

4-8

Copying from Phone Book

Insert Phone Book entry items into text entry windows.

Select from names, phone numbers, mail addresses or Personal Data.

1

In a text entry window, press

d I

2

Press

e 4

3

Open a Phone Book entry

C

To search Phone Book, see P.5-13.

B Skip the step of pressing

A (l).

4

Use

F to select an item and press b

5

Use

G to move cursor to target location

6

Press

b

Selected item is inserted.

J

Q

New Message

  <Paste> n

Mr. Ueda's phone num ber is

4

Set Start Back

Inserting Owner Profile

C In a text entry window, press d I A

Select XSaved Info

A

Press

b A

Select

1Profile A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

^ For more, see Steps 4 - 6 above.

Character Code

Use multi-digit Character Codes to enter characters.

1

In Character Code entry mode, enter four digits (see P.14-9 - 14-12)

4-9

4

Pager Code

1

In a text entry window, press

d I

2

Select

9Input/Conversion and press b

3

Select

1Input Method and press b

4

Select

2Pager and press b

Pager Code entry window opens.

C

To switch to Kana Mode, select

1Kana A

Press b

5

Enter two digits (see P.4-11)

^ Pager Mode is active until switched to Kana Mode.

Character Entry Modes

C For text entry in Pager Mode, press j to toggle between entry modes as follows:

Single-byte lower case (w)%Pictograph Code 1 - 6 (p) & Character Code

mode (q)%Double-byte lower case (s)

^ Press e to toggle between Pictograph Code 1 - 6 and Character Code mode.

C Press k to toggle between upper and lower case.

+

^ Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion is disabled in Pager Mode.

^ To enter ゛

Pager Code List

^ Blanks indicate no entry.

^ Upper and lower case are available for characters with gray background. Press k to switch.

Double-byte upper case Double-byte lower case

Second digit (Press secondly)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Second digit (Press secondly)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

5

6

7

2

3

4

*1

*2

*1

*2

よ U ＃

Space

9

0

､ 。

Single-byte upper case Single-byte lower case

Second digit (Press secondly) Second digit (Press secondly)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

1

ｱ ｲ ｳ ｴ ｵ A B C D E

2

ｶ ｷ ｸ ｹ ｺ F G H I J

3

ｻ ｼ ｽ ｾ ｿ K L M N O

4

ﾀ ﾁ ﾂ ﾃ ﾄ P Q R S T

5

ﾅ ﾆ ﾇ ﾈ ﾉ U V W X Y

6

ﾊ ﾋ ﾌ ﾍ ﾎ Z ?

!

/

7

ﾏ ﾐ ﾑ ﾒ ﾓ

*1

8

ﾔ ( ﾕ ) ﾖ

U ####

Space

*2

9

ﾗ ﾘ ﾙ ﾚ ﾛ 1 2 3 4 5

0

ﾜ ｦ ﾝ 6 7 8 9 0

1

2

5

6

3

4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

7

8

ｬ

9

0

ｧ ｨ ｩ ｪ ｫ a b c d e f g hh ii jj k l m n o p q rr ss tt u v w x y

,

..

*1

Press

70 to insert line breaks (in mail message text, Text Memo, etc.).

*2

Press

80 to toggle between upper and lower case.

^

and are double-byte.

*1

*2

4

4-10 4-11

4

Conversion Methods (Japanese Only)

Phonetic Conversion

Enter alternate readings to search for kanji.

1

Enter reading in hiragana

2

3

Press

e _

Select a kanji and press

b

J

Q h n

[かい]

**1 

介 会解回塊

壊廻快怪悔

*11 恢懐戒拐改

魁晦械海灰

*21 界皆絵芥蟹

開階貝凱蓋

*31 街鎧骸會偕

懷懈槐榿薤

*41 薈誨誡谿豈

Back OK

G

One-Hiragana Conversion

Enter the first hiragana to access previously selected words.

Example: To enter

鈴木

DE b

す 鈴木 鈴木

^ One-Hiragana Conversion and User Dictionary (see P.4-15) share memory. Selected words may not be saved if User Dictionary is full.

^ Up to 20 entries are saved per hiragana (Title Word) between One-Hiragana Conversion and User Dictionary. When memory is full, the oldest entry is deleted to make room for a new entry. However, User Dictionary remains unchanged.

4-12

Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion

Enter katakana and alphanumerics in kanji (hiragana) entry mode.

1

Enter hiragana and press

d ^

^ To enter AM, press

26 then d ^.

2

Use

E to select a word and press b characters/Symbols):

ーー

Space

Space

Space

Space

Space

ーー ーー

Space

Space

Space

Space

Space

Space

Space

ーー

Space

Space ー numbers):

4

Quick Conversion (for Hiragana)

Quick Conversion helps reduce keystrokes needed to enter frequently used words.

A list of word suggestions appears based on the key pressed.

Use Quick Conversion in kanji (hiragana) mode only.

Example: To enter

微妙

Normal Conversion

Quick Conversion

66q (び 77 (み 888888 (ょ

111 (う D k

6q((ば 7 (ま 8 (や 1 (あ C (convert)

1

Enter hiragana and press

C

Cursor turns green.

^ While cursor is green, use

F to segment entered hiragana and then convert one segment at a time.

C

To cancel Quick Conversion, press i A

Press

D for normal conversion

2

Use

E to select a word and press b

+

The most recently used word (mostly nouns) appears first.

4-13

One Hiragana Predictive Entry

Enter hiragana and initiate Quick Conversion. Words starting with a hiragana in the same row ( あ

Example: When

あ

5:00 - 10:59 11:00 - 16:59 17:00 - 22:59 23:00 - 4:59

4

^ Words in the list are preset by time blocks.

^ If Clock is not set, only words for 11:00 - 16:59 are available.

One Hiragana Word Call

Enter the first hiragana of entries you used Quick Conversion for. The most recently selected word appears first.

Example: You entered

あたあさわ and selected お父さん

C

あ お父さん

Conversion Settings

Disable Predictive/

Previous Usage

Disable Predictive or Previous Usage (see P.4-5)

KOn

In a text entry window, press

d I A

A

Press

A b

Choose

A

Select

2Off A

Press

Select

9Input/Conversion

2Predictive or 3Previous Usage A

Press

b b

Reset Learning

Clear log of words selected in kanji conversion, Predictive, etc.

In a text entry window, press

d I A

Select

9Input/Conversion

A

Press

b A

Select

4Reset Learning A

Press

b A

Select

1OK

A

Press

b

^ Words saved in User Dictionary remain.

4-14

Dictionaries (Japanese Only)

User Dictionary

Save up to 100 frequently used words/phrases and assign Title Words in hiragana to entries.

In text entry windows, enter Title Word and convert. Entries appear among word suggestions.

Save up to five entries per Title Word.

F43

New Entry

Save words/phrases to User Dictionary

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

User Dictionary

A

New Entry

Enter a word/phrase

A

Press

b A

Enter Title Word

A

Press

b

^ Enter up to 15 characters per word/phrase and eight characters in hiragana per Title Word.

Edit

Edit or delete entries

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

User Dictionary

A

Edit

Edit

Select a word or phrase

A

Press

b A

Edit

A

Press

b A

Edit Title

Word

A

Press

b A

Select

1Overwrite or 2New Entry A

Press

b

Deleting One Entry

Select a word or phrase

A

Press

d I A

Select

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

2Delete A

Deleting All

Press

d I A

Select

3Delete All A

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes

A

Press

b

V302SH Download Dictionary

Download specialized V302SH Download Dictionaries from Sharp's Space Town

Mobile Internet site. Activate up to two dictionaries at one time to improve handset character conversion. Dictionary words appear among word suggestions.

For details, access Sharp's Space Town Mobile Internet site (see IP.8-2).

Acquire Dictionary

Activate downloaded dictionaries

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

User Dictionary

A

Acquire Dictionary

Select a number

A

Press

b A

Select a dictionary

A

Press

b

C

To replace current dictionary, select a number

A

Press b A

Press d I A

Select

1Change A

Press b A

Select a dictionary

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

4

4-15

From Dictionary Library

C Press b A

Select Functions

A

Press

b A

Select

4Settings 2 A

Press

b A

Select

3User Dictionary A

Press

b A

Select

3Acquire Dictionary A

Press

b A

Select

3Dictionary Library A

Press

b A

Select a dictionary

A

Press

d I

A

Select

1Save Dictionary A

Press

b A

Select a number

A

Press

b

^ When a file is already saved, Overwrite? appears

A

Choose

1Yes or 2No A

Press b

4

Cancel

Cancel dictionary

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

User Dictionary

A

Acquire Dictionary

Select a number

A

Press

b A

Press

d I A

Select Cancel

A

Press

b

Editing Characters

Deleting

1

Use

G to select a character and press i

The highlighted character is deleted.

^ Recover up to 64 characters deleted with i. Press f once for each character to recover immediately after deleting. Pressing any other key disables the recover function.

Ki n oshita i

Ki o shita

,

Press i for 1+ seconds to delete an entire entry. Characters deleted in this manner cannot be recovered.

Replacing

1

Press

i to delete a character

2

Enter another character

Mik a ko i

Mik k o

Miki k o

4-16

Copy/Cut & Paste

When Menu appears, copy or cut and paste text (up to 6,000 single-byte characters) into the same window or another.

1

In a text entry window, press

d I

2

Select

1Copy or 2Cut and press b

3

Move cursor to the first character of text and press

b

Start point is set (End appears).

C

To change the start point, press i.

4

Move cursor to the end of text and press

b

5

Open text paste target window and press

d I

6

Select

3Paste and press b

J

Q

New Message

   <Cut> n

Manager of alumni. E mployee of A trading

company.

C all at ho me after 1

* PM.

Start Back

Cut

7

Move cursor to target location and press

b

Text is inserted.

J

Q n

Personal Data  n

Manager of alumni. C all at home after 1

*

PM.

4

Deleting Text Before or After Cursor

○○○○○○ ○ ○○○○○○

Use Delete

Previous to delete

Use Delete

Posterior to delete

1

Press

d I

2

Select

6Delete Posterior or 7Delete Previous and press b

3

Press

b

OK Menu

4-17

4

Text Memo

Save frequently used phrases for use in mail message, etc.

^ Save up to 20 Text Memo phrases.

^ Save up to 128 single-byte characters per phrase.

^ Ten editable Text Art are saved by default. Edit and replace default entries.

^ When memory is full, delete entries to make room for new ones.

^ To create QR Code from Text Memo, see P.12-27.

Index Menu

H

My Files

1

Select

7Text Memo and press b

Titles or the first part of saved text appear.

C

To open text, select one

A

Press b

2

Select a number and press

b

C

If the number is already used, saved text appears. Press d I A

Select

2Edit A

Press b

3

Enter text and press

b

Text is saved.

^ To save more text, repeat Steps 2 - 3.

Saving from Message or Phone Book

C In a text entry window, press d I A

Select

4Save Text Memo A

Press

b

A

Move cursor to the first character of text

A

Press

b A

Move cursor to the end of text

A

Press

b A

Select a number

A

Press

b

Edit/Delete

Edit or delete Text Memo

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Text Memo

Edit Memo

Select text

A

Press

b

Press

d I A

Select Edit

A

Press

b A

Edit

A

Delete Single Text Memos

Select text

A

Press

d I A

Select Delete

A

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

^ Default Text Art is restored after deleting text in 01 - 10.

4-18

Phone Book

5-1

5

Overview

Save frequently used phone numbers and mail addresses to Phone Book. Entry names appear for calls from numbers saved in Phone Book.

C Dialing from Phone Book (see P.5-11)

J

Q

            n

Ueda Mikio 005

1Friends ssyy c dPattern 1 ePattern 2 pMail Folder 1 qMail Folder 2

03123XXXX3

Back Menu f

Ueda Mikio

03123XXXX3

C Sending Sky/Long Mail from Phone Book (see IP.3-3)

J

Q

Ueda Mikio n

005

1Friends ssyy c dPattern 1 ePattern 2 pMail Folder 1 qMail Folder 2

03123XXXX3

Back Menu

C When a Call Arrives

J n

F

J

Q n

Ueda Mikio 005

1Friends ssyy c ePattern 2 pMail Folder 1 qMail Folder 2 [email protected]

Back Menu

J

Q n

<<Incoming Call>> bb

J

Q

J

Q

Select Mail Type n E

1Send Long Mail

2Send Sky Mail n

Select

A call arrives

Ueda Mikio

03123XXXX3

Menu Menu

,

Back-up Important Information

Keep a separate copy of important information. When battery is exhausted or removed for long periods, Phone Book entries may be lost. Handset damage may also affect information recovery. Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from accidental loss/alteration.

+ ^ Use Phone Book Lock (see P.11-3) to protect entries from accidental alteration and to restrict access to Phone Book information.

^ Exchange Phone Book entries with other handsets, etc. via infrared (see P.10-2).

5-2

Saving to Phone Book

Phone Book Entry Items

^ Save up to 500 entries (000 - 499) in Phone Book.

^ To create QR Codes from Phone Book entries, see P.12-27.

c Name

Item Description

Enter up to 16 single-byte characters.

Use kanji, hiragana, katakana (double or single-byte), alphanumerics (double or single-byte) and Pictographs.

d Reading e Phone Number i Mail Address

Katakana, alphanumerics or Symbols appear as names are entered (up to 10 single-byte characters including ゛ and ゜

Enter up to three phone numbers (24 digits each)

Enter up to three mail addresses (60 single-byte characters each) k Group

Sort entries into 10 Groups (0 - 9). Change Group names or set

Ring Tone by Group.

l Personal Data b Secret Mode

Add personal details. Use up to 60 single-byte characters.

Restrict access to Phone Book entries by saving them as Secret

Mode entries m Photo

Select an image to appear when you open a Phone Book entry.

Activate Picture Call/Mail to see the image set here for incoming calls/mail.

s Personal Ring Tone Set Ring Tone by caller

Incoming Notice

Picture Call/Mail

Set Ring Tone by sender

Set images to appear by caller or sender

Mail Folder

Messages are sorted into folders

Incoming Calls while Editing

C Contents are temporarily saved for later editing. To return, end the call and follow these steps.

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

5

5-3

5

New Phone Book Entries

Index Menu

H

Tel Ops

A

Add to Phone Book

1

Enter a name

2

Press

b

Characters entered for names (reading for kanji) appear after d.

^ Reading does not appear for Pictographs, pasted characters and names entered with Quick Conversion.

^ Katakana, roman letters, numbers and Symbols appear in single-byte.

C

To correct reading, select d

A

Press b A

Edit reading

A

Press b

C

To cancel, press e 3 A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

J

Q cUeda Mikio n E dUeda Mikio e<Unsaved> i<Unsaved> k0Untitled l<Unsaved> bOff m<Unsaved>

Option Settings

Cancel Select Save

Phone Book Details

3

Select e and press b

4

Enter a phone number

^ Include the area code for landline phone numbers.

C

To correct phone number, press

B to move cursor A

Press i to delete a digit at the cursor position

A

Enter a phone number (Press i for 1+ seconds to clear all.)

C

Press q twice to enter - between digits. (- counts as a digit.)

C

To enter Push Tones, press q three times to enter Pause ( u

)

A

Enter alphanumerics

B Each Pause ( u

) indicates a one-second pause. The subsequent alphanumerics are also sent as Push Tones (see P.12-2).

5

Press

b

6

Select an icon and press

b

C

To save additional phone numbers, select e<Unsaved>

A

Press b A

Repeat

Steps 4 - 6

7

Select i and press b

8

Enter a mail address

9

Press

b

10

Select an icon and press

b

C

To save additional mail addresses, select i<Unsaved>

A

Press b A

Repeat

Steps 8 - 10

C

To set a Group, select k

A

Press b A

Select a Group

A

Press b

C

To enter Personal Data, select l

A

Press b A

Enter information

A

Press b

C

Photo: see P.5-6

C

Saving Secret Mode Entries: see P.5-7

5-4

11

Press

d q

Memory Number entry window opens. Assign a Memory Number to each Phone Book entry.

12

Enter Memory No. (000 - 499)

Entry is saved to Phone Book.

C

Use headphones to call the number saved in Memory Number 000 (see P.12-32).

C

Use Speed Dial to call numbers saved in Memory Numbers 000 - 099 (see P.5-14).

Assign Memory No. Automatically

C Press q to assign the smallest available number.

C To specify a range of numbers, enter hundreds or tens digit and press q.

^ To specify hundreds, enter first digit

A

Press

q

Example: Enter

3q. The range is 300 - 399.

^ To specify tens, enter two digits

A

Press

q

Example: Enter

21q. The range is 210 - 219.

Warning Messages

On Display

Overwrite?

Memory Full

Cannot Save

Secret Data saved

Cause

The Memory Number is already in use

Operation

Choose

1Yes and press b to overwrite the entry. Choose

2No and press b to enter another

Memory Number.

To assign Memory Number automatically, see above.

All Memory Numbers are in use

Overwrite or delete entries (see P.5-15)

The number is already used for a

Secret Mode Phone

Book entry

Activate Secret Mode (see P.11-6) to overwrite

5

5-5

5

Photo

Save an image (still image or animation) to Phone Book entries. The image appears for calls/mail from that entry.

Setting Photo

1

In Phone Book Details (see P.5-4), select c and press b

2

Selecting from Data Folder

1 Select

1Data Folder and press b

2 Select an image from Data Folder (see P.9-6) and press b

3 Press b

Phone Book Details (see P.5-4) returns. Complete other fields.

^ Some images may be too large for Phone Book Photo.

Capturing New Image

1 Select

2Mobile Camera and press b

2 Select

1Sha-mail Mode or 2Wallpaper Mode and press b

3 Frame image on Display

4 Press b

Captured image appears.

5 Press b

Image is saved to Data Folder and Phone Book Details (see P.5-4) returns.

Complete other fields.

Picture Call/Mail

Picture Call/Mail is Off by default.

1

In Phone Book Details (see P.5-4), select Option Settings and press

b

2

Select

3Picture Call/Mail and press b

3

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel Picture Call/Mail (hide images for incoming calls/mail), choose

2Off A

Press b

4

Press

e j

Phone Book Details (see P.5-4) returns. Complete other fields.

,

Picture Call/Mail is canceled when source image in Data Folder is deleted.

Saving Secret Mode Entries

1

In Phone Book Details (see P.5-4), select b and press b

2

Choose

1On and press b

Phone Book Details (see P.5-4) returns. Complete other fields.

^ Activate Secret Mode (see P.11-6) to open Secret Mode entries.

Change Secret to Standard

C Activate Secret Mode (see P.11-6) and follow these steps.

Open a Phone Book entry (see P.5-11)

A

Press

b A

Select Edit

A

Press

b

A

Select b

A

Press

b A

Choose

2Off A

Press

b A

Save entry (see

Steps 6 - 8 on P.5-15)

,

Do not save confidential information in Phone Book. Security Code and thus Secret

Mode entries may be compromised.

+

When not in Secret Mode, Phone Book Names/Photo images do not appear for incoming calls/mail from numbers/addresses in Secret Mode entries. Personal Ring

Tone and Incoming Notice are disabled. Names for numbers in Secret Mode entries do not appear in Redial or Call History. Names saved in Redial/Call History before an entry is converted to a Secret Mode entry appear even if handset is not in Secret Mode.

5

5-6 5-7

5

F31

Saving from Redial or Call History

Index Menu

H

Tel Ops

1

Select

4Redial or 5Call History and press b

2

Select an entry and press

d I

3

Select Add to Phone Book and press

b

4

New Entry

1 Select

1New Entry and press b

2 Enter name and press b

Phone number is entered automatically and Phone Book Details (see P.5-4) appears.

Complete other fields.

New Item

1 Select

2New Item and press b

2 Select a Phone Book entry (see Step 2 on P.5-11)

^ When three phone numbers are already saved, the phone number is not added.

3 Press b

4 Select an icon and press b

Phone Book Details (see P.5-4) appears. Complete other fields.

,

Call History records without Caller ID cannot be saved to Phone Book.

+

Numbers and mail addresses in received messages (see IP.4-7) or Notepad

Memory (see P.2-13) can be saved to Phone Book.

Phone Book Memory Status

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

1

Select

1Memory and press b

Number of entries appears.

C

Press g to exit.

J

Q n

F31:Memory

<Memory Status>

Phone Book XX

Mail : XX%

Web : XX%

Station : XX%

Option Settings

Set Personal Ring Tone, Incoming Notice, Picture Call/Mail (see P.5-6) and Mail Folder.

Select Set All or One Number/Address.

Set All

One Number/

Address

Apply the same setting to every number/address in a single Phone

Book entry. Set All cancels One Number/Address settings.

Apply setting to each number/address independently. One Number/

Address cancels Set All settings.

Overview

1

In Phone Book Details (see P.5-4), select Option Settings and press

b

Option Settings menu appears.

2

Select an item and press

b

3

Apply Same Setting to All

1 Select

1Set All and press b

J

Q n E

Option Settings

[Off ]

1Personal Ring Tone

2Incoming Notice

3Picture Call/Mail

4Mail Folder

Settings by Number/Address

1 Select

2One Number/Address and press b

2 Select a number or address and press b

3 Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b A

Press e j

Set

Select

Option Settings Menu

Canceling

1 Choose

3Off and press b

Option Settings menu returns.

C

Press e j to exit.

4

Set Options (see P.5-10)

Phone Book Details (see P.5-4) returns. Complete other fields.

,

For phone numbers, the following settings apply only to Vodafone handset numbers: Incoming Notice and Mail Folder.

5

5-8 5-9

5

Setting Options

Follow these steps after opening Option Settings menu (see P.5-9).

Personal Ring Tone

& Incoming Notice

Select Ring Tone, vibration, etc. for incoming calls/mail from numbers/addresses saved in Phone Book

Ring Tone

Select

1Personal Ring Tone or 2Incoming Notice A

Press

b A

Perform Step 3 on P.5-9 to set target number/address

A

Select

1Ring Tone A

Press

b A

Select a tone or melody (see Steps 1 - 3 on P.8-3)

A

Press

e j A

Press

e j A

For One

Number/Address, press

e j again

Vibration

Select

1Personal Ring Tone or 2Incoming Notice A

Press

b A

Perform Step 3 on P.5-9 to set target number/address

A

Select

2Vibration A

Press

b A

Select

1On, 2Off or 3SMAF Link A

Press

b A

Press

e j A

Press

e j

Number/Address, press

e j again

A

For One

Vibration Pattern

Select

1Personal Ring Tone or 2Incoming Notice A

Press

b A

Perform

Step 3 on P.5-9 to set target number/address

A

Select

3Vibration Pattern

A

Press

b A

Select a pattern

A

Press

b A

Press

e j A

Press

e j A

For One Number/Address, press

e j again

Mobile/Small Light

Select

1Personal Ring Tone or 2Incoming Notice A

Press

b A

Perform Step 3 on P.5-9 to set target number/address

A

Select

4LED Indicator A

Press

b A

Perform Steps 1 - 3 in "Mobile/Small

Light" on P.8-4 to set pattern

A

Press

e j A

Press

e j

A

For One Number/Address, press

e j again

Ring Time (for Incoming Notice)

Select

2Incoming Notice A

Press

b A

Perform Step 3 on P.5-9 to set target number/address

A

Select

5Ring Time A

Press

b A

Enter time (01 - 99 seconds)

A

Press

b A

Press

e j A

Press

e j A

For One Number/Address, press

e j again

,

^ When source file in Data Folder is deleted, Ring Tone is set to Pattern 1 for

Personal Ring Tone and Mail for Incoming Notice.

^ To apply Personal Ring Tone or Incoming Notice setting to Secret Mode entries, activate Secret Mode first.

Mail Folder

Specify Mail Folder for each Phone Book entry to sort messages automatically

Select

4Mail Folder A

Press

b A

Select

1Inbox Auto Sort or

2Sent Auto Sort A

Press

b A

Perform Step 3 on P.5-9 to set target number/address

A

Select a folder

A

Press

b A

Press

e j A

Press

e j A

For One Number/Address, press

e j again

5-10

Using Phone Book

Dialing from Phone Book

Follow these steps to search Phone Book by Memory Number (default search method).

^ To dial numbers saved in Secret Mode entries, activate Secret Mode first (see P.11-6).

^ To search by other methods, see P.5-12.

1

Press

A (l)

2

Press

D + or enter Memory No.

^ Press

D + to open Phone Book Entry List in the order of

Memory Number.

^ Enter Memory Number to open Phone Book Entry List including the entered number.

C

Use

E to select an entry.

3

Press

b

Phone Book entry opens.

C

When multiple numbers or addresses are saved, use

F to select other icons.

4

Press

f

Number is dialed.

J

Q

005Ueda Mikio

007Kitayama Kaoru n E

008Kimura Tetsuya

,

Cancel Phone Book Lock (see P.11-3) to open Phone Book.

5

5-11

5

1

2

3

4

5

Window Description

J

Q n

Ueda Mikio 005

1Friends ssyy c dPattern 1 ePattern 2 fMail Folder 1 gMail Folder 2

03123XXXX3

Back Menu

6

7

8

1 Name

2 Group Name

3 Icon for Saved Items

B Phone Number (s Call, f Home, g Mobile, h Company)

B Mail Address (i Internet, j Mobile)

B Personal Data (l)

B Photo (m)

4 Tone Set for Personal Ring Tone or

Incoming Notice

n Personal Ring Tone, o Incoming

Notice

5 Mail Folders Set for Auto Sort p Inbox Mail Folder q Sent Mail Folder

6 Memory No.

7 Image Set for Photo

8 Phone Number or Mail Address

+

^ Use

F to toggle saved items. Phone number or mail address appears in 8.

Personal Data or Photo image appears in a new window.

^ Press e W to return to Phone Book Entry List.

Phone Book Search

Search Methods

Memory No. Search

Lists Memory Numbers including the one you enter

Katakana Search

Shows entries with Reading starting with specified katakana or katakana in the same row

Group Search

Opens entries in a specified Group

Search by Reading

Shows entries with Reading starting with entered character

Search method is Memory No. Search by default.

5-12

Switching Search Methods

1

Press

A (N)

The method used last appears.

2

Press

d I

3

Select a method and press

b

Selected method appears.

^ To search and open an entry, see below.

Searching/Opening Phone Book Entries

Follow these steps in Standby. Skip the step of pressing

A (l) when continuing from Step 3 above.

Memory No.

Search

Search by Memory Number

CSet search method to Memory No. Search (see P.5-12).

Press

A (N) A

Enter Memory No. (000 - 499)

A

Select a name

A

Press

b

C

Press f to dial.

Katakana Search

Search by katakana row which includes the first character of

Reading

CSet search method to Katakana Search (see P.5-12).

Press

A (N) A

Specify a row

A

Select a name

A

Press

b

C

Press f to dial.

^ Katakana-Key Assignments:

1 カ 2 サ

ナ

ラ

5 ハ

9 ワ

6 マ 7 ヤ

0 Others p

4

8

B When Reading starts with a roman letter, number or Symbol, or is not entered, select Others.

Group Search

Search by Group

CSet search method to Group Search (see P.5-12).

Press

A (N) A

Select a Group

A

Press

b A

Select a name

A

Press

b

C

Press f to dial.

Search by Reading

Search by Reading saved in d

CSet search method to Search by Reading (see P.5-12).

Press

A (N) A

Enter reading (up to 10 single-byte characters)

A

Press

b A

Select a name

A

Press

b

C

Press f to dial.

5-13

5

5

Speed Dial

Use Speed Dial to call first phone number saved in Memory Numbers 000 - 099.

To dial numbers saved in Secret Mode entries, activate Secret Mode first (see P.11-6).

If not, Secret Data saved appears and handset returns to Standby.

1

Dialing Memory No. 000 - 009

1 Enter the last digit (0 - 9)

Dialing Memory No. 010 - 099

1 Enter the last two digits (10 - 99)

2

Press

f

Name and phone number appear and the number is dialed.

^ When no entry/phone number is saved, No Number appears and handset returns to

Standby.

^ When multiple phone numbers are saved, the first one is dialed.

,

Cancel Phone Book Lock (see P.11-3) to use Speed Dial.

Show Photo

Show the assigned images in Phone Book Entry List.

J

Q

005Ueda Mikio

007Kitayama Kaoru

008Kimura Tetsuya n

E J n

J[No.*** - **9]H

**5 Ueda Mikio

^

*3123XXXX3

**7 Kitayama K

*3123XXXX8

**8 Kimura Tet

*3123XXXX5

Entry List

(Memory No. Search)

Entry List with Images

(Memory No. Search)

1

Press

A (N) then D +

2

Press

d I

3

Select Show Pics and press

b

Images appear in Phone Book Entry List.

C

To hide images, while list with images appears, press d I A

Select Show List

A

Press b

5-14

Editing Phone Book

Correction/Change

1

Press

A (N), then open an entry

2

Press

b

3

Select Edit and press

b

Phone Book Details appears.

4

Select an item and press

b

Edit contents.

^ Procedure is the same as when saving to Phone Book (see P.5-4).

^ Edit Reading manually after editing names.

5

Press

b when finished

Phone Book Details returns.

^ To edit other items, repeat Steps 4 - 5.

C

To cancel, press e 3 A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

6

Press

d q

7

Press

b

8

Choose

1Yes and press b

The entry is overwritten.

C

To save to another Memory No., choose

2No A

Press b A

Enter another Memory

No. (or press q)

Deleting Entries

1

Press

A (N), then open an entry

2

Press

b

3

Select Delete and press

b

4

Choose

1Yes and press b

,

The source files remain in Data Folder, even if you delete entries containing Original

Ring Tones, Voice files and images set for Personal Ring Tone, Incoming Notice or

Picture Call/Mail.

5

5-15

5

F37

Group Settings

Rename Groups and customize Ring Tone settings by Group. Personal Ring Tone and Incoming Notice settings (see P.5-10) take priority over Group Settings.

Changing Group Name

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Group Settings

A

Change Group Name

1

Select a Group and press

b

2

Enter a name

^ Enter up to 10 single-byte characters.

3

Press

b

^ Repeat Steps 1 - 3 for other Groups.

4

Press

g to exit

Group Ring Tone

Group Ring Tone is Off for all Groups by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Group Settings

A

Group Ring Tone

1

Select a Group and press

b

2

Select

1Incoming Call or 2Incoming Mail and press b

3

Select

1Call Functions and press b

4

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b

5

Select from

2Ring Tone to 6Ring Time and press b

^

6Ring Time is available for incoming mail only.

C

For Ring Tone settings, see P.8-3.

C

For vibration and Mobile/Small Light patterns, see P.8-3 - 8-4.

C

For Ring Time setting, see P.8-5.

6

Press

g to exit

+

When Group Ring Tone is Off, Ring Tone setting for incoming calls applies.

5-16

Mobile Camera

6-1

6

Getting Started

V302SH features a 0.31 megapixel camera. Capture still images and record video.

^ Still Images: see P.6-5 ^ Video: see P.6-13

^ Viewfinder & Key Assignments: see P.6-4 ^ Shooting Options: see P.6-16

File Formats & Save Locations

Mode

Sha-mail

Wallpaper

Camera

Action Snap

Format

JPEG high color (.jpg),

PNG normal/soft 256 colors (.png)

JPEG (.jpg)

JPEG (.jpg)

MPEG-4 (.ASF)

Save Location

Data Folder (Images)

See P.9-3

Camera folder

See P.9-2

Action Snap Folder

See P.9-2

Mobile Camera Basics

^ Check that lens cover (see P.1-6) is clean before image capture. Use a soft cloth to wipe fingerprints and oil off.

^ If handset moves while shooting, images may blur. Hold handset firmly or place it on a stable surface and use Self Timer (see P.6-9).

^ Mobile camera is a precision instrument. However, some pixels may appear brighter or darker.

^ Shooting/saving images while handset is hot may affect the image quality.

^ Subjecting the lens to direct sunlight will damage the camera's color filter.

Shutter Click

C Shutter Click volume is fixed, and sounds even in Manner Mode.

^ To change Shutter Click sound for still images, see P.6-16.

Auto Shut-off

C Before image capture, mobile camera ends after five minutes of inactivity and handset returns to Standby.

6-2

Incoming Calls before Saving Image or while Recording Video

C Captured still image is temporarily saved. To return, end the call and follow these steps.

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

C Unsaved video is lost.

Camera Mode Image Orientation

C Camera mode images appear rotated 90 degrees when viewed on PCs. To compensate for this, hold handset horizontally for image capture as shown to the right.

Anti-Flicker

C Display may flicker (stripes appear) when capturing images under fluorescent lights.

In this case, change Anti-Flicker settings (see P.6-17).

Camera Display Indicators

Below are descriptions of icons that may appear on Display while mobile camera is active. For details, see the referenced pages.

1

J q

QhbXfuUwK n

J

Qr kl n

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

6

切替 選択

チェック

1 Toggle Preview (see P.6-16) q: 100%, p: 200%

2 Self Timer (see P.6-9)

3 Mode (see P.6-20) b: Sha-mail, z: Wallpaper, c: Camera e: Action Snap

4 File Format (see P.6-19)

X: JPEG High, YV: PNG Normal, YW: PNG Soft

5 Image Quality (see P.6-18) f: Standard, g: Fine

切替 選択

チェック

6-3

6

6 Remaining Memory Capacity (see P.6-6) or Maximum Recording Time (see P.6-13)

^

K: More than 100 still image files

^ Red background: 5 or less still image files

7 Mobile Light (see P.6-17)

8 Brightness (see P.6-18)

Y X U V W

Dark

B

Standard

A

Bright

9 Image Size (see P.6-18) or Mic Settings (see P.6-19)

A Burst Shot Picture Count r - s: Captured/Total q: Index Image is on Display.

B Burst Mode k: 4-Burst Mode, l: 9-Burst Mode, m: 25-Burst Mode

C Burst Speed k: Rapid, l: Slightly Fast, m: Normal, n: Moderate, o: Slow, p: Manual

Viewfinder & Key Assignments

View a summary of key assignments on the handset (see P.6-20 "Key Ops Guide").

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

1 Viewfinder

2 Brightness (see P.6-18)

C (brighter), D (darker)

3 Camera Startup

In Standby, press e for 1+ seconds to activate the mode used last (default: Sha-mail).

4 Toggle Preview (see P.6-16)

5 Cancel

6 High Speed Zoom (zoom out)

6-4

7 Image Size (see P.6-18)

In Sha-mail mode, press before image capture to toggle image size between 120x128 and 120x160.

8 Menu

9 Shutter

A End

B Zoom

B (zoom out), A (zoom in)

C Select Mode (see P.6-20)

While mobile camera is active, press keys to activate the corresponding modes.

1 Sha-mail (see below)

2 Wallpaper (see below)

3 Camera (see below)

4 Action Snap (see P.6-13)

In Standby, press

1 - 4 for 1+ seconds to activate the corresponding modes.

D High Speed Zoom (zoom in)

E Mobile Light (see P.6-17)

Press to turn on or off.

Still Images

Still Image Modes

6

Sha-mail

Attach to Mail/save as Wallpaper

Use Burst Shot & Picture Effects

Use

Capture images for Mail,

Wallpaper or Display Images

Wallpaper

Resize Images to Display

Split and attach images to Mail

Use

Set Wallpaper or capture higher quality images

Camera

Maximum Image Size:

W 640 x H 480 dots

Use

Edit or print images on external devices

6-5

6

Mode Comparison

Image Size

Image Quality

Zoom

Attach to Long Mail

Format

Memory Capacity

Sha-mail

W 120 x H 160 dots

(QQVGA)

W 120 x H 128 dots

-

2x/4x

Sha-mail size

JPEG/PNG

1,600 files

2

Wallpaper

W 240 x H 320 dots

(QVGA)

Camera

W 640 x H 480 dots

(VGA)

1

Standard/Fine

2x

Wallpaper size,

Sha-mail size or Split

JPEG

-

Thumbnails only

530 files

2

200 files

2

1

Thumbnails (W 120 x H 160 dots) are saved with the original images.

2

Values are approximate for images captured with default size and quality.

+

^ Saving video or V-Application reduces memory for images.

^ To check memory status, see P.6-22.

File Names

Sha-mail/Wallpaper

Camera

Image files are saved by date and time by default.

Example: 05-09-15_12-34 indicates the image was captured at 12:34,

September 15, 2005.

Default file name starts from VFSH0001 then VFSH0002, and so on

Rename Sha-mail and Wallpaper mode files (see P.9-23).

,

Camera mode images may not appear on handset if file names are changed on PCs, etc. (Camera mode files cannot be renamed on handset.)

6-6

Capturing Still Images

Index Menu

H

Camera

1

Select

1Sha-mail Mode, 2Wallpaper Mode or

3Camera Mode and press b

2

Frame image on Display

C

Viewfinder & Key Assignments: see P.6-4

C

Shooting Options: see P.6-16

J q

Q bX uU K n

Shoot Menu

3

Press

h or b

Shutter clicks and the captured image appears on Display.

C

To start over, press i A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

C

To edit image, see P.9-12 - 9-19.

C

To send image via Long Mail, press e P A

Perform from

Step 2 on IP.3-3

J q

Q bX uU K n E

4

Press

b to save image

Viewfinder returns for another shot.

Sha-mail

5

Press

g to exit

+

When Captured Image is Unsaved

Exit? appears.

^ Choose

1Yes and press b to end. Handset returns to Standby.

^ Choose

2No and press b to return to the captured image.

Save Menu

Before Saving

Follow these steps after capturing an image in Step 3 above.

Add to

Phone Book

Save images to Phone Book

Press

d I A

Select Add to Phone Book

A

Press

b A

Perform Step 4 on P.5-8

Save As Thumb

Save only thumbnails (W 120 x H 160 dots) to Data Folder

(Images)

Press

d I A

Select Save As Thumb

A

Press

b

Rotate Thumb

Rotate and save thumbnails (W 120 x H 160 dots) to Data

Folder (Images)

Press

d I A

Select Rotate Thumb

A

Press

b

^ To rotate further, press d z.

C

Press b to save rotated thumbnails.

6-7

6

6

Still Image Functions

Before Image Capture

Press d I to use the following functions:

In Camera mode, Special Features does not appear.

Toggle Preview

Mobile Light

Image Size

1

Image Quality

2

Self Timer

Set Burst Mode

3

Frame

3

Lens Effects

3

Soft Focus

1

Shutter Click

Save As

1

Save to

3

Switch Viewfinder size (see P.6-16)

Turn Mobile Light on or off (see P.6-17)

Select image size (see P.6-18)

Select Standard or Fine (see P.6-18)

Set Self Timer (see P.6-9)

Select mode and speed (see P.6-11)

Add frames (see P.6-10)

Capture images with special effects (see P.6-11)

Capture softer images for attachments (see P.6-18)

Change Shutter Click sound (see P.6-16)

Select file format (see P.6-19)

Select a folder (see P.6-20)

Auto Reset

All settings return to defaults when mobile camera shuts down (see P.6-20)

Anti-Flicker

Change the setting when Display flickers under fluorescent lights

(see P.6-17)

Delete

Key Ops Guide

Brightness

Delete files on handset (see P.6-22)

View a summary of key assignments (see P.6-20)

Adjust amount of light (see P.6-18)

Select Mode

Switch to other mobile camera modes (see P.6-20)

1

Available for Sha-mail mode.

2

Available for Wallpaper and Camera modes.

3

Available for Sha-mail and Wallpaper modes.

Before Saving

Press d I to use the following functions:

C Sha-mail & Wallpaper

Toggle Preview

Save As

1

Picture Effect

Image Quality

2

Save to

Attachment

Add to Phone Book

Switch Viewfinder size (see P.6-16)

Select file format (see P.6-19)

Edit images (see P.9-12 - 9-19)

Select Standard or Fine (see P.6-18)

Select a folder (see P.6-20)

Attach images to Long Mail (see P.6-22)

Save images to Phone Book (see P.6-7)

Delete

Delete files on handset (see P.6-22)

1

Available for Sha-mail mode.

2

Available for Wallpaper mode.

6-8

C Camera

1Toggle Preview

2Save As Thumb

3Rotate Thumb

4Image Quality

5Attach Thumb

6Delete

Switch Viewfinder size (see P.6-16)

Save only thumbnails (see P.6-7)

Rotate thumbnails by 90 degrees (see P.6-7)

Select Standard or Fine (see P.6-18)

Attach thumbnails (see P.6-24)

Delete files on handset (see P.6-22)

Self Timer

Release shutter automatically to capture images or record video.

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

!

Action Snap

!

!

^ Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 2 on P.6-7) or recording video

(after Step 1 on P.6-14).

^ Self Timer is Off by default.

1

Press

d I

^ For Camera and Action Snap modes, skip ahead to Step 3.

2

Select

4Special Features and press b

3

Select Self Timer and press

b

C

To change countdown time (default: 10 Seconds), select

2Set Time A

Press b A

Select time

A

Press b

4

Select

1Self Timer On and press b

Viewfinder returns ( h appears).

C

To cancel, select

1Self Timer Off A

Press b (Omit the next steps.)

5

Frame image on Display and press

b

Tone sounds and countdown starts.

^ After the set time, shutter is released and captured image appears or video recording starts.

^ To release shutter manually during countdown, press b. Image is captured or video recording starts and Self Timer is canceled.

C

To cancel Self Timer during countdown, press e 3.

B Viewfinder returns. (Self Timer setting remains.)

6

Saving Still Images

1 Press b

Self Timer is canceled and Viewfinder returns.

Saving Video

1 To stop, press b

2 To save, select

1Save and press b

Self Timer is canceled and Viewfinder returns.

6

6-9

6

7

Press

g to exit

, ^ Incoming calls and Alarm cancels image capture and Self Timer.

^ During countdown, the following settings are not available:

B Brightness, Mobile Light, Select Mode and Image Size

Adding Frames

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

#

Action Snap

!

#

^ In addition to Preset Frames, use transparent PNG files obtained via Web or Long Mail.

^ Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 2 on P.6-7).

1

Press

d I

2

Select

4Special Features and press b

3

Select

3Frame and press b

4

Preset Frames

1 Select

1Preset Frames and press b

2 Select a frame and press b

Selected image (frame) appears on Display.

C

To toggle between frames, press e W or d J.

3 Press b

Original Frames

1 Select

2Original Frames and press b

^ Some images may not be used as a frame.

2 Select a frame and press b

Selected image (frame) appears on Display.

C

To change image (frame), press e W A

Start over from Step 1

3 Press b

^ In Wallpaper mode, frames smaller than W 120 x H 160 dots are enlarged.

Canceling

1 Choose

3Off and press b

5

Capture an image

C

For details, see Step 3 and onward on P.6-7.

+

In Burst Mode, frame is added to each image.

6-10

Lens Effects

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

#

Action Snap

^ Lens Effects cancels Frame setting (see P.6-10), and vice versa.

^ Soft Focus (see P.6-18) is disabled even when set to On.

^ Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 2 on P.6-7).

1

Press

d I

2

Select

4Special Features and press b

3

Select

4Lens Effects and press b

4

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b (Omit the next steps.)

5

Select an effect and press

b

C

To toggle between effects, press e W or d J.

6

Press

b

7

Capture an image

C

For details, see Step 3 and onward on P.6-7.

Burst Mode

!

#

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

#

Action Snap

Use Burst Mode to capture images sequentially.

Press b for the first shot. Handset captures the rest automatically.

Mode

4-Burst Mode

9-Burst Mode

25-Burst Mode

Description

Capture four separate images

Capture nine separate images

Capture 25 separate images

Sha-mail

*

Available

Available

Available

!

#

Wallpaper

Available

Available

N/A

*Set file format to JPEG beforehand (see P.6-19).

^ In 4-Burst or 9-Burst Mode, select shutter interval from five levels, or select Manual to release shutter manually.

^ Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 2 on P.6-7).

1

Press

d I

6

6-11

6

2

Select

4Special Features and press b

3

Select

2Set Burst Mode and press b

C

To change shutter interval (default: Normal), select Burst Speed

A

Press b A

Select speed

A

Press b

4

Select

14-Burst Mode On, 29-Burst Mode On or 325-Burst Mode

On (Sha-mail mode) and press

b

C

To cancel, choose Off

A

Press b

5

Frame image on Display and press

h or b

The first frame is captured with subsequent frames captured at selected speed.

^ For manual shutter control (4-Burst and 9-Burst Modes), repeat Step 5 for each frame.

C

To cancel, press d C.

B Image capture cannot be canceled when Burst Speed is Rapid or in 25-Burst Shot Mode.

B Press b to save captured images.

C

To cancel during manual shutter control, press e 3 A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

(Captured images are deleted.)

6

Index Image appears

C

Use

F to toggle between frames and Index Image.

C

To save images individually, select a frame or Index Image with

F A

Press d I A

Select

2Save Screen A

Press b

C

To send images via Long Mail, select a frame of Index Image with

F A

Press d I A

Select Attach Screen

A

Press b

(Attachment options may appear depending on the image size.)

7

To save, press

b

Captured frames are saved with Index Image. Viewfinder returns with selected Burst Mode active.

8

Press

g to exit

,

In low light or while Mobile Light is on, Burst Speed may slow down.

J q

Q qbkluU K n G

Sha-mail Save Menu

4-Burst Mode

C Before Saving

Press d I to use the following functions:

Toggle Preview

Save Screen

Image Quality

*

Attach Screen

Delete

Switch Viewfinder size (see P.6-16)

Save a selected image (see above)

Select Standard or Fine (see P.6-18)

Attach images to Long Mail (see above)

Delete files on handset (see P.6-22)

*Available for Wallpaper mode.

6-12

Video

Video Mode

Action Snap

Playable only on V302SH

Record with sound and zoom

Self Timer available

Use

Capture short video clips of memorable occasions quickly and easily

+

For best results, record within 1.5 meters, in well-lit conditions.

Video recording and playback are based on MPEG-4.

This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the MPEG-4

Video Standard ("MPEG-4 Video") and/or (ii) decode MPEG-4 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a licensed video provider. No license is granted or implied for any other use.

Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA. See http://www.mpegla.com.

This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Systems Patent Portfolio License for encoding in compliance with the MPEG-4 Systems Standard, except that an additional license and payment of royalties are necessary for encoding in connection with (i) data stored or replicated in physical media which is paid for on a title by title basis and/or (ii) data which is paid for on a title by title basis and is transmitted to an end user for permanent storage and/or use. Such additional license may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC.

See http://www.mpegla.com for additional details.

C Action Snap Mode Features

Image Size

W 120 x H 88 dots

Recording Time

(per shot)

Image Quality

Up to 60 seconds with Standard quality or 40 seconds with Fine quality

Standard/Fine

Zoom

4x

Attach to Long Mail N/A

Format

MPEG (Files are saved by date and time by default.)

Memory Capacity

9 files

*

*When recorded for 60 seconds, with default Mic Settings and Image Quality.

+

^ Saving V-Applications, etc. reduces memory for video.

^ To check memory status, see P.6-22.

6

6-13

6

Recording Video

Index Menu

H

Camera

A

Action Snap Mode

1

Frame image on Display

C

Viewfinder & Key Assignments: see P.6-4

C

Shooting Options: see P.6-16

2

Press

h or b

Recording begins after a tone.

^ To record sound (Mic Settings is On), keep handset within approximately 50 cm from sound source.

J p

Q e fi U M n

REC Menu

+

When Memory is Already Full

Insufficient Memory Cannot Record appears and Viewfinder returns. Perform

Steps 1 - 5 in "When Memory is Full" on P.6-22 to delete files and try again.

3

To stop, press

h or b

Recording stops with a tone.

^ Recording automatically ends when limit is reached.

C

To play back, select

2Preview A

Press b

C

To start over, select

3Cancel A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

J

Q e fi U M

Action Snap Mode n

E

1Save

2Preview

3Cancel

4Save to

4

To save, select

1Save and press b

Video is saved and Viewfinder returns for another shot.

5

Press

g to exit

+

When Captured Image is Unsaved

Exit? appears.

^ Choose

1Yes and press b to end. Handset returns to Standby.

^ Choose

2No and press b to return to the window after recording.

Select

Video Recording Operations

Before Recording

Press d I to use the following functions:

1Toggle Preview

2Mobile Light

3Image Quality

4Self Timer

5Mic Settings

1Save to

2Auto Reset

Switch Viewfinder size (see P.6-16)

Turn Mobile Light on or off (see P.6-17)

Select Standard or Fine (see P.6-18)

Set Self Timer (see P.6-9)

Activate to record sound (see P.6-19)

Select a file (see P.6-20)

All settings return to defaults when mobile camera shuts down (see

P.6-20)

3Anti-Flicker

7Delete

8Key Ops Guide

9Brightness

MSelect Mode

Change the setting when Display flickers under fluorescent lights (see

P.6-17)

Delete files on handset (see P.6-22)

View a summary of key assignments (see P.6-20)

Adjust amount of light (see P.6-18)

Switch to other mobile camera modes (see P.6-20)

Before Saving

The following menu items appear after recording:

1Save

2Preview

3Cancel

4Save to

Save video (see P.6-14)

Play video (see P.6-14)

Start over (see P.6-14)

Select a folder (see P.6-20)

6

6-14 6-15

6

Shooting Options

^ Available options vary by mode.

^ Follow these steps before capturing image (after Step 2 on P.6-7) or recording video

(after Step 1 on P.6-14). When the setting is complete, Viewfinder returns. Perform from

Step 3 on P.6-7 or Step 2 on P.6-14 to proceed.

Toggle Preview

Switch Viewfinder size or hide indicators

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

!

Action Snap

!

!

KSha-mail: 100%, Action Snap: 200%

Press

d I A

Select

1Toggle Preview A

Press

b

^ Setting returns to default when the mode is changed or mobile camera shuts down.

Shutter Click

Change Shutter Click sound

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

!

Action Snap

!

#

KPattern 1

Press

d I A

Select Option Settings

A

Press

b A

Select

1Shutter Click A

Press

b A

Select a pattern

A

Press

b

^ Shutter Click setting applies to all Sha-mail, Wallpaper and Camera modes.

C

To check sound, select a pattern and press e L.

B Press e C to stop.

,

^ Volume is fixed.

^ Shutter Click sound for Burst Mode is unique and fixed.

Turn Mobile Light on or off

Mobile Light

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

!

Action Snap

!

!

KOff

Press

d I A

Select

2Mobile Light A

Press

b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

C

To change lighting time (default: 1 Minute), press d I A

Select

2Mobile Light

A

Press b A

Select Illumination Time

A

Press b A

Select time

A

Press b

B To return to Viewfinder, select MBack

A

Press b A

Press e W

^ Select shorter Lighting Time to lengthen Battery Time.

^ Illumination Time setting applies to all mobile camera modes.

,

Do not use Mobile Light near people's faces or look into the light yourself.

Anti-Flicker

Change the setting when stripes appear on Display under fluorescent lights

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

!

Action Snap

!

!

KMode 2 (60Hz)

Press

d I A

Select Option Settings

A

Press

b A

Select

Anti-Flicker

A

Press

b A

Select

1Mode 1 (50Hz) or 2Mode 2 (60Hz)

A

Press

b

^ Anti-Flicker setting applies to all mobile camera modes.

+

In extremely dark or bright places, stripes may not disappear completely.

6

6-16 6-17

6

Image Settings

^ Available settings vary by mode.

^ Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 2 on P.6-7) or recording video

(after Step 1 on P.6-14). When the setting is complete, Viewfinder returns. Perform from

Step 3 on P.6-7 or Step 2 on P.6-14 to proceed.

Brightness

Adjust light sensitivity for still images and video

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

!

Action Snap

!

!

K0 (standard)

Press

d I A

Select Brightness

A

Press

b A

Select from five levels

A

Press

b

^ Setting returns to default when mobile camera shuts down.

Soft Focus

Capture softer Sha-mail mode images for attachments

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

#

Action Snap

#

#

KOff

Press

d I A

Select

4Special Features A

Press

b A

Select

5Soft Focus A

Press

b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

C

To return to Viewfinder, press e W A

Press e W

Image Size

Select image size

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

#

Action Snap

#

#

K120x160

Press

d I A

Select

3Image Size A

Press

b A

Select a size

A

Press

b

Image Quality

Select image or video quality

Sha-mail

Camera

#

Wallpaper

!

Action Snap

!

!

KStandard

Press

d I A

Select

3Image Quality A

Press

b A

Select quality

A

Press

b

+

Select Fine for better quality. Saving higher quality images requires more space in memory and shortens recording time.

6-18

Select file format

Save As

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

#

Action Snap

#

#

KJPEG High

Before Image Capture

Press

d I A

Select

5Option Settings A

Press

b A

Select

2Save As A

Press

b A

Select format

A

Press

b

Before Saving

Press

d I A

Select

2Save As A

Press

b A

Select format

A

Press

b

^ PNG Soft images are softened by error diffusion.

^ To change file format after saving to Data Folder, see P.9-19 "Change File Format."

,

Burst Mode (see P.6-11) is not available when format is PNG. Some PNG images may not be saved (a message appears after image capture). Convert to

JPEG and try again.

6

Record sound together with video

Mic Settings

Sha-mail

Camera

#

Wallpaper

#

Action Snap

#

!

KOn

Press

d I A

Select

5Mic Settings A

Press

b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

,

Recording sound with video consumes more memory, shortening recording time.

6-19

6

Additional Settings

^ Available settings vary by mode.

^ Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 2 on P.6-7) or recording video

(after Step 1 on P.6-14). When the setting is complete, Viewfinder returns. Perform from

Step 3 on P.6-7 or Step 2 on P.6-14 to proceed.

Select Mode

Save to

Switch to other mobile camera modes

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

!

Action Snap

!

!

Press

d I A

Select Select Mode

A

Press

b A

Select a mode

A

Press

b

^ Mode used last activates whenever mobile camera is activated with Camera Startup key.

Select a folder to save image/video files

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

#

Action Snap

!

!

KImage Folder */Action Snap Folder *

Press

d I A

Save to

A

Select Option Settings

Press

b A

Select a folder

A

A

Press

b A

Press

b

Select

Auto Reset

All settings return to defaults when mobile camera shuts down

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

!

Action Snap

!

!

KOff (Settings are retained.)

Press

d I A

Select Option Settings

A

Press

b A

Select

Auto Reset

A

Press

b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

C

To return to Viewfinder, press e W A

Press e W

^ Auto Reset setting applies to all mobile camera modes.

,

Setting does not affect Anti-Flicker and Shutter Click.

Key Ops Guide

View a summary of key assignments

Sha-mail

Camera

!

Wallpaper

!

Action Snap

Press

d I A

Select Key Ops Guide

A

Press

b

^ Press

D to scroll down.

C

To return to Viewfinder, press e W A

Press e W

6-20

!

!

Opening Images & Playing Video

Opening Still Images

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Camera

1

Select Sha-mail/Wallpaper or Camera Images and press

b

C

For Camera Images, select a folder

A

Press b

2

Select a file and press

b

Image appears.

C

To open other files, press i.

+

To view available functions, open a file and press d I. For more, see P.9-10 - 9-22.

J

Q n G

Data Folder s*5-*9-21_12- 3.7KB

Sha-mail Show Menu

Sha-mail/Wall paper

6

Camera Mode Images

C Images are reduced to thumbnail size (Show Thumbnails) to fit Display. To restore the original size, follow these steps.

Press

d I A

Select

5Original Size A

Press

b

^ Use

G to scroll up, down, left and right.

^ Press b to rotate images 90 degrees clockwise.

Opening Burst Shot Files

C Press b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

1Data Folder A

Press

b A

Select Burst Shots

A

Press

b A

Select a file

A

Press

b

C To toggle between frames and Index Image faster, press d I A

Select

Fast Forward

A

Press

b

Playing Video

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Action Snap Folder

1

Select a file and press

b

Video plays and stops automatically at the end.

C

To open other files, press e W.

C

Use

C (up) or D (down) to adjust volume.

C

To replay, press d L.

J

Q n

Action Snap Folder

E

91KB

Action Snap

G*4-*9-21_22-*8

Play Menu

6-21

6

Memory Status

Index Menu

H

My Files

1

Select

8Memory Status and press b

Memory usage status appears as a percentage (%).

When Memory is Full

When saving images, memory shortage warning may appear. To save images, follow these steps to delete files.

1

Press

d I

2

Select Delete and press

b

3

Select a folder and press

b b

4

Select a file and press

5

Choose

1Yes and press b

Sending Still Images

Sha-mail Mode Images

Capture and send images as Long Mail attachments.

^ To attach Burst Shot images, use

F to select a frame or Index Image.

^ To attach images in Data Folder, see P.9-7.

1

Capture an image in Sha-mail mode

C

For details, see Steps 1 - 3 on P.6-7.

2

Before saving, press

e P

Image is saved to Data Folder and Long Mail Composition window opens with image attached.

To send images without saving to Data Folder, see IP.6-3

"Save & Send Image."

+

When 2-Touch Mail List Appears

^ Select a recipient and press b. Long Mail

Composition window opens (see IP.3-3).

^ 2-Touch Mail: see IP.3-12

When Target Recipient is not in 2-Touch Mail List

Select

0<Mail Address> and press b.

J

Q n

E

Long Mail

Y[No Address ]

Z[No Subject ]

G[No Body Text ]

H[*5-*9-21_22-*8]

Confirm Delivery

K

Save Auto Send K

Save Select Send

6-22

3

Complete other fields and send Long Mail (see Step 2 and onward

on IP.3-3)

,

When attaching images before saving, character limit for message subject is 46 single-byte alphanumerics (20 double-byte characters or 44 single-byte katakana).

Once attached, files cannot be added, deleted or changed.

+

Make sure that the recipient's handset is able to receive attachments. For information about Mail service and compatibility with other handset models, contact Vodafone

Customer Center, General Information (see P.14-20).

Wallpaper Mode Images

Attaching as Wallpaper or Sha-mail

1

Capture an image in Wallpaper mode

C

For details, see Steps 1 - 3 on P.6-7.

2

Before saving, press

e P

3

Select

1Attach as Sha-mail or 2Wallpaper Size and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder and Long Mail Composition window opens with image attached.

^ To send images without saving to Data Folder, see IP.6-3 "Save & Send Image."

C

When 2-Touch Mail List Appears: see P.6-22

4

Complete other fields and send Long Mail (see Step 2 and onward

on IP.3-3)

Split Images

Split Mail transmission charges are equivalent to sending four Long Mail messages.

1

Capture an image in Wallpaper mode

C

For details, see Steps 1- 3 on P.6-7.

2

Before saving, press

e P

3

Select

3Attach Split Mail and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder and Select Address window opens (image attached).

^ To send images without saving to Data Folder, see IP.6-3 "Save & Send Image."

C

When 2-Touch Mail List Appears: see P.6-22

6

6-23

6

4

Select or enter a recipient (see Steps 3 - 4 on IP.3-4)

Four messages with split images are saved to Outbox.

^ For each Split Mail message, subject is automatically entered as: Upper Left,

Upper Right, Lower Left and Lower Right.

5

Sending Messages from Outbox

1 Choose

1Yes and press b

^ Outbox opens. See IP.4-19 to send Long Mail.

Saving Messages to Outbox

1 Choose

2No and press b

,

When attaching images before saving, character limit for message subject is 46 single-byte alphanumerics (20 double-byte characters or 44 single-byte katakana).

Once attached, files cannot be added, deleted or changed.

+

Make sure that the recipient's handset is able to receive attachments.

For information about Mail service and compatibility with other handset models, contact Vodafone Customer Center, General Information (see P.14-20).

Camera Mode Thumbnails

1

Capture an image in Camera mode

C

For details, see Steps 1 - 3 on P.6-7.

2

Before saving, press

d I

3

Select

5Attach Thumb and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder and Long Mail Composition window opens with image attached.

^ To send images without saving to Camera folder, see IP.6-3 "Save & Send Image."

C

When 2-Touch Mail List Appears: see P.6-22

4

Complete other fields and send Long Mail (see Step 2 and onward

on IP.3-3)

,

When attaching images before saving, character limit for message subject is 46 single-byte alphanumerics (20 double-byte characters or 44 single-byte katakana).

Once attached, files cannot be added, deleted or changed.

+

Make sure that the recipient's handset is able to receive attachments.

For information about Mail service and compatibility with other handset models, contact Vodafone Customer Center, General Information (see P.14-20).

Postcard & Calendar

Add text or calendar mask to Camera mode images to create original Postcards or

Calendars.

^ Created Postcard/Calendar images are saved to Camera folder as new files.

^ Postcard images are compressed when created and the quality may change.

Postcard

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Camera

A

Select a folder

1

Select an image and press

b

^ Alternatively, select an image and press d I. Skip ahead to Step 3.

C

Press b to rotate images 90 degrees clockwise.

2

Press

d I

3

Select Postcard and press

b

4

Select

1Text and press b

5

Enter text and press

b

^ Enter up to 18 single-byte characters per line (up to five lines are available).

^ Animated Pictographs stay still in Postcard images.

J

Q

Postcard

1Text

2Calendar n

E

Text Outside Frame

Will Not Appear

Select

6

Select a color combination and press

b

C

To not to outline text with the latter color, follow these steps first: Select

0Border A

Press b A

Choose

2Off A

Press b

7

Select a size and press

b

A rectangle appears indicating the location of text.

8

Use

G to move the rectangle to target location

and press

b

Text appears for confirmation.

9

Press

b

Back OK

+

Postcard images are saved with thumbnails (see P.6-6). Portions of thumbnails may turn black depending on the size of original images.

6

6-24 6-25

6

Calendar

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Camera

A

Select a folder

1

Select an image and press

b

^ Alternatively, select an image and press d I. Skip ahead to Step 3.

C

Press b to rotate images 90 degrees clockwise.

2

Press

d I

3

Select Postcard and press

b

4

Select

2Calendar and press b

5

Select

1Month (Small) or 22-Month and press b

Current month appears.

6

Enter month and press

b

A rectangle appears indicating the location of calendar mask.

7

Use

G to move the rectangle to target location

and press

b

Calendar mask appears for confirmation.

8

Press

b

+

^ Change color for days of the week in Set Color (see P.7-3).

^ Calendar images are saved with thumbnails (see P.6-6). Portions of thumbnails may turn black depending on the size of original images.

6-26

Display

7-1

7

F40

Wallpaper

Use Wallpaper to set an image or animation to appear in Standby. Choose from preset images, images captured with mobile camera, and images or animation obtained via Web or Long Mail.

^ Some images may not be used.

^ Wallpaper is Off by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Display Settings

A

Wallpaper

1

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel Wallpaper, choose

2Off A

Press b (Omit the next step.)

2

Preset Images

1 Select from

1Squared Away to 6Disney2 and press b

2 Press b

Original Images

1 Select

7Original and press b

C

If Original image is already saved, press d X to use other image.

B Existing image is replaced. (Images not saved to Data Folder are deleted.)

2 Select an image from Data Folder (see P.9-6) and press b

C

To change image size, press d I A

Select

1Enlarge/Reduce A

Press b

A

Use

E to enlarge or reduce

C

To create split-screen Wallpaper, press d I A

Select

2Split Picture A

Press b A

Select from

2 to 4 A

Press b A

Select an image from Data Folder

A

Press b twice A

Press e j

3 Press b

Show Indicators

C To hide indicators in Standby while Wallpaper is set, follow these steps.

Press

b A

Select Functions

A

Press

b A

Select

4

Settings 2

A

Press

b

A

Select

0 A

Press

b A

Select

5Show Indicators A

Press

b A

Choose

2Off A

Press

b

C While indicators are hidden, press g. Indicators appear for five seconds.

^ Regardless of this setting, indicators always appear in windows other than Standby and when Wallpaper is not set.

7-2

+

^ Even if Wallpaper is not set, it is automatically activated when an image from

Vodafone live! or Data Folder is saved as Wallpaper.

^ When a V-Application is set for Standby, Wallpaper may not appear.

^ Using Wallpaper shortens Battery Time. Using animation or multiple images consumes more handset power.

^ Wallpaper does not appear when Calendar Large Stamp or Schedule & Stamps appears in Standby (see below).

^ Animation may stop after 15 seconds of inactivity.

^ During animation, Calendar (Month (Large) - 6-Month) does not appear (see below); Small Clock appears even if Large Clock is set.

Clock & Calendar

Choose a Clock type and layout or use Calendar for Standby.

Clock Display

Clock Display is Large by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Clock Display

1

Select

1Large or 2Small and press b

C

To hide Clock, choose

4Off A

Press b

+

When

4Off is set, Calendar (see below) is also hidden.

Calendar

Select from seven Calendars: Month (Large Stamp, Schedule & Stamps, Large and

Small), 2-Month, 4-Month and 6-Month.

^ Select Large Stamp to show stamps on Large Calendar. Select Schedule & Stamps to show Schedule as well as stamps.

^ For Month (Small) and 2-Month, select a display position.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Clock Display

1

Select

3Calendar and press b

C

To hide Calendar, choose

4Off A

Press b

B When

4Off is set, Calendar (see above) is also hidden.

2

Select from

1Large Stamp to 76-Month and press b

C

For

4Month (Small) and 52-Month, select a display position A

Press b

C

To customize colors of the days of the week, select

8Set Color A

Press b A

Select a day

A

Press b A

Select a color

A

Press b

F53

7

7-3

Calendar Contents

J n

Current Date

^ Highlighted

Scheduled Date

^ Underlined, except when stamp appears (see P.12-13 for more about Schedule)

Stamp (see P.12-13 )

7

Schedule & Stamps

^ Press

C once to open the previous month, and press D once to open the next month.

Use

E to toggle between months. (In 2-Month Calendar, display changes by one month at a time. In 4-Month and 6-Month Calendars, display changes by two months at a time.)

Press i to return to the current month.

^ Press g to hide Calendar temporarily. While Calendar is hidden, press C to open Key

Long Press Guide or

D to open Call History. (Press g again to show Calendar.)

+

^ Calendar appears on Wallpaper. However, Wallpaper does not appear when

Calendar is Large Stamp or Schedule & Stamps.

^ Calendar does not appear while a Wallpaper animation is active.

^ When a V-Application is set for Standby, Calendar may not appear.

Display Images

Select images to use them for Power On/Off, incoming calls and Alarm windows. Use images captured with mobile camera or received via Web or Long Mail.

Display Images is Off for all items by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Display Settings

A

Display Images

1

Select an item and press

b

2

Select

1Fixed Graphic, 2Disney or 3Original and press b

^ For

1Fixed Graphic or 2Disney, skip ahead to Step 5.

C

To cancel Display Images, choose

4Off and press b. (Omit the next steps.)

C

When Original image is already saved, press d X to use other image.

B Existing Original image is replaced. (Images not saved to Data Folder are deleted.)

3

Select an image from Data Folder (see P.9-6) and press

b

Image appears with a rectangle indicating display size (see below).

^ Unavailable images do not appear.

Power On

Power Off

W 120 x H 130 dots

W 120 x H 130 dots

Incoming Calls

Alarm

^ Display Images appear 200% larger.

C

To toggle display size between 100% and 200%, press k.

W 120 x H 38 dots

W 120 x H 51 dots

4

Use

G to specify display area

^ Display area may not be specified depending on image size.

C

Press i to select another image A

Start over from Step 3

5

Press

b

,

Picture Call/Mail setting takes priority over Display Images when receiving calls (with caller ID) from callers with Picture Call/Mail set while

3Incoming Call is 3Original.

F40

7

7-4 7-5

7

F40

F41

Fonts

Change the size and weight of handset fonts.

Font weight is Font 3, and font size is standard (Large Font: Off) by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Display Settings

1

Font Weight

1 Select

3Fonts and press b

2 Select from

1Font 1 to 4Font 4 and press b

Font Size

1 Select

4Large Font and press b

2 Choose

1On or 2Off and press b

^ When Large Font is active, major menu items (Functions, Settings, Briefcase, etc.) always appear large. However, other items may appear in standard size.

+

V302SH employs LC Fonts for easing viewing of handset menus and messages. LC Font/LC FONT, as well as the LC logo are all registered trademarks of SHARP Corporation.

Display Patterns

Item

Battery Level

Select from five icons

Signal Strength

Select from five icons

Title Bars

Menu Design

Guide Keys

Indicator Bar

Description

Select from five color schemes

Select from five number key patterns for menu items

Select from five Soft Key patterns

Select from five background patterns for upper part of

Display on which indicators appear

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Display Patterns

1

Select an item and press

b

2

Select an option and press

b

^ For other settings, repeat Steps 1 - 2.

,

Cancel Disney Style to customize Display Patterns.

Default

Icon 1

Icon 1

Color 1

Menu Design 1

Pattern 1

Background 1

7-6

Light Settings

Activate or deactivate Backlight and Keypad Light. Adjust Active Time and Brightness.

^ Specify Active Hours to activate lights for a set period of time each day. (Set Clock first.

See P.1-20.)

^ Backlight and Keypad Light are On (15 seconds) by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Light Settings

1

Backlight

1 Select

1Backlight and press b

Keypad Light

1 Select

2Keypad Light and press b

2

Changing Active Time

1 Choose

1On and press b

2 Enter Active Time (01 - 99 seconds) and press b

Active Time is set.

Backlight Off

1 Choose

2Off and press b

^ Backlight remains on while using mobile camera even if Off is set.

Specifying Active Hours and Active Time

1 Select

3Active Hours and press b

2 Enter Start Time and End Time, then press b

Backlight and Keypad Light are available between Start Time and End Time.

3 Enter Active Time (01 - 99 seconds) and press b

+

^ Active Hours is ignored if Clock is not set.

^ Shorten Active Time to lengthen Battery Time.

F34

7

Brightness

Select Display Brightness from four levels

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Light Settings

A

Brightness

Press

C (Brighter) or D (Darker) A

Press

b

KLevel 4

In-Car Backlight

Set Backlight/Keypad Light to illuminate while using In-Car

Charger

KOff

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Light Settings

A

In-Car Backlight

Choose

1On A

Press

b

C

To cancel In-Car Backlight, choose

2Off A

Press b

7-7

7

F36

Sub Display Settings

Sub Display On/Off

Activate or deactivate Sub Display

KOn

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Sub Display

A

Sub Display On/Off

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

Backlight Settings

Specify Active Hours and Active Time

CAvailable when Sub Display is active.

KActive Time: 15 seconds, Active Hours: 17:00 - 6:00

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Sub Display

A

Backlight Settings

Active Time

Choose

1On A

Press

b A

Press

b

Enter Active Time (01 - 99 seconds)

A

C

To disable Backlight, choose

2Off A

Press b

Active Hours

Select

3Active Hours A

Press

b A

Enter Start Time and End Time

A

Press

b A

Enter Active Time (01 - 99 seconds)

A

Press

b

^ Backlight is available between Start Time and End Time.

Adjust Contrast

Adjust Sub Display contrast from nine levels

CAvailable when Sub Display is active.

KContrast 5

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Sub Display

A

Adjust Contrast

Press

C (Darker) or D (Lighter) A

Press

b

Recipient Display

Show or hide caller's number or name on Sub Display

CAvailable when Sub Display is active.

KOn

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Sub Display

A

Recipient Display

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

7-8

Other Display Settings

Language

Switch handset user interface between Japanese and English

F35

F40

F48

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

言語選択

Select

1日本語 2English A

Press

b

Power On

Message

Create a short text message to appear on Display each time handset power is activated

KOff

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Display Settings

A

Power On Message

Choose

1On A

Press

b A

Enter text

A

Press

b

^ Enter up to 16 single-byte characters.

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b

Vodafone live!

Animation

Show or hide animations when sending/receiving mail or receiving Web/Station information. Set for each occasion separately.

KOn (All)

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Animation

A

Vodafone live!

Select from

1Send Mail to 8Web Activated A

Press

b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

Mail Background

Set animation to appear in backgrounds of received messages containing compatible Pictographs

KOn

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Animation

A

Mail Background

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

7

7-9

7

F48

F45

F47

Screen Animation

Animation appears on Display when left open for a specified period of inactivity

KOff

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Animation

A

Screen Animation

Preset Animation

Choose

1On A

Press

b A

Select

1Animation A

Press

b A

Select

1Animation 1 or 2Animation 2 A

Press

b twice

Original Animation

Choose

1On A

Press

b A

Select

1Animation A

Press

b A

Select

3Original A

Press

b A

Select an image

A

Press

b twice

Period of Inactivity

Choose

1On A

Press

b A

Select

2Start Time A

Press

b A

Select a period

A

Press

b

Canceling

Choose

2Off A

Press

b

^ Only E-Animation files (.nva) are available.

^ While animation appears, press any key to stop it.

^ Animation may not appear depending on handset status (in Standby, mobile camera active, etc.).

+

Using Screen Animation shortens Battery Time.

Disney Style

Disney themed graphics appear during calls, when sending/ receiving messages, in Index Menu, etc.

KOff

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Disney Style

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

^ Disney themed indicators also appear for Signal Strength and Battery Strength.

Incoming Light

Set Small Light to flash for incoming calls/mail, Alarm, etc.

KOff (All)

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Incoming Light

Select an item

A

Press

b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

^ Small Light flashes while Missed Call notice or Delivery Notice appears.

^ In Off-Line Mode, Small Light always flashes while handset is closed or while Display shuts down for Panel Saving.

7-10

Sounds & Related Functions

8-1

8

F10

Call Functions

Use Call Functions menu items to adjust Ring Tones, Vibration, Mobile or Small Light, and Ring Time settings. See below for the default settings.

Ring Tone

Ring Tone Level

Vibration

Incoming

Call

Pattern 1

Level 5

Incoming

Mail

Mail

Level 5

Incoming

Web

Web

Level 5

New

Station Info

Off

Station

Level 5

Received

Complete

Pattern 5

Level 1

Confirm

Delivery

Report

Level 5

Vibration Pattern

Vibration 1 Vibration 2 Vibration 3 Vibration 4 Vibration 5 Vibration 2

LED Indicator

Mobile

Light

Small Light

Mobile/Small

Light Blink

Patterns

Ring Time

N/A

Pattern 1

10 Seconds 10 Seconds 10 Seconds 1 Second 10 Seconds

^ Received Complete settings apply after you:

B Retrieve complete messages or acquire Unretrieved List

B Delete Server Mail

B Manually update Station Main List or Location Info

^ Confirm Delivery settings apply to Delivery Reports.

^ Settings remain even after handset power is turned off.

^ Manner Settings (see P.3-4) take priority over.

+

V-Application set for Standby that also responds to incoming communications may take priority over Ring Tone and Vibration Pattern set in Call Functions.

Ring Tone Level

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Call Functions

A

Select an item

A

Ring Tone Level

1

Use

E to adjust level

^ Level 5 is maximum. When Rising Tone is set, volume increases in the order of

Level 1 - Level 5 every three seconds.

C

To check volume, press e !.

B Press e C to stop.

2

Press

b

When Ring Tone Level is Rising Tone for Incoming Call, g appears in Standby, and h appears for Silent.

8-2

Ring Tone

Select from preset patterns, preset melodies, Original Ring Tones, Voice files, etc.

Check preset melodies on handset.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Call Functions

A

Select an item

A

Ring Tone

1

Preset Patterns/Melodies

1 Select

1Preset Tones or 2Preset Melodies and press b

License: T-0570387

Melodies in Data Folder

1 Select

3Data Folder and press b

Voice Files

1 Select

4Voice Folder and press b

,

^ Voice files cannot be used for Received Complete.

^ Files cannot be selected if the file name exceeds 24 single-byte characters.

^ Some files may not be used.

2

Select a tone or melody

C

To play tones or melodies, press e !.

B Press e C to stop.

B When Manner Mode is active or Ring Tone Level is Rising Tone or Silent, sounds play at Level 1.

+

For some preset melodies, handset vibrates to the melody when Vibration (see below) is set to SMAF Link.

3

Press

b

+

If source file in Data Folder or Voice Folder is deleted, Ring Tone returns to default.

Handset Vibration

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Call Functions

A

Select an item

A

Vibration

1

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b

C

To link to SMAF files, select

3SMAF Link A

Press b

8

8-3

8

+

Select

3SMAF Link to allow compatible SMAF files to control Vibration.

,

^ Disable vibration when charging.

^ Manner Settings (see P.3-4) take priority over.

Vibration Pattern

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Call Functions

A

Select an item

A

Vibration Pattern

1

Select a pattern and press

b

Vibration Pattern

Vibration 1

Operation (repeats)

Vibrate (0.75 Sec) % Stop (0.75 Sec)

Vibration 2

Vibration 3

Vibration 4

Vibration 5

Vibrate (0.25 Sec) % Stop (0.25 Sec) % Vibrate (0.25 Sec) % Stop (1 Sec)

Vibrate (1 Sec) % Stop (2 Sec)

Vibrate (1 Sec) % Stop (1 Sec) % Vibrate (1 Sec) % Stop (2 Sec)

Vibrate (0.5 Sec) % Stop (0.5 Sec) % Vibrate (0.5 Sec) % Stop (1 Sec)

Mobile/Small Light

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Call Functions

A

Select an item

A

LED Indicator

1

Select

1Mobile Light or 2Small Light and press b

C

To cancel, choose

3Off A

Press b (Omit the next steps.)

2

Select a blink pattern

C

To check patterns, press e x.

B Press e C to stop.

Pattern

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Pattern 4

Pattern 5

SMAF Link

Operation (repeats)

On (0.75 Sec) % Off (0.75 Sec)

On (0.25 Sec) % Off (0.25 Sec) % On (0.25 Sec) % Off (1 Sec)

On (1 Sec) % Off (2 Sec)

On (1 Sec) % Off (1 Sec) % On (1 Sec) % Off (2 Sec)

On (0.5 Sec) % Off (0.5 Sec) % On (0.5 Sec) % Off (1 Sec)

Flashes according to SMAF files (Small Light only)

+

Select

6SMAF Link to allow compatible SMAF files to control Small Light.

3

Press

b

8-4

Ring Time

Ring Time settings are not available for Incoming Call.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Call Functions

1

Select an item other than

1Incoming Call and press b

2

Select

6Ring Time and press b

3

Enter time (01 - 99 seconds) and press

b

Sound Effects

Adjust sounds and volume for handset operations.

Keypad

Sound

On

Error Tone Power On Power Off

Setting

Sound

Push Tones Error Tone Opening 1

Volume

Level Medium Level Medium Level 5

Time

On On On

Ending 1

Level 5

0.05 Seconds 0.5 Seconds 3 Seconds 3 Seconds

Sound

Volume

Level 5

Set LED to Sound

Small Light

^ Power On is when turning on handset, and Power Off is when turning off.

^ Sound Volume applies to sounds in Data Folder, mail attachments, Web, etc.

^ Set LED to Sound is for flashing Mobile or Small Light with sounds.

^ Settings remain even after handset power is turned off.

Sounds

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Sound Effects

1

Select

1Keypad Sound, 2Error Tone, 3Power On or 4Power Off

and press

b

2

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b (Omit the next steps.)

3

Select

1Sound and press b

F13

8

8-5

8

4

Preset Patterns/Melodies

1 Select

1Preset Tones or 2Preset Melodies and press b

Melodies in Data Folder

1 Select

3Data Folder and press b

,

^ Files cannot be selected if the file name exceeds 24 single-byte characters.

^ Some files may not be used.

Push Tones (Keypad Sound)

1 Select

4Push Tones and press b

Pattern is set (omit the next steps).

5

Select a tone or melody

C

To play tones or melodies, press e !.

B Press e C to stop.

6

Press

b

C

To adjust Sound Effect volume, select

2Volume A

Press b A

Use

E to adjust level

A

Press b

C

To set Sound Effect duration, select

3Time A

Press b A

Select time (Keypad Sound/

Error Tone) or enter time (Power On/Power Off)

A

Press b

+

If source file in Data Folder is deleted, sound pattern returns to default.

Basic Sound Settings

Sound Volume/Set

LED to Sound

Set to flash Mobile or Small Light with sound

KSee P.8-5.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Sound Effects

Sound Volume

Select

5Sound Volume A

Press

b A

Use

E to adjust level A

Press

b

Light Settings

Select

6Set LED to Sound A

Press

b A

Select

1Mobile Light,

2Small Light or 3Off A

Press

b to complete

+

Blink pattern for Set LED to Sound is fixed to Pattern 1 for Mobile Light and

SMAF Link for Small Light.

8-6

Original Voice

^ Record sound for up to 30 seconds and use as Ring Tones.

^ Sound is saved to Voice Folder 0.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Original Tones

A

Original Voice

1

Enter title and press

b

^ Enter up to 24 single-byte characters. Title is mandatory.

^ Original Voice files are saved by title by default.

2

Press

b

Recording starts.

3

Press

b to stop

^ When maximum recording time is reached, recording stops automatically and sound is saved.

F17

Incoming Calls while Recording

C Recording stops and recorded material is lost.

Playing Recorded Sounds

C After Step 3, select a Voice file

A

Press

b

B Press e C to stop.

Voice Ring Tone

C To use as Ring Tone, follow these steps after Step 3.

Select a Voice file

A

Press

d I A

Select Incoming Tone

A

Press

b

A

Select an item

A

Press

b

^ Voice files cannot be used for Received Complete.

8

8-7

8

Original Ring Tones

Basics

Create melodies to use as Ring Tones, or to send via Long Mail.

^ Use up to 95 sounds x 32 chords, 190 sounds x 16 chords, or 380 sounds x 8 chords.

^ Original Ring Tones are saved to Data Folder (Melodies). See P.9-3.

,

^ Original Ring Tones are saved in SJM format. To send Original Ring Tones to handsets other than Vodafone live! packet-enabled Sharp handsets, convert them to Melody files or SMAF files (see IP.3-7).

^ Converted files may not play on recipient handsets.

Window Description

Melody Chord

^W: Chord 1, X: Chord 2

Y: Chord 3... Z: Chord 32

Tone

Loudness

J

Q

WTone Level?

Piano n k [**5/**4]

C Ad B G

X_ Y X X

#

Sound at Cursor

Entered Notes/Rests

Cursor

^Move to enter/edit sounds

Pitch

^(Low) f%d%no symbol%c%e(High)

^#: Semitone

^U: Rest

WX

YPlay

Save Menu

Duration

^Varies by note or rest

^

3

: Triplet, _: Slur

Sound

^Indicated by pitch and note

Pitch Range

Use the following scales (range: approximately 4 octaves including semitones).

C

#

D

#

F

#

G

#

A

#

Af Bf Cd Dd Ed Fd Gd Ad Bd C D E F G A B Cc Dc Ec Fc Gc Ac Bc Ce De Ee Fe

8-8

Notes & Rests

Note Rest Duration

Whole note/rest

Sixteenth note/rest

Eighth note/rest

Dotted eighth note/rest

Quarter note/rest

Dotted quarter note/rest

Half note/rest

Note Rest Duration

Dotted half note/rest

Whole note triplet/rest

Sixteenth triplet/rest

Eighth triplet/rest

Quarter triplet/rest

Half note triplet/rest

Tones

Handset contains 128 basic tones and 61 extra tones preset.

^ Create tones and save as Instrument Effects (up to 8 types to 3 locations).

^ Adjust octave of tones (see P.8-21).

Procedure

1

Enter title

^ The entered title will appear when selecting Ring Tone.

^ Enter up to 24 single-byte characters. Title is mandatory.

2

Select tempo

^ X: Number of quarter notes played per minute

1Fast

2Standard

X = 150

X = 125

3Slightly Slow X = 107

4Slow

X = 94

3

Select number of chords

^ Type: 8 Phonetic Chord, 16 Phonetic Chord and 32 Phonetic Chord

4

Enter sounds one by one for melody chord 1 (W)

^ Arrange pitch, octave or duration of each sound, and use semitones and triplets

(see P.8-10 - 8-11).

^ Press e L to play all entered sounds. When you press k, sounds are played up to cursor. Adjust playback volume in Sound Volume (see P.8-6).

^ In Manner Mode, sounds play at Level 1 even if Silent is set in Manner Settings,

Sound Volume.

^ To change tone or loudness while creating melodies, press d I.

5

For harmony, enter sounds in other melody chords (Melody chord 2:

X, melody chord 3: Y…melody chord 32: Z)

^ Press j to move to other melody chords.

^ Enter sounds in the same way as melody chord 1.

8

8-9

8

6

Select tone

^ Piano is set for all melody chords by default.

^ Select preset tones or Instrument Effects (see P.8-16) created beforehand.

^ Selected tone applies to two melody chords (pairs: 1&17, 2&18, 3&19...16&32).

7

Adjust loudness

^ Strong is set for all melody chords by default.

^ Select Strong, Standard or Faint for each melody chord.

^ Selected loudness applies to two melody chords (pairs: 1&17, 2&18,

3&19...16&32).

8

Save melody as Original Ring Tone

^ To use as Ring Tone, select from Data Folder (see P.8-3).

Entering Sounds

This section describes how to enter a sound.

The same procedure applies to melody chord 1 to 32.

1

Pitch & Rest

Key Assignments:

Do Re

1 2

Mi

3

Fa

4

Sol La

5 6

Ti

7

Rest

0

<Changing Pitch>

^ Press a key once to enter a quarter note. Press the same key repeatedly to adjust the octave.

A

6

Ac

6

6

Af

6

Ad

^ Use

E to change pitch by semitone.

C C C

…

…

C

D

C #

D

D

D

D #

C

D

E

<Entering Rests>

^ Press

0. A quarter rest (with U) is entered.

…

…

8-10

2

Note/Rest Type

Press q or p repeatedly to change type.

q q q q

Quarter note/rest

Eighth note/rest

Sixteenth note/rest

Whole note/rest

Half note/rest

<Using Dotted Notes or Triplets>

^ Enter a note and press

9.

The dotted version is available for half/quarter/eighth notes and rests.

X

9

Standard

XO

Dotted

9

3

X

9

X

Triplet Standard

^ Connect 3 triplets as follows:

3

A A A

Y

3

Y

3

Y

,

Melodies may not play properly, or may not attach to Long Mail if contained triplets are not a set of three. Use triplets of similar pitch to avoid failure.

<Using Slurs>

^ Enter a note and press

8. _ appears on the right connecting the note to the next.

X

8

Standard

X

8

X

Slur Standard

C A sound is entered.

To enter more, press

A to move cursor and repeat the same procedure.

^ Use

E to enter the same sound as the one on the left.

,

^ Sounds may not play properly if notes of the same scale/pitch play in some melody chords simultaneously.

^ Distortion may occur when multiple melody chords play simultaneously.

+

In Manner Mode, Keypad sound is muted.

8

8-11

8

F17

Creating an Original Ring Tone

Make sure there is enough free memory. When Data Folder is full, delete files and try again (see P.9-24).

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Original Tones

A

Original Ring Tone

1

Enter title and press

b

^ Enter up to 24 single-byte characters. Title is mandatory.

^ Original Ring Tones are saved by title by default.

2

Select tempo (see P.8-9) and press

b

3

Select number of chords and press

b

4

Enter pitch or rest (see P.8-10)

5

Specify note or rest type (see P.8-11)

6

Press

A to set

Cursor moves right.

7

Repeat Steps 4 - 6 to enter more

^ To adjust tone or loudness here, press d I and skip ahead to Step 9 (tone) or 14

(loudness).

C

Press e L to play sounds in all melody chords.

B Press e C to stop.

C

To play current melody chord up to cursor, press k.

B Press e C to stop.

C

To move to other melody chords, press j (repeatedly).

8

Press

b when finished

^ To save melody without adjusting tone or loudness, skip ahead to Step 19 on P.8-13.

C

To edit entered sounds, select

2Edit A

Press b A

Perform Step 3 on P.8-14

9

Select Tone and press

b

10

Select a melody chord and press

b

11

Select a genre with

F and a tone with E

^ To use Instrument Effects, select Original (FM) or Original (WT).

C

To check tones, press d j.

B Press d C to stop.

12

Press

b

^ Repeat Steps 10 - 12 for other melody chords.

C

To play melody, press e L.

B Press e C to stop.

8-12

13

Press

d W

^ Skip ahead to Step 19 when not adjusting loudness.

14

Select Adjust Loudness and press

b

15

Select a melody chord and press

b

16

Select from

1Strong to 3Faint

C

To check loudness, press e L.

^ Press e C to stop.

17

Press

b

^ Repeat Steps 15 - 17 for other melody chords.

C

To play melody, press e L.

B Press e C to stop.

18

Press

d W

19

Select

1Save and press b

Incoming Calls while Creating

C Melody is temporarily saved for later editing. To return, end the call and follow these steps.

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

,

Although most tones are named after musical instruments, they may sound different.

Also, playback volume may vary or distortion may occur depending on the tone/scale.

+

When you press e L, Cannot play back too many Phonetic chords may appear, and when you press b q, Cannot save too many Phonetic chords may appear. Delete melody chords, replace short notes with longer notes, or reduce triplets.

8

8-13

8

Editing an Original Ring Tone

Make sure there is enough free memory. When Data Folder is full, delete files and try again (see P.9-24).

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Original Tones

A

Data Folder

1

Select a file and press

d I

^ Original Ring Tones are marked with O.

2

Select Edit and press

b

C

To change tone, see Steps 9 - 13 on P.8-12 - 8-13 (omit the next steps).

C

To change loudness, see Steps 14 - 18 on P.8-13 (omit the next steps).

3

Edit title and press

b

4

Select tempo and press

b

5

Select number of chords and press

b

6

Move cursor to sound

C

To edit other melody chords, press j.

When Changing Number of Chords

C When changing the number of phonetic chords, a warning of possible data loss may appear. To proceed, choose

1Yes and press b (see table below).

B To cancel, choose

2No A

Press b

Current Chords

8

8

16

16

32

32

Changed to

16

32

32

8

8

16

C Tone may alter when number of chords is changed.

Data to be Lost

Sounds after the 191st

Sounds after the 96th

Sounds after the 96th

Melody chords 9 - 16

Melody chords 9 - 32

Melody chords 17 - 32

7

Editing Sounds

1 Use

E to change pitch and switch type with p/q/8/9

(see P.8-11)

^ Keys

1 - 7 are not available for this operation.

Adding Sounds

1 Enter sound

Sound is entered at the cursor position.

^ Refer to entry limit (see P.8-8).

Deleting Sounds

1 Press i

Sound at the cursor position is deleted.

^ To delete all sounds, press i for 1+ seconds.

C

To delete sound sequence before or after cursor, press d I A

Select

6Delete Posterior or 7Delete Previous A

Press b twice

Copy/Cut & Paste Melodies

1 Press d I

2 Select

3Copy or 4Cut and press b

3 Move cursor to the first sound of a portion and press b

4 Move cursor to the last sound of the portion and press b

Portion disappears when cut.

5 Open a window to paste the melody

^ When pasting into other melodies, close the current melody and open another window.

6 Press d I

7 Select

5Paste and press b

8 Press b at target location

8

Press

b when finished

C

To edit tone or loudness, see Steps 9 - 18 on P.8-12 - 8-13.

9

Select

1Save and press b

10

Select

2Overwrite and press b

Original Ring Tone is overwritten.

+

To save edited melody separately, select

1New Entry and press b. The original melody remains and the edited melody is saved as a new file.

8

8-14 8-15

8

Deleting an Original Ring Tone

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Original Tones

A

Data Folder

1

Select a file and press

d I

2

Select Delete and press

b

3

Choose

1Yes and press b

Instrument Effects

Basics

Create original tones for Original Ring Tones and other melodies.

Save up to eight tones per chord type (8/16 Chords, 32 Chords and WT Original Tone).

Procedure

This system, based on FM synthesis, allows you to select Algorithm and Effect

Level and adjust parameters of Operator to create Instrument Effects.

^ Select and arrange preset tones or Instrument Effects you have already created.

^ Play sounds as you arrange tones to check effects of changes.

^ Use WT synthesis by selecting WT Original Tone.

1

Select chord

^ Type: 8/16 Chords, 32 Chords and WT Original Tone

2

Select a location to save

3

Enter name

^ Name appears when selecting tones.

^ Enter up to 12 single-byte characters.

4

Select source tone

^ Select from preset tones if this is your first time.

J

Q

Piano

Bright Piano n E

Base Tone

J[ Piano ]H

Grand Piano

Honky-tonk Piano

Electric Piano 1

Electric Piano 2

Harpsichord

Clavi

YPlay

Select

8-16

5

Select Algorithm

^ Choose from six types for 8/16 Chords, and two types for 32

Chords.

^ Algorithm setting is not available for WT Original Tone.

J

Q n E

1Algorithm 3

2Algorithm 4

3Algorithm 5

4Algorithm 6

5Algorithm 7

6Algorithm 8

Select

6

Adjust parameters of each Operator (OP)

7

^ There are four types of Operators for 8/16 Chords and two types for 32 Chords.

^ Default parameters are the same as those of the source tone.

^ Use

E to select parameter and F to adjust.

^ Press e L to check effects of parameter changes.

Set Effect Level, Basic Octave, etc.

J

Q

Set OP 1 n E

Multiple 1

Sustain On

Key Scale Rate 1

Key Scale Level 2

Total Level 25

Attack Rate

*

Decay Rate 9

Sustain Level 1

Sustain Rate 16

YPlay

Adjust Set

8

Save tone (Instrument Effects)

^ Select Instrument Effects from tones to use for Original Ring Tone, etc.

WT Synthesis

C WT synthesis is based on recorded waveform data from musical instruments, etc. which are close to original sounds.

FM Synthesis

This system synthesizes various tones by generating a sine wave called Operator.

Algorithm is a combination of Operators. Depending on the Algorithm, Operators work either as Modulator (that which modulates) or Carrier (that to be modulated).

Feed Back

Operator 1 Operator 2 Various Tones

Modulate

Modulator Carrier

^ Adjust a variety of parameters including Multiple and Sustain.

^ Some Operators have a parameter called Feed Back for more effects.

8

8-17

Algorithm

Select a combination of Operators from six types (8/16 Chords) or two types (32 Chords).

For 8/16 Chords

Algorithm 3 Algorithm 4

Algorithm 7 Algorithm 8

For 32 Chords

Algorithm 5 Algorithm 6

(Shaded)

Modulator (that which modulates)

(White)

Carrier (that to be modulated)

8

Algorithm 1 Algorithm 2

^ Available Operators vary depending on the combination.

^ Algorithm setting is not available for WT Original Tone.

Operator (OP)

See the table for details. Available parameters may vary by the number of chords.

Parameter

Multiple

(13 levels)

Sustain

(On/Off)

Key Scale Rate

(two levels)

Key Scale Level

(four levels)

Total Level

(64 levels)

Description

Multiple affects tones most. The higher the Carrier level, the higher the pitch. Adjust the Modulator level for a variety of tones.

When Sustain is set, sound continues after produced. Choose On to provide sustaining effects to tones in Piano, Glockenspiel, etc.

Set Key Scale Rate high to shorten the rise and fall time. Select 2 to emphasize this effect.

The higher the Key Scale Level, the lower the volume level. Select 0 to disable this effect.

(1) Carrier

The higher the Carrier value, the higher the volume level.

Normally set 64 (maximum value), and select smaller values to use tones effectively at low volume for accompaniments, etc.

(2) Modulator

Increasing Modulator value brightens tones.

Select smaller values for softer tones. Normally set between 40 and 64 to enjoy effects of tone changes.

8-18

Parameter

Attack Rate

(15 levels)

Decay Rate

(16 levels)

Description

The higher the Attack Rate, the longer sounds take to reach the maximum volume. When using tones with Attack Rate high, use longer notes or select slower tempo.

Lower Decay Rate to shorten the time sounds reach down to Sustain Level

Sustain Level

(16 levels)

Sustain Rate

(16 levels)

Release Rate

(16 levels)

KEYOFF Nullify

(On/Off)

Wave Select

(29 types)

Vibrato

(four levels/Off)

AM Modulation

(four levels/Off)

Feed Back

(eight levels)

The Sustain Level for a Normal Tone equals the sustained volume. For

Step-Down Tones, Sustain Level measures the volume at which Ring Tone begins to decrease. The higher the Sustain Level, the higher the volume.

The lower the Sustain Rate, the longer the Sustain Level volume is sustained. 16 is Normal Tone, and other levels are Step-Down Tones.

The Release Rate for a Normal Tone equals the time from beginning to end of a sound. For Step-Down Tones, Release Rate measures the time from when a sound begins to decrease until it ends completely. The lower the

Release Rate, the sooner the sound ends. For sustaining effects, increase

Release Rate.

Choose On to avoid sound skipping of Step-Down Tones including those in

DRUM

Select from 29 waveforms

Vibrato is a periodic variation in pitch

The higher the AM Modulation level, the stronger the tremolo (periodic changes in loudness)

Set Feed Back (not available for some Operators)

+

When Release Rate is set high for Normal Tones, rests may be ignored in playback.

Additional Settings

Parameter

Effect Level

(four levels)

Basic Octave

(four levels)

Panpot

(31 levels)

Description

Effect Level affects cycle time of wavering quality in pitch or loudness.

Select high level to shorten the cycle.

Adjust octave of tones

Panpot measures the position of sounds, which varies by combination of L (left) and

R (right). Sound bias is emphasized as the value difference increases.

Sustain (On/Off)

Choose On to extend sounds

Vibration Level

(four levels/Off)

Select higher level for stronger vibrato

Basic Octave, Sustain and Vibration Level settings are not available for WT

Original Tone.

8

8-19

8

F18

Creating Instrument Effects

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Instrument Effects

1

Select

18/16 Chords, 232 Chords or 3WT Original Tone and press b

If Instrument Effects are already saved and renamed, they appear in Effects list.

2

Select a location to save and press

b twice

^ To leave the name unchanged, press b once and skip ahead to Step 4.

3

Enter name and press

b

^ Enter up to 12 single-byte characters.

4

Select Base Tone and press

b

5

Select a genre with

F and a tone with E

C

To check tone, press e L.

B Press e C to stop.

6

Press

b

7

Select Tone and press

b

^ To keep Algorithm unchanged, skip ahead to Step 10.

8

Select Algorithm and press

b

9

Select Algorithm and press

b

^ To keep each Operator (OP) unchanged, skip ahead to Step 14.

10

Select Operator (OP 1, etc.: see P.8-17) and press

Default parameters are the same as those of the source tone.

b

11

Select a parameter with

E and adjust it with F

C

For parameter descriptions, see P.8-18 - 8-19.

12

Repeat Step 11 to adjust other parameters

C

Press e L to check effects of parameter changes.

B Press e C to stop.

13

Press

b or d j

14

Select Effect Level and press

b

15

Select a frequency for tremolo/vibrato and press

b

Confirmation appears.

16

Select Basic Octave and press

b

17

Select a level and press

b

8-20

18

Select Panpot and adjust with

F

19

Select Sustain and choose On or Off with

F

20

Select Vibration Level and adjust with

F

21

Press

d j

22

When finished with all settings, press

d j

^ To create more, repeat Steps 2 - 22 on P.8-20 and above.

Other Sound Related Functions

Speaker Phone/

Speaker

Select whether to activate Speaker Phone (for handsfree conversations) or Speaker (to listen only)

KOff

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Speaker

Select

1Speaker Phone or 2Speaker A

Press

b

C

To use Earpiece and Microphone for phone conversations, choose

3Off A

Press b

F16

F19

8

Talk with Speaker

C Before or during calls, press f for 1+ seconds.

^ y: Speaker Phone is active. S: Speaker is active.

^ When Speaker is

3Off, use Earpiece and Microphone for phone conversations.

^ To cancel manually during a call, press f for 1+ seconds.

C When calls end, speaker talk is canceled.

,

^ Speaker is not available when headphones, etc. are in use.

^ When Speaker Phone is active, ringback tone may not sound. Handsfree conversations may be hampered by ambient noise. Keep handset as close as possible when using Speaker Phone.

Tone Octave

Select an octave for each tone from four levels

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Tone Octave

Select a genre with

F and a tone with E A

Press

b A

level

A

Press

b

Select a

C

To check tone or octave, press e L.

B Press e C to stop.

^ Adjust octave of Instrument Effects in Basic Octave setting (see Steps 16 - 17 on P.8-20).

8-21

Managing Files (Data Folder)

9-1

9

File Organization

Handset has two storage areas. Files are automatically sorted into Memory by function and into File Cabinet by file format. Handset File Cabinet capacity is approximately 8 MB.

Handset Memory Structure

Memory

Phone Book

Schedule

Text Memo

Mail Box

Bookmarks

Message Folder

Saved Information

Save files created/obtained using assorted handset functions.

Memory capacity varies by function.

Files are sorted into folders by file format. File Cabinet capacity is fixed and shared by all folders.

File Cabinet

Data Folder

Camera

(Shortcut)

Images

Melodies

Animation

Burst Shots

V-Appli Library

Camera

Action Snap Folder

Voice Folder

+

File Cabinet Memory Status

To check memory usage status, press

b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

8Memory Status A

Press

b

9-2

Data Folder

Contents

Files created or obtained via Web or Sky/Long Mail are organized in separate folders according to file format. Files are sorted as follows:

Data Folder

Camera

(Shortcut)

Images

Mobile Camera Data

^ Shortcut to still and video images captured in Sha-mail,

Wallpaper, Camera or Action Snap mode

Image Files including Still Images

Melody Files such as Original Ring Tones

Melodies

Animation

Burst Shots

Animation Files

Burst Shot Files

Create QR Codes from image/melody files in Data Folder (see P.12-27).

Window Description

To open Data Folder from Standby, follow these steps.

Press

b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

1Data Folder A

Press

b

J

Q

Data Folder

Data Folder

ZCamera

IImages

HMelodies bAnimation  jBurst Shots n E

9

Open Menu

Data Folder

File View

Open a folder to view files.

^ Example: Images folder

^ To customize the appearance of File View, see P.9-5 "Display Settings."

C File View (List)

J

Q n

G

Data Folder s*5-*9-21_12- 3.7KB

Format, Name and Size (of selected image)

Saved Files

^ Icons appear for files other than images or images not supported by handset.

Sha-mail Show Menu

9-3

C File View (List File Names)

J

Q

Data Folder n

E

3.7KB

Images s*5-*9-21_12-34 s*5-*9-21_12-21 s*5-*9-21_11-25 s*5-*9-21_11-*1 s*5-*9-21_1*-15 s*5-*9-21_1*-11 s*5-*9-21_1*-*4

Sha-mail Show Menu

File Size

Folder Name

Saved Files (format and file name)

9

+

To view folders first, select Thumbnails or File List in Display Settings for Images,

Animation or Burst Shots folder (see P.9-5).

Icons

Still Image & Animation Files

Icon

w

*

(P: white) w

*

(P: purple) s

*

PNG

Transparent PNG

Format

PNG image

Description

Transparent PNG image k

JPEG

Burst Shot (consisting of Index Image and

4, 9, or 25 frames)

JPEG image

Burst Mode image

R

*

(E: white)

R

*

(E: Yellow)

E-Animation (NEVA files) Animation (may include sound)

E-Animation (NEVA files) with jump buttons Animation (may include sound) x

*

Animation

(JPEG, PNG, or PNG/JPEG Animation)

Animation

*Blue icon: forwardable, red icon: unforwardable

^ Unforwardable files cannot be edited, combined, attached to Long Mail, converted to QR

Codes or sent via infrared.

^ A yellow triangle appears (S) on icons of the files used in Phone Book, Useful Diary or

Schedule entries.

Sound Files

Icon

y

* u

* z

O

P

SMAF

Melody

Sky Melody

Voice

Format

Original Ring Tone

Description

Melody via Web or Long Mail

(may include images)

Melody via Web or Long Mail

Melody downloaded from Sky

Melody Center (unforwardable).

Original melody (forwardable)

Voice/sound you recorded

(forwardable)

*Blue icon: forwardable, red icon: unforwardable

^ Unforwardable files cannot be edited, combined, attached to Long Mail, converted to QR

Codes or sent via infrared.

^ A yellow triangle appears (Q) on icons of the files set for Ring Tones, Alarm, etc.

Display Settings

Customize appearance of each folder in Data Folder.

Setting

List

1

List File Names

2

Thumbnails

1

File List

3

Description

Thumbnails appear

File names appear

Sub folders appear (thumbnails appear within)

Sub folders appear (file names appear within)

1

Not available for Melodies folder.

2

Appears as List for Melodies folder.

3

Appears as Folder for Melodies folder.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

1

Select a folder and press

d I

2

Select

4Display Settings and press b

3

Enter Security Code

4

Select a type and press

b

,

In this manual, most operations are described with Data Folder appearance set to

List. Operations may differ if folders are set to appear.

9

9-4 9-5

9

Opening Files

Handset Data Folder

Index Menu

H

My Files

1

Select

1Data Folder and press b

2

Select a folder and press

b

Thumbnails or file names appear (see P.9-3 "File View").

3

Select a file and press

The content plays or appears.

b

^ Press q to open or play the next file, and press p to open or play the previous one. (Available in most cases.)

J

Q n G

Data Folder s*5-*9-21_12- 3.7KB

Sha-mail Show Menu

File View

(Images Folder)

+

Opening Burst Shot Files

Index Image appears. Use

F to view single frames.

JPEG Images Exceeding W 240 x H 320 Dots

Images are reduced to fit Display. To restore the original size, press d I, select Original Size and press b.

4

Press

i to return to File View

E-Animation Files with Jump Buttons

C Some E-Animation files contain jump buttons with which to access the Mobile

Internet or open linked images. Follow these steps to use the buttons.

Open an E-Animation file and press

d I A

Select E-Animation Mode

A

Press

b

^ Click buttons on screen for operations.

+

Exchange files via infrared with compatible devices (seeP.10-2).

Sending Files via Long Mail

Attach files to Long Mail from Data Folder.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

1

Select a file and press

d I

2

Select Attachment and press

b

C

For large JPEG image, select

1Attach 1/4 Size, 2Attach Original or 3Attach Split Mail

A

Press b

C

For Melody files or Original Ring Tones, select a file format (see IP.3-8)

A

Press b

3

Complete other fields and send Long Mail (see Step 2 and onward

on IP.3-3)

Sending Burst Shot Images

C Press b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

1Data Folder A

Press

b A

Select Burst Shots

A

Press

b A

Select a file

A

Press

b A

Select an image with

F A

Press

d I A

Select

0Attach Screen A

Press

b A

Perform

from Step 2 on IP.3-3

Sending Split Images

C To split an image (240 x 320 dots) into four frames and attach to Long Mail, follow these steps.

Press

b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

1Data Folder A

Press

b

A

Select a folder

A

Press

b A

Select an image

A

Press

d I A

Select Attachment

A

Press

b A

Select

3Attach Split Mail A

Press

b A

Select or enter recipient

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b (See Step 3 and

onward in "Send Continuously" on IP.4-19.)

C Split Mail transmission charges are equivalent to sending four Long Mail messages.

9

9-6 9-7

9

F48

Properties

Index Menu

H

My Files

1

Open Data Folder or a folder within it, and select a folder or file

2

Press

d I

3

Select Property and press

b

Details appear.

^ Press

D to scroll down.

^ Item Descriptions

Title

1

Type

Location

Melody file name

File/folder type

File/folder location

File Size

Memory Used

Width x Length

2

Data Size

File size on handset

Copy/Fwd

Save

Transfer

Image size in dots

OK: can be copied within Data Folder

Invalid: not supported

OK: can be saved

Invalid: not supported

OK: can be transferred to external device

Invalid: not supported

Phone Book (Photo)

3

Incoming Tone

1

Set Useful Diary

3

Schedule Memo

3

Yes: set for Photo setting

Yes: set for Ring Tones, Alarm, etc.

Yes: set for Useful Diary

Yes: set for Schedule

1

Appears for files in Melodies folder.

2

Appears for JPEG/PNG/Burst Shot images, etc.

3

Number of entries for which the file is used also appears.

Animation File

Simple Animation

Select up to four images to create Simple Animation. Images appear one after another at the selected tempo.

^ Use JPEG images captured with mobile camera or obtained via Web/Long Mail.

^ Simple Animation files are saved to Animation folder. However, those made of a single image are saved to Images folder.

^ When memory is full, delete files to free some space (see P.9-24).

^ Image quality may change when used for animation.

9-8

Creating Simple Animation

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Animation

A

Simple Animation

A

New

1

Enter title and press

b

^ Enter up to 32 single-byte characters. Title is mandatory.

^ Files are saved by title by default; change file names later (see P.9-23).

2

Select tempo and press

b

In animation, images appear in numerical order at the tempo.

J

Q n

E

Simple Animation

*.*KB

File Name[ Easy-goin ]

Tempo[ Slightly Slow ]

1------------------

2------------------

3------------------

4------------------

Select

3

Select a number and press

b

4

Select an image in Data Folder and press

b

C

For operations in Data Folder, see P.9-6.

C

To use a 4-Burst Shot (all frames), select a Burst Shot file

A

Press b A

Select

1Animate Burst File A

Press b

B Animate Burst File is available only when

1 is selected in Step 3 with no other images specified. Burst Shot files of 240 x 320 dots are not available.

C

To use a Burst Shot frame, select a Burst Shot file

A

Press b A

Select

2Choose One

A

Press b A

Select an image with

F A

Proceed to Step 5

C

To start over from selecting an image in Data Folder, press d X.

C

To start over from Step 3, press e W.

5

Press

b

The image is set.

C

To play animation, press d I A

Select

1Animation Playback A

Press b

B To return, press e W A

Press i

C

To change images, select one

A

Press d I A

Select

2Change A

Press b A

Start over from Step 4

C

To delete images, select one

A

Press d I A

Select

3Delete A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

J

Q

Simple Animation n

E

4.4KB

File Name[ Easy-goin ]

Tempo[ Slightly Slow ]

1*5-*9-21_11-*8

2------------------

3------------------

4------------------

Set Select Menu

6

Repeat Steps 3 - 5 to add images

^ Select up to four images.

7

Press

e j when finished

C

To send animation via Long Mail, select

2Attachment A

Press b A

Perform from

Step 2 on IP.3-3

B For large animation, choose

1Yes A

Press b (File may be too large to be attached even if the size is reduced.)

8

Select

1Save and press b

9

9-9

9

Editing Animation

When memory is full, delete files to free some space (see P.9-24).

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Animation

A

Simple Animation

A

Edit

1

Select animation and press

b

2

Edit title and press

b

3

Select tempo and press

b

C

To add images, select a number

A

Press b A

Select an image

A

Press b twice

C

To change images, select a number

A

Press d I A

Select

2Change A

Press b

A

Select an image

A

Press b twice

C

To delete images, select a number

A

Press d I A

Select

3Delete A

Press b

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

4

When finished editing, press

e j

5

Select

1Save and press b

6

Select

1New Entry and press b

The animation is saved to Data Folder (Animation).

C

To overwrite, select

2Overwrite A

Press b

Opening Animation Files

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

1

Select a folder and press

b

2

Select animation file and press

b

The selected animation plays.

C

Press e W to stop.

C

To use animation files, see below.

Using Images & Animation

Some images may not be used.

Changing Display Size

1

Open a file and press

k

Display size toggles between 100% (with indicators), 100% (no indicators), Enlarged (with indicators) and Enlarged (no indicators).

^ Size may not be changed or size options may vary depending on the file. When enlarged, the entire image may not appear on Display.

^ q: 100%, p: Enlarged

9-10

Setting Image & Animation as Wallpaper

Save As Wallpaper can be selected only for compatible files.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

1

Images

1 Select

2Display Setting and press b

2 Select

1Save As Wallpaper and press b

Animation

1 Select Save As Wallpaper and press b

2 Press b

Setting Image & Animation as Display Images

To Display Images can be selected only for compatible files.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

1

Images

1 Select

2Display Setting and press b

2 Select

2To Display Images and press b

Animation

1 Select To Display Images and press b

2

Select an item and press

b

C

For more, see Step 4 and onward on P.7-5.

Saving Burst Shot Images

Save all frames and Index Image of a Burst Shot file (k) as individual images at one time, or select a single image to save.

Individual Burst Shot images are saved to Data Folder (Images) in JPEG format.

(Source file remains.)

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Burst Shots

A

Open a Burst Shot file

1

Saving All Images Individually

1 Press d I

2 Select

7Save Single Frames and press b

Saving a Single Image

1 Select a frame or Index Image with

F and press d I

2 Select

8Save Screen and press b

9

9-11

9

Slide Show

All images in Data Folder (Images, Animation or Burst Shots) or Camera folder appear sequentially. Adjust Slide Show speed.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

1

Select an image and press

d I

2

1Slide Show and press b

3

Select

1Slide Show and press b

Slide Show starts from the selected image.

C

To stop Slide Show, press b.

B To resume, press b.

C

To skip images manually, press d J.

Setting Interval

C Interval is Standard by default. To change interval, follow these steps.

After Step 2 above, select

2Display Speed A

Press

b A

Select an interval

A

Press

b

Editing Images

Enlarging/Reducing Image

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d) A

Image Size

1

Select

1Enlarge/Reduce and press b

^ If Move does not appear at the lower left, press e 0.

^ Shortcut: From Data Folder, open an image and press e 0

+

To Center the Point to Enlarge

^ Press e 1 and use G to move the point to the center of Display.

^ Image stops when you release the key or the limit is reached.

To Return to Resize Mode

Press e 0.

2

Press and hold

C to enlarge and D to reduce

the size

To stop resizing, release the key (stops automatically when the limit is reached).

C

To soften images, press d }.

,

^ Portions outside Display are cut when saved.

^ When e 1 is pressed after resizing, image returns to the original size.

3

Press

b

Resized image is saved as a new entry.

Move

Changing Image Size

Resize images in Data Folder to send via Long Mail or set as Wallpapers.

^ Alternatively, crop image for size. File size changes when images are resized.

^ Images may not appear depending on the size.

^ Change Image Size can be selected only for compatible files.

Save Soft

Resize to Preset Size

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Image Size

A

Change Image Size

1

Select from

1Wallpaper to 5Alarm and press b

A rectangle appears on the image (except for

1Wallpaper.)

Wallpaper

Sha-mail Size

Power On/Off

W 240 x H 320 dots

W 120 x H 160 dots

W 120 x H 130 dots

Incoming Call

Alarm

W 120 x H 38 dots

W 120 x H 51 dots

C

To start over from selecting preset size, press i or d |.

Resize OK Size

9

9-12 9-13

9

2

Selecting Display Area

1 Use

G to specify display area and press b

^ Display area may not be specified depending on image size.

Enlarge or Reduce

1 Press e 0

Move appears in the left bottom corner.

2 Press

C to enlarge and D to reduce the size, and press b

3

Press

b

Image is saved as a new entry.

Cropping Images

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Image Size

A

Change Image Size

1

Select

6Cut and press b

2

Use

G to move W to the upper left corner of the

portion to crop and press

b

3

Use

G to move W to the lower right corner of the

portion

C

To cancel, press e W A

Start over from Step 2

4

Press

d j

C

To start over from selecting preset size, press i or d |.

C

To adjust display area/scale, see Step 2 in "Resize to Preset

Size" above.

5

Press

b twice

Image is saved as a new entry.

Resize OK Size

Marker Stamp

Add text/stamps (arrows/plus sign) to images.

^ Apply to JPEG and PNG images. Some images may not be used.

^ Marker Stamp can be selected only for compatible files.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d) A

Picture Effect

1

Select

1Marker Stamp and press b

C

To specify the color, select

7Font Color A

Press b A

Select a combination

A

Press b

C

To not to outline text/stamp with the latter color, select

8Border A

Press b A

Choose

2Off A

Press b

,

For PNG images, Font Color and Border cannot be selected (White w/ Black applies).

9-14

2

Entering Text

1 Select

1Character and press b

2 Enter text and press b

^ Enter up to 16 single-byte characters.

C

To reenter text, press e W A

Start over from Step 1

C

Press

1 - 9 to change the color and 0 to toggle Border On and Off.

Adding Stamps

1 Select a stamp and press b

C

To change stamp, press e W

C

Press

1 - 9 to change the color and 0 to toggle Border On and Off.

3

Use

G to move text or stamp to target location and press b

4

Choose

1Yes and press b

C

To add more text or stamp, select

2Marking A

Press b A

Press d I A

Repeat Steps 2 - 4

C

To check the image, select

3Check Image A

Press b

C

To cancel editing, select

4Cancel Edit A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

5

Select

1Complete and press b

6

Choose

1Yes and press b

Image is saved as a new entry.

Visual Effects

Dress up images with preloaded visual effects.

^ Apply to JPEG images including Burst Shot files.

^ Use images between W 52 x H 52 and W 240 x H 320 dots. Images larger than

W 240 x H 320 dots are automatically cropped and centered.

^

2Image Decoration or 3Burst Shot Effects can be selected only for compatible files.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

1

Select

4Picture Effect and press b

C

To decorate Burst Shot images, select

3Burst Shot Effects A

Press b A

Skip ahead to Step 3

+

For Burst Shot files, decorations are added to all images. To decorate a single image, save it as an individual image first (see P.9-11).

2

Select

2Image Decoration and press b

9

9-15

9

3

Select an effect and press

b

^ Picture Effects:

Sepia

Sparkling

Soap Bubbles

Kaleidoscope

Emboss

Scrunch

Aluminum Can

Round Frame

Soft Frame

Zigzag Frame

4

Press

b

Image is saved as a new entry.

Renders image in sepia tones

Adds sparkling effect to bright portions of an image

Superimposes bubbles over an image

Renders an image as a kaleidoscopic image

Renders images in black and white relief

Renders image as a pencil sketch

Superimposes image onto a 3D can image

Adds a round, opaque frosting to the edges of an image

Adds a soft, opaque edged frame to image

Adds a jagged edged frame around image

,

Edited images may be too large to save or send via Long Mail.

Face Arrange

Make smiley, angry or sad faces.

^ Apply to JPEG images.

^ Use portrait images.

^ Face Arrange may not fit all images. Adjust position and size as required (see P.9-17).

^ Face Arrange can be selected only for compatible files.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Picture Effect

A

Face Arrange

1

Select a type and press

b

Mirror:

Right-half

Mirror:

Left-half

Grin

Mad

Sad

Copies right side of face onto left side

Copies left side of face onto right side

Slender

Pulls eyes down & mouth up

Dark

Pulls eyes up & mouth down

Fair

Pulls eyes & mouth down

C

To start over, press e W.

Crush Face

Stretches face to lengthen appearance

Shortens distance between top and bottom of face

Darkens skin tone

Brightens skin tone

Angry Mark

Adds a stress mark to face

9-16

2

Press

b

Image is saved as a new entry.

,

When using Face Arrange, take care not to create images that may embarrass or offend others. Always obtain permission before photographing others.

Adjusting Face Arrange Position

After Face Arrange (Step 1 on P.9-16), change the positions and sizes of targets to fit your images. Changes apply to the current image only.

1

Select LPositioning and press b

Face Arrange targets appear.

2

Press

d u

A rectangle appears with W in the upper left corner.

3

Set the face line

J q

Q n G

Set Upper Face Line

J q

Q n G

Set Lower Face Line

J q

Q n G

Right Eye/Upper Left

＋ b b

＋

＋

OK Set

Use

G to move

W to the upper left corner

C

To start over, press e W.

Back OK Set

Use

G to move

W to the lower right corner

4

Set the eyes and then mouth in the same way

J q

Q n G

Right Eye/LowerRight

J q

Q n

G

Left Eye/Lower Right

Back OK Set

Face line is set

J q

Q n

Mouth/Lower Right

G b b

＋ ＋

＋

Back OK

Right Eye

Set Back OK

Left Eye

Set Back

Mouth

Set

9

9-17

9

5

Press

d j when finished

After Arranging Face..., all the targets appear.

^ To start over from the face line, return to Step 2.

C

To restore the original positions, press e l.

6

Press

b

7

Choose

1Yes and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry with Face Arrange positions adjusted, and

Face Arrange menu returns.

^ Complete Face Arrange. Face Arrange is applied to the adjusted positions.

Additional Picture Effects

^ Frame, Burst Mode Frame, 90° turn, Change File Format and Moving Photo Frame can be selected only for compatible files.

^ Edited images are saved as new entries.

Add Frame to JPEG images

Frame

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

Framing Standard Images

Select

4Picture Effect A

Press

b A

Select

4Frame A

Press

b A

Select

1Preset Frames or 2Original Frames A

Press

b A

Select a frame

A

Press

b twice

C

To check frames, select one

A

Press e 9

B Press e W to return to Frame list.

Framing Burst Shot Images

Select

4Burst Mode Frame A

Press

b A

Select

1Preset Frames or

2Original Frames A

Press

b A

Select a frame

A

Press

b twice

C

To check frames, select one

A

Press e 9

B Press e W to return to Frame list.

+

For Burst Shot files, frames are added to all images. To frame a single image, save it as an individual image first (see P.9-11).

90° turn

Rotate images

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Picture Effect

Select

690° turn A

Press

b A

Press

b

*

*To rotate further, press d z. Each press rotates image by 90 degrees.

9-18

Moving Photo

Frame

Add Moving Photo Frame to JPEG images to create animations

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Picture Effect

A

Moving Photo Frame

Select a frame

A

Press

b twice

C

To view file animation alone, select one

A

Press e 9

B Press e W to return to Moving Photo Frame list.

^ Animations are saved as E-Animation files with a .nva extension.

+

Moving Photo Frame size is W 120 X H 130 dots. For images larger than this size, Moving Photo Frames appear centered. Resize or crop images to fit frame

(see P.9-14).

Change File

Format

Convert image format to JPEG (s) or PNG (w)

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Change File Format

Select a format

A

Press

b

^ Apply to images smaller than 120 x 160 dots.

^ The original format cannot be selected.

,

Changing file format may affect image quality.

Combining Images

Some images may not be combined and menu items may vary by file type.

Split Screen

Combine up to four reduced images into one.

^ Apply to JPEG images including Burst Shot files.

^ Make sure there is enough free memory.

^ Images are placed in the upper left, upper right, lower left and lower right in numerical order.

J q

Q n E

9

Resize Menu

Split Image

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

1

Select an image for upper left and press

b

^ To use a Burst Shot image for upper left, select any standard image temporarily and change it to a Burst Shot image later (see Step 10 on P.9-20).

9-19

9

2

Press

d I

3

Select

5Composite and press b

4

Select

1Split Image 120 x 160 or 2Split Image 240 x 320 and press b

5

Enter name and press

b

^ Enter up to 32 single-byte characters. Name is mandatory.

6

Select a number and press

b

Data Folder opens.

7

Select a folder and press

b

8

Select an image and press

b

^ Some images may not be selected.

C

To change the image, press d X.

C

To start over from selecting a number, press e W.

9

Press

b

10

Repeat Steps 6 - 9 to add images

C

To preview Split Image, press d I A

Select

1Split Screen A

Press b

B To return, press d W A

Press i

C

To change images, select one

A

Press d I A

Select

2Change A

Press b A

Start over from Step 7

C

To delete images, select one

A

Press d I A

Select

3Delete A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

J

Q

Split Picture n

E

File Name[MyPhoto ]

1*5-*9-2*_15-17

2*5-*9-2*_15-18

3Sleepy

4*5-*9-2*_15-2*

Set Select Menu

11

Press

e j when finished

C

To send Split Image via Long Mail, select

2Attachment A

Press b A

Perform from

Step 2 on IP.3-3

12

Select

1Save and press b

Image is saved as a new entry.

Using a Single Image of Burst Shot File

C Follow these steps after Step 6.

Select Burst Shots

A

Press

b A

Select a Burst Shot file

A

Press

b A

Use

F to select an image A

Press

b A

Perform from Step 10 above

^ 1/4 - 4/4, etc. is added to the file name.

C Index Image can be used ( x is added to the file name).

Panorama Images

Combine two images into one.

Select two images

Panorama Image Effects:

Merge Panorama

Standard

Near View

Document

Applicable to all kinds of shots

Best suited for close-up shots with parallax correction

Use for images with text

^ Use JPEG images between W 48 x H 64 and W 120 x H 160 dots/W 160 x H 120 dots.

^ Some portions may be cropped to adjust two images to the same size.

^ The result may not be satisfactory if color tones are different between two images.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

1

Select an image and press

b

2

Press

d I

^ For Burst Shot images, skip ahead to Step 4.

3

Select

5Composite and press b

4

Select Merge Panorama and press

b

The first selected image appears on the left when combined.

^ Merge Panorama can be selected only for compatible files.

5

Select from

1Standard to 3Document and press b

6

Select

2 and press b

Data Folder opens.

7

Select another image and press

b

9

9-20 9-21

9

8

Press

b

The selected image appears on the right. Two images are set.

^ If the image is too large or too small, select another.

C

To change the image press d X A

Start over from Step 7

9

Press

e j when finished

Combined image appears.

^ Use

G to scroll the image.

C

To switch the positions, press d r.

10

Press

b

Image is saved as a new entry.

J

Q

1*5-*9-2*_15-17

2*5-*9-2*_15-18 n E

Merge Panorama

Effect[Standard ]

Set Select

Combining Split Mail Images

Use one of four Split Mail images to combine them all into one.

^ Images may not be combined properly if file names of Split Mail images are changed, or the same file name exists.

^ When combined, image quality may change.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Composite

1

Select

3Combine Split Mail and press b

2

Press

b

Image is saved as a new entry.

Melody Files

Some functions may not be available and menu items may vary by file type.

Playback Volume

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Melodies

1

Select a file and press

d I

2

Select

1Playback Volume and press b

3

Use

E to adjust level and press b

9-22

Using for Incoming Tone/Sound Effects

Files cannot be used if the file name exceeds 24 single-byte characters.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Melodies

1

Select a file and press

d I

2

Select

2Incoming Tone or 3Sound Effects and press b

^ Incoming Tone or Sound Effects can be selected only for compatible files.

3

Select an item and press

b

Editing Melodies & Adjusting Tone or Loudness

C Press b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

1Data Folder A

Press

b A

Select Melodies

A

Press

b A

Select a melody

A

Press

d I

B To edit melodies, select

5Edit A

Press b A

Perform from Step 3 on P.8-14

B To adjust tone, select

6Tone A

Press b A

Perform Steps 10 - 13 on P.8-12 - 8-13

B To adjust loudness, select

7Adjust Loudness A

Press b A

Perform Steps

15 - 18 on P.8-13

^ Melody format files are saved as Original Ring Tone format after Edit.

Editing Files & Folders

To change folder names, set folders to appear from Display Settings (see P.9-5).

Changing Folder/

File Name

Rename folders (except Folder 0) or files

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

Folder Names

Select a folder

A

Press

b A

Select from Folder 1 to Folder 9

A

Press

d I A

Select

2Folder Name A

Press

b A

Enter name

A

Press

b

File Names

Select a folder

A

Press

b A

Select a file

A

Press

d I A

Select Change File Name

A

Press

b A

Enter name

A

Press

b

,

^ Changing names does not affect titles of sound files.

^ When you attach a file to Long Mail, single-byte katakana used in the name change to double-byte, and Pictographs are deleted.

^ Some single-byte Symbols may not be used for file names.

9

9-23

9

Restrict access to folders (except Folder 0)

Secret Mode

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

Select from Folder 1 to Folder 9

A

Press

d I A

Select

3Secret Mode A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

1On

or

2Off A

Press

b

^ Enter Security Code to open folders set to On.

,

Secret Mode is not available for Camera folder (shortcut).

Copy/Move

Copy or move files to other folders within each Data Folder

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

Select a file

A

Press

d I A

Select Copy or Move

A

Press

b

A

Select a destination folder

A

Press

b

Delete

Delete a single file or all files at once

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

Deleting Single Files

Select a folder

A

Press

b A

Select Delete

A

Press

b A

Press

b

Select a file

A

Press

d I A

Delete?

*

appears

A

Choose

1Yes A

*If the file is used for Incoming Tone, Picture Call/Mail, Useful Diary, etc.,

File in Use Delete? appears.

Deleting All Files

Select a folder

A

Press

d I A

Select

3Delete All A

Press

b

A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

9-24

Infrared

10-1

10

Getting Started

Exchange information and files with infrared-compatible Vodafone handsets and other devices.

^ V302SH complies with IrMC 1.1, but some files may not be exchanged.

^ Infrared transfers are disabled while handset is connected to the Network (receiving/ sending mail or information) or while using Vodafone live! services.

^ During infrared transfers, handset automatically enters Off-Line Mode (see P.3-6). Thus transfers are disabled while receiving calls/messages, during calls, while using Vodafone live! services, while editing mail or data, etc. Off-Line Mode is canceled after transfers.

Available Files

Function

Phone Book

One File All Files

Available Available

Note

The following settings are lost: Photo, Personal Ring

Tone, Incoming Notice and Mail Folder. In one file transfers, Group and Secret settings are also lost.

All file transfer includes Owner Profile

(except handset phone number).

Data Folder

Available N/A

Transfer JPEG and PNG files in Images folder as well as E-Animation (NEVA files) in Animation folder. Copy protected files cannot be transferred.

Camera Mode Images Available N/A Transfer a DCF format file of up to 210 KB

,

^ Files over 40 KB cannot be transferred (except Camera mode images).

^ Images may not appear on recipient handsets.

Precautions

^ Bring handsets to within 20 cm and place the ports face-to-face. Do not place objects between handsets.

Within 20 cm

Infrared Port

^ Keep the ports face-to-face during transfer.

^ Transfers may fail under direct sunlight or fluorescent lights, or near infrared equipment.

^ Clean the ports with a soft cloth. Dirty ports may not transfer files properly.

+

When transfer fails, Remote Device Not Found Reconnect? appears. Take the above precautions and try again. (Choose

1Yes and press b.)

Set IR Password

IR Password is specific for infrared transfers. Transfers are possible when passwords of both handsets match.

The password specified when receiving an infrared transfer for the first time remains valid. Use the procedure described below to change IR Password.

Index Menu

H

Infrared

A

Set IR Password

1

Enter Security Code

2

Enter IR Password

Password is set and Infrared Transfer menu returns.

+

If IR Password is set by this procedure beforehand, password entry is not requested when receiving an infrared transfer for the first time.

10

10-2 10-3

10

Transferring Files

One File Transfer

Sending

Send one file or entry from Phone Book or Data Folder.

1

Open file list and highlight a file

^ Alternatively, for Phone Book, open an entry.

2

Press

b I or d I

3

Select Send via Infrared and press

b

Off-Line Mode is set and title entry window opens.

^ When handset fails to enter Off-Line Mode, file list returns.

4

Edit title and press

b

^ Source file or entry name remains unchanged. To proceed without changing the title, press b.

5

Prepare recipient handset

6

Within 15 seconds, choose

1Yes and press b

Transfer starts. When finished, file or entry list returns.

Receiving

J

Q n

E

J [No.*** - **9] H

**5 Ueda Mikio

*3123XXXX3

**7 Kitayama K

*3123XXXX8

**8 Kimura Tet

*3123XXXX5

Select Menu

Phone Book Entry List

Index Menu

H

Infrared

A

Acquire Signal

1

Enter Security Code

Standing by... appears and handset receives files if sent within 30 seconds. (A confirmation appears.)

C

Press e 3 to cancel.

C

Press g to end.

+

Infrared Password

^ IR Password? appears when receiving an infrared transfer for the first time.

Enter a 4-digit password to start receiving.

^ The entered password remains valid. See P.10-3 to change the password.

^ If incorrect, Infrared Transfer menu returns.

2

Choose

1Yes and press b

File is saved and Infrared Transfer menu returns.

C

To cancel transfer, choose

2No A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

10-4

All File Transfer

Security Code and IR Password are required to transfer all files.

B Security Code: see P.1-26

B IR Password is required for infrared transfers. Transfers are possible when the passwords of both handsets match. To set recipient handset password before transfer, see P.10-3.

Sending All Phone Book Entries

Index Menu

H

Infrared

1

Select

1Send All Entries and press b

Off-Line Mode is set.

^ When handset fails to enter Off-Line Mode, Infrared Transfer menu returns.

2

Enter Security Code

3

Prepare recipient handset

4

Enter IR Password

5

Within 15 seconds, choose

1Yes and press b

Transfer starts. When finished, Infrared Transfer menu returns.

^ If IR Password is incorrect, Infrared Transfer menu returns.

Receiving All Phone Book Entries

Index Menu

H

Infrared

A

Acquire Signal

1

Enter Security Code

Standing by... appears and handset receives files if sent within 30 seconds. (A confirmation appears.)

C

Press e 3 to cancel.

C

Press g to end.

C

When IR Password? appears, see P.10-4 "Infrared Password."

2

To Add Entries

1 Select

1New Item and press b

Transfer starts. When finished, Infrared Transfer menu returns.

To Overwrite Existing Entries

1 Select

2Delete All & Save and press b

2 Choose

1Yes and press b

Transfer starts. When finished, Infrared Transfer menu returns.

,

When Phone Book is overwritten, all Owner Profile contents are deleted, except handset phone number.

10

10-5

Handset Security

11-1

F28

F20

Changing Security Code

Whenever necessary, change Security Code.

Center Access Code cannot be changed from handset.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

A

Change Code

1

Enter current Security Code

C

Security Code: see P.1-26

C

If incorrect, handset returns to Standby.

2

Enter new Security Code

3

Re-enter Security Code

If incorrect, handset returns to Standby.

Handset Locks

Keypad Lock

Restrict access to handset functions.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

A

Keypad Lock

1

Enter Security Code

Q appears and Keypad Lock is set.

11

When Keypad Lock is Active

C In Standby, press g for 2+ seconds to deactivate handset power, Press b for 1+ seconds to activate/cancel Key Guard,

0 - 9 to enter Security Code or i to edit Security Code entry. Emergency calls to Police (110), Fire (119) and Coast

Guard (118) are possible.

Dialing from Keypad is disabled except for emergency calls to Police (110), Fire (119) and Coast Guard (118).

C During a call, press g to end the call, f to answer another call or switch between callers in Call Waiting,

0 - 9 to enter Security Code or i to edit Security Code entry.

C Answer calls by pressing f or keys for Anykey Answer (see P.2-6). Press bg to forward incoming calls or press g to place callers on hold.

,

Emergency calls (110, etc.) are possible while Keypad Lock is active. For more, see

P.2-5 "Emergency Calls."

11-2

Canceling

1

Enter Security Code

Q disappears and Keypad Lock is canceled.

^ Keypad Lock can be canceled during calls.

^ Keypad Lock remains active even if handset power is deactivated, then reactivated.

Auto Key Lock

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

A

Auto Key Lock

1

Enter Security Code

2

Choose

1On and press b

^ Keypad Lock activates from the next time handset power is turned on.

,

Emergency calls (110, etc.) are possible while Auto Key Lock is active. For more, see

P.2-5 "Emergency Calls."

F21

F23

Canceling

Cancel Keypad Lock (see above) first and follow these steps.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

A

Auto Key Lock

1

Enter Security Code

2

Choose

2Off and press b

Phone Book Lock

Protect Phone Book entries from accidental alteration and restrict access to Phone

Book information.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

A

Phone Book Lock

1

Enter Security Code

2

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel Phone Book Lock, choose

2Off A

Press b

,

When Phone Book Lock is active, the following Phone Book operations are disabled:

B Searching, saving, editing and dialing, including Speed Dial (see P.5-14)

B Creating QR Codes from Phone Book entries or Owner Profile (see P.12-27)

11

11-3

F24

F25

F26

Restrict Dial

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

A

Restrict Dial

1

Enter Security Code

2

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel Restrict Dial, choose

2Off A

Press b

11

When Restrict Dial is Active

C Dialing from Keypad is disabled except for emergency calls to Police (110), Fire (119) and Coast Guard (118).

,

Emergency calls (110, etc.) are possible while Restrict Dial is active. For more, see

P.2-5 "Emergency Calls."

Accept Call & Reject Call

Designate numbers from which to accept or reject calls.

Accept Call

Accept calls from designated numbers only. Calls from other numbers are rejected and caller hears a busy tone.

Reject calls from designated numbers. Caller hears a busy tone.

Reject Call

^ For rejected calls, Missed Calls appears in Missed Call notice (see P.2-15) and Reject appears in Call History.

^ Accept Call and Reject Call operate only when Caller ID is sent.

^ To reject calls with No Caller ID or Payphone calls, see P.11-6.

^ Accept Call and Reject Call cannot be set at the same time.

Saving Entries

^ Save at least one entry before activating Accept Call or Reject Call.

^ Save up to 10 entries each.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

1

Accept Call

1 Select

5Accept Call and press b

2 Enter Security Code

Reject Call

1 Select

6Reject Call and press b

2 Enter Security Code

3 Select

1Specify Number and press b

11-4

2

Select

3Save to List and press b

Names or phone numbers appear if saved.

C

To delete list entries, select a number

A

Press d y A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

3

Select a number and press

b

^ Select ------------------ for new entry.

4

Enter a phone number

C

To select from Phone Book, see P.5-13.

5

Press

b

Name appears if selected from Phone Book. Number appears if entered directly. (Name does not appear even if saved in Phone Book.)

^ Repeat Steps 3 - 5 to save other numbers.

Accept Call

^ At least one entry is required to set Accept Call (see P.11-4).

^ Cancel Reject Call before activating Accept Call.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

A

Accept Call

1

Enter Security Code

2

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b

Reject Call

^ At least one entry is required to set Reject Call (see P.11-4).

^ Cancel Accept Call before activating Reject Call.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

A

Reject Call

1

Enter Security Code

2

Select

1Specify Number and press b

3

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b

11

11-5

11

F22

Rejecting Other Calls

Reject calls with No Caller ID or Payphone calls. Handset does not ring and caller hears a rejection message.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

A

Reject Call

1

Enter Security Code

2

Select

2No ID or 3Payphone and press b

3

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b

Secret Mode

Activate Secret Mode to open Secret Mode entries.

Activating Secret Mode

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

1

Select

2Secret Mode and press b

2

Enter Security Code

Secret Mode is set and z appears.

,

Secret Mode is canceled when handset power is turned off.

Exiting Secret Mode

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

1

Select

2Secret Mode and press b z disappears and Secret Mode is canceled.

Opening Secret Mode Entries

Activate Secret Mode and open a Phone Book entry.

^ z lights for standard entries and flashes for Secret Mode entries.

^ To edit or delete Secret Mode entries, see procedures for standard entries.

Jz

Q ssyy c n

Ueda Mikio 005

1Friends dPattern 1 ePattern 2 fMail Folder 1 gMail Folder 2

03123XXXX3

Back Menu

11-6

Reset

Reset Defaults

Cancel custom settings and return handset functions to their default settings.

^ Phone Book entries are unaffected.

^ For settings affected by Reset, see P.14-2 - 14-5.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

A

Reset Defaults

1

Enter Security Code

2

Select

1OK and press b

C

To cancel, select

2Cancel A

Press b

Reset All

Clear all Phone Book entries, Original Tones and other data (including Mail and Web).

Custom settings return to their defaults. However, Security Code is unchanged.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Privacy

A

Reset All

1

Enter Security Code

2

Select

1OK and press b

C

To cancel, select

2Cancel A

Press b

,

Files removed using Reset All cannot be recovered.

F29

F27

11

11-7

Additional Functions

12-1

12

F38

Handy Call Functions

Signal Alert

When Signal Alert is active, handset emits warning beeps when the signal is weak and the call may be disconnected. Signal Alert is Off by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Signal Alert

1

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel Signal Alert, choose

2Off A

Press b

,

Even when Signal Alert is active, calls may be disconnected without warning.

Push Tones

Use Push Tones to send alphanumeric messages to pagers or operate a home answering machine remotely.

From Phone Book

Use this function to send set messages to pagers.

^ Save Push Tones to Phone Book first (see P.5-4).

^ When saving Push Tones to Phone Book (s), do not save other information to that entry.

1

After a connection is established, press

A (l) to open Phone Book

entry (see P.5-13)

2

Press

b

3

Select Send All Push Tones and press

b

+

Enter P (Pause) in Push Tones to separate each sequence. To send following sequences, press d g for each.

Direct Entry

Press Keypad to send individual Push Tones during calls.

1

After a connection is established, use Keypad to enter numbers

^ For more information, see the manual for the recipient device/corresponding service.

^ Use 0 - 9,

U

and # to send Push Tones.

2

Press

d g

12-2

Side Key Settings

For Incoming Calls

Press h for 1+ seconds to activate the assigned function while ringing/vibrating.

Available functions:

Hold

Quick Silent

Place callers on hold

Temporarily mute ringer for incoming calls

Reject Call

Reject and end the call

Message Recorder

Record caller messages on handset

Forward Voice Mail

Forward incoming calls to Voice Mail

Message Recorder is assigned by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

SideKey Settings

1

Select

1Incoming Calls and press b

2

Select a function and press

b

Standby

h

Press h for 1+ seconds to activate the assigned function in Standby.

Available functions:

Details

One-Shot Mail

Off

Corresponding indicators appear on Sub Display for incoming communications

Send a preset Sky Mail message to a specific recipient

No function is assigned. (Sub Display backlight illuminates.)

Details is set by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

SideKey Settings

1

Select

2Standby and press b

2

Select a function and press

b

C

To cancel, choose

3Off A

Press b

F39

12

12-3

F文字

F44

Message Recorder

Activating

Record caller messages on handset.

^ Message Recorder cannot be used when handset is off, out-of-range or in Off-Line Mode.

Use Voice Mail to record caller messages when Message Recorder is not available (see

P.13-4).

^ Record up to 90 seconds or 20 messages between Message Recorder, Voice Memo (see

P.12-6) and My Voice Memo (see P.12-6).

Index Menu

H

Tel Ops

A

Message Recorder

1

Select

1Recorder Settings and press b

Remaining recording time appears and Message Recorder menu returns (j appears).

C

To sample outgoing message, select

3Outgoing Message A

Press b

C

To activate or mute Earpiece for outgoing message/caller message recordings, select

4Volume Level A

Press b A

Select

1Volume Level Link or 2Silent A

Press b

12

Message Recorder Disabled

C In Manner Mode, activate/deactivate Message Recorder via Manner Settings only.

C When less than 4 seconds remain or 20 messages are recorded, Message Recorder is disabled. Delete messages (see P.12-6) to activate Message Recorder.

Answer Time

C Adjust ring time between 0 and 59 seconds (Message Recorder waits to answer calls). Answer Time is 09 seconds by default.

Press

b A

Select Tel Ops

A

Press

b A

Select

7Message Recorder A

Press

b A

Select

6Answer Time A

Press

b A

Enter time (00 - 59)

A

Press

b

B To start recording immediately after a call arrives, enter 00

A

Press b

C When Message Recorder and Voice Mail or Call Forwarding are both active, the function with the shortest ring time takes priority. However, if Message Recorder is full, handset is in Off-Line Mode or out-of-range, incoming calls are handled by Voice

Mail or Call Forwarding.

In-Car Recorder

C Activate In-Car Recorder to automatically activate Message Recorder when In-Car

Charger is in use. In-Car Recorder is active by default. To cancel this setting, follow these steps.

Press

b A

Select Tel Ops

A

Press

b A

Select

7Message Recorder A

Press

b

A

Select

5In-Car Recorder A

Press

b A

Choose

2Off A

Press

b

12-4

When Message Recorder is Active

C For incoming calls, outgoing message plays and recording starts.

^ Recording continues even if handset is closed.

^ To answer calls, press f during recording (no message will be recorded).

C When recording ends, l appears.

C If recording capacity becomes full (see P.12-4 "Message Recorder Disabled") after the recording, Message Recorder is deactivated and j disappears. (l remains lit until the message is deleted.)

Quick Recorder

C Use Quick Recorder to record caller messages on handset when Message Recorder is inactive. When a call arrives, press bj to activate Quick Recorder. Outgoing message plays and caller's message is recorded.

B Alternatively, set Side Key Settings for incoming calls (see P.12-3) to

4Message Recorder to activate Quick Recorder with Side Key. When a call arrives, press h for 1+ seconds.

Outgoing message plays and caller's message is recorded.

C When recording capacity is full (see P.12-4 "Message Recorder Disabled"), delete messages (see P.12-6) to activate Message Recorder.

F

スケジュール

メモ

Deactivating

Index Menu

H

Tel Ops

A

Message Recorder

1

Select

1Recorder Settings and press b

Message Recorder is deactivated and menu returns (j disappears).

Playing Messages

Index Menu

H

Tel Ops

A

Message Recorder

1

Select

2Play and press b

Number of recordings appears and playback starts from the most recent message. After all messages have played, playback ends and handset returns to Standby.

C

Press g to stop playback.

+

Message playback stops for incoming calls. Press f to answer the call.

C Playback Operations (Example: 3 Messages are Recorded)

Skip the message

Press

D during

playback

Replay the message

Press

C during

playback

Play the previous message

Press

C twice during

playback

No.3

No.2

No.1

Playback Playback

No.3

No.2

No.1

Playback

Playback

No.3

No.2

No.1

Playback

Playback

12

12-5

Deleting Recorded Messages

C While message is playing, press i A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

^ The next message plays, if any. l disappears after all messages are deleted.

12

Voice Memos

Record the other party's voice (Voice Memo) during a call or your own (My Voice

Memo) in Standby.

^ For Voice Memo, only the other party's voice is recorded.

^ Record up to 90 seconds between Voice Memo, My Voice Memo and Message Recorder

(see P.12-4). When less than 3 seconds remain or 20 messages are recorded, messages cannot be recorded.

1

Recording Voice Memo

1 During a call, press k for 1+ seconds

Recording My Voice Memo

1 In Standby, press k for 1+ seconds

2 Select

1My Voice Memo and press b

2

Recording starts

^ For My Voice Memo, talk to Microphone from the distance of 5 - 10 cm.

3

Press

b or k to stop recording

^ If Close to End Call (see P.2-3) is active, calls and Voice Memo recordings

+ end when handset is closed. The remaining recording time will not appear.

^ My Voice Memo stops for incoming calls. Press keys for Anykey Answer (see

P.2-6) to answer the call. (The recorded message is saved.)

+

^ Recordings remain even after handset power is turned off.

^ Refer to the description for Message Recorder on P.12-5 and above to play or delete Voice Memo/My Voice Memo.

Alarm

Setting Alarm

Set Alarm to sound at a specific time each day or on specific days of the week.

^ Save up to 5 Alarm settings.

^ Save a message or phone number to appear with Alarm. Customize Ring Time, Tone

Volume, Alarm Tone, LED Indicator and Vibration.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Alarm

1

Select a number and press

b

^ For a new entry, select --------------.

2

Select

2Input Time and press b

3

Enter time and press

b

^ Apply 24-hour clock format.

^ To set Alarm Tones, Vibration, Snooze, etc., see P.12-9.

4

Select

3Weekly and press b

5

Daily

1 Select

1Daily and press b

J

Q

Alarm 1 n

E

[12:15 ]

1Complete

2Input Time

3Weekly

4Sound

5Snooze

6Message

7Option Settings

Specified Day of the Week

1 Select

2Weekly and press b

2 Select a day of the week and press b

The day is set and R appears.

^ To cancel, highlight the selected day and press b.

3 Repeat 2 to select more

4 Press e j when finished

6

Press

e j when finished

Alarm is set.

^ For more settings, repeat Steps 1 - 6.

Set Select

Alarm Settings

7

Press

g to exit

Handset returns to Standby and d appears. y (blue) appears in Alarm list when Schedule

Alert (see P.12-9) is set.

F50

12

12-6 12-7

12

At Alarm Time

Alarm is activated, sounding/vibrating, etc. according to related settings.

Image appears if Display Images is set. However, SMAF file images take priority over

Display Images.

Stopping Alarm Tone

C Press g or h.

^ Alternatively, press keys for Anykey Answer (see P.2-6).

Snooze

C Alarm repeats at the set interval.

^ Snooze is not canceled even when Alarm is stopped by pressing g.

^ Accept incoming calls. After each call, press g to reactivate Snooze.

C To cancel Snooze after initial Alarm Time, press keys for Anykey Answer, choose

1Yes and press b.

^ Snooze is canceled automatically 60 minutes after initial Alarm Time.

Phone Number

C While saved name or number appears, press f to dial the number.

^ Cancel Snooze before dialing.

C Press g instead of f to close window without dialing.

Sending Advance Mail Message

C While saved address, name or number appears, press d I A

Select

2Send Mail A

Press

b A

Press

d N

^ Cancel Snooze before sending a message.

,

^ While Alarm Message, Phone Number or Advance Mail appears, Alarm will not sound for other Alarm settings.

^ If Alarm Time arrives during a call, no tone will sound. End the call to reactivate

Alarm.

+

While ALARM appears on Sub Display, press h to show the saved message, number, etc. Press h again for 1+ seconds to return to Standby (except when

Snooze is active).

Alarm Options

^ Follow these steps after Step 3 on P.12-7.

^ After each setting, Alarm settings window returns. Complete other settings.

Alarm Tones

Tone Volume

Ring Time

Snooze

Message

Vibration

LED Indicator

Mobile Light

Small Light

Cancel

Schedule Alert

Set a tone to sound at Alarm Time

Select

4Sound A

Press b A

Select

1Alarm Tones A

Press b A

Select a type

A

Press b A

Select a tone

A

Press b A

Press e W

^ To select a tone, see procedures for Ring Tone (see P.8-3).

Set volume for Alarm Tone

Select

4Sound A

Press b A

Select

2Tone Volume A

Press b

A

Select a level with

E A

Press b A

Press e W

^ No tone sounds when Silent is selected.

Set ring time

Select

4Sound A

Press b A

Select

3Ring Time A

Press b A

Enter time (02 - 99 seconds)

A

Press b A

Press e W

Set Alarm to activate at set intervals after initial Alarm Time

Select

5Snooze A

Press b A

Choose

1On A

Press b A

Enter interval (02 - 20 minutes)

A

Press b

^ To cancel, select

5Snooze A

Press b A

Choose

2Off A

Press b

Saved message appears at Alarm Time

Select

6Message A

Press b A

Enter message

A

Press b

Set handset to vibrate at Alarm Time

Select

7Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

1Vibration A

Press b

A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press b A

Press e W

^ Vibration Pattern is the same as that for incoming calls.

Customize blink patterns

Select

7Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

2LED Indicator A

Press b A

Select

1Mobile Light A

Press b A

Select a blink pattern

A

Press b A

Press e W

Select

7Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

2LED Indicator A

Press b A

Select

2Small Light A

Press b A

Select a blink pattern

A

Press b A

Press e W

Select

7Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

2LED Indicator A

Press b A

Choose

3Off A

Press b A

Press e W

Set an Alert to announce upcoming Alarm Time beforehand

Select

7Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

3Schedule Alert A

Press b A

Choose

1On A

Press b A

Enter time (02 - 99 minutes)

A

Press b A

Press e W

^ To cancel, select

7Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

3Schedule

Alert

A

Press b A

Choose

2Off A

Press b A

Press e W

12

12-8 12-9

12

Phone Number

Advance Mail

Saved phone number appears at Alarm Time

Select

7Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

4Phone Number A

Press b A

Enter a phone number

A

Press b A

Press e W

^ Dial the number after Alarm stops.

^ Phone Number and Advance Mail cannot be set at the same time.

^ To copy from Phone Book, press

A (l) before entering a phone number.

Saved outgoing mail appears at Alarm Time

Select

7Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

5Advance Mail A

Press b A

Select a message

A

Press b A

Press e W

^ To cancel, select a message and press d 3 A

Press e W

^ Advance Mail and Phone Number cannot be set at the same time.

Canceling & Reactivating Alarm

Cancel

Cancel Alarm and retain the settings

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Alarm

A

Select a number

Select

2Cancel A

Press

b

^ d or y disappears.

^ Reactivate Alarm to use the same settings.

Delete

Delete Alarm settings

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Alarm

A

Select a number

Select

3Delete A

Press

b

Settings

Reactivate Alarm with the same settings, or change current settings

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Alarm

Same Settings

Select a number

A

Press

b A

Select

1Settings A

Press

b A

Press

e j

Change Settings

Select a number

A

Press

b A

Select

1Settings A

Press

b A

Perform from Step 2 on P.12-7

12-10

Auto Power On/Off

Auto Power On

Use Auto Power On to activate handset power automatically at a specific time each day.

^ Once set, Auto Power On remains active until canceled.

^ Alarm can be set to sound for Auto Power On.

^ Auto Power On is Off by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Auto Power On

1

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel Auto Power On, choose

2Off A

Press b (Omit the next steps.)

2

Select

2Input Time and press b

3

Enter time and press

b

^ Apply 24-hour clock format.

^ To set Alarm, see P.12-12.

4

Press

e j

J

Q

1Complete

2Input Time

3Set Alarm

4Alarm Tones

5Tone Volume

6Vibration

7LED Indicator

8Ring Time

Set Select n E

F51:Auto Power On

[ 7:

** ]

Auto Power On Settings

At Auto Power On Time

C When Handset is Off

Handset turns on. When Alarm is set, Alarm is activated, sounding/vibrating, etc. according to related settings.

Image appears if Display Images is set. However, SMAF file images take priority over

Display Images.

C When Handset is On

When Alarm is set, Alarm is activated, sounding/vibrating, etc. according to related settings.

,

If Auto Power On Time arrives during a call, no tone will sound. Press to reactivate Alarm.

g after the call

F51

12

+

Press

P.2-6).

g to stop Alarm. Alternatively, press h or keys for Anykey Answer (see

12-11

F52

Setting Alarm

^ Follow these steps after Step 3 on P.12-11.

^ After each setting, Auto Power On settings window returns. Complete other settings.

^ Activate Alarm (Set Alarm On) before setting other Alarm options.

Set Alarm

Alarm Tones

Tone Volume

Vibration

LED Indicator

Mobile Light

Small Light

Cancel

Ring Time

Activate Alarm at Auto Power On Time

Select

3Set Alarm A

Press b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press b

Set a tone to sound at Alarm Time

Select

4Alarm Tones A

Press b A

Select a type

A

Press b A

Select a tone

A

Press b

^ To select a tone, see procedures for Ring Tone (see P.8-3).

Set volume for Alarm Tone

Select

5Tone Volume A

Press b A

Select a level with

E A

Press b

^ No tone sounds when Silent is selected.

Set handset to vibrate at Auto Power On Time

Select

6Vibration A

Press b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press b

^ Vibration Pattern is the same as that for incoming calls.

Customize blink patterns

Select

7LED Indicator A

Press b A

Select

1Mobile Light A

Press b A

Select a blink pattern

A

Press b

Select

7LED Indicator A

Press b A

Select

2Small Light A

Press b

A

Select a blink pattern

A

Press b

Select

7LED Indicator A

Press b A

Choose

3Off A

Press b

Set ring time

Select

8Ring Time A

Press b A

Enter time (02 - 99 seconds)

A

Press b

12

Auto Power Off

Use Auto Power Off to deactivate handset power automatically at a specific time each day.

^ Once set, Auto Power Off remains active until canceled.

^ Auto Power Off is Off by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Auto Power Off

1

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel Auto Power Off, choose

2Off A

Press b (Omit the next step.)

2

Enter time and press

^ Apply 24-hour clock format.

b

12-12

At Auto Power Off Time

Handset power turns off.

^ When handset is in use, a confirmation appears (after operation if the time arrives during a call).

B Handset power turns off after a minute of inactivity. Alternatively, choose

1Yes and press b.

Unsaved data will be deleted.

B Choose

2No and press b to cancel Auto Power Off.

^ Even if there are messages saved as Auto Send, handset power turns off without confirmation.

Schedule

Enter upcoming events with dates and times. Save general plans as Action Items.

Save up to 150 Schedule entries (up to 20 entries per day) and 50 Action Items.

Saving Entries

Saving Schedule Entries

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

1

Press

k

^ Press d # to select date from Calendar.

2

Enter date and time and press

b

^ Enter 4 digits for year, 2 digits for month and day each, and apply

24-hour clock format for time.

^ Date and time are mandatory.

3

Select

3Stamp Selection and press b

4

Select a stamp and press

b

5

Select

4Schedule and press b

6

Enter text and press

b

^ Enter up to 120 single-byte characters.

^ Set Alarm (see P.12-14) and Option Settings (see P.12-16).

7

Press

e j when finished

^ Repeat Steps 1 - 7 to enter more entries.

^ The scheduled date is underlined. Stamp appears if set.

J

Q n

G

View Select Menu

Schedule Window

J

Q n

1Complete

2Enter Date & Time

3Stamp Selection

4Schedule

5Set Alarm

6Option Settings

E

Schedule

[2

**5/*9/2* 18:3* ]

Set Select

Schedule Settings

12

12-13

On Scheduled Day

C w (Alarm is set) or x (Alarm is not set) appears. (They will disappear after Schedule

Time.)

Saving Action Items

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

1

Press

j

2

Enter text and press

b

^ Enter up to 120 single-byte characters.

3

Select

3Stamp Selection and press b

4

Select a stamp and press

^ Set Option Settings (see P.12-16).

b

5

Press

e j when finished

^ Repeat Steps 1 - 5 to enter more entries.

J

Q

Action Item n

E

[ ]

1Complete

2Message

3Stamp Selection

4Option Settings

12

Set Select

Action Item Settings

Setting Alarm

Alarm

Set Alarm to sound at Schedule Time

In Schedule settings window (see Step 6 on P.12-13), select

5Set Alarm

A

Press

b A

Choose

1On A

Press

b

^ Set Alarm window opens. For more, see P.12-15 "Alarm Options."

^ Press e W to return to Schedule settings window. Complete other settings.

Alarm Options

^ Follow these steps after opening Set Alarm window for Schedule.

^ After each setting, Set Alarm window returns.

Alarm Tones

Tone Volume

Ring Time

Snooze

Vibration

LED Indicator

Mobile Light

Small Light

Cancel

Schedule Alert

Set a tone to sound at Alarm Time

Select

1Sound A

Press b A

Select

1Alarm Tones A

Press b A

Select a type

A

Press b A

Select a tone

A

Press b A

Press e W

^ To select a tone, see procedures for Ring Tone (see P.8-3).

Set volume for Alarm Tone

Select

1Sound A

Press b A

Select

2Tone Volume A

Press b

A

Select a level with

E A

Press b A

Press e W

^ No tone sounds when Silent is selected.

Set ring time

Select

1Sound A

Press b A

Select

3Ring Time A

Press b A

Enter time (02 - 99 seconds)

A

Press b A

Press e W

Set Alarm to activate at set intervals after initial Alarm Time

Select

2Snooze A

Press b A

Choose

1On A

Press b A

Enter interval (02 - 20 minutes)

A

Press b

^ To cancel, select

2Snooze A

Press b A

Choose

2Off A

Press b

Set handset to vibrate at Alarm Time

Select

3Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

1Vibration A

Press b

A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press b A

Press e W

^ Vibration Pattern is the same as that for incoming calls.

Customize blink patterns

Select

3Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

2LED Indicator A

Press b A

Select

1Mobile Light A

Press b A

Select a blink pattern

A

Press b A

Press e W

Select

3Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

2LED Indicator A

Press b A

Select

2Small Light A

Press b A

Select a blink pattern

A

Press b A

Press e W

Select

3Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

3LED Indicator A

Press b A

Choose

3Off A

Press b A

Press e W

Set an Alert to announce upcoming Alarm Time beforehand

Select

3Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

3Schedule Alert A

Press b A

Select from

2Minutes to 6Months A

Press b A

Enter amount of time (5 minutes, 1 week, etc.)

A

Press b A

Press e W

^ To cancel, select

3Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

3Schedule

Alert

A

Press b A

Choose

1Off A

Press b A

Press e W

12

12-14 12-15

12

At Schedule Alarm Time

When Alarm is set, Alarm is activated, sounding/vibrating, etc. according to related settings.

^ Image appears if Display Images is set. However, SMAF file images take priority over

Display Images.

^ For stopping Alarm Tone, dialing numbers, sending Advance Mail and canceling Snooze, see P.12-8.

,

If Alarm Time arrives during a call, no tone will sound. Press reactivate Alarm.

g after the call to

+

While ALARM appears on Sub Display, press h to show the saved message, number, etc. Press h again for 1+ seconds to return to Standby (except when

Snooze is active).

Schedule & Action Item Options

^ Follow these steps after Step 6 on P.12-13 (Schedule) or Step 4 on P.12-14 (Action Item).

^ After each setting, Schedule settings window or Action Item settings window returns.

Complete other settings.

Attach Image

(Schedule only)

Phone Number

(Schedule only)

Advance Mail

(Schedule only)

Set an image to appear at Schedule Time

Select

6Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

1Attach Image A

Press b A

Select

2Data Folder A

Press b A

Select a folder

A

Press b A

Select an image

A

Press b A

Press e W

^ To cancel, select

6Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

1Attach Image

A

Press b A

Select

3Cancel A

Press b A

Press e W

^ Select

1Camera instead of 2Data Folder to capture a still image or record video.

Saved phone number appears at Schedule Time

Select

6Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

5Phone Number A

Press b A

Enter a phone number

A

Press b A

Press e W

^ Dial the number after Alarm stops.

^ Phone Number and Advance Mail cannot be set at the same time.

^ To copy from Phone Book, press

A (l) before entering a phone number.

Saved outgoing mail appears at Schedule Time

Select

6Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

6Advance Mail A

Press b A

Select a message

A

Press b A

Press e W

^ To cancel, select a message and press d 3 A

Press e W

^ Advance Mail and Phone Number cannot be set at the same time.

12-16

Date Color

(Schedule only)

Auto Protect

Standby Display

Set Calendar date color

Select

6Option Settings A

Press b A

Select

2Date Color A

Press b A

Select a color

A

Press b A

Press e W

^ Colors do not appear in 1-Week view (see below).

^ When multiple entries are saved for the date, setting for the earliest applies.

Protect entries from Auto Delete

Select Option Settings

A

Press b A

Select Auto Protect

A

Press b A

Choose

1On (protect) or 2Off (cancel) A

Press b A

Press e W

^ When Auto Delete is Off, entries are protected automatically regardless of this setting.

Show or hide entries in Standby

Select Option Settings

A

Press b A

Select Standby Display

A

Press b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press b A

Press e W

^ The setting is effective when Clock Display is set to Calendar (see

P.7-3). For Action Item, set Calendar type to Schedule & Stamps.

Opening Entries

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

1

Schedule Entries

1 Select a date and press b

2 Select an entry and press b

J

Q

2

**5/*9/26(Mon)

19:3

*

Bring a gift!

n

Action Items

1 Press e ) until Action Item window

opens

2 Select an entry and press b

C

To delete an entry, select one

A

Press d I A

Back

Select

5Delete Item A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

2

Press

e W to end

Menu

Toggling View

C Press b A

Select Briefcase

A

Press

b A

Select

2Schedule A

Press

b A

Press

e )

^ Press e ) to toggle between Action Item, 1-Week, 1-Month, All and

Day Detail/Stamps.

C To select the types of view that toggle, follow these steps.

Press

b A

Select Briefcase

A

Press

b A

Select

2Schedule A

Press

b

A

Press

d I A

Select

4View A

Press

b A

Select

6Toggle View A

Press

b A

Select a type

Press

e) A

Press

b

*

A

Press

e @ A

(Select another type

A

*Select Q to check and select R to uncheck.

12

12-17

12

Schedule Display for Standby

C To view Schedule entries in Standby, set Standby Display (see P.12-17) in Option

Settings to On.

C Show or hide Schedule/Action Item details as follows:

^ Set Calendar type to Schedule & Stamps in Clock Display and follow these steps.

Press

b A

Select Briefcase

A

Press

b A

Select

2Schedule A

Press

b

A

Press

d I A

Select

0Standby Display A

Press

b A

Select an item

A

Press

b

Editing Entries

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

1

Schedule Entries

1 Select a date and press b

Action Items

1 Press e ) until Action Item window opens

2

Select an entry and press

d I

3

Select Edit and press

b

4

Select an item and press

b

^ For details, see procedures for saving Schedule/Action Item.

5

When finished editing, press

e j

6

Select

1New Entry or 2Overwrite and press b

Deleting Entries

Delete Item

Delete one entry

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

A

Select a date

A

Select an entry

A

Menu (

d) A

Delete Item

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

^ For Action Items, see Step 1 on P.12-17.

One Day

Schedules

Delete the day's Schedule entries

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

A

Select a date

A

Menu (

d) A

Delete All

Select

2One Day Schedules A

Press

b A

Select

1Select All or

2Unprotected A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

1Yes

A

Press

b

12-18

Delete All

Delete all past Schedule entries or all entries

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

A

Menu (

d) A

Delete All

Select

1Past Schedules, 3Schedules or 4Action Items A

Press

b

A

Select

1Select All or 2Unprotected A

Press

b A

Enter Security

Code

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Other Schedule Settings

Auto Delete

Delete the oldest unprotected Schedule or Action Item entries automatically when memory is full

KOff

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

A

Menu (

d) A

Auto Delete

Select

1Schedule or 2Action Item A

Press

b A

Select

1Auto

Delete On or

2Auto Delete Off A

Press

b

Secret Mode

Security Code must be entered to save and check

Schedule/Action Item entries

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

Activating

Press

d I A

Select

8Secret Mode A

Press

b A

Enter

Security Code

A

Choose

1On A

Press

b

Canceling

Enter Security Code

A

Press

d I A

Select

8Secret Mode A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

2Off A

Press

b

Set Color

Change color for days of the week

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

A

Menu (

d) A

Set Color

Select a day

A

Press

b A

Select a color

A

Press

b

View

Change view

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

A

Menu (

d) A

View

Select from

1Day Detail/Stamps to 5All A

Press

b

12

Event List

Check the number of saved entries

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Schedule

A

Menu (

d)

Select LEvent List

A

Press

b

12-19

F54

Useful Diary

Keep a diary with photos or video.

^ Save up to 400 entries (500 single-byte characters each).

^ When memory is full, delete entries to make room for new ones (see P.12-22).

Saving Entries

12

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Useful Diary

1

Select

1New Diary and press b

Useful Diary window for the day opens.

C

To specify other dates, select

1Date A

Press b A

Enter date

A

Press b

^ When saving a still image or video only, skip ahead to Step 4.

2

Select

2Message and press b

3

Enter text and press

b

^ When saving text only, skip ahead to Step 6.

C

To use Fixed Text, press e p A

Select a type

A

Press b twice

B Fixed Text cannot be entered after entering characters.

4

Select

3Image Setting and press b

5

Capturing Still Image/Recording Video

1 Select

1Camera and press b

2 Select a mode and press b

3 Capture an image or record video and save it

Selecting from Data Folder

1 Select

2Data Folder and press b

2 Select a still image or video and press b

^ Some files cannot be selected.

Canceling

1 Select

3Cancel and press b

6

Press

e j

C

To create more entries, press d I A

Select

1Create A

Press b A

Enter date

A

Press b A

Repeat Steps 2 - 6

Editing/Deleting Fixed Text

C To edit Fixed Text, press e p in Step 3 on P.12-20 and follow these steps.

Select Fixed Text

A

Press

d I A

Select

2Edit A

Press

b A

Edit title

A

Press

b A

Edit content

A

Press

b

B Fixed Text is overwritten.

C To delete single Fixed Text, press e p in Step 3 on P.12-20 and follow these steps.

Select Fixed Text

A

Press

d I A

Select

3Delete Item A

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

B Default Fixed Text returns when edited Fixed Text is deleted.

C To delete all Fixed Text, press e p in Step 3 on P.12-20 and follow these steps.

Press

d I A

Select

4Delete All A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

B Default Fixed Text returns when edited Fixed Text is deleted.

Secret Mode (Restrict Access to Useful Diary)

C To activate Secret Mode, follow these steps in Step 1 on P.12-20.

Select

3Secret Mode A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

1On A

Press

b

B From the next time, Security Code must be entered to use Useful Diary.

C To cancel Secret Mode, enter Security Code in Step 1 on P.12-20 and follow these steps.

Select

3Secret Mode A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

2Off A

Press

b

Opening Entries

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Useful Diary

1

Select

2Diary List and press b

Entries appear most recent first.

2

Select an entry and press

b

C

To open saved still image, press b 9.

B Press e W to return.

C

To play saved video, press b L.

B Press e C to return.

12

12-20 12-21

12

Sending Entries

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Useful Diary

A

Diary List

1

Select an entry and press

e A

^ For entries without still image, skip ahead to Step 3.

2

Choose

1Yes and press b

^ Some images may not be attached.

^ Skip ahead to Step 4.

C

To send text only, choose

2No A

Press b A

Proceed to Step 3

C

If the image is too large, select

1Attach 1/4 Size or 2Attach Original A

Press b A

Skip ahead to Step 4

3

Select

1Long Mail or 2Sky Mail and press b

^ For

2Sky Mail, text exceeding the character limit is lost.

4

Complete other fields and send mail (see IP.3-3)

Editing Entries

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Useful Diary

A

Diary List

A

Open an entry

A

Menu (

d)

1

Select Edit and press

b

2

Select an item and press

b

^ For details, see procedures for saving Useful Diary.

3

When finished editing, press

e j

Deleting Entries

Delete Item

Delete one entry

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Useful Diary

A

Diary List

A

Select an entry

A

Menu (

d) A

Delete Item

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Delete all past entries or all entries

Delete All

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Useful Diary

A

Diary List

A

Menu (

d)

Select

3Delete All or 4Delete All Past A

Press

b A

Enter Security

Code

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Stopwatch

Record elapsed time for up to 24 hours (23 hours 59 minutes 59.9 seconds) in

0.1-second increments. Use lap time feature to segment elapsed time.

^ Save times (including the last five lap times) to Text Memo.

^ Stopwatch ends when battery level is low.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Stopwatch

1

Press

b

Stopwatch starts.

C

To record Lap times, press d ,.

2

Press

b to stop

The last five Lap times are recorded. The records are deleted when Stopwatch is canceled.

C

To save the records to Text Memo, press d I A

Select

1Save Text Memo A

Press b A

Select a number

A

Press b

B To overwrite saved record/entry, choose

1Yes A

Press b

C

To check saved records, press d I A

Select

2See Text Memo A

Press b A

Select a number

A

Press b

C

Press b to resume Stopwatch.

C

Press e l to clear the record.

3

Press

g or i to exit

C

When Stopwatch is running or paused, choose

1Yes A

Press b

+ ^ Records are deleted when Stopwatch is canceled. Save records to Text Memo.

^ Stopwatch is not affected by incoming calls. Press g after the call to return to

Stopwatch.

^ Alarm (see P.12-8) is disabled while Stopwatch window is open, and starts when handset returns to Standby.

^ Count continues even if handset is closed. (

R flashes on Sub Display.)

F55

12

12-22 12-23

F56

Kitchen Timer

Set Kitchen Timer up to 60 minutes in 1-second increments. Tone sounds when set time elapses.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Clock

A

Kitchen Timer

1

Enter time (00:01 - 60:00)

^ Use

F to move cursor and correct the number.

2

Press

b

^ When times over 60 minutes (60:00) are entered, the last set time returns.

C

To change time, press d Z A

Enter time

A

Press b

3

Press

b

Countdown starts.

4

Press

b to stop

C

Press b to resume.

C

Press e l to return to the set time.

5

Press

g or i to exit

C

When Kitchen Timer is running or paused, choose

1Yes A

Press b

12

Kitchen Timer End

C Timer End appears. Tone sounds and LED Indicator flashes. (Tone is fixed to

Pattern 1. Volume and LED Indicator depend on the settings for Sound Volume and

Set LED to Sound respectively. Vibration is Off.)

^ Tone stops automatically after 60 seconds. Press b to stop manually.

^ In Manner Mode, handset vibrates. (Vibration Pattern is Vibration 1. Volume and

LED Indicator depend on Manner Settings.)

^ Tone and Vibration Pattern cannot be changed.

C When the set timer time has elapsed during a call, Timer End appears after g is pressed to end the call.

+

^ Countdown is not affected by incoming calls. Press g after the call to return to

Kitchen Timer window.

^ Press j for 1+ seconds to activate or cancel Manner Mode.

^ Alarm (see P.12-8) is disabled while Kitchen Timer window is open, and starts when handset returns to Standby.

^ Count continues even if handset is closed. (

R flashes on Sub Display.)

12-24

Barcode

Scan barcodes created on handset or downloaded via Web or Long Mail.

^ Scan UPC (JAN) or QR Codes. Handset automatically detects code type and reads code data.

^ Barcodes cannot be scanned with mobile camera.

+

^ UPC (Universal Product Code) or JAN (Japanese Article Number) is a series of varying width vertical lines (called bars) and spaces. Bars and spaces together are elements, combinations of which represent different numbers. Handset cannot read other one-dimensional barcodes (ITF Code, Code39, Codabar/NW-7, etc.).

^ QR (Quick Response) Code is a matrix symbology consisting of an array of nominally square cells. It allows omni-directional reading of up to 7,366 characters-numeric, alphanumeric, byte data as well as kanji and kana.

^ QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

1

Select Images and press

b

C

To open files in sub folders, select a folder

A

Press b

2

Select a barcode image and press

d I

3

Select

6Barcode Reader and press b

4

Select

1Scan Code and press b

Scan results appear.

C

Using Scan Results: see P.12-26

Split Data

C Split Data Scan next Symbol? appears.

To continue, choose

1Yes A

Press

b A

Select next code

A

Press

b

To cancel, choose

2No A

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

C Data will not be saved until all split data is scanned.

C The scanning status appears on the first line of Display. For example, r indicates that 1 of 4 codes has been scanned.

Font & Image Size

C While scan results appear, press d I A

Select Display Size

A

Press

b

A

Select a size

A

Press

b

^ Medium Font/100% is set by default.

^ Alternatively, press k to toggle between Medium Font/200%, Small Font/100%,

Small Font/200%, Large Font/100%, Large Font/200% and Medium Font/100%.

(q appears for 100% and p for 200%.)

C The changes do not affect the settings for received/sent messages or Web.

12

12-25

12

,

^ Resized QR Codes may be invalid.

^ For invalid codes, Error This data may be Incorrect appears.

C Using Scan Results

Place Calls

1

Send Mail

3

Quote & Send Mail

Save to Phone

Book

1, 3

Access Mobile

Internet Sites

4

Save to Data Folder

(Images & Melodies)

Copy Text

Select a number starting with TEL:

2 A

Press b A

Select mCall

A

Press b A

Press f

Select a mail address including @

A

Press b A

Select mSend Mail

A

Press b A

Select

1Send Long Mail or 2Send Sky Mail A

Press b

(See IP.3-3 for more.)

Press d I A

Select Send Mail

A

Press b A

Select

1Send Long Mail or 2Send Sky Mail A

Press b A

Scan results appear

A

Press b

B To use a part of text, press d { A

Highlight the first character of the text block to copy

A

Press b A

Highlight the text block

A

Press b (See IP.3-3 for more.)

Select a number starting with TEL:

2

or a mail address including @

A

Press b A

Select mAdd to Phone Book

A

Press b (See Step 4 on

P.5-8 for more.)

Select a URL starting with http://

A

Press b A

Select mOpen Link

A

Press b A

Perform Step 2 in "URLs" on IP.4-8

Select an image or melody file

A

Press b A

Select To Data Folder

A

Press b A

Check file name

A

Press b

Press d I A

Select Copy

A

Press b A

Highlight the first character of the text block to copy

A

Press b A

Highlight the text block

A

Press b

^ Paste the copied text into a text entry window.

1

Available when text is in TEL:

U format.

2

3

Text strings of 10 to 24 digits starting with 0 are also recognized as phone numbers.

Available when text is in

U@U format.

4

Available when text is in http://

U format.

U represents one or more alphanumerics.

MEMORY: or MAILTO:

C When MEMORY: or MAILTO: appears in scan results, press b to save text underlined with a dotted line to Phone Book or send it via Sky/Long Mail.

^ All underlined items are entered. However, text after an invalid character is not underlined and is not copied.

J q

Q

Scanned Data

________________

NAME2:Ueda Mikio

MAIL1:[email protected]

_______________ n

Back Select Menu

12-26

Create QR Codes

Create QR Codes from Owner Profile, Phone Book, Mail, Text

Bytes Used

Total Bytes

Memo, Melodies or Images.

^ Use saved contents or enter new contents for a QR Code.

^ Save up to the equivalent of 469 digits or 120 kanji per QR Code.

^ Large items up to 3,416 bytes are divided into maximum of 16 QR

^ Created QR Codes are saved to Data Folder (Images). See P.9-3

1

Codes.

for more about Data Folder.

Open a file or entry and press

b I or d I

^ For mail, select a message in Mail Box.

J

Q

Create QR Code n

E

Phone Book

82/3416( 1/16) cUeda Mikio dUeda Mikio e03123XXXX3 e<Unsaved> [email protected]

i<Unsaved> l<Unsaved>

Cancel Select Create

C

For image files in Data Folder, select a file

A

Press d I

A

Select

6Barcode Reader A

Press b A

Select

2Create

QR Code

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b twice

Number of Codes

Code Limit

Create QR Code

Window (Phone Book)

(Omit the next steps.)

C

For melody files in Data Folder, select a file

A

Press d I A

Select

4Create QR

Code

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b twice (Omit the next steps.)

B Create QR Codes from E-Animation in the same manner as above.

B When Format? appears, select a format

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b twice (Omit the next steps.)

2

Select Create QR Code and press

b

Create QR Code window for each item opens.

C

To add text or attachments, select a field

A

Press b A

Enter contents

A

Press b

3

Press

d m

4

Press

b

Attaching to Long Mail

C Before pressing b to save in Step 4, press d I A

Select

1Attachment

A

Press

b A

Perform from Step 2 on IP.3-3

Deleting Created QR Codes

C Before pressing b to save in Step 4, press d I A

Select

2Delete A

Press

b A

Select a file

A

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Incoming Calls while Creating

C Contents are temporarily saved. To return, end the call and follow these steps.

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

12

12-27

F33

12

Battery Saving

Power Saving

Use Power Saving to reduce transmission signal strength.

^ When Power Saving is active, other parties may not be able to hear you at the beginning of a call.

^ Power Saving is active by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Battery Saving

A

Power Saving

1

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel Power Saving, choose

2Off A

Press b

Panel Saving

Use Panel Saving to place handset in hibernation mode after a period of inactivity.

This will extend Battery Time. Period of inactivity can be specified between 2 and 20 minutes.

Handset may not enter Panel Saving mode depending on its status, such as during calls or when using Vodafone live!.

Setting Panel Saving

Handset enters Panel Saving mode after five minutes of inactivity by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Battery Saving

A

Panel Saving

A

On/Off

1

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel Panel Saving, select

2Off (Light Low) or 3Off (Light Off) A

Press b (Omit the next step.)

2

Enter time (02 - 20 minutes) and press

b

Panel Saving Mode

C After a period of inactivity, Display shuts down automatically.

^ Pressing a key or receiving a call cancels Panel Saving mode (cancel Panel Saving mode first for Keypad operations).

^ If handset is closed in Panel Saving mode, the sound for

3Power On in Sound

Effects settings (see P.8-5) rings. Open handset to cancel Panel Saving mode.

12-28

,

Battery is consumed faster when Panel Saving is Off. More handset power is consumed with

2Off (Light Low).

+

Set shorter time to extend Battery Time.

Flash Small Light (Orange)

Small Light does not flash in Panel Saving mode by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

A

Battery Saving

A

Panel Saving

A

LED Indicator

1

Select

1LED Indicator On and press b

C

To cancel, select

2LED Indicator Off A

Press b

+

In Off-Line Mode, Small Light flashes regardless of this setting.

Calculator

Use Calculator for basic arithmetic, percentage, and tax calculation.

^ Key Assignments:

+ (Add)

- (Subtract) x (Multiply)

÷ (Divide)

= (Equal)

C

･CE (Clear)

CM (Clear Memory)

B

A

C

D b i k

^ Tax rate is 5% by default.

RM (Recall Memory)

M+ (Add Memory)

. (Decimal)

+/- (Switch)

% (Percent)

TAX (Tax)

j d q p e f

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

J

Q

F49:Calculator

* n

1

Select

9Calculator and press b

^ Use Keypad to enter digits, and the above keys for calculation.

^ Alternatively, in Standby, enter any number, then press b to open Calculator.

C

To change tax rate, enter rate (01 - 99%)

A

Press f (Long Press)

2

Press

g to end

F49

12

12-29

F42

Saved Information

C Copy calculation results or numbers saved in Memory to text entry windows.

In a text entry window, press

d I A

Press

kSaved Info A

Press

b

A

Select

4Calculator A

Press

b A

Select an entry

A

Press

b A

Move cursor to target location

A

Press

b

^ The last 10 calculation results are saved.

12

+

^ Incoming calls clear entered numbers and results. However, numbers saved in

Memory are not affected.

^ Press k to clear Memory before starting Memory calculations.

^ Numbers saved in Memory remain even if Calculator is closed, but are cleared when handset power is turned off.

Spending Memo

Use Spending Memo to add expenses, such as travel expenses.

^ Enter up to 31 entries (up to 30,999,969 yen in total, 999,999 yen per entry).

^ Spending Memo cannot be opened during a call.

Entry

Enter monetary figure

Enter amount

A

Press

k A

Select a category

A

Press

b

^ The entry date and time is automatically saved.

^ If Clock is unset (see P.1-20), entry date and time will be saved as --/-- --:--.

Totals

Check entries

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Spending Memo

Select

1Totals A

Press

b

C

Use

E to scroll through entries.

Delete

Delete entries

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Spending Memo

A

Totals

Press

b A

Press

i A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

New Item

Rename categories

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Spending Memo

A

New Item

Select a category

A

Press

b A

Edit

A

Press

b

^ Enter up to 6 single-byte characters.

^ Clear the name and press b. Default name returns.

Pen Light

Use handset as a flashlight.

Illuminate

Illuminate Pen Light

In Standby, double-press

h

C

To turn off, press h, g or i.

Pen Light Settings

Change Lighting Time

KLighting Time: 1 Minute

Index Menu

H

Briefcase

A

Pen Light

Select

2Lighting Time A

Press

b A

Select time

A

Press

b

, ^ Do not point Pen Light at people or look at it directly.

^ Pen light cannot be used when:

B Mobile camera is active B Key Guard is set B Keypad Lock is set

B During calls

B Calling/sending

B Receiving calls/info

B Receiving mail

B Stopwatch is active

B Playing melodies

B SMAF file is active

B Kitchen Timer is active

B Playing Action Snap files

+

^ Pen Light goes off and Display Backlight illuminates for incoming calls, messages, etc.

^ Pen Light goes off and Display Backlight illuminates for incoming calls, messages, etc.

B Backlight illuminates after Lighting Time when a V-Application is active and

Backlight in V-Appli Settings (see IP.12-2) is Always Active.

^ When handset is closed, opening handset turns off Pen Light.

^ Select shorter Lighting Time to extend Battery Time.

12

12-30 12-31

12

Headphones

Initiating Calls

Use Call Button on headphones (optional accessory) to call the number saved in

Memory Number 000 (see P.5-5).

1

Connect headphones to handset

2

Press Call Button for 1+ seconds until a double beep sounds

^ The number is dialed.

3

Press Call Button for 1+ seconds until a beep sounds

Call ends. Alternatively, press g to disconnect call.

^ Closing handset does not end the call.

,

^ If Memory Number 000 is a Secret Mode entry, activate Secret Mode to call it (see

P.11-6).

^ Cancel Keypad Lock and Phone Book Lock to place calls (see P.11-2 - 11-3).

^ Do not wrap cord around handset or Antenna. This may cause malfunction. Noise interference occurs if cord is close to Internal Antenna.

^ Plug in headphones firmly. If not, sounds may not be heard.

Answering Calls

1

Connect headphones to handset

Ring Tone sounds from headphones only or from both headphones and handset speaker depending on the setting (see P.12-33).

2

Press Call Button for 1+ seconds to answer a call

3

Press Call Button for 1+ seconds until a beep sounds

Call ends. Alternatively, press g to disconnect call.

^ Closing handset does not end the call.

Ringer Out

When headphones are connected to handset, Ring Tone sounds from headphones and handset speaker.

To disable speaker, follow these steps.

Earphone/Speaker is set by default.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Sounds

A

Ringer Out

1

Select

1Earphone and press b

C

To use headphones and speaker, select

2Earphone/Speaker A

Press b

+

Even if Earphone is selected, Ring Tone sounds from speaker when headphones are not connected.

F15

Fax & PC Transmissions

FAX

Transmissions

Use handset for fax transmissions via data/fax card

Connect a data/fax card

^ FAX COM. appears during G3 FAX transmissions.

PC Transmissions

Use handset for PC transmissions via data/fax card

Connect a data/fax card

^ MODEM COM. appears during PC transmissions.

,

Use handset for fax or PC transmissions only when signal conditions are stable.

+

^ Sign-in window may differ by data/fax card.

^ Handset supports 9,600 bps high-speed data transmissions.

^ To connect data/fax cards to fax machines or PCs, see the manuals for the device.

12

12-32 12-33

Optional Services

13-1

13

Optional Services Overview

^ When handset is out-of-range or outside your subscription area, access Optional

Services from a touch-tone landline.

^ For details, contact Vodafone Customer Center, General Information (see P.14-20).

Call

Forwarding

Voice Mail

*

Call Waiting

*

When you know you will be unable to receive calls to your handset, use Call

Forwarding to automatically transfer calls to another phone number (see P.13-3)

Unanswered calls are forwarded to Voice Mail. Retrieve caller messages from handset or any touch-tone phone, anytime. Voice Mail indicator appears on handset after message is recorded (see P.13-4).

Call Waiting alerts you to incoming calls when the line is already engaged.

After the tone, place the current call on hold and answer the second, or alternate between calls (see P.13-6).

3 Way Calling

*

Caller ID

*

Open a second line while the first is engaged. Switch back and forth between two lines or talk on both simultaneously. Create a conference call by adding another party to an existing conversation (see P.13-7).

Use Caller ID to identify callers before answering. Show or hide your own phone number when placing calls. When no Caller ID is sent, the reason appears.

*An additional contract is required.

13-2

Call Forwarding

^ Call Forwarding and Voice Mail cannot be used at the same time.

^ Activating Call Forwarding cancels Voice Mail.

Set Fwd Number

Save a forwarding number

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Call Forwarding

A

Set Fwd Number

Enter a phone number

A

Press

b

Saved number appears following Connecting to Network....

^ Include the area code for landline phone numbers.

+

Phone Numbers Beginning with the Following Numbers Cannot be Saved:

^ 1 (Public Service Numbers: 110, 119, 118, etc.)

^ 0120 (Toll-free numbers)

^ 0990 (Fee-based services: Dial Q2, etc.)

F71

F73

F74

Start Fwd

Initiate Call Forwarding

CSave a forwarding number beforehand.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Call Forwarding

A

Start Fwd

Select

1Call (handset rings/vibrates before forwarding calls) or

2No Call (calls are forwarded immediately) A

Press

b

テンソウサービス

^

2No Call is currently available only for subscribers in Kanto, Koshin, Tokai and Kansai areas.

Cancel Secretary

Cancel Call Forwarding

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Cancel Secretary

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

13

Check Secretary

Check Call Forwarding status

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Check Secretary

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Service status appears.

Incoming Calls while Call Forwarding is Active

C To answer calls, press f while handset is ringing/vibrating.

^ Calls are forwarded immediately when No Call is set. (Available only for subscribers in Kanto, Koshin, Tokai and Kansai areas.)

13-3

F72

F73

Voice Mail

An additional contract is required.

^ For details, contact Vodafone Customer Center, General Information (see P.14-20).

^ Voice Mail and Call Forwarding cannot be used at the same time.

^ Activating Voice Mail cancels Call Forwarding.

Voice Mail

Initiate Voice Mail

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Voice Mail

Select

1Call (handset rings/vibrates before forwarding calls) or

2No Call (calls are forwarded immediately) A

Press

b

ルスバンサービス ON

^

2No Call is currently available only for subscribers in Kanto, Koshin, Tokai and Kansai areas.

13

Incoming Calls while Voice Mail is Active

C To answer calls, press f while handset is ringing/vibrating.

^ Calls are forwarded immediately when No Call is set. (Available only for subscribers in Kanto, Koshin, Tokai and Kansai areas, and when used in those areas.)

C k appears on handset after message is recorded.

When Voice Mail is Canceled (Kanto Koshin, Tokai and Kansai)

C While handset is ringing/vibrating, press bg to forward the call. (This function is for one time only. Voice Mail remains canceled.)

C When the call is not successfully forwarded, Unavailable appears and Incoming Call

Notice returns.

C When Side Key Settings (see P.12-3) is set to

5Forward Voice Mail, calls can be forwarded by pressing h for 1+ seconds while handset is ringing/vibrating.

Cancel Secretary

Cancel Voice Mail

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Cancel Secretary

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

13-4

F74

F77

F70

Check Secretary

Check Voice Mail status

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Check Secretary

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Service status appears.

Play Voice Mail

Check Voice Mail messages

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Play Voice Mail

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

^ Follow the guidance for further operations after handset connects to Voice Mail Center.

C

Press g when finished.

+ k disappears after messages are checked, unless they are checked from a touch-tone landline.

Ring Time

This function is not available for subscribers in Tohoku, Niigata, Chugoku and

Shikoku areas.

Choose Call for Call Forwarding or Voice Mail and select Ring Time from 5 to 30 seconds (by 5 seconds).

^ This function cannot be set from landlines or while handset is out-of-range or outside your subscription area.

^ This function is disabled when No Call is set. (No Call is available only for subscribers in

Kanto, Koshin, Tokai and Kansai areas.)

Ring Time

Set Ring Time for Call Forwarding or Voice Mail

K20 Seconds

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Ring Time

Select Ring Time

A

Press

b

13

,

Adjust Ring Time to set the response priority when using Call Forwarding or Voice

Mail together with Message Recorder (see P.12-4).

Example: Ring time for Call Forwarding or Voice Mail: 10 seconds

Ring time for Message Recorder: 9 seconds

In this example, Message Recorder responds first. (Priority may change depending on signal conditions.) If Message Recorder memory is full, Voice Mail will activate.

13-5

13

F75

F76

Call Waiting

An additional contract is required.

Call Waiting

On/Off

Activate or cancel Call Waiting

CSubscribers in Hokkaido, Hokuriku, Kyushu, Okinawa, Tohoku, Niigata, Chugoku and Shikoku areas cannot set this service from handsets (service itself is available).

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Call Waiting

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b following Connecting to Network....

Confirm Service

Check Call Waiting status

CSubscribers in Hokkaido, Hokuriku, Kyushu, Okinawa, Tohoku, Niigata, Chugoku and Shikoku areas cannot set this service from handsets (service itself is available).

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Services

A

Confirm Service

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b following Connecting to Network....

Incoming Calls

Put Line 1 on hold to answer Line 2

When a tone sounds during a call, press

f

C

Press f to switch between two lines.

+

Handset does not ring or vibrate for incoming calls while a line is engaged.

A tone sounds from Earpiece and Incoming Call appears.

Kanto, Koshin, Tokai and Kansai Areas

C When Voice Mail or Call Forwarding is active, unanswered incoming calls are transferred to Voice Mail or the forwarding number. Call Waiting is disabled if No Call is selected, then all calls are transferred directly.

Ending a Call while Someone is on Hold

C When g is pressed, a beep sounds and Caller on Hold appears.

Press f or g to talk with the party on hold.

Line 1 Ends while Line 2 is on Hold

C A beep sounds and Caller on Hold appears.

Press f or g to talk with the party on hold.

13-6

3 Way Calling

An additional contract is required.

Open Another Line

Open another line during a call

Enter a phone number during a call

A

Press

f

Line 2 is open. Line 1 is put on hold.

^ Phone Book, Redial, Call History and Notepad Memory are available.

Switch Line

Switch between two open lines

During a call, press

b A

Select

4Switch Line A

Press

b

The line switches. The other line is put on hold.

^ Press b4 to toggle between two lines.

Ending a Call while Someone is on Hold

C A beep sounds and Caller on Hold appears.

Press f or g to talk with the party on hold.

Line 1 Ends while Line 2 is on Hold

C A beep sounds and Caller on Hold appears.

Press f or g to talk with the party on hold.

Break Away (while

Switching Lines)

Original call ends Line 1 and Line 2 remain connected

CAvailable for subscribers in Kanto, Koshin, Tokai and Kansai areas.

While switching between two lines, press

b A

Select

6Break Away

A

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Break Away... appears. You are disconnected, but Line 1 and 2 remain connected.

(If you made the call, you are charged for the remaining call.)

^ Press g to return to Standby.

3 Way Calling

Use two lines simultaneously

Press

b while switching between two lines A

Select

53 Way Calling

A

Press

b

^ You cannot switch lines (see above) once shifted to 3 Way Calling.

13

13-7

13

Break Away

(from 2 Open Lines)

Original call ends Line 1 and Line 2 remain connected

CAvailable for subscribers in Kanto, Koshin, Tokai and Kansai areas.

Press

b during 3 Way Calls A

Select

4Break Away A

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Break Away... appears. You are disconnected, but Line 1 and 2 remain connected. (If you made the call, you are charged for the remaining call.)

^ Press g to return to Standby.

Ending a Call during 3 Way Calls

C Both lines are disconnected.

Line 1 Ends during 3 Way Calls

C Line 2 remains connected.

13-8

Appendix

14-1

14

Function List

Settings for items with gray background are affected by Reset.

1

Also available during calls.

2

Currently not available in Hokkaido, Hokuriku, Kyushu and Okinawa areas.

3

Currently not available in Tohoku, Niigata, Chugoku and Shikoku areas.

4

Available only when switching between two open lines. Break Away is currently not available in Hokkaido, Tohoku, Niigata, Hokuriku, Chugoku, Shikoku, Kyushu and

Okinawa areas.

Functions Menu

0. My Number

1

1. Sounds

2. Privacy

3. Settings 1

4. Settings 2

5. Clock

6. Charges

7. Services

8. Vodafone live!

Open handset phone number

Description

Call Functions, Volume, Sound Effects, etc.

Manage handset security with Keypad Lock, Auto Key Lock, etc.

Display settings such as Light Settings, Group Settings and Side Key

Settings

Display settings including User Dictionary and Manner Settings

Alarm, Clock Display, etc.

Call Charge, Total Talk Time, etc.

Activate Optional Services such as Voice Mail and Call Forwarding

Access Mail, Web, Station and V-Applications

C 1. Sounds

Function Default

0. Call Functions Delayed Ringer: Off, Close to End Call: On

1. Volume

1

3. Sound Effects

5. Ringer Out

6. Speaker

1

7. Original Tones

Level 5

Refer to the table in "Sound Effects"

Earphone/Speaker

8. Instrument Effects -

9. Tone Octave -

Off

-

Refer to

P.8-2, P.2-10,

P.2-3

P.2-11

P.8-5

P.12-33

P.8-21

P.8-8

P.8-16

P.8-21

C 2. Privacy

Function

0. Keypad Lock

1. Auto Key Lock

2. Secret Mode

1

Off

Off

Off

3. Phone Book Lock Off

4. Restrict Dial

5. Accept Call

6. Reject Call

7. Reset All

8. Change Code

9. Reset Defaults

-

-

Off

Off

All Off

-

Default Refer to

P.11-2

P.11-3

P.11-6

P.11-3

P.11-4

P.11-5

P.11-5

P.11-7

P.11-2

P.11-7

C 3. Settings 1

Function

0. Guide

1

1. Memory

2. Off-Line Mode

3. Battery Saving

4. Light Settings

-

-

Default Refer to

P.1-25

P.5-8

Off

Power Saving: On, Panel Saving On/Off: On (5 minutes),

LED Indicator: Off

P.3-6

P.12-28

Backlight: On (15 seconds), Keypad Light: On (15 seconds), In-Car Backlight: Off, Brightness: Level 4

P.7-7

5. 言語選択

6. Sub Display

P.7-9

Sub Display On/Off: On, Backlight Settings: On (15 seconds),

Adjust Contrast: Contrast 5, Recipient Display: On

-

P.7-8

P.5-16

7. Group Settings

8. Signal Alert Off

9. Side Key Settings Incoming Calls: Message Recorder, Standby: Details

P.12-2

P.12-3

14

14-2 14-3

14

C 5. Clock

Function

0. Alarm

1. Auto Power On

2. Auto Power Off

3. Clock Display

4. Useful Diary

5. Stopwatch

6. Kitchen Timer

9. Clock Settings

1

C 6. Charges

Function

0. Total Charges

1. Call Charge

2. Total Talk Time

3. Call Time

4. Instant Display

C 4. Settings 2

Function

0. Display Settings

1. Display Patterns

2. Spending Memo

3. User Dictionary

1

4. Message Recorder

5. Disney Style

6. Manner Settings

7. Incoming Light

8. Animation

9. Calculator

Default

Wallpaper: Off, Display Images: All Off, Fonts: Font 3,

Large Font: Off, Show Indicators: On,

Power On Message: Off

-

-

Battery Level: Icon 1, Signal Strength: Icon 1,

Title Bars: Color 1, Menu Design: Menu Design 1,

Guide Keys: Pattern 1, Indicator Bar: Background 1

Recorder Settings, Play, Outgoing Message,

Volume Level, In-Car Recorder, Answer Time

Off

Message Recorder: On, Ring Tone Level: All Silent,

Vibration: All On, LED Indicator: Small Light,

Whisper Mode: On, Sound Volume: Silent,

V-Appli Volume: Silent, V-Appli Vibration: On

All Off

Screen Animation: Off, Vodafone live!: All On,

Mail Background: On

-

Refer to

P.7-2, P.7-5,

P.7-6, P.7-2,

P.7-9

P.7-6

P.12-30

P.4-15

P.12-4

P.7-10

P.3-4

P.7-10

P.7-10, P.7-9

P.12-29

-

-

-

Off

-

-

Off

Large

0 Yen

0 Yen

0 hours 0 minutes

0 minutes 0 seconds

Off

Default

Default

Refer to

P.12-7

P.12-11

P.12-12

P.7-3

P.12-20

P.12-23

P.12-24

P.1-20

Refer to

P.2-20

P.2-20

P.2-19

P.2-19

P.2-19, P.2-20

14-4

C 7. Services

Function

0. Ring Time

3

1. Call Forwarding

2. Voice Mail

3. Cancel Secretary

4. Check Secretary

5. Call Waiting

2, 3

6. Confirm Service

2, 3

7. Play Voice Mail

8. 3 Way Calling

4

9. Setup Preset

Default

-

-

-

-

20 Seconds

-

Call

-

-

International Call: 0046010

C 8. Vodafone live!

1. Mail

2. Web

Function

3. Station

4. V-Appli

-

-

-

-

Default

C Other Settings Affected by Reset

Function

Manner Mode

Message Recorder

Phone Book Search

Method

Pen Light

Schedule View

Scan Code Display

Size

Canceled

Canceled

Memory No. Search

Lighting Time: 1 Minute

Day Detail/Stamps

Medium Font/100%

Default

All camera settings also return to their defaults.

Refer to

P.13-5

P.13-3

P.13-4

P.13-3, P.13-4

P.13-3, P.13-5

P.13-6

P.13-6

P.13-5

P.13-7

P.2-5

Refer to

Vodafone live!

Vodafone live!

Vodafone live!

Vodafone live!

Refer to

P.3-3

P.12-4

P.5-12

P.12-31

P.12-17

P.12-25

14

14-5

14

Troubleshooting

Problem

Handset does not turn on

s appears and

cannot make calls from handset

Possible Cause

^ Is g pressed for 1+ seconds?

^ Is battery low or dead?

^ Is battery installed?

^ Is handset out-of-range?

Solution

^ Press g for 1+ seconds.

^ Charge battery or install a charged battery.

^ Install battery properly.

^ Move to a place where signal is strong and retry.

Keypad does not respond

Cannot enter numbers from handset Keypad

Cannot place calls from Phone Book

Beep continues after dialing and call cannot be connected

^ Did you dial the number including the area code or first 0?

^ Is handset out-of-range?

(s appears)

^ Is handset off-line? (s appears)

Calls are interrupted or cut

^ Is Key Guard active?

(Q appears)

^ Is Keypad Lock active?

(

Q appears)

^ Is Key Guard active?

(Q appears)

^ Is Keypad Lock active?

(

Q appears)

^ Is Restrict Dial active?

^ Is the number saved as Secret

Mode entry?

^ Is Phone Book Lock active?

^ Is signal weak?

^ Is battery low or dead?

^ Cancel Key Guard (see P.1-19).

^ Cancel Keypad Lock

(see P.11-2).

^ Cancel Key Guard (see P.1-19).

^ Cancel Keypad Lock

(see P.11-2).

^ Cancel Restrict Dial (see P.11-4).

^ Activate Secret Mode

(see P.11-6).

^ Cancel Phone Book Lock

(see P.11-3).

^ Dial the number including the area code or 0.

^ Move to a place where signal is strong and retry.

^ Cancel Off-Line Mode

(see P.3-6).

^ Move to a place where signal is strong and retry.

^ Charge battery or install a charged battery.

Hear noise while talking on the phone

Display flickers

Display is dark when

Backlight is off

^ This may happen when signal is weak or unstable.

^ Display may flicker under fluorescent lights.

^ Panel construction characteristic; not a malfunction.

-

-

-

battery

Problem

Cannot charge

Charging time is shorter

Handset or accessories are hot

Battery runs out quickly

Possible Cause

^ Is Rapid Charger connected correctly to handset?

^ Is Rapid Charger plugged in firmly?

^ Is battery installed?

^ Are handset, battery, Charger

Terminals & Connection

Terminal and External Device

Connector clean?

^ Battery may not be charged if temperature is not within 5]C - 35]C.

^ Battery has run out or is defective.

^ Charging time shortens when battery is not empty.

^ Rapid Charger may heat up while charging. Handset may also heat up if used for long periods. This is normal if they are not extremely hot.

^ Battery runs out faster depending on the environment

(temperatures, charging/signal conditions), usage or settings.

Solution

^ Plug in again.

^ Plug in again.

^ Install battery properly.

^ Clean with a cotton swab.

^ Handle within ambient temperature of 5]C - 35]C.

^ Replace battery with a new one.

-

-

^ Refer to "Estimated Hours of Use

(fully charged battery)," "Battery

Time" and "Extend Battery Time"

(see P.1-11 - 1-12).

+

For repairs and after-sales services, contact Vodafone Customer Center, Customer

Assistance (see P.14-20).

14

14-6 14-7

14

Indicators & Recharge Warning

C s appears

Handset is out-of-range. Move for a better signal.

C s appears

Handset is in Off-Line Mode (see P.3-6).

Cancel the setting.

C Recharge Battery appears and short beeps sound

Battery is low (see P.1-12 - 1-13).

Charge or replace battery immediately.

C

Q appears

Key Guard is active (see P.1-19).

Cancel to use Keypad. Incoming calls suspend Key Guard. Press keys for Anykey

Answer (see P.2-6) to answer calls.

C

Q appears

Keypad Lock is active (see P.11-2).

Cancel to place calls, etc. Press keys for Anykey Answer (see P.2-6) to answer calls.

14-8

Character Code List

070

071

072

073

074

075

076

077

018

019

020

021

022

023

024

010

011

012

013

014

015

016

017

040

041

042

043

044

045

046

047

048

031

032

033

034

035

036

037

038

039

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

026

027

028

029

050

051

052

053

054

055

056

057

058

060

061

062

063

064

065

(Space)

、 。 ， ．・ ： ； ？

！ ゛ ゜ ´ ｀ ¨ ＾ ￣ ＿ ヽ

ヾ ゝ ゞ 〃 仝 々 〆 〇 ー ―

‐ ／ ＼ ∼ ‖ ｜ … ‥‘ ’

“ ”（ ）〔 〕［ ］｛ ｝

〈 〉《 》「 」『 』【 】

＋ − ± × ÷ ＝ ≠ ＜ ＞ ≦

≧ ∞ ∴

♂

♀ ° ′ ″ ℃ ￥

＄ ￠ ￡ ％ ＃ ＆ ＠ § ☆

★ ○ ● ◎ ◇

◆ □ ■ △ ▲ ▽ ▼ ※ 〒

→ ← ↑ ↓ 〓

∈ ∋ ⊆ ⊇

⊂ ⊃ ∪ ∩

∧ ∨ ￢ ⇒ ⇔ ∀ ∃

∠ ⊥ ͡ ∂ ∇ ≡ ≒ ≪ ≫ √

∽ ∝ ∵ ∫ ∬

Å ‰ ♯ ♭ ♪ † ‡ ¶

⃝

4 5 6 7 8 9

Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ

Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ

Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ ａ ｂ ｃ ｄ ｅ ｆ ｇ ｈ ｉ ｊ ｋ ｌ ｍ ｎ ｏ ｐ ｑ ｒ ｓ ｔ ｕ ｖ ｗ ｘ ｙ ｚ

ぁ あ ぃ い ぅ う ぇ え ぉ

お か が き ぎ く ぐ け げ こ

ご さ ざ し じ す ず せ ぜ そ

ぞ た だ ち ぢ っ つ づ て で

と ど な に ぬ ね の は ば ぱ

ひ び ぴ ふ ぶ ぷ へ べ ぺ ほ

ぼ ぽ ま み む め も ゃ や ゅ

ゆ ょ よ ら り る れ ろ ゎ わ

ゐ ゑ を ん

0 1 2 3

ァ ア ィ イ ゥ ウ ェ エ ォ

オ カ ガ キ ギ ク グ ケ ゲ コ

ゴ サ ザ シ ジ ス ズ セ ゼ ソ

ゾ タ ダ チ ヂ ッ ツ ヅ テ デ

ト ド ナ ニ ヌ ネ ノ ハ バ パ

ヒ ビ ピ フ ブ プ ヘ ベ ペ ホ

ボ ポ マ ミ ム メ モ ャ ヤ ュ

ユ ョ ヨ ラ リ ル レ ロ ヮ ワ

ヰ ヱ ヲ ン ヴ ヵ ヶ

Α Β Γ Δ Ε Ζ Η Θ Ι

Κ Λ Μ Ν Ξ Ο Π Ρ Σ Τ

Υ Φ Χ Ψ Ω

α β γ δ ε ζ η

θ ι κ λ μ ν ξ ο π ρ

σ τ υ φ χ ψ ω

А Б В Г Д Е Ё Ж З

И Й К Л М Н О П Р С

Т У Ф Х Ц Ч Ш Щ Ъ Ы

Ь Э Ю Я а б в г д е ё ж з и й к л м н о п р с т у ф х ц ч ш щ ъ ы ь э

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

078

080

081

082

083

160

161

162

163

164

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

170

171

172

173

173

174

175

176

177

178

178

179

180

181

182 ю я

─ │ ┌ ┐ ┘ └ ├ ┬ ┤

┴ ┼ ━ ┃ ┏ ┓ ┛ ┗ ┣ ┳

┫ ┻ ╋ ┠ ┯ ┨ ┷ ┿ ┝ ┰

┥ ┸ ╂

あ

亜 唖 娃 阿 哀 愛 挨 姶 逢

葵 茜 穐 悪 握 渥 旭 葦 芦 鯵

梓 圧 斡 扱 宛 姐 虻 飴 絢 綾

鮎 或 粟 袷 安 庵 按 暗 案 闇

鞍 杏

い

以 伊 位 依 偉 囲 夷 委

威 尉 惟 意 慰 易 椅 為 畏 異

移 維 緯 胃 萎 衣 謂 違 遺 医

井 亥 域 育 郁 磯 一 壱 溢 逸

稲 茨 芋 鰯 允 印 咽 員 因 姻

引 飲 淫 胤 蔭

院 陰 隠 韻 吋

う

右 宇 烏 羽

迂 雨 卯 鵜 窺 丑 碓 臼 渦 嘘

唄 欝 蔚 鰻 姥 厩 浦 瓜 閏 噂

云 運 雲

え

荏 餌 叡 営 嬰 影 映

曳 栄 永 泳 洩 瑛 盈 穎 頴 英

衛 詠 鋭 液 疫 益 駅 悦 謁 越

閲 榎 厭 円 園 堰 奄 宴 延 怨

掩 援 沿 演 炎 焔 煙 燕 猿 縁

艶 苑 薗 遠 鉛 鴛 塩

お

於 汚 甥

凹 央 奥 往 応

押 旺 横 欧 殴 王 翁 襖 鴬

鴎 黄 岡 沖 荻 億 屋 憶 臆 桶

牡 乙 俺 卸 恩 温 穏 音

か

下 化

仮 何 伽 価 佳 加 可 嘉 夏 嫁

家 寡 科 暇 果 架 歌 河 火 珂

禍 禾 稼 箇 花 苛 茄 荷 華 菓

蝦 課 嘩 貨 迦 過 霞 蚊 俄 峨

我 牙 画 臥 芽 蛾 賀 雅 餓 駕

介 会 解 回 塊 壊 廻 快 怪 悔

恢 懐 戒 拐 改

魁 晦 械 海 灰 界 皆 絵 芥

蟹 開 階 貝 凱 劾 外 咳 害 崖

慨 概 涯 碍 蓋 街 該 鎧 骸 浬

馨 蛙 垣 柿 蛎 鈎 劃 嚇 各 廓

拡 撹 格 核 殻 獲 確 穫 覚 角

赫 較 郭 閣 隔 革 学 岳 楽 額

顎 掛 笠 樫 橿 梶 鰍 潟 割 喝

恰 括 活 渇 滑 葛 褐 轄 且 鰹

叶 椛 樺 鞄 株 兜 竃 蒲 釜 鎌

噛 鴨 栢 茅 萱

粥 刈 苅 瓦 乾 侃 冠 寒 刊

勘 勧 巻 喚 堪 姦 完 官 寛 干

幹 患 感 慣 憾 換 敢 柑 桓 棺

款 歓 汗 漢 澗 潅 環 甘 監 看

竿 管 簡 緩 缶 翰 肝 艦 莞 観

諌 貫 還 鑑 間 閑 関 陥 韓 館

舘 丸 含 岸 巌 玩 癌 眼 岩 翫

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

223

224

225

226

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

258

259

260

261

First Three

Digits

207

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

261

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

贋 雁 頑 顔 願

き

企 伎 危 喜 器

基 奇 嬉 寄 岐 希 幾 忌 揮 机

旗 既 期 棋 棄

機 帰 毅 気 汽 畿 祈 季 稀

紀 徽 規 記 貴 起 軌 輝 飢 騎

鬼 亀 偽 儀 妓 宜 戯 技 擬 欺

犠 疑 祇 義 蟻 誼 議 掬 菊 鞠

吉 吃 喫 桔 橘 詰 砧 杵 黍 却

客 脚 虐 逆 丘 久 仇 休 及 吸

宮 弓 急 救 朽 求 汲 泣 灸 球

究 窮 笈 級 糾 給 旧 牛 去 居

巨 拒 拠 挙 渠 虚 許 距 鋸 漁

禦 魚 亨 享 京

供 侠 僑 兇 競 共 凶 協 匡

卿 叫 喬 境 峡 強 彊 怯 恐 恭

挟 教 橋 況 狂 狭 矯 胸 脅 興

蕎 郷 鏡 響 饗 驚 仰 凝 尭 暁

業 局 曲 極 玉 桐 粁 僅 勤 均

巾 錦 斤 欣 欽 琴 禁 禽 筋 緊

芹 菌 衿 襟 謹 近 金 吟 銀

く

九

倶 句 区 狗 玖 矩 苦 躯 駆 駈

駒 具 愚 虞 喰 空 偶 寓 遇 隅

串 櫛 釧 屑 屈

掘 窟 沓 靴 轡 窪 熊 隈 粂

栗 繰 桑 鍬 勲 君 薫 訓 群 軍

郡

け

卦 袈 祁 係 傾 刑 兄 啓 圭

珪 型 契 形 径 恵 慶 慧 憩 掲

携 敬 景 桂 渓 畦 稽 系 経 継

繋 罫 茎 荊 蛍 計 詣 警 軽 頚

鶏 芸 迎 鯨 劇 戟 撃 激 隙 桁

傑 欠 決 潔 穴 結 血 訣 月 件

倹 倦 健 兼 券 剣 喧 圏 堅 嫌

建 憲 懸 拳 捲

検 権 牽 犬 献 研 硯 絹 県

肩 見 謙 賢 軒 遣 鍵 険 顕 験

鹸 元 原 厳 幻 弦 減 源 玄 現

絃 舷 言 諺 限

こ

乎 個 古 呼 固

姑 孤 己 庫 弧 戸 故 枯 湖 狐

糊 袴 股 胡 菰 虎 誇 跨 鈷 雇

顧 鼓 五 互 伍 午 呉 吾 娯 後

御 悟 梧 檎 瑚 碁 語 誤 護 醐

乞 鯉 交 佼 侯 候 倖 光 公 功

効 勾 厚 口 向

后 喉 坑 垢 好 孔 孝 宏 工

巧 巷 幸 広 庚 康 弘 恒 慌 抗

拘 控 攻 昂 晃 更 杭 校 梗 構

江 洪 浩 港 溝 甲 皇 硬 稿 糠

紅 紘 絞 綱 耕 考 肯 肱 腔 膏

航 荒 行 衡 講 貢 購 郊 酵 鉱

砿 鋼 閤 降 項 香 高 鴻 剛 劫

号 合 壕 拷 濠 豪 轟 麹 克 刻

告 国 穀 酷 鵠 黒 獄 漉 腰 甑

忽 惚 骨 狛 込

此 頃 今 困 坤 墾 婚 恨 懇

昏 昆 根 梱 混 痕 紺 艮 魂

さ

些

14

14-9

14

262

263

264

265

266

267

268

269

270

271

272

273

302

303

304

305

306

307

292

293

294

295

296

297

298

299

300

301

308

309

310

311

312

313

314

315

280

281

282

283

284

285

286

287

288

289

290

291

273

274

275

276

277

278

279

First Three

Digits

315

316

317

318

319

320

320

321

322

323

324

325

326

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

佐 叉 唆 嵯 左 差 査 沙 瑳 砂

詐 鎖 裟 坐 座 挫 債 催 再 最

哉 塞 妻 宰 彩 才 採 栽 歳 済

災 采 犀 砕 砦 祭 斎 細 菜 裁

載 際 剤 在 材 罪 財 冴 坂 阪

堺 榊 肴 咲 崎 埼 碕 鷺 作 削

咋 搾 昨 朔 柵 窄 策 索 錯 桜

鮭 笹 匙 冊 刷

察 拶 撮 擦 札 殺 薩 雑 皐

鯖 捌 錆 鮫 皿 晒 三 傘 参 山

惨 撒 散 桟 燦 珊 産 算 纂 蚕

讃 賛 酸 餐 斬 暫 残

し

仕 仔 伺

使 刺 司 史 嗣 四 士 始 姉 姿

子 屍 市 師 志 思 指 支 孜 斯

施 旨 枝 止 死 氏 獅 祉 私 糸

紙 紫 肢 脂 至 視 詞 詩 試 誌

諮 資 賜 雌 飼 歯 事 似 侍 児

字 寺 慈 持 時

次 滋 治 爾 璽 痔 磁 示 而

耳 自 蒔 辞 汐 鹿 式 識 鴫 竺

軸 宍 雫 七 叱 執 失 嫉 室 悉

湿 漆 疾 質 実 蔀 篠 偲 柴 芝

屡 蕊 縞 舎 写 射 捨 赦 斜 煮

社 紗 者 謝 車 遮 蛇 邪 借 勺

尺 杓 灼 爵 酌 釈 錫 若 寂 弱

惹 主 取 守 手 朱 殊 狩 珠 種

腫 趣 酒 首 儒 受 呪 寿 授 樹

綬 需 囚 収 周

宗 就 州 修 愁 拾 洲 秀 秋

終 繍 習 臭 舟 蒐 衆 襲 讐 蹴

輯 週 酋 酬 集 醜 什 住 充 十

従 戎 柔 汁 渋 獣 縦 重 銃 叔

夙 宿 淑 祝 縮 粛 塾 熟 出 術

述 俊 峻 春 瞬 竣 舜 駿 准 循

旬 楯 殉 淳 準 潤 盾 純 巡 遵

醇 順 処 初 所 暑 曙 渚 庶 緒

署 書 薯 藷 諸 助 叙 女 序 徐

恕 鋤 除 傷 償

勝 匠 升 召 哨 商 唱 嘗 奨

妾 娼 宵 将 小 少 尚 庄 床 廠

彰 承 抄 招 掌 捷 昇 昌 昭 晶

松 梢 樟 樵 沼 消 渉 湘 焼 焦

照 症 省 硝 礁 祥 称 章 笑 粧

紹 肖 菖 蒋 蕉 衝 裳 訟 証 詔

詳 象 賞 醤 鉦 鍾 鐘 障 鞘 上

丈 丞 乗 冗 剰 城 場 壌 嬢 常

情 擾 条 杖 浄 状 畳 穣 蒸 譲

醸 錠 嘱 埴 飾

拭 植 殖 燭 織 職 色 触 食

蝕 辱 尻 伸 信 侵 唇 娠 寝 審

心 慎 振 新 晋 森 榛 浸 深 申

疹 真 神 秦 紳 臣 芯 薪 親 診

身 辛 進 針 震 人 仁 刃 塵 壬

尋 甚 尽 腎 訊 迅 陣 靭

す

笥 諏

須 酢 図 厨 逗 吹 垂 帥 推 水

炊 睡 粋 翠 衰 遂 酔 錐 錘 随

瑞 髄 崇 嵩 数 枢 趨 雛 据 杉

椙 菅 頗 雀 裾

澄 摺 寸

せ

世 瀬 畝 是 凄 制

勢 姓 征 性 成 政 整 星 晴 棲

栖 正 清 牲 生 盛 精 聖 声 製

西 誠 誓 請 逝 醒 青 静 斉 税

脆 隻 席 惜 戚 斥 昔 析 石 積

籍 績 脊 責 赤 跡 蹟 碩 切 拙

接 摂 折 設 窃 節 説 雪 絶 舌

354

355

356

357

358

359

360

361

362

363

366

367

368

369

370

371

372

373

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

350

351

352

353

354

343

344

345

346

347

348

349

381

382

383

384

385

386

373

374

375

376

377

378

379

380

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

327

328

329

330

331

332

363

364

365

366

蝉 仙 先 千 占 宣 専 尖 川 戦

扇 撰 栓 栴 泉 浅 洗 染 潜 煎

煽 旋 穿 箭 線

繊 羨 腺 舛 船 薦 詮 賎 践

選 遷 銭 銑 閃 鮮 前 善 漸 然

全 禅 繕 膳 糎

そ

噌 塑 岨 措 曾

曽 楚 狙 疏 疎 礎 祖 租 粗 素

組 蘇 訴 阻 遡 鼠 僧 創 双 叢

倉 喪 壮 奏 爽 宋 層 匝 惣 想

捜 掃 挿 掻 操 早 曹 巣 槍 槽

漕 燥 争 痩 相 窓 糟 総 綜 聡

草 荘 葬 蒼 藻 装 走 送 遭 鎗

霜 騒 像 増 憎

臓 蔵 贈 造 促 側 則 即 息

捉 束 測 足 速 俗 属 賊 族 続

卒 袖 其 揃 存 孫 尊 損 村 遜

た

他 多 太 汰 詑 唾 堕 妥 惰 打

柁 舵 楕 陀 駄 騨 体 堆 対 耐

岱 帯 待 怠 態 戴 替 泰 滞 胎

腿 苔 袋 貸 退 逮 隊 黛 鯛 代

台 大 第 醍 題 鷹 滝 瀧 卓 啄

宅 托 択 拓 沢 濯 琢 託 鐸 濁

諾 茸 凧 蛸 只

叩 但 達 辰 奪 脱 巽 竪 辿

棚 谷 狸 鱈 樽 誰 丹 単 嘆 坦

担 探 旦 歎 淡 湛 炭 短 端 箪

綻 耽 胆 蛋 誕 鍛 団 壇 弾 断

暖 檀 段 男 談

ち

値 知 地 弛 恥

智 池 痴 稚 置 致 蜘 遅 馳 築

畜 竹 筑 蓄 逐 秩 窒 茶 嫡 着

中 仲 宙 忠 抽 昼 柱 注 虫 衷

註 酎 鋳 駐 樗 瀦 猪 苧 著 貯

丁 兆 凋 喋 寵

帖 帳 庁 弔 張 彫 徴 懲 挑

暢 朝 潮 牒 町 眺 聴 脹 腸 蝶

調 諜 超 跳 銚 長 頂 鳥 勅 捗

直 朕 沈 珍 賃 鎮 陳

つ

津 墜 椎

槌 追 鎚 痛 通 塚 栂 掴 槻 佃

漬 柘 辻 蔦 綴 鍔 椿 潰 坪 壷

嬬 紬 爪 吊 釣 鶴

て

亭 低 停 偵

剃 貞 呈 堤 定 帝 底 庭 廷 弟

悌 抵 挺 提 梯 汀 碇 禎 程 締

艇 訂 諦 蹄 逓

邸 鄭 釘 鼎 泥 摘 擢 敵 滴

的 笛 適 鏑 溺 哲 徹 撤 轍 迭

鉄 典 填 天 展 店 添 纏 甜 貼

転 顛 点 伝 殿 澱 田 電

と

兎 吐

堵 塗 妬 屠 徒 斗 杜 渡 登 菟

賭 途 都 鍍 砥 砺 努 度 土 奴

怒 倒 党 冬 凍 刀 唐 塔 塘 套

宕 島 嶋 悼 投 搭 東 桃 梼 棟

盗 淘 湯 涛 灯 燈 当 痘 祷 等

答 筒 糖 統 到

董 蕩 藤 討 謄 豆 踏 逃 透

鐙 陶 頭 騰 闘 働 動 同 堂 導

憧 撞 洞 瞳 童 胴 萄 道 銅 峠

鴇 匿 得 徳 涜 特 督 禿 篤 毒

独 読 栃 橡 凸 突 椴 届 鳶 苫

寅 酉 瀞 噸 屯 惇 敦 沌 豚 遁

頓 呑 曇 鈍

415

416

417

418

419

420

421

422

393

394

395

396

397

398

399

400

401

402

403

404

405

405

406

407

408

409

410

411

412

413

414

415

426

427

428

429

430

431

432

433

434

435

436

First Three

Digits

386

387

388

388

389

390

390

391

392

393

422

423

424

425

426

436

437

438

439

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

な

奈 那 内 乍 凪 薙

謎 灘 捺 鍋 楢 馴 縄 畷 南 楠

軟 難 汝

に

二 尼 弐 迩 匂 賑 肉

虹 廿 日 乳 入

如 尿 韮 任 妊 忍 認

ぬ∼の

濡 禰

祢 寧 葱 猫 熱 年 念 捻 撚 燃

粘 乃 廼 之 埜 嚢 悩 濃 納 能

脳 膿 農 覗 蚤

は

巴 把 播 覇 杷

波 派 琶 破 婆 罵 芭 馬 俳 廃

拝 排 敗 杯 盃 牌 背 肺 輩 配

倍 培 媒 梅 楳 煤 狽 買 売 賠

陪 這 蝿 秤 矧 萩 伯 剥 博 拍

柏 泊 白 箔 粕 舶 薄 迫 曝 漠

爆 縛 莫 駁 麦

函 箱 硲 箸 肇 筈 櫨 幡 肌

畑 畠 八 鉢 溌 発 醗 髪 伐 罰

抜 筏 閥 鳩 噺 塙 蛤 隼 伴 判

半 反 叛 帆 搬 斑 板 氾 汎 版

犯 班 畔 繁 般 藩 販 範 釆 煩

頒 飯 挽 晩 番 盤 磐 蕃 蛮

ひ

匪

卑 否 妃 庇 彼 悲 扉 批 披 斐

比 泌 疲 皮 碑 秘 緋 罷 肥 被

誹 費 避 非 飛 樋 簸 備 尾 微

枇 毘 琵 眉 美

鼻 柊 稗 匹 疋 髭 彦 膝 菱

肘 弼 必 畢 筆 逼 桧 姫 媛 紐

百 謬 俵 彪 標 氷 漂 瓢 票 表

評 豹 廟 描 病 秒 苗 錨 鋲 蒜

蛭 鰭 品 彬 斌 浜 瀕 貧 賓 頻

敏 瓶

ふ

不 付 埠 夫 婦 富 冨 布

府 怖 扶 敷 斧 普 浮 父 符 腐

膚 芙 譜 負 賦 赴 阜 附 侮 撫

武 舞 葡 蕪 部 封 楓 風 葺 蕗

伏 副 復 幅 服

福 腹 複 覆 淵 弗 払 沸 仏

物 鮒 分 吻 噴 墳 憤 扮 焚 奮

粉 糞 紛 雰 文 聞

へ

丙 併 兵 塀

幣 平 弊 柄 並 蔽 閉 陛 米 頁

僻 壁 癖 碧 別 瞥 蔑 箆 偏 変

片 篇 編 辺 返 遍 便 勉 娩 弁

鞭

ほ

保 舗 鋪 圃 捕 歩 甫 補 輔

穂 募 墓 慕 戊 暮 母 簿 菩 倣

俸 包 呆 報 奉 宝 峰 峯 崩 庖

抱 捧 放 方 朋

法 泡 烹 砲 縫 胞 芳 萌 蓬

蜂 褒 訪 豊 邦 鋒 飽 鳳 鵬 乏

亡 傍 剖 坊 妨 帽 忘 忙 房 暴

望 某 棒 冒 紡 肪 膨 謀 貌 貿

鉾 防 吠 頬 北 僕 卜 墨 撲 朴

牧 睦 穆 釦 勃 没 殆 堀 幌 奔

本 翻 凡 盆

ま

摩 磨 魔 麻 埋 妹

昧 枚 毎 哩 槙 幕 膜 枕 鮪 柾

鱒 桝 亦 俣 又 抹 末 沫 迄 侭

繭 麿 万 慢 満

14-10

458

459

460

461

462

463

464

465

480

481

482

483

484

485

486

487

473

474

475

476

477

478

479

First Three

Digits

440

440

441

441

442

442

443

444

444

445

446

447

447

448

449

449

450

451

452

452

453

454

455

456

456

457

458

466

467

468

469

470

470

471

472

473

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

漫 蔓

み

味 未 魅 巳 箕 岬 密

蜜 湊 蓑 稔 脈 妙 粍 民 眠

む

務

夢 無 牟 矛 霧 鵡 椋 婿 娘

め

冥

名 命 明 盟 迷 銘 鳴 姪 牝 滅

免 棉 綿 緬 面 麺

も

摸 模 茂 妄

孟 毛 猛 盲 網 耗 蒙 儲 木 黙

目 杢 勿 餅 尤 戻 籾 貰 問 悶

紋 門 匁

や

也 冶 夜 爺 耶 野 弥

矢 厄 役 約 薬 訳 躍 靖 柳 薮

鑓

ゆ

愉 愈 油 癒

諭 輸 唯 佑 優 勇 友 宥 幽

悠 憂 揖 有 柚 湧 涌 猶 猷 由

祐 裕 誘 遊 邑 郵 雄 融 夕

よ

予

余 与 誉 輿 預 傭 幼 妖 容 庸

揚 揺 擁 曜 楊 様 洋 溶 熔 用

窯 羊 耀 葉 蓉 要 謡 踊 遥 陽

養 慾 抑 欲 沃 浴 翌 翼 淀

ら

羅

螺 裸 来 莱 頼 雷 洛 絡 落 酪

乱 卵 嵐 欄 濫 藍 蘭 覧

り

利 吏

履 李 梨 理 璃

痢 裏 裡 里 離 陸 律 率 立

葎 掠 略 劉 流 溜 琉 留 硫 粒

隆 竜 龍 侶 慮 旅 虜 了 亮 僚

両 凌 寮 料 梁 涼 猟 療 瞭 稜

糧 良 諒 遼 量 陵 領 力 緑 倫

厘 林 淋 燐 琳 臨 輪 隣 鱗 麟

る∼れ

瑠 塁 涙 累 類 令 伶 例 冷 励

嶺 怜 玲 礼 苓 鈴 隷 零 霊 麗

齢 暦 歴 列 劣 烈 裂 廉 恋 憐

漣 煉 簾 練 聯

蓮 連 錬

ろ

呂 魯 櫓 炉 賂 路

露 労 婁 廊 弄 朗 楼 榔 浪 漏

牢 狼 篭 老 聾 蝋 郎 六 麓 禄

肋 録 論

わ

倭 和 話 歪 賄 脇 惑

枠 鷲 亙 亘 鰐 詫 藁 蕨 椀 湾

碗 腕

弌 丐 丕 个 丱 丶 丼 丿 乂

乖 乘 亂 亅 豫 亊 舒 弍 于 亞

亟 亠 亢 亰 亳 亶 从 仍 仄 仆

仂 仗 仞 仭 仟 价 伉 佚 估 佛

佝 佗 佇 佶 侈 侏 侘 佻 佩 佰

侑 佯 來 侖 儘 俔 俟 俎 俘 俛

俑 俚 俐 俤 俥 倚 倨 倔 倪 倥

倅 伜 俶 倡 倩 倬 俾 俯 們 倆

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

偃 假 會 偕 偐 偈 做 偖 偬 偸

傀 傚 傅 傴 傲

僉 僊 傳 僂 僖 僞 僥 僭 僣

僮 價 僵 儉 儁 儂 儖 儕 儔 儚

儡 儺 儷 儼 儻 儿 兀 兒 兌 兔

兢 竸 兩 兪 兮 冀 冂 囘 册 冉

冏 冑 冓 冕 冖 冤 冦 冢 冩 冪

冫 决 冱 冲 冰 况 冽 凅 凉 凛

几 處 凩 凭 凰 凵 凾 刄 刋 刔

刎 刧 刪 刮 刳 刹 剏 剄 剋 剌

剞 剔 剪 剴 剩 剳 剿 剽 劍 劔

劒 剱 劈 劑 辨

辧 劬 劭 劼 劵 勁 勍 勗 勞

勣 勦 飭 勠 勳 勵 勸 勹 匆 匈

甸 匍 匐 匏 匕 匚 匣 匯 匱 匳

匸 區 卆 卅 丗 卉 卍 凖 卞 卩

卮 夘 卻 卷 厂 厖 厠 厦 厥 厮

厰 厶 參 簒 雙 叟 曼 燮 叮 叨

叭 叺 吁 吽 呀 听 吭 吼 吮 吶

吩 吝 呎 咏 呵 咎 呟 呱 呷 呰

咒 呻 咀 呶 咄 咐 咆 哇 咢 咸

咥 咬 哄 哈 咨

咫 哂 咤 咾 咼 哘 哥 哦 唏

唔 哽 哮 哭 哺 哢 唹 啀 啣 啌

售 啜 啅 啖 啗 唸 唳 啝 喙 喀

咯 喊 喟 啻 啾 喘 喞 單 啼 喃

喩 喇 喨 嗚 嗅 嗟 嗄 嗜 嗤 嗔

嘔 嗷 嘖 嗾 嗽 嘛 嗹 噎 噐 營

嘴 嘶 嘲 嘸 噫 噤 嘯 噬 噪 嚆

嚀 嚊 嚠 嚔 嚏 嚥 嚮 嚶 嚴 囂

嚼 囁 囃 囀 囈 囎 囑 囓 囗 囮

囹 圀 囿 圄 圉

圈 國 圍 圓 團 圖 嗇 圜 圦

圷 圸 坎 圻 址 坏 坩 埀 垈 坡

坿 垉 垓 垠 垳 垤 垪 垰 埃 埆

埔 埒 埓 堊 埖 埣 堋 堙 堝 塲

堡 塢 塋 塰 毀 塒 堽 塹 墅 墹

墟 墫 墺 壞 墻 墸 墮 壅 壓 壑

壗 壙 壘 壥 壜 壤 壟 壯 壺 壹

壻 壼 壽 夂 夊 夐 夛 梦 夥 夬

夭 夲 夸 夾 竒 奕 奐 奎 奚 奘

奢 奠 奧 奬 奩

奸 妁 妝 佞 侫 妣 妲 姆 姨

姜 妍 姙 姚 娥 娟 娑 娜 娉 娚

婀 婬 婉 娵 娶 婢 婪 媚 媼 媾

嫋 嫂 媽 嫣 嫗 嫦 嫩 嫖 嫺 嫻

嬌 嬋 嬖 嬲 嫐 嬪 嬶 嬾 孃 孅

孀 孑 孕 孚 孛 孥 孩 孰 孳 孵

學 斈 孺 宀 它 宦 宸 寃 寇 寉

寔 寐 寤 實 寢 寞 寥 寫 寰 寶

寳 尅 將 專 對 尓 尠 尢 尨 尸

尹 屁 屆 屎 屓

屐 屏 孱 屬 屮 乢 屶 屹 岌

岑 岔 妛 岫 岻 岶 岼 岷 峅 岾

峇 峙 峩 峽 峺 峭 嶌 峪 崋 崕

崗 嵜 崟 崛 崑 崔 崢 崚 崙 崘

嵌 嵒 嵎 嵋 嵬 嵳 嵶 嶇 嶄 嶂

嶢 嶝 嶬 嶮 嶽 嶐 嶷 嶼 巉 巍

巓 巒 巖 巛 巫 已 巵 帋 帚 帙

帑 帛 帶 帷 幄 幃 幀 幎 幗 幔

幟 幢 幤 幇 幵 并 幺 麼 广 庠

廁 廂 廈 廐 廏

廖 廣 廝 廚 廛 廢 廡 廨 廩

廬 廱 廳 廰 廴 廸 廾 弃 弉 彝

彜 弋 弑 弖 弩 弭 弸 彁 彈 彌

彎 弯 彑 彖 彗 彙 彡 彭 彳 彷

徃 徂 彿 徊 很 徑 徇 從 徙 徘

徠 徨 徭 徼 忖 忻 忤 忸 忱 忝

悳 忿 怡 恠 怙 怐 怩 怎 怱 怛

怕 怫 怦 怏 怺 恚 恁 恪 恷 恟

恊 恆 恍 恣 恃 恤 恂 恬 恫 恙

539

540

541

542

543

544

545

546

532

533

534

535

536

537

538

526

527

528

529

530

531

520

521

522

523

524

525

547

548

549

550

551

552

553

554

555

556

557

558

512

513

514

515

516

517

518

519

504

505

506

507

508

509

510

511

496

497

498

499

500

501

502

503

488

489

490

491

492

493

494

495

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

悁 悍 惧 悃 悚

悄 悛 悖 悗 悒 悧 悋 惡 悸

惠 惓 悴 忰 悽 惆 悵 惘 慍 愕

愆 惶 惷 愀 惴 惺 愃 愡 惻 惱

愍 愎 慇 愾 愨 愧 慊 愿 愼 愬

愴 愽 慂 慄 慳 慷 慘 慙 慚 慫

慴 慯 慥 慱 慟 慝 慓 慵 憙 憖

憇 憬 憔 憚 憊 憑 憫 憮 懌 懊

應 懷 懈 懃 懆 憺 懋 罹 懍 懦

懣 懶 懺 懴 懿 懽 懼 懾 戀 戈

戉 戍 戌 戔 戛

戞 戡 截 戮 戰 戲 戳 扁 扎

扞 扣 扛 扠 扨 扼 抂 抉 找 抒

抓 抖 拔 抃 抔 拗 拑 抻 拏 拿

拆 擔 拈 拜 拌 拊 拂 拇 抛 拉

挌 拮 拱 挧 挂 挈 拯 拵 捐 挾

捍 搜 捏 掖 掎 掀 掫 捶 掣 掏

掉 掟 掵 捫 捩 掾 揩 揀 揆 揣

揉 插 揶 揄 搖 搴 搆 搓 搦 搶

攝 搗 搨 搏 摧 摯 摶 摎 攪 撕

撓 撥 撩 撈 撼

據 擒 擅 擇 撻 擘 擂 擱 擧

舉 擠 擡 抬 擣 擯 攬 擶 擴 擲

擺 攀 擽 攘 攜 攅 攤 攣 攫 攴

攵 攷 收 攸 畋 效 敖 敕 敍 敘

敞 敝 敲 數 斂 斃 變 斛 斟 斫

斷 旃 旆 旁 旄 旌 旒 旛 旙 无

旡 旱 杲 昊 昃 旻 杳 昵 昶 昴

昜 晏 晄 晉 晁 晞 晝 晤 晧 晨

晟 晢 晰 暃 暈 暎 暉 暄 暘 暝

曁 暹 曉 暾 暼

曄 暸 曖 曚 曠 昿 曦 曩 曰

曵 曷 朏 朖 朞 朦 朧 霸 朮 朿

朶 杁 朸 朷 杆 杞 杠 杙 杣 杤

枉 杰 枩 杼 杪 枌 枋 枦 枡 枅

枷 柯 枴 柬 枳 柩 枸 柤 柞 柝

柢 柮 枹 柎 柆 柧 檜 栞 框 栩

桀 桍 栲 桎 梳 栫 桙 档 桷 桿

梟 梏 梭 梔 條 梛 梃 檮 梹 桴

梵 梠 梺 椏 梍 桾 椁 棊 椈 棘

椢 椦 棡 椌 棍

棔 棧 棕 椶 椒 椄 棗 棣 椥

棹 棠 棯 椨 椪 椚 椣 椡 棆 楹

楷 楜 楸 楫 楔 楾 楮 椹 楴 椽

楙 椰 楡 楞 楝 榁 楪 榲 榮 槐

榿 槁 槓 榾 槎 寨 槊 槝 榻 槃

榧 樮 榑 榠 榜 榕 榴 槞 槨 樂

樛 槿 權 槹 槲 槧 樅 榱 樞 槭

樔 槫 樊 樒 櫁 樣 樓 橄 樌 橲

樶 橸 橇 橢 橙 橦 橈 樸 樢 檐

檍 檠 檄 檢 檣

檗 蘗 檻 櫃 櫂 檸 檳 檬 櫞

櫑 櫟 檪 櫚 櫪 櫻 欅 蘖 櫺 欒

欖 鬱 欟 欸 欷 盜 欹 飮 歇 歃

歉 歐 歙 歔 歛 歟 歡 歸 歹 歿

殀 殄 殃 殍 殘 殕 殞 殤 殪 殫

殯 殲 殱 殳 殷 殼 毆 毋 毓 毟

毬 毫 毳 毯 麾 氈 氓 气 氛 氤

氣 汞 汕 汢 汪 沂 沍 沚 沁 沛

汾 汨 汳 沒 沐 泄 泱 泓 沽 泗

泅 泝 沮 沱 沾

沺 泛 泯 泙 泪 洟 衍 洶 洫

洽 洸 洙 洵 洳 洒 洌 浣 涓 浤

浚 浹 浙 涎 涕 濤 涅 淹 渕 渊

涵 淇 淦 涸 淆 淬 淞 淌 淨 淒

淅 淺 淙 淤 淕 淪 淮 渭 湮 渮

渙 湲 湟 渾 渣 湫 渫 湶 湍 渟

湃 渺 湎 渤 滿 渝 游 溂 溪 溘

滉 溷 滓 溽 溯 滄 溲 滔 滕 溏

溥 滂 溟 潁 漑 灌 滬 滸 滾 漿

滲 漱 滯 漲 滌

610

611

612

613

614

615

616

617

603

604

605

606

607

608

609

597

598

599

600

601

602

591

592

593

594

595

596

618

619

620

621

622

623

624

625

626

627

628

629

583

584

585

586

587

588

589

590

575

576

577

578

579

580

581

582

567

568

569

570

571

572

573

574

559

560

561

562

563

564

565

566

14-11

14

14

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

漾 漓 滷 澆 潺 潸 澁 澀 潯

潛 濳 潭 澂 潼 潘 澎 澑 濂 潦

澳 澣 澡 澤 澹 濆 澪 濟 濕 濬

濔 濘 濱 濮 濛 瀉 瀋 濺 瀑 瀁

瀏 濾 瀛 瀚 潴 瀝 瀘 瀟 瀰 瀾

瀲 灑 灣 炙 炒 炯 烱 炬 炸 炳

炮 烟 烋 烝 烙 焉 烽 焜 焙 煥

煕 熈 煦 煢 煌 煖 煬 熏 燻 熄

熕 熨 熬 燗 熹 熾 燒 燉 燔 燎

燠 燬 燧 燵 燼

燹 燿 爍 爐 爛 爨 爭 爬 爰

爲 爻 爼 爿 牀 牆 牋 牘 牴 牾

犂 犁 犇 犒 犖 犢 犧 犹 犲 狃

狆 狄 狎 狒 狢 狠 狡 狹 狷 倏

猗 猊 猜 猖 猝 猴 猯 猩 猥 猾

獎 獏 默 獗 獪 獨 獰 獸 獵 獻

獺 珈 玳 珎 玻 珀 珥 珮 珞 璢

琅 瑯 琥 珸 琲 琺 瑕 琿 瑟 瑙

瑁 瑜 瑩 瑰 瑣 瑪 瑶 瑾 璋 璞

璧 瓊 瓏 瓔 珱

瓠 瓣 瓧 瓩 瓮 瓲 瓰 瓱 瓸

瓷 甄 甃 甅 甌 甎 甍 甕 甓 甞

甦 甬 甼 畄 畍 畊 畉 畛 畆 畚

畩 畤 畧 畫 畭 畸 當 疆 疇 畴

疊 疉 疂 疔 疚 疝 疥 疣 痂 疳

痃 疵 疽 疸 疼 疱 痍 痊 痒 痙

痣 痞 痾 痿 痼 瘁 痰 痺 痲 痳

瘋 瘍 瘉 瘟 瘧 瘠 瘡 瘢 瘤 瘴

瘰 瘻 癇 癈 癆 癜 癘 癡 癢 癨

癩 癪 癧 癬 癰

癲 癶 癸 發 皀 皃 皈 皋 皎

皖 皓 皙 皚 皰 皴 皸 皹 皺 盂

盍 盖 盒 盞 盡 盥 盧 盪 蘯 盻

眈 眇 眄 眩 眤 眞 眥 眦 眛 眷

眸 睇 睚 睨 睫 睛 睥 睿 睾 睹

瞎 瞋 瞑 瞠 瞞 瞰 瞶 瞹 瞿 瞼

瞽 瞻 矇 矍 矗 矚 矜 矣 矮 矼

砌 砒 礦 砠 礪 硅 碎 硴 碆 硼

碚 碌 碣 碵 碪 碯 磑 磆 磋 磔

碾 碼 磅 磊 磬

磧 磚 磽 磴 礇 礒 礑 礙 礬

礫 祀 祠 祗 祟 祚 祕 祓 祺 祿

禊 禝 禧 齋 禪 禮 禳 禹 禺 秉

秕 秧 秬 秡 秣 稈 稍 稘 稙 稠

稟 禀 稱 稻 稾 稷 穃 穗 穉 穡

穢 穩 龝 穰 穹 穽 窈 窗 窕 窘

窖 窩 竈 窰 窶 竅 竄 窿 邃 竇

竊 竍 竏 竕 竓 站 竚 竝 竡 竢

竦 竭 竰 笂 笏 笊 笆 笳 笘 笙

笞 笵 笨 笶 筐

筺 笄 筍 笋 筌 筅 筵 筥 筴

筧 筰 筱 筬 筮 箝 箘 箟 箍 箜

箚 箋 箒 箏 筝 箙 篋 篁 篌 篏

箴 篆 篝 篩 簑 簔 篦 篥 籠 簀

簇 簓 篳 篷 簗 簍 篶 簣 簧 簪

簟 簷 簫 簽 籌 籃 籔 籏 籀 籐

籘 籟 籤 籖 籥 籬 籵 粃 粐 粤

粭 粢 粫 粡 粨 粳 粲 粱 粮 粹

粽 糀 糅 糂 糘 糒 糜 糢 鬻 糯

糲 糴 糶 糺 紆

紂 紜 紕 紊 絅 絋 紮 紲 紿

紵 絆 絳 絖 絎 絲 絨 絮 絏 絣

經 綉 絛 綏 絽 綛 綺 綮 綣 綵

緇 綽 綫 總 綢 綯 緜 綸 綟 綰

緘 緝 緤 緞 緻 緲 緡 縅 縊 縣

縡 縒 縱 縟 縉 縋 縢 繆 繦 縻

縵 縹 繃 縷 縲 縺 繧 繝 繖 繞

繙 繚 繹 繪 繩 繼 繻 纃 緕 繽

辮 繿 纈 纉 續 纒 纐 纓 纔 纖

纎 纛 纜 缸 缺

罅 罌 罍 罎 罐 网 罕 罔 罘

676

677

678

679

680

681

682

683

668

669

670

671

672

673

674

675

660

661

662

663

664

665

666

667

652

653

654

655

656

657

658

659

692

693

694

695

696

697

698

699

700

684

685

686

687

688

689

690

691

644

645

646

647

648

649

650

651

637

638

639

640

641

642

643

630

631

632

633

634

635

636

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

罟 罠 罨 罩 罧 罸 羂 羆 羃 羈

羇 羌 羔 羞 羝 羚 羣 羯 羲 羹

羮 羶 羸 譱 翅 翆 翊 翕 翔 翡

翦 翩 翳 翹 飜 耆 耄 耋 耒 耘

耙 耜 耡 耨 耿 耻 聊 聆 聒 聘

聚 聟 聢 聨 聳 聲 聰 聶 聹 聽

聿 肄 肆 肅 肛 肓 肚 肭 冐 肬

胛 胥 胙 胝 胄 胚 胖 脉 胯 胱

脛 脩 脣 脯 腋

隋 腆 脾 腓 腑 胼 腱 腮 腥

腦 腴 膃 膈 膊 膀 膂 膠 膕 膤

膣 腟 膓 膩 膰 膵 膾 膸 膽 臀

臂 膺 臉 臍 臑 臙 臘 臈 臚 臟

臠 臧 臺 臻 臾 舁 舂 舅 與 舊

舍 舐 舖 舩 舫 舸 舳 艀 艙 艘

艝 艚 艟 艤 艢 艨 艪 艫 舮 艱

艷 艸 艾 芍 芒 芫 芟 芻 芬 苡

苣 苟 苒 苴 苳 苺 莓 范 苻 苹

苞 茆 苜 茉 苙

茵 茴 茖 茲 茱 荀 茹 荐 荅

茯 茫 茗 茘 莅 莚 莪 莟 莢 莖

茣 莎 莇 莊 荼 莵 荳 荵 莠 莉

莨 菴 萓 菫 菎 菽 萃 菘 萋 菁

菷 萇 菠 菲 萍 萢 萠 莽 萸 蔆

菻 葭 萪 萼 蕚 蒄 葷 葫 蒭 葮

蒂 葩 葆 萬 葯 葹 萵 蓊 葢 蒹

蒿 蒟 蓙 蓍 蒻 蓚 蓐 蓁 蓆 蓖

蒡 蔡 蓿 蓴 蔗 蔘 蔬 蔟 蔕 蔔

蓼 蕀 蕣 蕘 蕈

蕁 蘂 蕋 蕕 薀 薤 薈 薑 薊

薨 蕭 薔 薛 藪 薇 薜 蕷 蕾 薐

藉 薺 藏 薹 藐 藕 藝 藥 藜 藹

蘊 蘓 蘋 藾 藺 蘆 蘢 蘚 蘰 蘿

虍 乕 虔 號 虧 虱 蚓 蚣 蚩 蚪

蚋 蚌 蚶 蚯 蛄 蛆 蚰 蛉 蠣 蚫

蛔 蛞 蛩 蛬 蛟 蛛 蛯 蜒 蜆 蜈

蜀 蜃 蛻 蜑 蜉 蜍 蛹 蜊 蜴 蜿

蜷 蜻 蜥 蜩 蜚 蝠 蝟 蝸 蝌 蝎

蝴 蝗 蝨 蝮 蝙

蝓 蝣 蝪 蠅 螢 螟 螂 螯 蟋

螽 蟀 蟐 雖 螫 蟄 螳 蟇 蟆 螻

蟯 蟲 蟠 蠏 蠍 蟾 蟶 蟷 蠎 蟒

蠑 蠖 蠕 蠢 蠡 蠱 蠶 蠹 蠧 蠻

衄 衂 衒 衙 衞 衢 衫 袁 衾 袞

衵 衽 袵 衲 袂 袗 袒 袮 袙 袢

袍 袤 袰 袿 袱 裃 裄 裔 裘 裙

裝 裹 褂 裼 裴 裨 裲 褄 褌 褊

褓 襃 褞 褥 褪 褫 襁 襄 褻 褶

褸 襌 褝 襠 襞

襦 襤 襭 襪 襯 襴 襷 襾 覃

覈 覊 覓 覘 覡 覩 覦 覬 覯 覲

覺 覽 覿 觀 觚 觜 觝 觧 觴 觸

訃 訖 訐 訌 訛 訝 訥 訶 詁 詛

詒 詆 詈 詼 詭 詬 詢 誅 誂 誄

誨 誡 誑 誥 誦 誚 誣 諄 諍 諂

諚 諫 諳 諧 諤 諱 謔 諠 諢 諷

諞 諛 謌 謇 謚 諡 謖 謐 謗 謠

謳 鞫 謦 謫 謾 謨 譁 譌 譏 譎

證 譖 譛 譚 譫

譟 譬 譯 譴 譽 讀 讌 讎 讒

讓 讖 讙 讚 谺 豁 谿 豈 豌 豎

豐 豕 豢 豬 豸 豺 貂 貉 貅 貊

貍 貎 貔 豼 貘 戝 貭 貪 貽 貲

貳 貮 貶 賈 賁 賤 賣 賚 賽 賺

賻 贄 贅 贊 贇 贏 贍 贐 齎 贓

賍 贔 贖 赧 赭 赱 赳 趁 趙 跂

趾 趺 跏 跚 跖 跌 跛 跋 跪 跫

跟 跣 跼 踈 踉 跿 踝 踞 踐 踟

蹂 踵 踰 踴 蹊

蹇 蹉 蹌 蹐 蹈 蹙 蹤 蹠 踪

蹣 蹕 蹶 蹲 蹼 躁 躇 躅 躄 躋

747

748

749

750

751

752

753

754

739

740

741

742

743

744

745

746

731

732

733

734

735

736

737

738

723

724

725

726

727

728

729

730

763

764

765

766

767

768

769

770

771

755

756

757

758

759

760

761

762

715

716

717

718

719

720

721

722

708

709

710

711

712

713

714

701

702

703

704

705

706

707

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

躊 躓 躑 躔 躙 躪 躡 躬 躰 軆

躱 躾 軅 軈 軋 軛 軣 軼 軻 軫

軾 輊 輅 輕 輒 輙 輓 輜 輟 輛

輌 輦 輳 輻 輹 轅 轂 輾 轌 轉

轆 轎 轗 轜 轢 轣 轤 辜 辟 辣

辭 辯 辷 迚 迥 迢 迪 迯 邇 迴

逅 迹 迺 逑 逕 逡 逍 逞 逖 逋

逧 逶 逵 逹 迸

遏 遐 遑 遒 逎 遉 逾 遖 遘

遞 遨 遯 遶 隨 遲 邂 遽 邁 邀

邊 邉 邏 邨 邯 邱 邵 郢 郤 扈

郛 鄂 鄒 鄙 鄲 鄰 酊 酖 酘 酣

酥 酩 酳 酲 醋 醉 醂 醢 醫 醯

醪 醵 醴 醺 釀 釁 釉 釋 釐 釖

釟 釡 釛 釼 釵 釶 鈞 釿 鈔 鈬

鈕 鈑 鉞 鉗 鉅 鉉 鉤 鉈 銕 鈿

鉋 鉐 銜 銖 銓 銛 鉚 鋏 銹 銷

鋩 錏 鋺 鍄 錮

錙 錢 錚 錣 錺 錵 錻 鍜 鍠

鍼 鍮 鍖 鎰 鎬 鎭 鎔 鎹 鏖 鏗

鏨 鏥 鏘 鏃 鏝 鏐 鏈 鏤 鐚 鐔

鐓 鐃 鐇 鐐 鐶 鐫 鐵 鐡 鐺 鑁

鑒 鑄 鑛 鑠 鑢 鑞 鑪 鈩 鑰 鑵

鑷 鑽 鑚 鑼 鑾 钁 鑿 閂 閇 閊

閔 閖 閘 閙 閠 閨 閧 閭 閼 閻

閹 閾 闊 濶 闃 闍 闌 闕 闔 闖

關 闡 闥 闢 阡 阨 阮 阯 陂 陌

陏 陋 陷 陜 陞

陝 陟 陦 陲 陬 隍 隘 隕 隗

險 隧 隱 隲 隰 隴 隶 隸 隹 雎

雋 雉 雍 襍 雜 霍 雕 雹 霄 霆

霈 霓 霎 霑 霏 霖 霙 霤 霪 霰

霹 霽 霾 靄 靆 靈 靂 靉 靜 靠

靤 靦 靨 勒 靫 靱 靹 鞅 靼 鞁

靺 鞆 鞋 鞏 鞐 鞜 鞨 鞦 鞣 鞳

鞴 韃 韆 韈 韋 韜 韭 齏 韲 竟

韶 韵 頏 頌 頸 頤 頡 頷 頽 顆

顏 顋 顫 顯 顰

顱 顴 顳 颪 颯 颱 颶 飄 飃

飆 飩 飫 餃 餉 餒 餔 餘 餡 餝

餞 餤 餠 餬 餮 餽 餾 饂 饉 饅

饐 饋 饑 饒 饌 饕 馗 馘 馥 馭

馮 馼 駟 駛 駝 駘 駑 駭 駮 駱

駲 駻 駸 騁 騏 騅 駢 騙 騫 騷

驅 驂 驀 驃 騾 驕 驍 驛 驗 驟

驢 驥 驤 驩 驫 驪 骭 骰 骼 髀

髏 髑 髓 體 髞 髟 髢 髣 髦 髯

髫 髮 髴 髱 髷

髻 鬆 鬘 鬚 鬟 鬢 鬣 鬥 鬧

鬨 鬩 鬪 鬮 鬯 鬲 魄 魃 魏 魍

魎 魑 魘 魴 鮓 鮃 鮑 鮖 鮗 鮟

鮠 鮨 鮴 鯀 鯊 鮹 鯆 鯏 鯑 鯒

鯣 鯢 鯤 鯔 鯡 鰺 鯲 鯱 鯰 鰕

鰔 鰉 鰓 鰌 鰆 鰈 鰒 鰊 鰄 鰮

鰛 鰥 鰤 鰡 鰰 鱇 鰲 鱆 鰾 鱚

鱠 鱧 鱶 鱸 鳧 鳬 鳰 鴉 鴈 鳫

鴃 鴆 鴪 鴦 鶯 鴣 鴟 鵄 鴕 鴒

鵁 鴿 鴾 鵆 鵈

鵝 鵞 鵤 鵑 鵐 鵙 鵲 鶉 鶇

鶫 鵯 鵺 鶚 鶤 鶩 鶲 鷄 鷁 鶻

鶸 鶺 鷆 鷏 鷂 鷙 鷓 鷸 鷦 鷭

鷯 鷽 鸚 鸛 鸞 鹵 鹹 鹽 麁 麈

麋 麌 麒 麕 麑 麝 麥 麩 麸 麪

麭 靡 黌 黎 黏 黐 黔 黜 點 黝

黠 黥 黨 黯 黴 黶 黷 黹 黻 黼

黽 鼇 鼈 皷 鼕 鼡 鼬 鼾 齊 齒

齔 齣 齟 齠 齡 齦 齧 齬 齪 齷

齲 齶 龕 龜 龠

堯 槇 遙 瑤 凜 熙

818

819

820

821

822

823

824

825

810

811

812

813

814

815

816

817

802

803

804

805

806

807

808

809

794

795

796

797

798

799

800

801

834

835

836

837

838

839

840

826

827

828

829

830

831

832

833

786

787

788

789

790

791

792

793

779

780

781

782

783

784

785

772

773

774

775

776

777

778

14-12

Specifications

C V302SH

Weight

Continuous Call Time

Continuous Standby Time

Charging Time (Power off)

Approximately 90 g (with battery)

Approximately 140 minutes

Approximately 450 hours (with handset closed)

Rapid Charger: Approximately 115 minutes

In-Car Charger: Approximately 115 minutes

Approximately 46 x 24 x 92 mm (with handset closed)

Dimensions (W x H x D)

Maximum Output

0.8 W

^ Continuous Call Time is an average measured with a new, fully charged battery, with both

Power Saving and Panel Saving off, with stable signals. Continuous Call Time may be less than half this value if handset is out-of-range or signal is weak. Continuous Standby

Time is an average measured with a new, fully charged battery, with handset closed without calls or operations, in Standby with stable signals. Standby Time may be less than half this value if handset is out-of-range or signal is weak. Standby Time may vary by environment (battery status, temperature, etc.).

^ Call Time and Standby Time decrease with frequent use of Display/Keypad Backlights.

^ Call Time and Standby Time may decrease when a V-Application is active.

^ Station service may consume more power through automatic updates.

^ Call Time and Standby Time decrease with handset use in poor signal conditions

(see P.1-11 "Battery Time").

^ Display employs precision technology. However, some pixels may appear brighter or darker.

14

14-13

14

C Rapid Charger

Power Source

Power Consumption

Output Voltage/Current

Charging Temperature

Dimensions (W x H x D)

Cord Length

C Battery

Voltage

Battery Type

Capacity

Dimensions (W x H x D)

100 VAC, 50/60 Hz

8 VA

5.6 VDC/500 mA

5]C - 35]C

Approximately 48 x 17 x 46 mm

(without protruding parts, cord)

Approximately 1.5 m

3.7 V

Lithium-ion

750 mAh

Approximately 36 x 4.5 x 51 mm

(without protruding parts)

14-14

Index

Numbers

3 Way Calling ...................................... 13-7

90

]]]]

turn (Picture Effect)...................... 9-18

A

Accept Call .......................................... 11-5

Acquire Dictionary.............................. 4-15

Action Item ........................................ 12-14

Action Snap mode .....................6-13, 6-14

Alarm ................................................... 12-7

Answer Time (Message Recorder) .....12-4

Anti-Flicker.......................................... 6-17

Anykey Answer..................................... 2-6

Attach 1/4 Size ...................................... 9-7

Attach as Sha-mail ............................. 6-23

Attach Screen ....................................... 9-7

Attach Split Mail...........................6-23, 9-7

Attach Thumb

(Camera mode image) .................... 6-24

Auto Key Lock .................................... 11-3

Auto Power Off ................................. 12-12

Auto Power On.................................. 12-11

Auto Protect (Schedule)................... 12-17

Auto Reset........................................... 6-20

B

Backlight ............................................... 7-7 battery.................................................. 1-10

Battery Level (Display Patterns) ......... 7-6

Battery Saving .................................. 12-28

Battery Strength ........................1-12, 1-13

Break Away ......................................... 13-7

Brightness (Display)............................. 7-7

Brightness (mobile camera) .............. 6-18

Burst Mode.......................................... 6-11

C

Calculator .......................................... 12-29

Calendar ................................................ 7-3

Calendar (creating)............................. 6-26

Call Charge.......................................... 2-20

Call Forwarding .................................. 13-3

Call Functions ...................................... 8-2

Call History ......................................... 2-14

Call in Progress.................................. 2-15

Call Time ............................................. 2-19

Call Waiting......................................... 13-6

Caller ID (sending/blocking)................ 2-2 calls (ending) ........................................ 2-2 calls (placing) ................................ 2-2, 2-7

Camera mode ................................ 6-5, 6-7

Cancel Secretary ....................... 13-3, 13-4

Center Access Code .......................... 1-26

Character Code (entering)................... 4-9

Character Code (list).......................... 14-9

Check Secretary ........................ 13-3, 13-5

Clock Display........................................ 7-3

Clock Settings .................................... 1-20

Close to End Call.................................. 2-3

Combine Split Mail ............................. 9-22

Composite........................................... 9-20

Confirm Service (Call Waiting).......... 13-6

Copy (text) .......................................... 4-17

Create QR Code................................ 12-27 cursor .................................................. 1-20

Cut (images) ....................................... 9-14

Cut (text) ............................................. 4-17

D

Data Folder ........................................... 9-3

Delayed Ringer ................................... 2-10

Delete Posterior/Previous ................. 4-17

Disney Style........................................ 7-10

Display .................................................. 1-7

Display Images ..................................... 7-5

Display Patterns ................................... 7-6

E

E-Animation .......................................... 9-6

Earpiece Volume ................................ 2-11

Emoticons............................................. 4-8

English .................................................. 7-9

14-15

14

14

F

Face Arrange ...................................... 9-16

FAX transmissions .......................... 12-33

File Cabinet........................................... 9-2

Fonts ..................................................... 7-6

Forward Voice Mail ..................... 2-9, 13-4

Frame (saved image) ......................... 9-18

Frame (Sha-mail mode) ..................... 6-10

Function List ...................................... 14-2

Functions Menu ................................. 1-22

G

Group Ring Tone (Phone Book) ....... 5-16

Group Search (Phone Book)............. 5-12

Group Settings (Phone Book)........... 5-16

Guide................................................... 1-25

Guide Keys (Display Patterns)............ 7-6

H handset codes.................................... 1-26 handset phone number

(opening My Number) .................... 2-21

Handy Features .................................. 1-22 headphones...................................... 12-32

Hiragana to Katakana/

Alphanumerics Conversion........... 4-13 hold (incoming calls) ........................... 2-8

I

Image Quality ..................................... 6-18

Image Size (mobile camera).............. 6-18 images (changing file format) ......6-19, 9-19 images (editing) ................................. 9-12

Image Decoration............................... 9-15

Inbox Auto Sort .................................. 5-10

In-Car Backlight ................................... 7-7

In-Car Charger.................................... 1-17

In-Car Recorder.................................. 12-4 incoming calls ...................................... 2-6 incoming calls (answering)................. 2-6 incoming calls (Call Waiting) ............ 13-6 incoming calls (rejecting).................... 2-8

Incoming Light ................................... 7-10

Incoming Notice ................................. 5-10

Incoming Tone .................................... 9-23

Index Menu.......................................... 1-21

Indicator Bar (Display Patterns).......... 7-6

Infrared ................................................ 10-2

Input Method ....................................... 4-10

Instrument Effects .............................. 8-16

International Call ..................................2-5

K

Katakana Search (Phone Book) ........ 5-13 key assignments (text entry) ...............4-3

Key Guard ........................................... 1-19

Key Ops Guide (mobile camera) ....... 6-20

Keypad Lock ....................................... 11-2

Kitchen Timer.................................... 12-24

L

Language...............................................7-9

LED Indicator (for sounds) ..................8-4

Lens Effects ........................................ 6-11

Light Settings........................................7-7

List (Data Folder files)...................9-3, 9-5

List File Names .....................................9-4

M mail address (Phone Book) .................5-3

Mail Folder (Phone Book) .................. 5-10

Manner Mode ........................................3-3

Memory No. ...........................................5-5

Memory No. Search ............................ 5-13

Memory Status (File Cabinet) .....6-22, 9-2

Memory Status (Phone Book) ............. 5-8 menu .................................................... 1-21

Menu Design (Display Patterns).......... 7-6

Merge Panorama................................. 9-21

Message Recorder.......................2-9, 12-4

Mic Settings (mobile camera)............ 6-19

Missed Calls........................................ 2-15 mobile camera ......................................6-2

Mobile Light ........................................ 6-17

Moving Photo Frame .......................... 9-19

Multi Selector ............................................ i

My Voice Memo................................... 12-6

14-16

N

Notepad Memory ................................ 2-13

O

Off-Line Mode ....................................... 3-6

One Hiragana Predictive Entry.......... 4-14

One Hiragana Word Call .................... 4-14

One-Hiragana Conversion ................. 4-12

Original Size (Camera mode image) .....6-21

Original Tones ...................................... 8-8

Original Voice ....................................... 8-7 out-of-range ........................................ 14-8

Owner Profile ...................................... 2-21

P

Pager Code (entering) ........................ 4-10

Pager Code (list) ................................. 4-11

Panel Saving ..................................... 12-28

Paste .................................................... 4-17

PC transmissions ............................. 12-33

Pen Light ........................................... 12-31

Personal Data........................................ 5-4

Personal Ring Tone............................ 5-10

Phone Book (deleting entries)........... 5-15

Phone Book (editing) ......................... 5-15

Phone Book (saving)............................ 5-3

Phone Book (searching) .................... 5-12

Phone Book........................................... 5-2

Phone Book Entry List ..............5-11, 5-14

Phone Book Entry List with images .....5-14

Phone Book Lock ............................... 11-3

Phonetic Conversion.......................... 4-12

Photo (Phone Book) ............................. 5-6

Pictographs........................................... 4-7

Picture Call/Mail.................................... 5-6

Play Voice Mail.................................... 13-5

Postcard .............................................. 6-25

Power On Message............................... 7-9 power on/off ........................................ 1-18

Power On/Off (Sound Effects) ............. 8-5

Power Saving .................................... 12-28

Predictive (conversion)........................ 4-5

Previous Usage (conversion) .............. 4-5

Property................................................. 9-8

Push Tones......................................... 12-2

Q

Quick Conversion .............................. 4-13

Quick Operations ............................... 1-24

Quick Silent .......................................... 2-6

R

Rapid Charger .................................... 1-16

Redial ........................................... 2-4, 2-14

Reject Call........................................... 11-5

Reset All.............................................. 11-7

Reset Defaults .................................... 11-7

Reset Learning ................................... 4-14

Restrict Dial ........................................ 11-4

Ring Time.............................................. 8-5

Ring Time

(Call Forwarding & Voice Mail)........ 13-5

Ringer Out......................................... 12-33

Rotate Thumb (Camera mode image) 6-7

S

Save As Thumb

(Camera mode image) ...................... 6-7

Save Dictionary .................................. 4-16

Save to ................................................ 6-20

Scan Code......................................... 12-25

Schedule ........................................... 12-13

Screen Animation............................... 7-10

Search by Reading (Phone Book) ...... 5-13

Secret Mode (Data Folder)................. 9-24

Secret Mode (Phone Book) ............... 11-6

Security Code ..................................... 1-26

Select Mode (mobile camera)............ 6-20

Self Timer.............................................. 6-9

Send All Push Tones ......................... 12-2

Send With Code.................................... 2-5

Sent Auto Sort .................................... 5-10

Set IR Password ................................. 10-3

Set LED to Sound................................. 8-6

Sha-mail mode............................... 6-5, 6-7

Show Indicators ................................... 7-2

Show Thumbnails

(Camera mode image) .................... 6-21

Shutter Click ....................................... 6-16

14

14-17

14

Side Key.....................................................i

Side Key Settings............................... 12-3

Signal Alert ......................................... 12-2

Signal Strength (Display Patterns)..... 7-6 signal strength indicator ..................... 1-7

Simple Animation................................. 9-8

Simple Mode....................................... 2-16

Slide Show.......................................... 9-12

Small Light............................................ 1-6

Snooze ................................................ 12-8

Soft Focus .......................................... 6-18

Soft Key .............................................. 1-23

Sound Effects....................................... 8-5

Sound Volume...................................... 8-6

Speaker ............................................... 8-21

Speaker Phone ................................... 8-21

Speed Dial........................................... 5-14

Spending Memo ............................... 12-30

Split Image.......................................... 9-19

Standby............................................... 1-18

Stopwatch......................................... 12-23

Sub Display ................................... 1-9, 7-8

Switch Line (3 Way Calling) .............. 13-7

Symbols ................................................ 4-7

T text (deleting) ..................................... 4-16 text (editing) ....................................... 4-16 text (entering) ....................................... 4-4 text (entry modes)................................ 4-2

Text Memo .......................................... 4-18

Title Bars (Display Patterns) ............... 7-6

Toggle Preview................................... 6-16

Tone Octave ....................................... 8-21

Total Charges ..................................... 2-20

Total Talk Time................................... 2-19

U

Useful Diary ...................................... 12-20

User Dictionary .................................. 4-15

V

V-Appli Vibration.................................. 3-5

Vibration ............................................... 8-3

Vibration Pattern .................................. 8-4

Vodafone live! Animation ....................7-9

Voice Mail ............................................ 13-4

Voice Memo......................................... 12-6

W

Wallpaper ..............................................7-2

Wallpaper mode.............................6-5, 6-7

Wallpaper Size .................................... 6-23

Whisper Mode .......................................3-5

Z zoom ...................................................... 6-5

14-18

Warranty & After-Sales Services

C Warranty

Warranty is provided when you purchase V302SH.

^ Check the name of distributor and date of purchase.

^ Read through contents and keep in a safe place.

^ The warranty term is described in the warranty.

C After-Sales Services

See P.14-6 "Troubleshooting" before contacting us for repair. If you cannot find solutions or solve problems, contact Vodafone Customer Center, Customer

Assistance (see P.14-20) of your subscription area and provide detailed description.

^ During the warranty term, the repair is performed under the terms and conditions

described in the warranty.

^ After the warranty term, repairs are performed if possible upon your request at

your expense.

For other services, contact the distributor, the nearest Vodafone shop or Vodafone

Customer Center, General Information (see P.14-20). Replacement parts are available for 6 years after termination of production.

, ^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from use of this product.

^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from accidental loss/alteration of handset data. Please keep a separate record of Phone Book entries, etc.

^ Disassembling or modifying handset may violate the Radio Law. Modified handset will not be repaired.

14

14-19

Customer Service

If you have questions about Vodafone handsets or services, please call General

Information. For repairs, please call Customer Assistance.

Vodafone Customer Centers

From a Vodafone handset, dial toll free at

157 for General Information or

113 for Customer Assistance

14

C Call these numbers toll free from landlines

Subscription Area

Hokkaido, Aomori, Akita, Iwate, Yamagata, Miyagi,

Fukushima, Niigata, Tokyo, Kanagawa, Chiba,

Saitama, Ibaraki, Tochigi, Gunma, Yamanashi,

Nagano, Toyama, Ishikawa, Fukui

Service Center

General Information

Customer Assistance

Aichi, Gifu, Mie, Shizuoka

Osaka, Hyogo, Kyoto, Nara, Shiga, Wakayama

Hiroshima, Okayama, Yamaguchi, Tottori, Shimane

Tokushima, Kagawa, Ehime, Kochi

General Information

Customer Assistance

General Information

Customer Assistance

General Information

Customer Assistance

General Information

Customer Assistance

Fukuoka, Saga, Nagasaki, Oita, Kumamoto, Miyazaki,

Kagoshima, Okinawa

General Information

Customer Assistance

Phone Number

G 0088-240-157

G 0088-240-113

G 0088-241-157

G 0088-241-113

G 0088-242-157

G 0088-242-113

G 0088-259-157

G 0088-259-113

G 0088-247-157

G 0088-247-113

G 0088-250-157

G 0088-250-113

14-20

V302SH Instruction Manual

Basic Operations

October 2005, First Edition

Vodafone K.K.

For additional information, please visit a Vodafone shop.

Model: V302SH

Manufacturer: SHARP Corporation

Please help the mobile industry maintain high environmental standards. Recycle your old handsets, batteries and charger units (all manufacturers and brands). Before you recycle, please remember these important points:

^Handset, batteries and chargers submitted for recycling cannot be returned.

^Always be sure to erase all data recorded on old handsets (Phone

Book entries, call records, mail, etc.) before recycling.

Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the V302SH.

^ For proper handset use, read this manual

beforehand.

^ This manual has been produced for V302SH

Vodafone live!

^ Keep this manual in a convenient place for

reference.

^ Accessible Vodafone services may vary by service

area, subscription, etc.

V302SH transmits at 1.5 GHz and is compatible with the Vodafone K.K. network.

This product is exclusively for use in Japan.

Note

^ Copying this manual in whole or part without

authorization is prohibited.

^ Manual content is subject to change without prior

notice.

^ Efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy and

clarity of this manual. Please contact Customer

Service, General Information (see P.16-15) concerning unclear or missing information.

Symbols

Multi Selector

Use Multi Selector to select menu items, move cursor, scroll, etc.

In this manual, Multi Selector operations are indicated as shown to the right.

Basic Multi Selector Operations

B

E: Press C or D

B

F: Press B or A

B

G: Press C, D, B or A

C

B

Side Key

Use Side Key to activate specified functions with handset closed or to release shutter. In this manual, Side Key is indicated as shown to the right. "S" is not inscribed on the actual Side Key.

b

A

D

Side Key h

,

^ In this manual, most operations are described with handset open.

^ Sample screen shots, etc. are provided for reference only. Actual handset windows, menus, etc. may differ in appearance.

i

ii

Page References

When 6 appears next to a page reference, indicated pages are in Basic

Operations Manual. When only a page reference appears, indicated pages are in

Vodafone live! Manual.

Abbreviated Steps

Handset operations starting from Index Menu are abbreviated as follows:

Press e to open Handy Features menu

Press b

Perform the operation such as opening a window

Index Menu

H

Menu Item

A

Handy (

e) A

Selection

A

Operation

A

Menu (

●)

Select the folder or file and press b

Select the menu item and press b

Press the corresponding key in parentheses

MEMO

iii

iv

Contents

Symbols....................................................................................................................... i

Contents .................................................................................................................... iv

1

Vodafone live!

Overview

Vodafone live! Overview

Vodafone live! Basics...................................................... 1-2

Customizing Handset Address....................................... 1-4

Memory Status ................................................................. 1-5

Disabling Vodafone live! ................................................. 1-5

2

New Mail

3

Sending Text

Messages

Mail

Opening New Messages.................................................. 2-4

C Inbox .......................................................................... 2-5

C Retrieving Long Mail .................................................. 2-7

Sky Melody ....................................................................... 2-7

C Requesting Melody Files............................................ 2-7

C Saving to Data Folder ................................................ 2-8

Creating Text Messages.................................................. 3-2

C Procedure .................................................................. 3-2

C Creating & Sending a Message ................................. 3-3

C Attaching Images & Sounds....................................... 3-7

C Saving to Outbox ..................................................... 3-10

Option Settings .............................................................. 3-10

●

PIN....................................................................... 3-10

●

Privacy Level ....................................................... 3-11

●

Set Priority ........................................................... 3-11

●

Polling .................................................................. 3-11

●

Recipient Type..................................................... 3-11

Save as Auto Send ........................................................ 3-12

2-Touch Mail................................................................... 3-12

C Add Address ............................................................ 3-12

C Creating & Sending.................................................. 3-13

Mail Templates ............................................................... 3-14

C Saving Mail Templates............................................. 3-14

C Using Mail Templates .............................................. 3-15

One-Shot Mail................................................................. 3-16

C Saving One-Shot Mail .............................................. 3-16

C Sending One-Shot Mail with Handset Closed.......... 3-16

Greeting .......................................................................... 3-17

4

Mail Box

5

Server Mail

Checking Messages .........................................................4-2

Using Received Messages ..............................................4-6

C Replying to Messages ................................................4-6

C Forwarding Messages ................................................4-6

C Resending Messages .................................................4-7

C Linked Info ..................................................................4-7

C Protecting Messages ..................................................4-9

C Deleting Messages ...................................................4-10

Chat Mail Log..................................................................4-12

C Saving Members.......................................................4-12

C Opening Chat Mail Log.............................................4-13

Mail Folders ....................................................................4-14

C Mail Box Layout ........................................................4-14

C Folder Name.............................................................4-14

C Secret Mode .............................................................4-15

C Moving Messages.....................................................4-16

C Sorting to Folders Automatically...............................4-17

Confirm Delivery & Cancel Delivery .............................4-18

Sending from Outbox.....................................................4-19

C Sending a Message..................................................4-19

C Send Continuously ...................................................4-19

Attachments....................................................................4-20

C Saving Attachments to Data Folder..........................4-20

C Wallpaper & Display Images ....................................4-21

C Other Function..........................................................4-22

●

Sound Auto Play...................................................4-22

Mail Box/Message Menu ................................................4-22

C Combining Split Mail Images ....................................4-22

C Mail Box Menu..........................................................4-23

●

Show/Display Address .........................................4-23

●

List........................................................................4-23

C Message Menu .........................................................4-23

●

Copy .....................................................................4-23

●

Display Size..........................................................4-23

Unretrieved List ................................................................5-2

C Acquire Mail List .........................................................5-2

C Retrieving Selected Messages ...................................5-3

C Deleting Unretrieved List Messages...........................5-3

Server Mail ........................................................................5-4

C Deleting Server Mail ...................................................5-4 v

vi

6

Mail

Settings

Basic Settings .................................................................. 6-2

●

Mail Notice ............................................................. 6-2

●

Confirm Delivery .................................................... 6-2

●

Auto Send .............................................................. 6-2

●

Custom Fixed Text (Japanese Only) ..................... 6-2

Long Mail Settings........................................................... 6-3

C Additional Settings ..................................................... 6-3

●

Save & Send Image............................................... 6-3

●

Auto Retrieve ......................................................... 6-3

Sky Mail Settings ............................................................. 6-3

C PIN Filter .................................................................... 6-3

C Address Filter............................................................. 6-4

C Additional Settings ..................................................... 6-5

●

Set Priority ............................................................. 6-5

●

Sender ................................................................... 6-5

BBS ................................................................................... 6-5

●

BBS........................................................................ 6-6

●

Saving Messages .................................................. 6-6

Resetting Mail & Access Points ..................................... 6-7

●

Reset ..................................................................... 6-7

●

Delete All ............................................................... 6-7

●

Access Points ........................................................ 6-7

7

Web Basics

8

Advanced

Features

Web

Getting Started................................................................. 7-4

C Web Content .............................................................. 7-4

C Information Types ...................................................... 7-5

Using Web ........................................................................ 7-6

C Opening Vodafone Web Menu................................... 7-6

C Entering URLs Directly............................................... 7-7

Basic Operations ............................................................. 7-8

Auto Delivery Service.................................................... 7-10

C Received Information ............................................... 7-10

Favorites, Storage Type & Bookmarks.......................... 8-2

C Saving Information & URLs........................................ 8-2

C Opening Saved Info & Links ...................................... 8-3

C Editing & Deleting ...................................................... 8-4

Using Linked Info............................................................. 8-5

Images .............................................................................. 8-5

C Saving to Data Folder ................................................ 8-5

C Wallpaper & Display Images...................................... 8-6

9

Web

Settings

Melody Files......................................................................8-7

C Playing Sound Files....................................................8-7

C Saving to Data Folder.................................................8-7

Dictionary Files.................................................................8-8

C Title & Version ............................................................8-8

C Saving to Dictionary Library........................................8-8

Sub Menu Settings ...........................................................9-2

●

Set Display Size .....................................................9-2

●

Screen Scroll ..........................................................9-2

●

Copy .......................................................................9-2

●

Reacquire ...............................................................9-2

●

Save to Text Memo ................................................9-2

●

Property..................................................................9-3

Basic Settings...................................................................9-3

●

Screen Savers........................................................9-3

●

Text Only ................................................................9-3

●

Auto Retrieve..........................................................9-3

●

Image Link..............................................................9-4

●

Location Info...........................................................9-4

●

Link Limiter .............................................................9-4

Resetting Web & Center Address ...................................9-5

●

Web Reset..............................................................9-5

●

Clear Memory.........................................................9-5

●

Server Address.......................................................9-5

10

V-Application

Basics

11

Using

V-Applications

V-Applications

Getting Started ...............................................................10-4

Downloading V-Applications.........................................10-4

Starting V-Applications..................................................10-5

Exit, Pause & Resume....................................................10-6

C Exiting or Pausing V-Applications.............................10-6

C Resuming V-Applications .........................................10-6

Managing V-Applications ..............................................11-2

C Opening V-Application Properties ............................11-2

C Deleting V-Applications ............................................11-2

Standby V-Application ...................................................11-3

Network Connection Confirmation ...............................11-4

vii

viii

12

V-Application

Settings

General Settings ............................................................ 12-2

●

Incoming Settings ................................................ 12-2

●

Playback Volume ................................................. 12-2

●

Vibration............................................................... 12-2

●

Backlight .............................................................. 12-2

●

Set to Flash.......................................................... 12-3

Resetting V-Appli & Center Address ........................... 12-3

●

Reset ................................................................... 12-3

●

Clear Memory ...................................................... 12-3

●

Center Address.................................................... 12-3

13

14

Station

Basics

Advanced

Features

Station (Japanese Only)

Getting Started............................................................... 13-4

C Station Content ........................................................ 13-4

C Subscription Status .................................................. 13-4

Opening Main List.......................................................... 13-5

My List ............................................................................ 13-6

C Saving to My List...................................................... 13-6

C Editing My List.......................................................... 13-7

C Received Information ............................................... 13-7

Saving Information ........................................................ 14-2

C Saved Information.................................................... 14-2

C Checking Information ............................................... 14-2

C Deleting Selected Information.................................. 14-2

Using Linked Info........................................................... 14-3

Files within Information ................................................ 14-4

●

To Data Folder..................................................... 14-4

●

Wallpaper & Display Images................................ 14-4

Weather Indicator .......................................................... 14-4

C Activating Weather Indicator .................................... 14-4

C Weather Forecast .................................................... 14-5

Location Info .................................................................. 14-5

C Checking Location Info ............................................ 14-5

C Protecting Location Info ........................................... 14-6

15

Station

Settings

16

Appendix

Sub Menu Settings .........................................................15-2

●

Set Display Size ...................................................15-2

●

Screen Scroll ........................................................15-2

●

Save to Text Memo ..............................................15-2

●

Copy .....................................................................15-2

●

Property................................................................15-2

Basic Settings.................................................................15-3

●

Screen Savers......................................................15-3

●

Update Frequency................................................15-3

●

Save Info Number ................................................15-3

●

Image Link............................................................15-3

Resetting Station & Center Address ............................15-4

●

Reset Station........................................................15-4

●

Clear Memory.......................................................15-4

●

Center Address ....................................................15-4

Appendix

Reset Settings ................................................................16-2

C Mail Settings .............................................................16-2

C Web Settings ............................................................16-3

C V-Application Settings ..............................................16-3

C Station Settings ........................................................16-3

Display Messages ..........................................................16-4

C Mail ...........................................................................16-4

C Web ..........................................................................16-5

C V-Applications...........................................................16-6

C Station ......................................................................16-7

Pictograph List ...............................................................16-8

Memory List ..................................................................16-11

Index ..............................................................................16-12

Customer Service.........................................................16-15

ix

Vodafone live!

Overview

1-1

1

Vodafone live! Basics

Use Vodafone live! services to exchange text and multimedia messages with compatible handsets, download sounds and images as well as V-Applications, browse the Mobile Internet or receive up-to-date area information via Station.

C Mail

Sky Mail

Use this basic service to exchange short text messages (of up to 128 alphanumerics) with other Vodafone handsets, email-compatible mobiles, PCs and other similar devices.

Text

Long Mail

Exchange long text messages (of up to 6,000 alphanumerics) with other Long Mail-compatible

Vodafone handsets, email-compatible mobiles,

PCs, and other similar devices. Attach images/ sounds to messages for multimedia messaging.

Text

Sounds

Images

Service Center

Specify

Date/Time

Service Center

Greeting

Designate the date/time for the timely delivery of special salutations, like birthday or holiday congratulations, etc. to friends or family with compatible Vodafone handsets.

Sky Melody

Request the latest hits from Sky Melody Center to use as handset Ring Tones/Alarm Tones.

Appears at

Specified

Time

Sky Melody

Service Center

Service Center

An additional contract is required to use Long Mail and receive e-mail from PCs, etc.

C Web

Access the Mobile Internet. Browse for image or sound files as well as information.

Web Information

Access Vodafone live!-compatible

Mobile Internet sites from Web menu to download files/info.

(Mobile) Internet

Enter Mobile Internet URLs to view specific sites/pages directly, or access Log List.

Auto Delivery Service

Where available, request automatic info updates from compatible Mobile Internet sites.

Images

Text Info

Sounds

Mobile Internet Access

An additional contract is required to use Web service.

Auto

Delivery

Service

1-2

C V-Applications

Download V-Applications, including games and 3D graphics.

Web Downloads

Download V-Applications via

Web (Vodafone Web).

Download

Network V-Applications

Enjoy Network games and access real time information.

Sports

Games

Real Time

Stocks

Standby V-Application

Set a V-Application to activate when handset enters Standby.

Standby V-Application

Download and use V302SH-compatible V-Applications.

C Station

Access a variety of area-specific local information, periodically updated automatically.

Main List

Area information is updated automatically by location.

My List

Save area information in My

List to receive update notices.

Weather Indicator

Set handset to show updated weather forecast for your area.

Local Info

News

Weather

Local Info

News

Weather

JPK

Forecast

Indicators

^ Receive current location info automatically.

^ Receive urgent information, such as emergency/disaster warnings, automatically.

^ Separate subscription is required for fee-based information.

+

^ For more information concerning Vodafone live! services, contact Vodafone

Customer Center, General Information (see P.16-15).

^ To disable individual Vodafone live! services, see P.1-5.

1

1-3

1

Customizing Handset Address

Default

Account Name Domain Name

Custom

Entered Account Name

varies by subscription area.

If you have further questions, please contact Vodafone Customer Center, General Information

(see P.16-15).

^ Handset must connect to the Network to customize handset address.

^ Customizing handset mail address helps reduce spam.

^ Web must be activated before handset address can be customized (see P.1-5).

1

Press

e

2

Select

1Vodafone Web and press b

3

Select My Vodafone and press

b

4

Select press

オリジナルメール設定・各種メール設定 b

^ Follow onscreen instructions (Japanese only).

C

For Web basic operations, see P.7-8.

C

Center Access Code: see 6P.1-26

,

Onscreen instructions are subject to change. For more information on customizing handset address, contact Vodafone Customer Center, General Information (see P.16-15).

Memory Status

Save up to approximately 375 KB between Inbox (Mail), Storage Type (Web), and

Saved Information (Station).

Open Memory Status window to confirm Mail, Web and Station memory.

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 1

1

Select

1Memory and press b

Disabling Vodafone live!

Disable any or all Vodafone live! services. Use this function to restrict access to or prevent unauthorized use of Vodafone live! services on your handset.

All services are active by default.

1

Press

bqp

2

Enter Security Code

3

Select a service and press

b

4

Choose

2Off and press b

C

To activate, choose

1On A

Press b

1

1-4 1-5

Mail

2-1

2-2

MEMO

New Mail

2-3

2

Opening New Messages

1

When mail arrives, animation plays and Delivery

Notice appears

B (Long Mail) or A (Sky Mail) appears according to message type.

^ When handset is closed, notification followed by y appears on

Sub Display. Open handset to see Delivery Notice.

2

Press

b

Inbox opens (see P.2-5).

J

Q

B n

9/2

*[Tue] 12:34

Message Received

3

Select a message and press

b

Message window opens (see P.2-6 "Message Contents").

^ Press q to see newer messages or p for older ones.

4

Press

g to exit

Show

Delivery Notice

J q

Q n

D

9/2

* 12:34 21

BVKimura Tetsuya

ZTomorrow's meeti ng

The meeting schedule d for tomorrow has b een postponed. Pleas e come over to confe rence room 1 at 11.

Menu

Delivery Report

C When messages are sent with Confirm Delivery On (see P.3-5, P.6-2), handset receives a Delivery Report from the Center. Open Delivery Reports in the same manner as standard messages.

Ring Tone Volume

C While handset is ringing, press

C (up) or D (down).

^ Ring Tone Level setting (see 6P.8-2) changes accordingly.

^ Cancel Manner Mode (see 6P.3-3) to adjust the level.

Quick Silent

C Press j to instantly mute incoming information tone for that information only.

+

^ See P.4-2 to open Inbox when Delivery Notice does not appear.

^ See 6P.7-9 "Vodafone live! Animation" to disable incoming mail animation.

New Mail Notifications during Operations

When mail arrives while using handset functions, a notification such as New Mail from (Sender's name) appears.

^ See P.6-2 "Mail Notice" to hide or edit notification.

^ New Mail appears for:

B Messages sorted to Secret Mode Mail Folders

B Messages from senders saved as Secret Mode Phone Book entries

New Mail from Kimura

New Message

29/128

I have a business tr ip today,

(when handset is not in Secret Mode)

B Messages with Privacy Level 3 or 4

^ Names do not appear when Phone Book Lock (see 6P.11-3) is

OK Menu active.

^ To receive notification while V-Application is active, select Show Message in Incoming

Settings (see P.12-2).

^ Notification does not appear when:

B A Greeting message arrived before the designated date/time B In Standby

B The current window does not support notifications

Inbox

2

Inbox Contents

To open Inbox while Delivery Notice for mail appears, press b; otherwise, open Mail and press b twice. To select a different view for Mail Box, see "List" (P.4-23 "Mail

Box Menu").

J

Q

A n

AQKitayama Kaoru

BVKimura Tetsuya

[email protected]

AQKatou Reiko

AQKimura

E

GMr.Yamamoto and

Ms.Kawahashi, please

bring a camera and a tripod to the wedd ing. I will bring a

Check Select Menu

Unread/Read

Long Mail: B

Messages other than Long Mail: A

(If subscribed to Long Mail, B appears for e-mail messages.)

^ Indicator color varies by message status:

B Unread: Red

B Protected: Yellow

Message Type (see P.2-6)

+

Incoming Mail... and received text appear for incoming linked mes

2-4 2-5

2

C Message Type

X

Y

S

Z

Q

R

V

W

V

Sky Mail (mail from Vodafone handsets)

E-mail (messages received via the Internet)

Long Mail with attachments

Long Mail Notice (Server Mail, initial portion included)

Unretrieved List (Long Mail)

BBS Notice

Polling (BBS accessed)

Greeting

Unsaved Sky Melody

Message Contents

Select a message and press b to open it.

J q

Q n

D

9/2

* 12:34 21

BVKimura Tetsuya

ZTomorrow's meeti ng

The meeting schedule d for tomorrow has b een postponed. Pleas e come over to confe rence room 1 at 11.

Sending Priority: see P.6-5

C: Low, D (blue arrow): Normal, E (orange arrow): High,

F: By Express (B: Long Mail or Long Mail Notice)

Image Display Size

100%: q, 200%: p

Received Date & Time

Message Number

Sender

^ Number or address appears. Name appears if saved in

Phone Book.

Message Text

Menu

Privacy Level (see P.3-11)

^ Lv2 appears for Sky Melodies.

Attachments

V: Files are attached to the message.

2-6

Retrieving Long Mail

The Center sends the initial portion of Long Mail messages when:

B The message is over 385 single-byte characters

B The sender's address is over 56 single-byte characters

B The subject is over 41 single-byte characters

B The message was sent to multiple recipients

B Files are attached to the message

X (Long Mail Notice) appears in Inbox when the remaining portion of Long Mail message is held at the Center.

+

^ To retrieve complete Long Mail automatically, see P.6-3 "Auto Retrieve."

^ Use Unretrieved List to retrieve multiple Long Mail messages at one time (see

P.5-3).

Retrieving a Selected Long Mail Message

1

Open a message

NMore appears at the bottom of the message.

2

Press

e b

Download starts.

^ After the message is retrieved, Inbox opens. (Long Mail Notice disappears and the message is saved.)

J q

Q

B n C r. Yamamoto and Miss

Kawahashi's wedding next Sunday. I will bring a camcorder.

You're the cameraman that day, OK?

The capacity of the stor

NMore

More Menu

Sky Melody

If Mail service is disabled, Sky Melody cannot be used. Activate Mail to use Sky

Melody (see P.1-5).

Requesting Melody Files

1

Press

d, select 4Sky Melody and press b

2

Press

b

3

Follow voice prompts and select a melody

4

Press

g

Sky Melody Center sends the melody.

2

2-7

2

Changing Sky Melody Center Number

C Do not change this number unless instructed to do so. Otherwise, Sky Melody Center access will be disabled.

Press

d A

Select

4Sky Melody A

Press

b A

Press

d X A

Press

i (Long Press) A

Enter new number

A

Press

b

^

U1790 is set by default.

Saving to Data Folder

1

When Sky Melody arrives, animation plays and Delivery Notice appears

A appears.

^ When handset is closed, MAIL followed by y appears on Sub Display. Open handset to see Delivery Notice.

2

Press

b

^ VSky Melody Center appears.

3

Select the message and press

b

Title appears and melody plays as set in Sound Volume.

4

Press

d I

5

Select To Data Folder and press

b

Melody is saved to Data Folder and message is automatically deleted.

^ When memory is full, delete files (see 6P.9-24) and try again.

C

To use as Ring Tone, see 6P.8-3.

+

Sky Melody files cannot be modified or attached to Long Mail.

2-8

Sending Text Messages

3-1

3

Creating Text Messages

Procedure

Enter Recipient (see P.3-4)

Address

Locations

Phone Book

2-Touch Mail

Sent Mail

Direct

Entry

Mobile Number

Mail Address

Enter Subject (Long Mail: see P.3-4)

Compose Message (see P.3-4)

Attach Files (Long Mail: see P.3-7 - 3-9)

Still Image Animation Melody

Send Message

Incoming Calls during Message Creation

C Content is saved temporarily. To resume editing, follow these steps.

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

+

Undeliverable messages are stored at the Center for up to 72 hours, and delivered when recipient's handset connects to the Network.

3-2

Character Entry Limits

Character limits vary by Mail Type.

Sky Mail

Long Mail

Greeting

Character Entry Limits

128 single-byte alphanumerics

6,000 single-byte alphanumerics, up to 6 KB

112 single-byte alphanumerics

Long Mail message text character limit differs by attachment size and recipient count.

Entry Item Availability

Character limits vary by Mail Type.

Sky Mail

Long Mail

Greeting

Recipient

Available

Available

Available

Sender

N/A

N/A

Available

Subject

N/A

Available

N/A

Message Date & Time Attachments

Available

Available

Available

N/A

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

To send Long Mail messages, enter a recipient and either attach a file or enter a subject or message text.

Creating & Sending a Message

Save frequently used addresses to 2-Touch Mail.

1

Press

d, select 1Long Mail, 2Sky Mail or

3Greeting and press b

Mail Composition window opens.

J

Q n

E

Long Mail

Y[No Address ]

Z[No Subject ]

G[No Body Text ]

H[No Attach ]

Confirm Delivery

K

Save Auto Send K

3

2

Select Y and press b

Save Select Send

Mail Composition Window

(Long Mail)

3-3

3

3

Phone Book

1 Select

1Phone Book and press b

2 Open an entry

C

To search Phone Book, see Steps 2 - 3 on 6P.5-11.

2-Touch Mail List

1 Select

22-Touch Mail and press b

C

2-Touch Mail: see P.3-12

2 Select a recipient

Sent Mail

1 Select

3Sent Mail and press b

C

Sent Mail: see P.3-5

2 Select a recipient

Direct Entry

1 Select

4Mobile Number or 5Mail Address and press b

2 Enter recipient's Vodafone handset number or mail address

C

To select from Phone Book, see Steps 1 - 3 on 6P.5-11.

4

Press

b

^ For Sky Mail, skip ahead to Step 7.

5

Select Z and press b

^ Enter up to 256 single-byte alphanumerics (254 single-byte katakana or 125 double-byte characters).

6

Enter subject and press

b

7

Select G and press

New Message window opens.

b

8

Enter a message

C

Using Mail Templates: see P.3-15

C

Using Fixed Text: see P.3-6

C

To copy from Phone Book, see 6P.4-9.

C

To copy from Text Memo, press d I A

Select

5Call Text Memo A

Press b A

Select Text Memo

A

Press b

3-4

9

Press

b

Mail Composition window returns.

C

Attaching Images & Sounds: see P.3-7

C

Option Settings: see P.3-10

C

Saving to Outbox: see P.3-10

C

To set Confirm Delivery (see P.6-2), select Confirm Delivery

A

Press b A

Choose

1On A

Press b

C

Save as Auto Send: see P.3-12

10

Press

d N

^ Messages are delivered even if handset is closed.

Message delivery status and result appear on Sub Display.

J

Q n E

Long Mail

Y[Kimura Tetsuya]

Z[I got your mai]

G[Thank you in a]

H[No Attach   ]

Confirm Delivery

K

Save Auto Send K

Save Select Send

Mail Composition Window

(Long Mail)

+

Using both single and double-byte characters may reduce character entry limit.

3

When Mail Address is Entered

C Mail addresses count toward the message text character limit.

C Single-byte katakana and Pictographs are invalid in message text and subject.

Entered single-byte katakana is changed to double-byte, and Pictograph is replaced with single-byte ?.

Sending from Phone Book Entries

C To select a recipient from Phone Book, perform Steps 1 - 3 on 6P.5-11

A

Press

b A

Select Send Mail (Phone) or Send Mail (E-mail)

A

Press

b A

Select Mail Type

A

Press

b

Save Auto Send for Failed Messages

C Save As Auto Send? appears when message delivery fails with Auto Send On (see

P.6-2) and Save Auto Send Off.

To set Save Auto Send, choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Sent Mail

C Last 9 sent mail records are saved.

C Recipients' names appear if saved in Phone Book. Names for Secret Mode Phone

Book entries appear only when handset is in Secret Mode.

C Vodafone handset numbers appear with g, etc. Mail addresses appear with i.

C Changes to Phone Book entries are not reflected in Sent Mail.

C To delete records from Sent Mail, follow these steps.

After Step 3 (Sent Mail) on P.3-4, press

d I A Select Delete or

Delete All

A Press b A Choose 1Yes A Press b

3-5

3

Entering Recipients (Long Mail)

C Enter up to five recipients. To add recipients, follow these steps.

After Step 3 on P.3-4, select Y

A

Press

b A

Select a number

A

Press

b A

Enter a recipient (see Step 3 on

P.3-4)

^ To enter additional recipients, repeat the above steps from

J

Q n E

Long Mail Address

UKimura Tetsuya

2------------------

3------------------

4------------------

5------------------

"Select a number."

B Press e j to return to Mail Composition window.

C In Address list, U appears before recipient's name, number or address. Change the status to Cc (carbon copy) as follows:

Select a recipient

A

Press

d I A

Select Cc

A

Press

b

C To edit, open Address list and follow these steps.

Set Select Menu

Address List

Select a recipient

A

Press

d I A

Select Change

A

Press

b A

Edit address

A

Press

b

C To delete, open Address list and follow these steps.

Select a recipient

A

Press

d I A

Select Delete

A

Press

b

Sending to Server (Sky Mail)

C Intranet integration is required to send messages to the Server.

After Step 2 on P.3-3, select

6Server A Press b A Enter Server Address

(within 20 digits)

A Press b A Enter Sub Address (within five digits) A

Press

b

Using Fixed Text (Japanese Only)

Editable Text or Custom Fixed Text (see P.6-2).

^ Follow these steps after Step 7 on P.3-4. Mail Composition window returns after Fixed

Text is entered.

1

Press

e 5

^ Fixed Text cannot be inserted after entering characters.

2

Select

2定型文 b

3

Select a type and press

b

4

Select a message and press

b

C

To select other Fixed Text, press

B A

Select another message

A

Press b

C

To use Editable Fixed Text, select Editable Fixed Text

A

Press b A

Press

1 A

Enter text

A

Press b

B Press

2 or 3 if any A

Enter text

A

Press b

5

Press

b

3-6

+

^ Edit Preset Fixed Text after it is copied to Long Mail or e-mail messages.

^ Character limit depends on message type and the number of parentheses.

Converting Mail Type

Change Mail Types while editing Sky Mail or Long Mail messages.

^ The following are deleted when Long Mail is converted to Sky Mail:

B Subject B Attachments B Recipients other than the first one

B Message text exceeding Sky Mail character limit

^ Follow these steps after Step 7 on P.3-4. After conversion, New Message window returns. Complete and send the message.

1

Press

d I

2

Select STo Long Mail or SConvert Sky Mail and press b

3

Choose

1Yes and press b

^ When converting Sky Mail to Long Mail, entered address appears in TO field.

When a Sky Mail Message Exceeds the Character Limit

C Mail Message Exceeds Limit Convert to Long Mail? appears.

To convert Sky Mail to Long Mail, choose

1Yes A

Press

b

^ The message above does not appear if you are using Fixed Text.

Attaching Images & Sounds

Attach images or sound files to Long Mail.

^ Attach up to five files. (Only one animation file can be attached.)

^ Split to four smaller images or reduce image size (see 6P.6-23).

^ For more information, contact Vodafone Customer Center, General Information

(see P.16-15).

Attaching Files from Data Folder

Follow these steps after Step 9 on P.3-5. Mail Composition window returns after a file is attached.

1

Select H and press b

C

If files are already attached, select a number

A

Press b

C

To change attached file, select a file

A

Press b A

Press d X

2

Select

1Data Folder and press b

3

3-7

3

3

Select a folder and press

b

^ Files cannot be attached if not selectable.

C

To open images or play sounds, select a file

A

Press e 9 or L

B To return, press e W or C.

4

Select a file and press

b

C

For large JPEG images, select

1Attach 1/4 Size or 2Attach Original A

Press b

(Files may not be attached even if the file size is reduced.)

C

For large animation files, choose

1Yes A

Press b (Files may not be attached even if the file size is reduced.)

C

To attach a Burst Shot image, use

F to select an image A

Press b

C

When attaching a sound file, select a format

A

Press b

1Melody Format

Chords over 6 are deleted. Tone and loudness settings are ignored.

Chords over 17 are deleted, and tones of the following change

2SMAF (MA-2) Format to Piano:

Drum (FM) B Drum (WT) B Original (FM) B Original (WT)

3SMAF (MA-3) Format Up to 32 chords can be sent

Editing Images

C To add stamps/text to attached images, follow these steps after Step 4.

Select H

A

Press

b A

Select an image

A

Press

d I A

Select

3Marker Stamp A

Press

b A

Edit image (see Steps 2 - 5 on 6P.9-15)

A

Press

e j

^ Stamps/text cannot be added if the attached Sha-mail image is unsaved.

^ While adding Marker Stamps, unsaved changes may be deleted by incoming calls.

Adding & Deleting Attachments

C To attach additional files, follow these steps.

Select H

A

Press

b A

Select a number

A

Press

b

A

Perform from Step 2 in "Attaching Files from Data

Folder" on P.3-7

B Press e j to return to Mail Composition window.

C To delete attachments, follow these steps.

Open Attachment list and select a file

A

Press

d I A

Select

2Delete A

Press

b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

B Press e j to return to Mail Composition window.

J

Q

Attachment s*4-*9-21_11-54 n E

2------------------

3------------------

4------------------

5------------------

Set Select Menu

, ^ Some sound files cannot be converted.

^ Tone and loudness of sound files may change after conversion. Some files may be too large to attach after conversion.

3-8

Attaching Mail & Web Files

1

Select an image or sound file in mail or Web info and press

d I

^ Selected image is outlined in blue.

J p

Q n D

9/21 12:3

* 21

BVKimura Tetsuya

ZMy lovely Sakura

Isn't she cute?

2

Select XCopy (image) or WCopy (sound) and

press

b

Copied files are saved to Clipboard temporarily.

^ Some images or sounds cannot be copied.

3

Press

g

4

In Long Mail Composition window, select H and press b

5

Choose

2Clipboard and press b

6

Select

1Attach and press b

C

Adding & Deleting Attachment: see P.3-8

C

To open images or play sounds, select

2Open File A

Press b

B To return, press e W (image) or e C (sound).

Menu

7

Create and send the message

C

Creating & Sending a Message: see P.3-3

,

Depending on the file size of images or sounds, File Exceeds Limit Cannot Attach may appear and file is not attached.

Attaching Images Captured while Creating Message

^ Follow these steps after Step 9 on P.3-5. Mail Composition window returns after an image is attached.

^ This function is not available when files are already attached.

1

Select H and press b

2

Select

3Sha-mail Shoot and press b

Camera is activated.

3

Capture image

C

For details, see Steps 2 - 3 in "Capturing Still Images" on 6P.6-7.

4

Press

b

Image is attached.

^ If Save & Send Image is On (see P.6-3), the captured image is automatically saved to

Data Folder.

3

3-9

3

Saving to Outbox

^ Save up to 100 KB.

^ When memory is full, delete messages (see P.4-10) before creating new ones.

^ Follow these steps after Step 9 on P.3-5.

1

Press

e q

2

Choose

1Yes and press b

Outbox opens. Latest message comes first.

3

Press

g to exit

,

The order in which addresses (To and Cc) or attachments appear may change when saving Long Mail.

Option Settings

Confirm or change send options when sending Sky Mail or Greeting messages.

^ Sky Mail options are available only when sending to Vodafone handsets.

^ These settings are valid for one message when set during message composition.

^ Option Settings are not available when resending messages.

J

Q n

E

Sky Mail

Y[Kimura Tetsuya]

G[Thank you in a]

Option Settings

Confirm DeliveryK

Save Auto Send K

Save Select Send

Mail Composition Window

(Sky Mail)

PIN

Set a matching PIN for recipients using PIN Filter (see P.6-3)

In Mail Composition window, select Option Settings

A

Press

b A

Select

1PIN A

Press

b A

Enter recipient's 4-digit PIN

A

Press

b

C

To return to Mail Composition window, press e W.

3-10

Privacy Level

Restrict copying/forwarding the message, or require Security

Code to open it

KLevel 1

In Mail Composition window, select Option Settings

A

Press

b A

Select

2Privacy A

Press

b A

Select from

1Level 1 to 4Level 4 A

Press

b

C

To return to Mail Composition window, press e W.

Privacy Level

Low

.

High

1

2

3

4

Copy/Forward

Allowed

Prohibited

Allowed

Prohibited

Security Code

Not Required

Not Required

Required

Required

3

Set priority when sending mail

Set Priority

CAvailable for Sky Mail.

KNormal

In Mail Composition window, select Option Settings

A

Press

b A

Select

3Set Priority A

Press

b A

Select from

1Low to 4By Express

A

Press

b

C

To return to Mail Composition window, press e W.

,

By Express messages are delivered faster for additional fees. Other levels indicate the importance of the message and do not affect delivery speed.

Polling

Activate Polling to receive BBS messages (see P.6-5)

CAvailable for Sky Mail.

KOff (not to receive BBS messages)

In Mail Composition window, select Option Settings

A

Press

b A

Select

4Polling A

Press

b A

Choose

1On A

Press

b

C

To return to Mail Composition window, press e W.

Recipient Type

Select a recipient type

Under normal conditions, set Recipient Type to None

CAvailable for Sky Mail.

KNone

In Mail Composition window, select Option Settings

A

Press

b A

Select

5Recipient Type A

Press

b A

Select from

1None to

3Computer A

Press

b

C

To return to Mail Composition window, press e W.

^ Select Mobile Phone to send to a Vodafone handset, or Computer to send to a PC connected to a Vodafone handset.

3-11

3

Save as Auto Send

When Save Auto Send is active, the message is saved to Outbox and is sent automatically when signal returns.

^ Activate Auto Send beforehand (see P.6-2).

^ Save up to 10 messages.

1

In Mail Composition window, select Save Auto Send and press

b

2

Choose

1On and press b

Auto appears in the right bottom corner.

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b (Omit the next step.)

3

Press

d 0

+ ^ Auto Send initiates message send up to three times including initial attempt.

^ Auto Send Long Mail takes priority over Sky Mail.

^ Auto Send failed deliveries are saved to Sent and Outbox.

When Auto Send is Activated

C Approximately 10 seconds after signal returns, an Auto Send message is sent. When there is more than one, messages are sent in five second intervals.

C Consecutively saved Long Mail messages are sent in succession.

C Sent appears when Auto Send is complete.

For unsent messages, press b to open Outbox.

^ Y or N appears next to failed Auto Send messages.

2-Touch Mail

Add Address

Save up to nine frequently used addresses to 2-Touch Mail to send mail from Standby

(see P.3-13) or add addresses to mail from 2-Touch Mail List (see P.3-4).

1

Press

d, select 6Mail Settings and press b

2

Select

12-Touch Mail and press b

3

Select

1Add Address and press b

4

Select a number and press

b

C

To change addresses, select a number

A

Press b A

Edit address

A

Press b

C

To delete an entry, select a number

A

Press d I A

Select Delete

A

Press b

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

C

To delete all entries, press d I A

Select Delete All

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

B When selecting a number with no entry, press d I A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b (All entries are deleted.)

5

Phone Book

1 Select

1Phone Book and press b

^ Changing Phone Book entries does not affect 2-Touch Mail Addresses.

2 Open an entry

C

To search Phone Book, see Steps 2 - 3 on 6P.5-11.

Direct Entry

1 Select

2Mobile Number or 3E-Mail and press b

2 Enter recipient's Vodafone handset number or mail address

C

To select from Phone Book, see Steps 1 - 3 on 6P.5-11.

6

Press

b

An icon corresponding to the address type appears.

^ Repeat Steps 4 - 6 for other entries.

7

Press

g to exit

Adding to 2-Touch Mail while Creating Message

C When there is no entry in 2-Touch Mail, add an address from Mail Composition window.

After Step 2 on P.3-3, select

22-Touch Mail A Press b A Choose 1Yes A

Press

b A Perform from Step 5 above

Creating & Sending

Use 2-Touch Mail to create and send messages from Standby.

Save addresses in 2-Touch Mail (Mail Settings) beforehand (see P.3-12).

1

In Standby, press the assigned number (

1 - 9) with Keypad (1 - 9)

3

3-12 3-13

3

2

Sending Long Mail

1 Press e 1

The address is entered automatically.

Sending Sky Mail

1 Press d 2

The address is entered automatically.

3

Create and send the message

C

Creating & Sending a Message: see P.3-3

Mail Templates

Save frequently used messages to Mail Templates. Choose a template and fill in fields to easily create messages. Templates consist of fixed text and Items (free text fields).

Fixed text is editable.

Saving Mail Templates

^ Save up to 10 templates per category.

default. Edit default templates to make your own templates.

1

Press

b, select My Files and press b

2

Select

6Mail Templates and press b

3

Select a category and press

b

C

To edit title, select a number

A

Press d I A

Select

3Change Title A

Press b

A

Edit title

A

Press b

B Default template titles cannot be changed.

C

To delete templates, select a number

A

Press d I A

Select

4Delete A

Press b

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

B Default templates cannot be deleted.

4

Press

d I, select 1Create New and press b

C

To edit existing templates, select a number

A

Press b twice

5

Enter title and press

b

^ Enter up to 24 single-byte characters.

3-14

6

Enter text

^ Enter up to 2,000 single-byte characters.

^ Use up to 10 Items (

1 - 0).

^ Press i to delete Items.

C

To enter Items, press e B A

Select a number

A

Press b

B Items in use cannot be selected.

7

Press

b

8

Select

1New Entry or 2Overwrite and press b

9

Select a number and press

b

Creating Mail Directly from Mail Templates

C Follow these steps after Step 3 in "Saving Mail Templates" on P.3-14.

Select a number

A

Press

e A A

Select

1Create Long Mail or

2Create Sky Mail A

Press

b A

Perform from Step 5 below

Using Mail Templates

Use saved Mail Templates to easily create text messages.

Follow these steps after opening New Message window in Step 7 on P.3-4. When finished, Mail Composition window returns. Complete and send the message.

1

Press

e p

^ Templates cannot be inserted after entering text.

2

Select

1Mail Templates and press b

3

Select a category and press

b

4

Select a template and press

b

^ To keep the text unchanged, skip ahead to Step 9.

5

Press

e B

6

Select a number and press

b

7

Enter text and press

b

^ Enter up to 100 single-byte characters per Item.

8

Repeat Steps 5 - 7 for other Items

9

Press

b

10

Check message and press

b

^ For Long Mail, template title will be the subject if not already entered.

3

3-15

3

One-Shot Mail

Save a Sky Mail message as One-Shot Mail and send to a specific recipient with handset closed. Location Info can be pasted into the message text.

Saving One-Shot Mail

^ Available only for Sky Mail. One-Shot Mail will not be saved to Outbox.

^ Entered contents remain until changed.

1

Press

d, select 5One-Shot Mail and press b

2

Select

2Create and press b

3

Enter a recipient's number and message text

C

For details, see P.3-3 "Creating & Sending a Message."

C

To paste Location Info, select SendLocationInfo

A

Press b A

Choose

1On A

Press b

4

Press

e j when finished

Location Info

C Latest Location Info is pasted. If no Location Info is obtained, nothing is pasted.

C Location Info counts toward the character limit.

Sending One-Shot Mail with Handset Closed

Save One-Shot Mail (above) and activate One-Shot Mail in Side Key Settings for

Standby (see 6P.12-3) before sending One-Shot Mail.

1

Close handset and press

h for 1+ seconds

One-Shot Mail is sent (handset vibrates for 0.5 seconds).

^ When delivery fails, Save Auto Send is set. (When Auto Send is Off or Outbox is full, handset vibrates for another second.)

Sending One-Shot Mail with Handset Open

C Press d A

Select

5One-Shot Mail A

Press

b A

Select

1Send A

Press

b

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Greeting

Send messages to compatible Vodafone handsets anytime, to be opened at the designated date/time in the future; ideal for holidays, birthdays and other special occasions.

1

Press

d, select 3Greeting and press b

2

Select Y and press b

3

Enter a recipient's number and press

b

C

To enter a recipient, see Step 3 on P.3-4.

4

Select I and press b

^ When Sender is set in Mail Settings (see P.6-5), entered name appears automatically.

^ Skip ahead to Step 6 if no entry is required.

5

Enter name and press

b

^ Enter up to 12 single-byte alphanumerics (10 single-byte katakana or 3 double-byte characters).

6

Select G and press b

7

Enter message text and press

b

8

Select J and press b

The current date and time appear.

9

Specify the date and time and press

b (Recipients cannot open

Greeting messages until then.)

^ Apply 24-hour clock format.

10

Press

d N

3

3-16 3-17

Mail Box

4-1

4

Checking Messages

Received messages are saved to Inbox, sent ones to Sent and drafts to Outbox.

^ A or B appears when there is unread mail in Inbox.

^ Set Mail Box display layouts to List or Folder (see P.4-14).

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

C

To check the number of saved messages, select

1Inbox or 3Outbox A

Press d I

B Press d W to return.

C

To toggle layout, select

1Inbox, 2Sent or 3Outbox A

Press d I A

Select

2Mail Box Display A

Press b

B Security Code is required when there is a Secret Mode Mail Folder.

2

Select

1Inbox, 2Sent or 3Outbox and press b

Mail Box Contents: see P.4-4

C

When Mail Box Layout is set to Folder, select appropriate folder

A

Press b

3

Select a message and press

b

Message window opens (see P.4-5 "Message Contents").

^ Press q to see newer messages or p for older ones.

^ For Outbox messages, Mail Composition window opens.

B To edit Outbox messages, select an item

A

Press b A

Edit the message

B To save edited messages, press e q A

Select

1Save as or 2Overwrite A

Press b

^ If attached image is too large, it may not appear.

^ For Sky Melody messages, the title appears and melody plays.

C

To edit Sent messages, press d I A

Select Edit

A

Press b A

Select an item

A

Press b A

Edit the message

C

Use

E to scroll.

C

To open messages with Privacy Level 3 or 4, enter Security Code.

4

Press

g to exit

Save Auto Send for Outbox Messages

C For one message, press d A

Select

0Mail Box A

Press

b A

Select

3Outbox A

Press

b A

Select a message

A

Press

d I A

Select

Save Auto Send

A

Press

b

C For multiple messages, press d A

Select

0Mail Box A

Press

b A

Select

3Outbox A

Press

b A

Select a message and press

e @ (repeat for

other messages)

A

Press

d I A

Select Save Auto Send

A

Press

b

B To uncheck, select a message with R

A

Press e @

B To clear all check marks, press d I A

Select Reset Check(s)

A

Press b

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

C Save Auto Send is disabled for protected or incomplete messages.

Enlarging Images and SMAF File Images

C Select an image (or a SMAF file with image)

A

Press

d I A

Select

XEnlarge Display or WEnlarge Image

A

Press

b

B Use

G to view the portion outside Display.

^ Images can only be enlarged when XEnlarge Display or WEnlarge Image appears.

+

^ To activate Display Backlight, press

0 - 9.

^ Greeting messages are saved in Inbox. Sender's name and message cannot be viewed until the specified date and time.

When Mail Box Layout is Set to Folder

Newly received/sent messages and drafts are saved to Main Folder. Messages are sorted to the specified Mail Folder if set in the sender or recipient's Phone Book

Option Settings (see P.4-17 - 4-18).

4

4-2 4-3

4

Mail Box Contents

Select a Mail Box and press b. Inbox, Sent or Outbox opens.

^ To select a different view for Mail Box, see "List" (P.4-23 "Mail Box Menu").

^ Press d I to reply, forward, edit, etc.

J

Q

A n

AQKitayama Kaoru

BVKimura Tetsuya

[email protected]

AQKatou Reiko

AQKimura

E

GMr.Yamamoto and

Ms.Kawahashi, please

bring a camera and a tripod to the wedd ing. I will bring a

Check Select Menu

Unread/Read (Inbox), Mail Type (Sent/Outbox)

Long Mail: B

Messages other than Long Mail: A

(If subscribed to Long Mail, B appears for e-mail messages.)

^ Indicator color varies by message status:

B Unread: Red

B Protected: Yellow

B Unread Delivery Report: Green

B Saved as Auto Send: Light blue

Message Type (see below)

+

Incoming Mail... and received text appear for incoming linked messages.

C Message Type

Q

R

V

X

1

Y

1

S

1

Z

W

V

1

P

2

Sky Mail (mail to/from Vodafone handsets)

E-mail (messages sent/received via the Internet)

Long Mail with attachments

Long Mail Notice (Server Mail, initial portion included)

Unretrieved List (Long Mail)

BBS Notice

Polling (BBS accessed)

Greeting

Unsaved Sky Melody

PD Mail (messages sent via mail terminals

3

)

1

Appears only in Inbox.

2

Appears only in Sent.

3

Mail terminal (e.g. Sky e pad manufactured by SHARP) is a Vodafone accessory.

Connect a Vodafone handset to exchange messages.

C Additional Indicators

N

Y

Failed Auto Send Sky Mail

Failed Auto Send Long Mail

These indicators appear only in Outbox.

4-4

Message Contents

Select a message and press b to open it.

J q

Q n D

9/21 12:3

* 21

BVKimura Tetsuya

ZTomorrow's meeti ng

The meeting schedule d for tomorrow has b een postponed. Pleas e come over to confe rence room 1 at 11.

Sending Priority: see P.6-5

C: Low, D (blue arrow): Normal, D (orange arrow): High,

F: By Express (B: Long Mail or Long Mail Notice)

Image Display Size

100%: q, 200%: p

Received or Sent Date & Time

Message Number

Sender or Recipient

^ Number or address appears. Name appears if saved in

Phone Book.

Message Text

Menu

Privacy Level (see P.3-11)

^ Lv2 appears for Sky Melodies.

Attachments

V: Files are attached to the message.

Received, Sent, etc.: Delivery Status (Sent only)

Sent message delivery status (see below)

E: Report (Sent only)

Delivery Report

Delivery Status Indicators

Received Message delivered*

Sent

Message delivered or sent to e-mail

Delivery failed, or was canceled

(not saved at the Center)

Message status unknown

*Appears when confirming delivery from a message window (see P.4-18) or when sending messages with Confirm Delivery On (see P.3-5, P.6-2).

Changing Scroll Unit

C Press d A

Select

0Mail Box A

Press

b A

Select

7Mail Box Settings A

Press

b A

Select

1Scroll Unit A

Press

b A

Select an option

A

Press

b

4

4-5

4

Using Received Messages

Replying to Messages

1

Open a message

2

Press

d I

3

Select Return Mail or Reply to All and press

b

^ Use Long Mail to send the same message to up to five recipients at one time.

^ Select Reply to All to send the same reply to all recipients (To/Cc). Reply to All may not appear for some messages.

4

Select Mail Type, original message quote option and press

Mail Composition window opens. Recipient is automatically entered.

b

^ For Long Mail, subject is entered prefaced with Re:.

5

Send the message

C

To create and send a message, see Step 5 (Step 7 for Sky Mail) and onward on P.3-4.

Forwarding Messages

^ Messages with Privacy Level 2 or 4 cannot be forwarded.

^ Long Mail is always forwarded as Long Mail.

1

Open a message

2

Press

d I

3

Select Forward and press

b

Mail Composition window opens.

^ For Long Mail, subject is automatically entered prefaced with Fw:.

4

Select Y and press b

5

Enter recipients and press

b

^ Files attached to the original message are automatically attached to forwarded messages.

C

To enter recipients, see Step 3 on P.3-4.

C

When files cannot be attached, select

1Understood and press b to send the message without the attachment.

6

Press

d N

Resending Messages

1

Open a message

2

Press

d I

3

Select Resend and press

b

4

Choose

1Yes and press b

Linked Info

Saving Linked Info to Phone Book

Linked Info is indicated by a dotted underline. Save a linked phone number, mail address or URL from within message text or sender's address to Phone Book; use

Linked Info within a message as indicated below:

Phone Number

Mail Address

Numbers, #,

U

, etc. between 10 and 24 digits, starting with 0.

Numbers, #,

U

, etc. following TEL: (case insensitive).

Example: TEL:090392XXXX1 (X is any number)

Single-byte alphanumerics and dots, etc., before and after @.

Example: abc@))).co.jp ()is any alphanumeric character)

1

Open a message

2

Saving Sender Address

1 Press d I

2 Select Add to Phone Book and press b

Saving Linked Info

1 Select a phone number or mail address and press b

2 Select mAdd to PhoneBook and press b

3

Select

1New Entry and press b

Number or address is entered in corresponding Phone Book field. Complete other fields and save (see 6P.5-4 - 5-5).

C

Edit number/address if necessary

A

Press b A

Select an icon

A

Press b A

Complete other fields and save (see 6P.5-4 - 5-5)

C

To save to an existing Phone Book entry, select

2New Item A

Press b A

Open a

Phone Book entry (perform Steps 1 - 3 on 6P.5-11)

A

Select an icon

A

Press b A

Press d q A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

4

4-6 4-7

4

Using Linked Info

Use numbers (TEL:), addresses or URLs (http://) to place calls, send messages or access Mobile Internet sites. Available only when number, address or URL is underlined with a dotted line.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

1Inbox or 2Sent and press b

C

When Mail Box Layout is set to Folder, select appropriate folder

A

Press b

3

Open a message containing a phone number, mail address or URL

4

Select a number, address or URL and press

d I

5

Phone Numbers

1 Select mCall and press b

Phone number appears.

2 Press f

The number is dialed.

Mail Addresses

1 Select mSend Mail and press b

2 Select

1Send Long Mail or 2Send Sky Mail and press b

C

To create and send a message, see Step 5 (Step 7 for Sky Mail) and onward on

P.3-4.

URLs

1 Select mOpen Link and press b

URL appears.

2 Press b again, select 1Send and press b

Handset connects to the Network.

C

For more about accessing Mobile Internet sites, see P.7-7.

Protecting Messages

Protect important messages saved in Inbox, Sent or Outbox from unintentional deletion.

^ Unretrieved List (Long Mail), unread Long Mail Notices and incoming linked messages are protected and will not be deleted automatically.

^ Protect up to 40 messages in Sent. All messages in Inbox and Outbox can be protected.

^ Protected messages are not deleted from Outbox even after they are sent.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

1Inbox, 2Sent or 3Outbox and press b

C

When Mail Box Layout is set to Folder, select appropriate folder

A

Press b

3

Select a message and press

e @

R appears.

^ Auto Send (light blue indicator) and failed Auto Send (Y or N) messages are not selectable.

C

To uncheck, select a message with R

A

Press e @

4

Repeat Step 3 and select all the messages to protect

^ Select up to 50 messages at one time.

C

To clear all check marks, press d I A

Select Reset Check(s)

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

5

Press

d I

6

Select Protect Message and press

b

7

Choose

1On and press b

Protected message indicators change to yellow.

C

To cancel protection, choose

2Off A

Press b

8

Press

g to exit

4

4-8 4-9

4

Deleting Messages

Selecting Messages to Delete

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

1Inbox, 2Sent or 3Outbox and press b

C

When Mail Box Layout is set to Folder, select appropriate folder

A

Press b

3

Deleting a Message

1 Select a message and press d I

^ Auto Send (light blue indicator) and failed Auto Send (Y or N) messages are not selectable.

2 Select Delete and press b

Deleting Selected Messages

1 Select a message and press e @

R appears.

^ Auto Send (light blue indicator) and failed Auto Send (Y or N) messages are not selectable.

C

To uncheck, select a message with R

A

Press e @

2 Repeat Step 1 to select all messages to delete

^ Select up to 50 messages at one time.

C

To clear all check marks, press d I A

Select Reset Check(s)

A

Press b

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

3 Press d I

4 Select Delete and press b

4

Choose

1Yes and press b

5

Press

g to exit

+

Advance Mail (see 6P.12-10) messages must be deleted one by one.

Delete All

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

1Inbox, 2Sent or 3Outbox and press d I

^ To delete all messages in a Mail Folder, select a folder and press d I.

3

Select Delete All and press

b

4

Select

1Select All or 2Read/Unprotected (2Unprotected for Sent

and Outbox) and press

b

5

Enter Security Code

6

Choose

1Yes and press b

7

Press

g to exit

+

When Outbox is set to

2Unprotected, Advance Mail (see 6P.12-10), Auto Send and failed Auto Send messages are not deleted. For

1Select All, failed Auto Send messages are not deleted.

Auto Delete

When memory is full, handset cannot receive new messages. Activate Auto Delete

Old to automatically delete oldest received messages to make room for new ones.

Auto Delete Old is Off by default.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

7Mail Box Settings and press b

3

Select

5Auto Delete Old and press b

4

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b

5

Press

g to exit

+

When memory is full, oldest sent messages are automatically deleted to make room for new ones. To prevent unintentional deletion, protect important messages (see P.4-9).

4

4-10 4-11

4

Chat Mail Log

Use Chat Mail Log folders to organize messages exchanged between your handset and up to five addresses per folder. Sent and received messages appear by date, designated by sender.

Saving Members

^ Save up to five members per group (Group 1 - Group 3).

^ Same address can be entered in multiple groups.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

4Chat Mail Log and press b

C

Security Code is required when there is a Secret Mode Mail Folder.

C

When adding members to an existing group, select a group

A

Press d I A

Select Save Member

A

Press b A

Skip ahead to Step 5

3

Select a group and press

b

C

To change members, select a group

A

Press d I A

Select Save Member

A

Press b A

Select a number

A

Press b A

Enter number or address

A

Press b

C

To delete a member, select a group

A

Press d I A

Select Save Member

A

Press b A

Select a number

A

Press d I A

Select Delete

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

C

To delete all members, select a group

A

Press d I A

Select Save Member

A

Press b A

Press d I A

Select Delete All

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

4

Choose

1Yes and press b

5

Select a number and press

b

6

Phone Book

1 Select

1Phone Book and press b

^ Changes to Phone Book entries are not reflected in Chat Mail groups. Edit member addresses directly.

2 Open an entry

C

To search Phone Book, see Steps 2 - 3 on 6P.5-11.

Direct Entry

1 Select

2Mobile Number or 3Mail Address and press b

2 Enter recipient's Vodafone handset number or mail address

C

To open Phone Book, see Steps 1 - 3 on 6P.5-11.

7

Press

b

^ Repeat Steps 5 - 7 to add more members.

4-12

8

Press

g to exit

,

Changing members does not affect messages already saved in Chat Mail Log.

Opening Chat Mail Log

Received Sky Mail messages with Privacy Level 2 or higher, Long Mail messages in

Unretrieved List and Greeting messages do not appear in group contents even if the address is saved.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

4Chat Mail Log and press b

C

Security Code is required when there is a Secret Mode Mail Folder.

C

To delete all messages, select a group

A

Press d I A

Select Delete All Mail

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

B Messages in Mail Box are not deleted.

3

Select a group and press

b

Group opens and contents appear (see below).

List Contents

J

Q

Chat Mail Log

1

[ 9/22 12:

**] n E

Suzuki Itirou ＞Is th ere anything I'd bet

Kimura Tetsuya ＞ Why not we meet at 1

*:**

Owner ＞ Where should we meet tomorrow?

Received or Sent Date & Time

Sender

^ Number or address appears. Name appears if saved in

Phone Book.

^ Owner appears for mail sent from handset if Owner Profile is blank. Owner Profile name appears when set (see

6P.2-21).

Message Text

Select Menu

4

Chat Mail Log Menu

C While Chat Mail Log folder is open, press d I to reply, forward, etc.

C To open a message, select a message and press b.

+

^ Deleting a message from Inbox or Sent automatically deletes the same message in

Chat Mail Log.

^ Each group holds up to 100 messages. When full, oldest messages are automatically deleted to make room for new ones.

4-13

4

Mail Folders

Mail Box Layout

From Mail Box Settings, set Layout to Folder or List for Inbox, Sent and Outbox.

List is set by default (Mail Folders are hidden).

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

7Mail Box Settings and press b

3

Select

2Layout and press b

C

Security Code is required when there is a Secret Mode Mail Folder.

4

Select

1Inbox, 2Sent or 3Outbox and press b

5

Select

2Folder and press b

^ Follow the same steps to change Layout for each Mail Box.

C

To hide folders, select

1List A

Press b

6

Press

g to exit

Folder Name

From Mail Box Settings, change Layout to Folder for Inbox, Sent or Outbox, then use

Mail Folders to organize messages. Sort messages to one of nine Mail Folders in

Inbox, Sent or Outbox.

^ Change folder names to customize Mail Folders.

^ Main Folder cannot be renamed.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

7Mail Box Settings and press b

3

Select

3Set Folders and press b

4

Select

1Inbox, 2Sent or 3Outbox and press b

5

Select

1Folder Name and press b

Mail Folders appear.

6

Select a folder and press

b

7

Enter name

^ Enter up to 18 single-byte characters.

8

Press

b

^ Repeat Steps 6 - 8 to rename other folders.

9

Press

g to exit

Secret Mode

Security Code is required to open a Secret Mode Mail Folder.

^ Set Mail Box Layout to Folder to use Secret Mode.

^ Main Folder cannot be set to Secret Mode.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

7Mail Box Settings and press b

3

Select

3Set Folders and press b

4

Select

1Inbox, 2Sent or 3Outbox and press b

5

Select

2Secret Mode and press b

6

Enter Security Code

7

Select a folder and press

b

8

Choose

1On and press b

^ Repeat Steps 7 - 8 for other folders.

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b

9

Press

g to exit

4

4-14 4-15

4

Moving Messages

^ Set Mail Box Layout to Folder before attempting to move messages (see P.4-14).

^ Unretrieved List (Long Mail) and incoming linked messages cannot be moved; these messages are saved in Main Folder.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

1Inbox, 2Sent or 3Outbox and press b

3

Select a folder and press

b

4

Select a message and press

e @

R appears.

^ Auto Send (light blue indicator) and failed Auto Send (Y or N) messages are not selectable.

C

To uncheck, select a message with R

A

Press e @

5

Repeat Step 4

^ Select up to 50 messages at one time.

C

To clear all check marks, press d I A

Select Reset Check(s)

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

6

Press

d I

7

Select Move to Folder and press

b

8

Select a folder and press

b

^ Repeat Steps 4 - 8 to move other messages.

9

Press

g to exit

4-16

Sorting to Folders Automatically

Sorting by Phone Book Entry

Sort messages automatically by phone number or mail address.

When a Phone Book entry contains multiple numbers/addresses, use Set All to apply settings to all entry items or One Number/Address to designate individual numbers/addresses.

1

Open a Phone Book entry

C

To search Phone Book, see Steps 1 - 3 on 6P.5-11.

2

Press

b

3

Select Edit and press

b

4

Select Option Settings and press

b

5

Select

4Mail Folder and press b

6

Select

1Inbox Auto Sort or 2Sent Auto Sort and

press

b

7

All Numbers/Addresses

1 Select

1Set All and press b

J

Q n

Ueda Mikio 005

1Friends ssyy c dPattern 1 ePattern 2 fMail Folder 1 gMail Folder 2

03123XXXX3

Back Menu

Individual Numbers/Addresses

1 Select

2One Number/Address and press b

2 Select a Vodafone handset number or a mail address and

press

b

3 Choose

1On and press b

Canceling

1 Choose

3Off and press b

8

Select a folder and press

b

C

When setting for One Number/Address, press e j.

9

Press

e j twice

C

For more, see Step 6 and onward on 6P.5-15.

+

^ Sent messages are sorted by the first recipient address.

^ Individual settings are replaced when Set All is selected and vice versa.

4

4-17

4

Sorting Messages from Unsaved Numbers or Addresses

Designate a folder to sort messages from numbers or addresses not saved in Phone

Book. Use Designate Folder to filter unsolicited messages (spam).

Designate Folder is Off by default.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

7Mail Box Settings and press b

3

Select

6Designate Folder and press b

4

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b (Omit the next steps.)

5

Select a folder and press

b

6

Press

g to exit

,

Non-delivery notifications are also sorted to a designated folder.

+

^ Messages are not sorted when Phone Book Lock (see 6P.11-3) is active.

^ Messages from numbers and addresses in Secret Mode Phone Book entries are not sorted by this function, even if handset is in Secret Mode.

Confirm Delivery & Cancel Delivery

Confirm delivery of Sky Mail and Greeting messages, or cancel Sky Mail delivery.

Use Confirm Delivery or Cancel Delivery for messages sent to compatible Vodafone handsets.

1

Open a message

^ Select a message with Sent or ?.

2

Press

d I

3

Select Confirm Delivery or Cancel Delivery and press

b

4

Choose

1Yes and press b

When complete, the Center sends a Delivery Report.

4-18

Sending from Outbox

Sending a Message

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

C

To check the number of saved messages, select

3Outbox A

Press d I

B Press d W to return.

2

Select

3Outbox and press b

^ Light blue indicator appears for Auto Send messages, and Y or N appears for failed

Auto Send messages.

3

Select a message and press

b

Mail Composition window opens.

C

For Auto Send (light blue indicator) messages, Cancel Auto Send? appears. Choose

1Yes A

Press b

C

For Failed Auto Send (Y or N) messages, Re-save As Auto Send? appears. Select

1Save As Auto Send or 2Cancel A

Press b

C

To edit Outbox messages, select an item

A

Press b A

Edit the message

B To save edited messages, press e q A

Select

1Save as or 2Overwrite A

Press b

4

Press

d N

^ Sent messages are deleted from Outbox. To prevent unintentional deletion, protect important messages (see P.4-9).

+

When sent from Outbox, failed messages remain in both Outbox and Sent.

Send Continuously

Send Long Mail from Outbox continuously.

Up to three messages are sent at one time.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

3Outbox and press b

3

Select a Long Mail message and press

e @

R appears.

^ Auto Send (light blue indicator) and failed Auto Send (Y or N) messages are not selectable.

C

To uncheck, select a message with R

A

Press e @

4

4-19

4

4

Repeat Step 3

^ Select up to 50 messages at one time.

C

To clear all check marks, press d I A

Select Reset Check(s)

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

5

Press

d I

6

Select Send Continuously and press

b

After messages are sent, handset returns to Standby.

^ Sent messages are deleted from Outbox. To prevent unintentional deletion, protect important messages (see P.4-9).

C

A confirmation appears for unsent messages. Choose

1Yes A

Press b (Other messages are sent.)

Attachments

Saving Attachments to Data Folder

Save attachments (image and sound) to Data Folder.

1

Open a message with at least one attached file

2

Select a file and press

d I

^ Select an image in the message.

^ Files can only be saved when To Data Folder appears.

C

To open properties, select Property

A

Press b

B Press i to return.

C

To play sound, select WPlay

A

Press b

B To adjust volume, press

C (up) or D (down) during playback.

C

To change tone or loudness, select Tone or Adjust Loudness

A

Press b

(See 6P.8-12 - 8-13 for more.)

3

Select To Data Folder and press

b

4

Press

b

^ When memory is full, delete files (see 6P.9-24) and try again.

Wallpaper & Display Images

Save images as Wallpaper or as Display Images to use them for Power On/Off, Alarm or incoming calls.

1

Open a message containing images

2

Select an image and press

d I

^ Images can only be used when Save As Wallpaper or To Display Images appears.

C

To open properties, select XProperty

A

Press b

B Press i to return.

3

Wallpaper

1 Select Save As Wallpaper and press b

^ For E-Animation (NEVA files), omit the next step.

2 Use

G to specify display area and press b

^ Depending on size or type, display area cannot be specified for some images.

^ Existing image is replaced.

Display Images

1 Select To Display Images and press b

^ E-Animation (NEVA files) cannot be used for

3Incoming Call and 4Alarm.

^ Maximum image size:

Power On

W 120 x H 130 dots

Incoming Call

W 120 x H 38 dots

Power Off

W 120 x H 130 dots

Alarm

W 120 x H 51 dots

2 Select an item and press b

Display Images appear 200% larger.

^ For E-Animation (NEVA files), omit the next step.

3 Use

G to specify display area and press b

^ Depending on size or type, display area cannot be specified for some images.

^ Existing image is replaced.

4

4-20 4-21

4

Other Function

Sound Auto Play

Set handset to play attached sound files automatically

KOff

Press

d A

Select

0Mail Box A

Press

b A

Select

7Mail Box Settings A

Press

b A

Select

4Sound Auto Play A

Press

b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

+

^ When more than one sound file is attached, the first file plays.

^ Press j to stop playback.

^ Depending on file type, sound may not play automatically, or playback starts when an image is opened. E-Animation (NEVA file) sound may play automatically even if Sound Auto Play is Off.

Mail Box/Message Menu

Combining Split Mail Images

Download images attached to Split Mail beforehand.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

1Inbox and press b

3

Select a Split Mail message and press

e @

^ Subjects of Split Mail messages are Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left and Lower

Right. Check all four messages.

4

Press

d I

5

Select Combine Split Mail and press

b

Combined Image appears.

6

Press

b

Image is saved to Data Folder and Menu returns.

,

^ Images may not be combined properly if file names of Split Mail images are changed, or the same file name exists.

^ Combined image may be rough.

^ Receiving Split Mail costs receiving four Long Mail.

Mail Box Menu

Show/Display

Address

Check sender's address

Open a Mail Box and select a message

A

Press

d I A

Select

Show Address or Display Address

A

Press

b

^ Show/Display Address is not available for Outbox.

List

Select a view for Mail Box

KPattern 1

Open a Mail Box and press

d I A

Select List

A

Select a pattern

A

Press

b

Press

b A

^ Setting applies to Inbox, Sent and Outbox.

Message Menu

4

Copy

Copy message text

Open a message and press

d I A

Select Copy

A

Press

b A

Use

E to underline the first line of the text block A

Press

b A

Use

E to specify text A

Press

b A

Perform from Step 5 on 6P.4-17

C

To change the starting position, press i.

^ Text can only be saved when Copy appears.

Change font and image size

Display Size

KMedium Font/100%

Open a message and press

d I A

Select Display Size

A

Press

b A

Select a size

A

Press

b

+

^ Press k to toggle between Medium Font/200%, Small Font/100%, Small

Font/200%, Large Font/100%, Large Font/200% and Medium Font/100%.

(q appears for 100% and p for 200%.)

^ The setting applies to both received and sent messages. It remains even after exiting Mail.

4-22 4-23

Server Mail

5-1

5

Unretrieved List

Acquire Mail List

Retrieve a list of messages stored at the Center (Server Mail), then retrieve selected messages.

1

Press

d, select 0Mail Box and press b

2

Select

5Mail Request and press b

C

To retrieve all Server Mail, select

2Retrieve All A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

C

To delete all Server Mail, select

3Delete All Mail A

Press b A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

3

Select

1Acquire List and press b

4

Choose

1Yes and press b

After Unretrieved List is retrieved, Inbox opens.

^ When Unretrieved List has already been retrieved, it is refreshed.

5

Press

b

Unretrieved List (containing sender's name, handset number or address of each Server

Mail) appears.

C

For details, select a message

A

Press

A

B Press

B to return.

+

Server Message appears in the list when there is more Server Mail. (Select Server

Message and press

A to see notice from the Server.) To see the rest, retrieve or delete messages on the list and refresh Unretrieved List.

Retrieving Selected Messages

Retrieve up to three messages at one time.

1

Open Unretrieved List

C

To retrieve all messages, press d I A

Select Retrieve all Mail

A

Press b

(Omit the next steps.)

2

Select a message and press

b

The box is checked.

C

To uncheck, select a message with R

A

Press b

3

Repeat Step 2

4

Press

d I

5

Select Next and press

b

After messages are retrieved, Inbox opens.

^ Downloaded messages are deleted from Unretrieved List.

Deleting Unretrieved List Messages

Deleted messages cannot be recovered.

1

Open Unretrieved List

2

Deleting Selected Messages

1 Select a message and press b

The box is checked.

C

To uncheck, select a message with R

A

Press b

2 Repeat Step 1

3 Press d I

4 Select Delete Item and press b

Deleting All Messages

1 Press d I

2 Select Delete all Mail and press b

3 Enter Security Code

3

Select

1Delete and press b

^ Unretrieved List is deleted from Inbox.

C

To cancel, select

2Cancel A

Press b

5

5-2 5-3

5

Server Mail

Deleting Server Mail

Delete Server Mail directly without downloading it first.

1

Open a message (Long Mail Notice)

^ Select a Long Mail message with X.

2

Press

d I

3

Select Delete Mail and press

b

+

To delete Long Mail Notice only, select Delete and press b.

4

Choose

1Yes and press b

5-4

Mail Settings

6-1

6

Basic Settings

Mail Notice

Select contents or cancel notices for messages received during handset use

KName

Press

d A

Select

6Mail Settings A

Press

b A

Select

5Mail Notice

A

Press

b A

Select from

1Name to 4Off A

Press

b

Confirm Delivery

Request a Delivery Report (see P.2-4) to confirm message delivery

KOff

Press

d A

Select

6Mail Settings A

6Confirm Delivery A

Press

b A

Press

Choose

b A

Select

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

+

^ Delivery Report is available for:

B Sky Mail messages sent to Vodafone handsets

B Greeting messages

B Long Mail messages sent to a single Vodafone handset

^ To change settings for individual messages, see P.3-5.

^ To check delivery status of Sky Mail or Greeting messages sent without

Confirm Delivery, see P.4-18.

Auto Send

Outbox messages saved as Auto Send when handset is out-of-range are sent automatically when signal returns

KOn

Press

d A

Select

6Mail Settings A

Press

b A

Select

2Auto Send

A

Press

b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

+

Save Auto Send does not appear in Mail Composition window when Auto Send is Off.

Custom Fixed Text

(Japanese Only)

Save phrases to Custom Fixed Text (No.118 to 127)

Saving Text

Press

d A

Select

6メール設定 A

Press

b A

Select

ユーザー定型文

A

Press

b A

Select a number

A

Press

b A

Enter text

A

Press

b

^ Enter up to 128 single-byte alphanumerics (126 single-byte katakana or 61 double-byte characters).

Editing Text

Press

d A

A

Press

b

Select

A

6メール設定

Select a number

A

A

Press

b A

Press

b A

Select

9ユーザー定型文

Edit text

A

Press

C

To delete text, open an entry and press i (Long Press) A

Press b b

,

When sending Sky Mail or Greeting messages using Custom Fixed Text to other Vodafone handsets, the recipient must have the same Custom Fixed Text saved under the same number to read the message.

6-2

Long Mail Settings

Additional Settings

Save & Send

Image

Automatically save new Sha-mail images to Data Folder before attaching them to messages (see 6P.6-22)

KOn (save image)

Press

d A

Select

6Mail Settings A

A

Press

b A

Select

Press

b

2Save & Send Image A

A

Select

12-Touch Mail

Press

b A

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

Auto Retrieve

Retrieve complete Long Mail manually or automatically

KManual

Press

d A

Select

6Mail Settings A

Press

b A

Select

4Auto Retrieve

A

Press

b A

Select

1Auto or 2Manual A

Press

b

,

Even when Auto Retrieve is active, Long Mail Notices may appear when signal is weak, etc. When short, complete message may be delivered automatically even if Manual is set.

Sky Mail Settings

PIN Filter

Set PIN to reject incoming messages without the matching PIN. Sender must include the same PIN to send mail to your handset. PIN Setting is effective only when PIN

Filter is active.

^ PIN Filter cannot be used for Long Mail messages.

^ Pin Filter is Off by default.

1

Press

d, select 6Mail Settings and press b

2

Select

3Security and press b

3

Select

1PIN Setting and press b

4

Enter a 4-digit PIN and press

b

5

Select

2PIN Filter and press b

6

6-3

6

6

Select a type and press

1Standard b

Standard Sky Mail messages

*

2Concatenation Two or more linked messages

3Polling

Location Info/Polling requests

4E-Mail

E-mail messages

*E-mail under 128 bytes is also rejected.

7

Choose

1On and press b

^ Repeat Steps 6 - 7 for other types.

C

To cancel PIN Filter, choose

2Off A

Press b

8

Press

g to exit

,

Senders of rejected mail are not notified.

Address Filter

Activate Address Filter to reject incoming mail from up to 10 numbers (digits only) or addresses saved in Reject List.

^ Address Filter cannot be used for Long Mail messages.

^ Reject List is effective only when Address Filter is active.

Saving to Reject List

1

Press

d, select 6Mail Settings and press b

2

Select

3Security and press b

3

Select

3Reject List and press b

4

Select a number and press

b

^ Select ------------------ for new entry.

C

To edit entry, select an entry

A

Press b A

Edit

A

Press b

C

To delete entry, select an entry

A

Press b A

Press i (Long Press) A

Press b

5

Enter a phone number or mail address and press

b

^ Enter up to 60 single-byte alphanumerics for mail addresses.

^ Repeat Steps 4 - 5 to add more numbers/addresses.

6

Press

g to exit

Activating Address Filter

Address Filter is Off by default.

1

Press

d, select 6Mail Settings and press b

2

Select

3Security and press b

3

Select

4Address Filter and press b

4

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b

Additional Settings

Set Priority

Set priority when sending mail

KNormal

Press

d A

Select

6Mail Settings A

Press

b A

Select

7Set Priority

A

Press

b A

Select from

1Low to 4By Express A

Press

b

^ To change priority for individual messages, see P.3-11.

,

By Express messages are delivered faster for additional fees. Other levels indicate the importance of the message and do not affect delivery speed.

6

Sender

Save Sender name for Greeting

Press

d A

Press

b A

Select

6Mail Settings A

Enter name

A

Press

b

Press

b A

Select

8Sender A

C

To delete Sender mid-entry, press i (Long Press) A

Press b

^ Enter up to 12 single-byte alphanumerics (10 single-byte katakana or 3 double-byte characters).

B Using both single and double-byte characters may reduce character entry limit.

BBS

Save and share BBS messages.

^ Send Polling request (see P.3-11) to receive BBS messages (Sky Mail option setting).

^ Save and share Location Info.

6-4 6-5

6

BBS

Share messages & Location Info

KOff

Activating BBS

Press

d A

Select

0Mail Box A

Press

b A

Select

6BBS A

Press

b

A

Select

1Settings A

Press

b A

Choose

1On A

Press

b A

Select

1Message or 2Location Info A

Press

b

C

Enter Code appears for

2Location Info. Enter Security Code A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

Canceling BBS

Press

d A

Select

0Mail Box A

Press

b A

Select

6BBS A

Press

b

A

Select

1Settings A

Press

b A

Choose

2Off A

Press

b

^ Saved messages remain even after BBS is canceled. Reactivate BBS to use.

^ Set PIN to restrict message access (see P.6-3).

Saving Messages

Save messages & Location Info

Saving Messages

Press

A d A

Select

Select

0Mail Box A

Press

b A

2New Message A

Select

6BBS

Press

b A

Enter message

A

A

Press

b

Press

b

C

To delete the message mid-entry, press i (Long Press) A

Press b

^ Activate BBS to share the message.

^ Enter up to 128 single-byte alphanumerics (126 single-byte katakana or 61 double-byte characters).

B Using both single and double-byte characters may reduce character entry limit.

Saving Location Info

Press

d A

Select

0Mail Box A

Press

b A

Select

6BBS A

Press

b

A

Select

3Location Info A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

The latest information appears

A

Press

e W

C

To update opened Location Info, press d h A

Press b

^ Activate BBS to share the message.

Polling

C When BBS is accessed, handset receives a Polling message.

To open Polling messages, press

d A

Select

0Mail Box A

Press

b A

Select

1Inbox A

Press

b A

Select a message with Z

A

Press

b

6-6

Resetting Mail & Access Points

Reset

Reset Mail settings

Refer to P.16-2 for the settings affected by Reset

Press

d A

Press

b A

Select

Select

6Mail Settings A

Enter Security Code

A

1OK or 2Cancel A

Press

b A

Select

Select

1Reset A

0Reset A

Press

b A

Press

b

Delete All

Delete all sent/received mail messages at one time

Press

d A

Select

6Mail Settings A

Press

b A

Select

0Reset A

Press

Select

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Select

1Select All or 2Read/Sent Only

or

2Cancel A

Press

b

A

2Delete All

Press

b A

A

Press

b A

Select

1OK

^ Messages are deleted as follows:

1Select All

Delete all Inbox, Sent and Outbox messages, except for saved or failed

Auto Send messages

2Read/Sent Only Delete all unprotected read Inbox and Sent messages

Access Points

Set Mail Center Address or Server Address

KShort Message: U7032, Data Access: U7132, Long Mail Line: U7042, Server Address: 5000

Center Address

Press

d A

Select

6Mail Settings A

Press

b A

Select

LAccess Points

A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Select

2Center Address A

Select from

1Short Message to 3Long Mail

Line

A

Enter Center Address

A

Press

b

Server Address

Press

d A

Select

6Mail Settings A

Press

b A

Select

LAccess Points

A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Select

1Server Address A

Press

b A

Select

1Server Address or 2Sub

Address

A

Press

b A

Enter Server Address or Sub Address

A

Press

b

,

Do not change Center Address or Server Address unless instructed to do so.

Otherwise, access to the service will be disabled.

6

6-7

Web

7-1

7-2

MEMO

Web Basics

7-3

7

Getting Started

Use Web (Vodafone Web) to access the Mobile Internet directly from handset.

Browse for image or sound files as well as information.

^ An additional contract is required to use Web service.

^ Address questions about Vodafone Web to Vodafone Customer Center, General

Information (see P.16-15).

Web Content

Web Info Content

Sample Web information page:

^ Press e W to see the previous page. From that page, press d I then d J to return to the initial page.

^ For details, see P.7-8 "Basic Operations."

^ When there is more than one item with the same title in

Message Folder (Overwrite Type), the most recent item appears first. To see the next saved item, press d J, select Next and press b.

J qI

Q n D

9/22 12:

** LY

ニュース（総合）

９月２２日

［トピック１］

アメリカで行われた世

界腕相撲大会で、日本

の石橋さんが優勝。日

本人の優勝は、一昨年

の木村さんに次いで二

人目の快挙。

Back Menu

Download

Date & Time

Content

Enlarging Images and SMAF File Images

C Select an image (or a SMAF file with image)

A

Press

b A

Select Enlarge

Display (or Enlarge Image)

A

Press

b

^ Images can only be enlarged when Enlarge Display or Enlarge Image appears.

^ Use

G to view the portion outside Display.

,

Handset returns to Standby after 20 minutes of inactivity.

Information Types

There are four types of Web information. They can be identified by the indicators below. Information is saved differently according to type.

Y

V

W

No Indicator

Overwrite Type (temporarily saved information)

Storage Type (saved information)

Work Type (unsaved information)

Vodafone Web Menu

Overwrite Type

Overwrite Type information is saved temporarily in Message Folder.

Up to five titles are saved, and up to three information items are saved under each title. When full, oldest items are deleted to make room for new ones.

Title A

A3

B

B2

C

C1

D

D3

E

E2

B

B3

A

A3

B

B3

C

C1

D

D3

E

E2

Info A2 B1 D2 E1 A2 B2 D2 E1

A1 D1

Three info items can be saved under each title.

A1 B1 D1

Info with the same title is added to the list.

F

F1

B

B2

B1

C

C1

D

D3

D2

E

E2

E1

F

F1

D1

Oldest title (Title A) and its contents are deleted to make room for new ones.

D

D4

A

A3

A2

B

B3

B2

C

C1

D

D4

D3

E

E2

E1

A1 B1 D2

When full, oldest info (D1) is deleted.

Overwrite Type information is similar to data saved in cache memory of a Web browser on a PC. Content remains even after handset power is turned off.

7

7-4 7-5

7

Storage Type

Storage Type information is saved in Message Folder until it is deleted manually.

Approximately 375 KB is shared between Inbox (Mail), Storage Type (Web) and

Saved Information (Station). (Saving large files reduces the number of items that can be saved.)

^ Overwrite Type and Work Type information can be changed to Storage Type (see P.8-2).

^ Storage Type information is similar to files stored on a computer hard disk or floppy disk.

Content remains even after handset power is turned off.

^ Memory Status: see P.1-5

Work Type

Work Type information is not saved in Message Folder.

To change Work Type information to Storage Type, see P.8-2.

Vodafone Web Menu

C Vodafone Web Menus are saved temporarily. New Menu replaces old. Temporarily saved Menus remain even after handset power is turned off.

C Vodafone Web Menus cannot be saved to Message Folder.

Using Web

Use Web to access the Mobile Internet for information as well as image, sound and other files.

Opening Vodafone Web Menu

Access Mobile Internet sites by selecting a topic from Vodafone Web Menu.

Address questions about Vodafone Web to Vodafone Customer Center, General

Information (see P.16-15).

1

Press

e, select 1Vodafone Web and press b

Vodafone Web Menu opens.

^ Vodafone Web Menu content is subject to change.

C

Alternatively, press

8 (Long Press) in Standby A

Select

2Web A

Press b A

Select

1Vodafone Web A

Press b

2

Highlight a menu item and press

b

^ Handset remains connected to the Network even if it is closed.

C

To disconnect, press i.

3

Repeat Step 2 to open additional links

C

Basic Operations: see P.7-8

4

Press

g to exit Web

7-6

+

^ Temporarily saved Information and Vodafone Web Menus may open without connecting to the Network.

^ While information appears, press j for 1+ seconds to activate or cancel Manner

Mode.

Entering URLs Directly

Enter URLs directly to access Mobile Internet sites.

1

Press

e, select 4Internet and press b

2

Select 00New and press b

3

Enter URL

C

To copy from Phone Book, press d I A

Press e 4 A

Open a Phone

Book entry (see Steps 2 - 3 on 6P.5-11)

A

Select an item

A

Press b twice

4

Press

b

C

To edit URL, press i A

Edit URL

A

Press b

5

Select

1Send and press b

Handset connects to the Network.

6

Press

g to exit

,

Some sites may not be accessed. Images, layouts, etc. may not appear the same as on PCs.

Using URL Log

Access Mobile Internet sites using previously entered URLs. Up to 30 URLs are saved. When log memory is full, oldest URLs are deleted to make room for new ones.

1

Press

e, select 4Internet and press b

2

Select a URL and press

b

^ Shortcut: Select a URL and press d N

3

Press

b

4

Select

1Send and press b

C

To edit URL, select

2Edit A

Press b A

Edit URL

A

Press b

C

To delete log, select

3Delete A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

7

7-7

Basic Operations

Moving Cursor

7

Move cursor to select items. Selectable items are underlined with a dotted line.

Use

E to scroll through items.

J qI

Q

9/22 12:

**

ニュース n

1.新着ニュース

2.今日のニュース

3.経済ニュース

4.国際ニュース

5.スポーツニュース

6.芸能ニュース

Back Menu

D

C

J qI

Q

9/22 12:

**

ニュース n

1.新着ニュース

2.今日のニュース

3.経済ニュース

4.国際ニュース

5.スポーツニュース

6.芸能ニュース

Back Menu

D

C

J qI

Q

9/22 12:

**

ニュース n

1.新着ニュース

2.今日のニュース

3.経済ニュース

4.国際ニュース

5.スポーツニュース

6.芸能ニュース

Back Menu

Cursor

Use

F to move left and right when multiple items are listed in one row.

Cursor does not appear when there are no selectable items.

Scrolling Pages

Triangular indicators appear at the top when information continues outside the current window. Use

G to scroll.

Scroll Right

Scroll Up

J qI

Q

9/22 12: n G

** LY

ニュース（総合）

９月２２日

［トピック１］

アメリカで行われた世

界腕相撲大会で、日本

の石橋さんが優勝。日

本人の優勝は、一昨年

の木村さんに次いで二

人目の快挙。

Back Menu

Scroll Down

Scroll Left

Text Entry & Item Selection

Enter text or select items to send information.

J qI

Q

アンケート

お名前

性別

Q男Q女

お住まい

埼玉

東京

神奈川

送信

Back n

Menu

D

Text Entry Field

^ Highlight , and press b. Text entry window opens.

Enter text and press b.

Check-box

^ Highlight Q (check-box) and press b. The box changes to

R, indicating that the item is selected.

^ In addition to Q, ! may also appear as selection indicators.

Menu List

^ Highlight the field and press b to select an item.

Command Button

^ Use to send, reset, etc.

^ Highlight , and press b to execute the indicated command.

7

Input Memory

C Entered text is saved to Input Memory, except Security Code. Use saved text in other applications.

C Up to five entries are saved. When full, oldest entries are deleted to make room for new ones.

Using Input Memory

C In a text entry window, press d I A

Select XSaved Info

A

Press

b A

Select

2Input Memory A

Press

b A

Select an entry

A

Press

b

7-8 7-9

7

Auto Delivery Service

Register with Auto Delivery Service to receive update notifications and other information on handset. Use the notification to access the information provider or

Mobile Internet sites to download more information.

Register from Mobile Internet sites that support Auto Delivery Service.

Received Information

Delivered information is automatically saved to Message Folder.

J

Q

C

1

When new information arrives, animation plays and Delivery Notice appears

C appears.

^ When handset is closed, y appears on Sub Display. Open handset to see Delivery Notice.

2

Press

b

Information appears (and is deleted from Unread Messages).

9/22[Thu] 12:

**

New Information n

Show

Delivery Notice

Ring Tone Volume

C While handset is ringing, press

C (up) or D (down).

^ Ring Tone Level setting (see 6P.8-2) changes accordingly.

^ Cancel Manner Mode (see 6P.3-3) to adjust the level.

Quick Silent

C Press j to instantly mute incoming information tone for that information only.

In Standby

C Press e A

Select

5Unread Messages A

Press

b A

Select a title

A

Press

b

^ Once read, information appears in

6Message Folder (see P.8-3).

+

^ If information is received during an operation, Delivery Notice may not appear.

^ When Screen Savers is active (see P.9-3), new information appears automatically.

7-10

Advanced Features

8-1

8

Favorites, Storage Type & Bookmarks

Save frequently used information/URLs to Favorites, Storage Type or Bookmarks.

Function

Favorites

Storage Type

Bookmarks

Description

Save Mobile Internet site content.

Handset does not connect to the

Network to open saved information.

Save links to Mobile Internet sites.

Handset connects to the Network to access the site.

Moving Title Adding Icon Editing Title

Available Available N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Available

^ Save information of some interest to Storage Type and save frequently used information to Favorites.

^ Information in Favorites is saved as Storage Type.

^ Sharp's Space Town Mobile Internet site (Japanese Only) is bookmarked by default. Visit

Space Town for various downloads such as Wallpapers, games and Dictionary files.

Saving Information & URLs

^ Save up to 30 links in Bookmarks.

^ For Storage Type memory, see P.16-11.

1

Open information and press

d I

^ Information can only be saved when Save appears.

2

Select Save and press

b

^ Available destinations appear.

3

Favorites & Storage Type

1 Select Save to Favorites or Save to Accumulate and press b

Information returns. (X appears for information saved to Favorites, and V for

Storage Type.)

Bookmarks

1 Select Save to Bookmarks and press b

2 Press b

Opening Saved Info & Links

Overwrite Type information is saved to Message Folder automatically.

1

Press

e

2

Favorites

1 Select

2Favorites and press b

C

To rearrange the list, select a title

A

Press d I A

Select

4Move A

Press b

A

Use

E to move the title A

Press b

2 Select a title and press b

C

To remove information from Favorites, press d I A

Select Save

A

Press b

A

Select

1Cancel Favorite A

Press b

B Information deleted from Favorites appears in Storage Type.

Message Folder

1 Select

6Message Folder and press b

C

To open folder status, select information type

A

Press d I

2 Select

1Storage Type or 2Overwrite Type and press b

3 Select a title and press b

Bookmarks

1 Select

3Bookmarks and press b

2 Select a title and press d N

,

Overwrite Type information is saved to Message Folder by title. When more than one item shares the same title, the number of titles may not correspond to the number of items.

8

8-2 8-3

8

Editing & Deleting

Editing Titles

1

Press

e

2

Adding Icons (Favorites)

1 Select

2Favorites and press b

2 Select a title and press d I

C

To delete icon, select

3Delete Icon A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

3 Select

2Select Icon and press b

C

Press e to open more icons.

4 Use

G to select icon and press b

Editing Titles (Bookmarks)

1 Select

3Bookmarks and press b

2 Select a title and press b

3 Select

2Edit and press b

4 Edit title and press b

Deleting Entries

1

Press

e

2

Favorites

1 Select

2Favorites and press b

C

To delete all entries, press d I A

Select

1Delete All A

Press b A

Enter Security Code

A

Skip ahead to Step 6

Message Folder

1 Select

6Message Folder and press b

C

To delete all entries, select information type

A

Press d I A

Select

2Delete All A

Press b A

Enter Security Code

A

Skip ahead to Step 6

2 Select

1Storage Type or 2Overwrite Type and press b

Bookmarks

1 Select

3Bookmarks and press b

3

Select a title and press

b

^ For Bookmarks, skip ahead to Step 5.

4

Press

d I

5

Select Delete or

3Delete and press b

6

Choose

1Yes and press b

8-4

Using Linked Info

Use numbers, addresses or URLs (http://) to place calls, send messages or access

Mobile Internet sites.

^ Available only when number, address or URL is underlined with a dotted line.

^ Words may be substituted for the numbers, addresses and URLs.

1

Open information containing a phone number, mail address or URL

2

Phone Numbers

1 Highlight a number and press b

2 Select Dial and press b

The number is dialed.

Mail Addresses

1 Highlight an address and press b

2 Select Send and press b

3 Select

1Send Long Mail or 2Send Sky Mail and press b

C

Creating & Sending a Message: see P.3-3

URLs

1 Highlight a URL and press b

Handset connects to the Network.

Saving to Phone Book

C To save as new entry, open information and follow these steps.

Select a phone number or mail address

A

Press

b A

Select Save

A

Press

b

A

Select

1New Entry A

Press

b A

See 6P.5-4 - 5-5 for more about Phone

Book

C To save as new item, open information and follow these steps.

Select a phone number or mail address

A

Press

b A

Select Save

A

Press

b

A

Select

2New Item A

Press

b A

Select an entry (see 6P.5-13)

A

Press

b

A

See 6P.5-4 - 5-5 for more about Phone Book

Images

Saving to Data Folder

Download and save images from Mobile Internet sites to Data Folder. Some images may not be saved due to size or other factors.

1

Open information

8

8-5

8

2

Select an image and press

b

^ Images can only be saved when To Data Folder appears.

C

To open properties, select XProperty

A

Press b

B Press i to return.

3

Select XTo Data Folder and press b

4

Press

b

^ When memory is full, delete files (see 6P.9-24) and try again.

Linked Images

C From Menu, select To Link Address and press b to jump to the linked site.

Wallpaper & Display Images

Save images as Wallpaper or as Display Images to use them for Power On/Off, Alarm or incoming calls.

^ Some images may be too large to use as Wallpaper or Display Images.

^ Image files saved as Wallpaper or Display Images are not saved to Data Folder.

1

Open information

2

Select an image and press

b

^ Selected image is outlined in blue.

^ Images can only be used when Save As Wallpaper or

To Display Images appears.

C

To open properties, select XProperty

A

Press b

B Press i to return.

3

Wallpaper

1 Select Save As Wallpaper and press b

^ For E-Animation (NEVA files), omit the next step.

J qI

Q n

D

9/22 12:

** Y

ネコ特集

田中さん宅のニャン太

くんです。

Back

Display Images

1 Select To Display Images and press b

^ E-Animation (NEVA) cannot be used for

3Incoming Call and 4Alarm.

^ Maximum image size:

Power On

Power Off

W 120 x H 130 dots Incoming Call W 120 x H 38 dots

W 120 x H 130 dots Alarm

2 Select an item and press b

Display Images appear 200% larger.

^ For E-Animation (NEVA files), omit the next step.

W 120 x H 51 dots

Menu

8-6

4

Use

G to specify display area and press b

^ Depending on size or type, display area cannot be specified for some images.

^ Existing image is replaced.

Melody Files

Playing Sound Files

1

Open information

2

Select a sound file and press

b

C

To change tone or loudness, select Tone or Adjust Loudness

A

Press b

(See 6P.8-12 - 8-13 for more.)

C

To open properties, select WProperty

A

Press b

B Press i to return.

3

Select WPlay and press b

The sound plays.

C

Press e W to stop playback.

C

To adjust volume, press

C (up) or D (down) during playback.

Linked Sounds

C From Menu, select To Link Address and press b to jump to the linked site.

Saving to Data Folder

1

Open information

2

Select a sound file and press

b

3

Select WTo Data Folder and press b

^ Files can only be saved when WTo Data Folder appears.

C

To attach to mail, select WCopy

A

Press b A

Perform from Step 3 in "Attaching Mail &

Web Files" on P.3-9

4

Press

b

^ When memory is full, delete files (see 6P.9-24) and try again.

8

8-7

8

Dictionary Files

Refer to 6P.4-15 "V302SH Download Dictionary" for the handling of Dictionary files.

Title & Version

Check the title and version of the file.

1

Open information

^ r indicates Dictionary files.

2

Select a file and press

b

C

To download and activate dictionary, select Save Dictionary

A

Press b A

Select a number

A

Press b

B To replace the current dictionary, choose

1Yes A

Press b

C

To open properties, select Property

A

Press b

B Press i to return.

3

Select Show and press

b

Title and version appear.

Saving to Dictionary Library

1

Open information

^ r indicates Dictionary files.

2

Select a file and press

b

3

Select Save to Library and press

b

^ Files can only be saved when Save to Library appears.

4

Press

b

5

Select a number and press

b

C

When overwriting, choose

1Yes A

Press b

8-8

Managing Files (Data Folder)

9-1

9

File Organization

Handset has two storage areas. Files are automatically sorted into Memory by function and into File Cabinet by file format. Handset File Cabinet capacity is approximately 8 MB.

Handset Memory Structure

Memory

Phone Book

Schedule

Text Memo

Mail Box

Bookmarks

Message Folder

Saved Information

Save files created/obtained using assorted handset functions.

Memory capacity varies by function.

Files are sorted into folders by file format. File Cabinet capacity is fixed and shared by all folders.

File Cabinet

Data Folder

Camera

(Shortcut)

Images

Melodies

Animation

Burst Shots

V-Appli Library

Camera

Action Snap Folder

Voice Folder

+

File Cabinet Memory Status

To check memory usage status, press

b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

8Memory Status A

Press

b

9-2

Data Folder

Contents

Files created or obtained via Web or Sky/Long Mail are organized in separate folders according to file format. Files are sorted as follows:

Data Folder

Camera

(Shortcut)

Images

Mobile Camera Data

^ Shortcut to still and video images captured in Sha-mail,

Wallpaper, Camera or Action Snap mode

Image Files including Still Images

Melody Files such as Original Ring Tones

Melodies

Animation

Burst Shots

Animation Files

Burst Shot Files

Create QR Codes from image/melody files in Data Folder (see P.12-27).

Window Description

To open Data Folder from Standby, follow these steps.

Press

b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

1Data Folder A

Press

b

J

Q

Data Folder

Data Folder

ZCamera

IImages

HMelodies bAnimation  jBurst Shots n E

9

Open Menu

Data Folder

File View

Open a folder to view files.

^ Example: Images folder

^ To customize the appearance of File View, see P.9-5 "Display Settings."

C File View (List)

J

Q n

G

Data Folder s*5-*9-21_12- 3.7KB

Format, Name and Size (of selected image)

Saved Files

^ Icons appear for files other than images or images not supported by handset.

Sha-mail Show Menu

9-3

C File View (List File Names)

J

Q

Data Folder n

E

3.7KB

Images s*5-*9-21_12-34 s*5-*9-21_12-21 s*5-*9-21_11-25 s*5-*9-21_11-*1 s*5-*9-21_1*-15 s*5-*9-21_1*-11 s*5-*9-21_1*-*4

Sha-mail Show Menu

File Size

Folder Name

Saved Files (format and file name)

9

+

To view folders first, select Thumbnails or File List in Display Settings for Images,

Animation or Burst Shots folder (see P.9-5).

Icons

Still Image & Animation Files

Icon

w

*

(P: white) w

*

(P: purple) s

*

PNG

Transparent PNG

Format

PNG image

Description

Transparent PNG image k

JPEG

Burst Shot (consisting of Index Image and

4, 9, or 25 frames)

JPEG image

Burst Mode image

R

*

(E: white)

R

*

(E: Yellow)

E-Animation (NEVA files) Animation (may include sound)

E-Animation (NEVA files) with jump buttons Animation (may include sound) x

*

Animation

(JPEG, PNG, or PNG/JPEG Animation)

Animation

*Blue icon: forwardable, red icon: unforwardable

^ Unforwardable files cannot be edited, combined, attached to Long Mail, converted to QR

Codes or sent via infrared.

^ A yellow triangle appears (S) on icons of the files used in Phone Book, Useful Diary or

Schedule entries.

Sound Files

Icon

y

* u

* z

O

P

SMAF

Melody

Sky Melody

Voice

Format

Original Ring Tone

Description

Melody via Web or Long Mail

(may include images)

Melody via Web or Long Mail

Melody downloaded from Sky

Melody Center (unforwardable).

Original melody (forwardable)

Voice/sound you recorded

(forwardable)

*Blue icon: forwardable, red icon: unforwardable

^ Unforwardable files cannot be edited, combined, attached to Long Mail, converted to QR

Codes or sent via infrared.

^ A yellow triangle appears (Q) on icons of the files set for Ring Tones, Alarm, etc.

Display Settings

Customize appearance of each folder in Data Folder.

Setting

List

1

List File Names

2

Thumbnails

1

File List

3

Description

Thumbnails appear

File names appear

Sub folders appear (thumbnails appear within)

Sub folders appear (file names appear within)

1

Not available for Melodies folder.

2

Appears as List for Melodies folder.

3

Appears as Folder for Melodies folder.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

1

Select a folder and press

d I

2

Select

4Display Settings and press b

3

Enter Security Code

4

Select a type and press

b

,

In this manual, most operations are described with Data Folder appearance set to

List. Operations may differ if folders are set to appear.

9

9-4 9-5

9

Opening Files

Handset Data Folder

Index Menu

H

My Files

1

Select

1Data Folder and press b

2

Select a folder and press

b

Thumbnails or file names appear (see P.9-3 "File View").

3

Select a file and press

The content plays or appears.

b

^ Press q to open or play the next file, and press p to open or play the previous one. (Available in most cases.)

J

Q n G

Data Folder s*5-*9-21_12- 3.7KB

Sha-mail Show Menu

File View

(Images Folder)

+

Opening Burst Shot Files

Index Image appears. Use

F to view single frames.

JPEG Images Exceeding W 240 x H 320 Dots

Images are reduced to fit Display. To restore the original size, press d I, select Original Size and press b.

4

Press

i to return to File View

E-Animation Files with Jump Buttons

C Some E-Animation files contain jump buttons with which to access the Mobile

Internet or open linked images. Follow these steps to use the buttons.

Open an E-Animation file and press

d I A

Select E-Animation Mode

A

Press

b

^ Click buttons on screen for operations.

+

Exchange files via infrared with compatible devices (seeP.10-2).

Sending Files via Long Mail

Attach files to Long Mail from Data Folder.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

1

Select a file and press

d I

2

Select Attachment and press

b

C

For large JPEG image, select

1Attach 1/4 Size, 2Attach Original or 3Attach Split Mail

A

Press b

C

For Melody files or Original Ring Tones, select a file format (see IP.3-8)

A

Press b

3

Complete other fields and send Long Mail (see Step 2 and onward

on IP.3-3)

Sending Burst Shot Images

C Press b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

1Data Folder A

Press

b A

Select Burst Shots

A

Press

b A

Select a file

A

Press

b A

Select an image with

F A

Press

d I A

Select

0Attach Screen A

Press

b A

Perform

from Step 2 on IP.3-3

Sending Split Images

C To split an image (240 x 320 dots) into four frames and attach to Long Mail, follow these steps.

Press

b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

1Data Folder A

Press

b

A

Select a folder

A

Press

b A

Select an image

A

Press

d I A

Select Attachment

A

Press

b A

Select

3Attach Split Mail A

Press

b A

Select or enter recipient

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b (See Step 3 and

onward in "Send Continuously" on IP.4-19.)

C Split Mail transmission charges are equivalent to sending four Long Mail messages.

9

9-6 9-7

9

F48

Properties

Index Menu

H

My Files

1

Open Data Folder or a folder within it, and select a folder or file

2

Press

d I

3

Select Property and press

b

Details appear.

^ Press

D to scroll down.

^ Item Descriptions

Title

1

Type

Location

Melody file name

File/folder type

File/folder location

File Size

Memory Used

Width x Length

2

Data Size

File size on handset

Copy/Fwd

Save

Transfer

Image size in dots

OK: can be copied within Data Folder

Invalid: not supported

OK: can be saved

Invalid: not supported

OK: can be transferred to external device

Invalid: not supported

Phone Book (Photo)

3

Incoming Tone

1

Set Useful Diary

3

Schedule Memo

3

Yes: set for Photo setting

Yes: set for Ring Tones, Alarm, etc.

Yes: set for Useful Diary

Yes: set for Schedule

1

Appears for files in Melodies folder.

2

Appears for JPEG/PNG/Burst Shot images, etc.

3

Number of entries for which the file is used also appears.

Animation File

Simple Animation

Select up to four images to create Simple Animation. Images appear one after another at the selected tempo.

^ Use JPEG images captured with mobile camera or obtained via Web/Long Mail.

^ Simple Animation files are saved to Animation folder. However, those made of a single image are saved to Images folder.

^ When memory is full, delete files to free some space (see P.9-24).

^ Image quality may change when used for animation.

9-8

Creating Simple Animation

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Animation

A

Simple Animation

A

New

1

Enter title and press

b

^ Enter up to 32 single-byte characters. Title is mandatory.

^ Files are saved by title by default; change file names later (see P.9-23).

2

Select tempo and press

b

In animation, images appear in numerical order at the tempo.

J

Q n

E

Simple Animation

*.*KB

File Name[ Easy-goin ]

Tempo[ Slightly Slow ]

1------------------

2------------------

3------------------

4------------------

Select

3

Select a number and press

b

4

Select an image in Data Folder and press

b

C

For operations in Data Folder, see P.9-6.

C

To use a 4-Burst Shot (all frames), select a Burst Shot file

A

Press b A

Select

1Animate Burst File A

Press b

B Animate Burst File is available only when

1 is selected in Step 3 with no other images specified. Burst Shot files of 240 x 320 dots are not available.

C

To use a Burst Shot frame, select a Burst Shot file

A

Press b A

Select

2Choose One

A

Press b A

Select an image with

F A

Proceed to Step 5

C

To start over from selecting an image in Data Folder, press d X.

C

To start over from Step 3, press e W.

5

Press

b

The image is set.

C

To play animation, press d I A

Select

1Animation Playback A

Press b

B To return, press e W A

Press i

C

To change images, select one

A

Press d I A

Select

2Change A

Press b A

Start over from Step 4

C

To delete images, select one

A

Press d I A

Select

3Delete A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

J

Q

Simple Animation n

E

4.4KB

File Name[ Easy-goin ]

Tempo[ Slightly Slow ]

1*5-*9-21_11-*8

2------------------

3------------------

4------------------

Set Select Menu

6

Repeat Steps 3 - 5 to add images

^ Select up to four images.

7

Press

e j when finished

C

To send animation via Long Mail, select

2Attachment A

Press b A

Perform from

Step 2 on IP.3-3

B For large animation, choose

1Yes A

Press b (File may be too large to be attached even if the size is reduced.)

8

Select

1Save and press b

9

9-9

9

Editing Animation

When memory is full, delete files to free some space (see P.9-24).

Index Menu

H

Functions

A

Settings 2

A

Animation

A

Simple Animation

A

Edit

1

Select animation and press

b

2

Edit title and press

b

3

Select tempo and press

b

C

To add images, select a number

A

Press b A

Select an image

A

Press b twice

C

To change images, select a number

A

Press d I A

Select

2Change A

Press b

A

Select an image

A

Press b twice

C

To delete images, select a number

A

Press d I A

Select

3Delete A

Press b

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

4

When finished editing, press

e j

5

Select

1Save and press b

6

Select

1New Entry and press b

The animation is saved to Data Folder (Animation).

C

To overwrite, select

2Overwrite A

Press b

Opening Animation Files

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

1

Select a folder and press

b

2

Select animation file and press

b

The selected animation plays.

C

Press e W to stop.

C

To use animation files, see below.

Using Images & Animation

Some images may not be used.

Changing Display Size

1

Open a file and press

k

Display size toggles between 100% (with indicators), 100% (no indicators), Enlarged (with indicators) and Enlarged (no indicators).

^ Size may not be changed or size options may vary depending on the file. When enlarged, the entire image may not appear on Display.

^ q: 100%, p: Enlarged

9-10

Setting Image & Animation as Wallpaper

Save As Wallpaper can be selected only for compatible files.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

1

Images

1 Select

2Display Setting and press b

2 Select

1Save As Wallpaper and press b

Animation

1 Select Save As Wallpaper and press b

2 Press b

Setting Image & Animation as Display Images

To Display Images can be selected only for compatible files.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

1

Images

1 Select

2Display Setting and press b

2 Select

2To Display Images and press b

Animation

1 Select To Display Images and press b

2

Select an item and press

b

C

For more, see Step 4 and onward on P.7-5.

Saving Burst Shot Images

Save all frames and Index Image of a Burst Shot file (k) as individual images at one time, or select a single image to save.

Individual Burst Shot images are saved to Data Folder (Images) in JPEG format.

(Source file remains.)

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Burst Shots

A

Open a Burst Shot file

1

Saving All Images Individually

1 Press d I

2 Select

7Save Single Frames and press b

Saving a Single Image

1 Select a frame or Index Image with

F and press d I

2 Select

8Save Screen and press b

9

9-11

9

Slide Show

All images in Data Folder (Images, Animation or Burst Shots) or Camera folder appear sequentially. Adjust Slide Show speed.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

1

Select an image and press

d I

2

1Slide Show and press b

3

Select

1Slide Show and press b

Slide Show starts from the selected image.

C

To stop Slide Show, press b.

B To resume, press b.

C

To skip images manually, press d J.

Setting Interval

C Interval is Standard by default. To change interval, follow these steps.

After Step 2 above, select

2Display Speed A

Press

b A

Select an interval

A

Press

b

Editing Images

Enlarging/Reducing Image

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d) A

Image Size

1

Select

1Enlarge/Reduce and press b

^ If Move does not appear at the lower left, press e 0.

^ Shortcut: From Data Folder, open an image and press e 0

+

To Center the Point to Enlarge

^ Press e 1 and use G to move the point to the center of Display.

^ Image stops when you release the key or the limit is reached.

To Return to Resize Mode

Press e 0.

2

Press and hold

C to enlarge and D to reduce

the size

To stop resizing, release the key (stops automatically when the limit is reached).

C

To soften images, press d }.

,

^ Portions outside Display are cut when saved.

^ When e 1 is pressed after resizing, image returns to the original size.

3

Press

b

Resized image is saved as a new entry.

Move

Changing Image Size

Resize images in Data Folder to send via Long Mail or set as Wallpapers.

^ Alternatively, crop image for size. File size changes when images are resized.

^ Images may not appear depending on the size.

^ Change Image Size can be selected only for compatible files.

Save Soft

Resize to Preset Size

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Image Size

A

Change Image Size

1

Select from

1Wallpaper to 5Alarm and press b

A rectangle appears on the image (except for

1Wallpaper.)

Wallpaper

Sha-mail Size

Power On/Off

W 240 x H 320 dots

W 120 x H 160 dots

W 120 x H 130 dots

Incoming Call

Alarm

W 120 x H 38 dots

W 120 x H 51 dots

C

To start over from selecting preset size, press i or d |.

Resize OK Size

9

9-12 9-13

9

2

Selecting Display Area

1 Use

G to specify display area and press b

^ Display area may not be specified depending on image size.

Enlarge or Reduce

1 Press e 0

Move appears in the left bottom corner.

2 Press

C to enlarge and D to reduce the size, and press b

3

Press

b

Image is saved as a new entry.

Cropping Images

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Image Size

A

Change Image Size

1

Select

6Cut and press b

2

Use

G to move W to the upper left corner of the

portion to crop and press

b

3

Use

G to move W to the lower right corner of the

portion

C

To cancel, press e W A

Start over from Step 2

4

Press

d j

C

To start over from selecting preset size, press i or d |.

C

To adjust display area/scale, see Step 2 in "Resize to Preset

Size" above.

5

Press

b twice

Image is saved as a new entry.

Resize OK Size

Marker Stamp

Add text/stamps (arrows/plus sign) to images.

^ Apply to JPEG and PNG images. Some images may not be used.

^ Marker Stamp can be selected only for compatible files.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d) A

Picture Effect

1

Select

1Marker Stamp and press b

C

To specify the color, select

7Font Color A

Press b A

Select a combination

A

Press b

C

To not to outline text/stamp with the latter color, select

8Border A

Press b A

Choose

2Off A

Press b

,

For PNG images, Font Color and Border cannot be selected (White w/ Black applies).

9-14

2

Entering Text

1 Select

1Character and press b

2 Enter text and press b

^ Enter up to 16 single-byte characters.

C

To reenter text, press e W A

Start over from Step 1

C

Press

1 - 9 to change the color and 0 to toggle Border On and Off.

Adding Stamps

1 Select a stamp and press b

C

To change stamp, press e W

C

Press

1 - 9 to change the color and 0 to toggle Border On and Off.

3

Use

G to move text or stamp to target location and press b

4

Choose

1Yes and press b

C

To add more text or stamp, select

2Marking A

Press b A

Press d I A

Repeat Steps 2 - 4

C

To check the image, select

3Check Image A

Press b

C

To cancel editing, select

4Cancel Edit A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

5

Select

1Complete and press b

6

Choose

1Yes and press b

Image is saved as a new entry.

Visual Effects

Dress up images with preloaded visual effects.

^ Apply to JPEG images including Burst Shot files.

^ Use images between W 52 x H 52 and W 240 x H 320 dots. Images larger than

W 240 x H 320 dots are automatically cropped and centered.

^

2Image Decoration or 3Burst Shot Effects can be selected only for compatible files.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

1

Select

4Picture Effect and press b

C

To decorate Burst Shot images, select

3Burst Shot Effects A

Press b A

Skip ahead to Step 3

+

For Burst Shot files, decorations are added to all images. To decorate a single image, save it as an individual image first (see P.9-11).

2

Select

2Image Decoration and press b

9

9-15

9

3

Select an effect and press

b

^ Picture Effects:

Sepia

Sparkling

Soap Bubbles

Kaleidoscope

Emboss

Scrunch

Aluminum Can

Round Frame

Soft Frame

Zigzag Frame

4

Press

b

Image is saved as a new entry.

Renders image in sepia tones

Adds sparkling effect to bright portions of an image

Superimposes bubbles over an image

Renders an image as a kaleidoscopic image

Renders images in black and white relief

Renders image as a pencil sketch

Superimposes image onto a 3D can image

Adds a round, opaque frosting to the edges of an image

Adds a soft, opaque edged frame to image

Adds a jagged edged frame around image

,

Edited images may be too large to save or send via Long Mail.

Face Arrange

Make smiley, angry or sad faces.

^ Apply to JPEG images.

^ Use portrait images.

^ Face Arrange may not fit all images. Adjust position and size as required (see P.9-17).

^ Face Arrange can be selected only for compatible files.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Picture Effect

A

Face Arrange

1

Select a type and press

b

Mirror:

Right-half

Mirror:

Left-half

Grin

Mad

Sad

Copies right side of face onto left side

Copies left side of face onto right side

Slender

Pulls eyes down & mouth up

Dark

Pulls eyes up & mouth down

Fair

Pulls eyes & mouth down

C

To start over, press e W.

Crush Face

Stretches face to lengthen appearance

Shortens distance between top and bottom of face

Darkens skin tone

Brightens skin tone

Angry Mark

Adds a stress mark to face

9-16

2

Press

b

Image is saved as a new entry.

,

When using Face Arrange, take care not to create images that may embarrass or offend others. Always obtain permission before photographing others.

Adjusting Face Arrange Position

After Face Arrange (Step 1 on P.9-16), change the positions and sizes of targets to fit your images. Changes apply to the current image only.

1

Select LPositioning and press b

Face Arrange targets appear.

2

Press

d u

A rectangle appears with W in the upper left corner.

3

Set the face line

J q

Q n G

Set Upper Face Line

J q

Q n G

Set Lower Face Line

J q

Q n G

Right Eye/Upper Left

＋ b b

＋

＋

OK Set

Use

G to move

W to the upper left corner

C

To start over, press e W.

Back OK Set

Use

G to move

W to the lower right corner

4

Set the eyes and then mouth in the same way

J q

Q n G

Right Eye/LowerRight

J q

Q n

G

Left Eye/Lower Right

Back OK Set

Face line is set

J q

Q n

Mouth/Lower Right

G b b

＋ ＋

＋

Back OK

Right Eye

Set Back OK

Left Eye

Set Back

Mouth

Set

9

9-17

9

5

Press

d j when finished

After Arranging Face..., all the targets appear.

^ To start over from the face line, return to Step 2.

C

To restore the original positions, press e l.

6

Press

b

7

Choose

1Yes and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry with Face Arrange positions adjusted, and

Face Arrange menu returns.

^ Complete Face Arrange. Face Arrange is applied to the adjusted positions.

Additional Picture Effects

^ Frame, Burst Mode Frame, 90° turn, Change File Format and Moving Photo Frame can be selected only for compatible files.

^ Edited images are saved as new entries.

Add Frame to JPEG images

Frame

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

Framing Standard Images

Select

4Picture Effect A

Press

b A

Select

4Frame A

Press

b A

Select

1Preset Frames or 2Original Frames A

Press

b A

Select a frame

A

Press

b twice

C

To check frames, select one

A

Press e 9

B Press e W to return to Frame list.

Framing Burst Shot Images

Select

4Burst Mode Frame A

Press

b A

Select

1Preset Frames or

2Original Frames A

Press

b A

Select a frame

A

Press

b twice

C

To check frames, select one

A

Press e 9

B Press e W to return to Frame list.

+

For Burst Shot files, frames are added to all images. To frame a single image, save it as an individual image first (see P.9-11).

90° turn

Rotate images

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Picture Effect

Select

690° turn A

Press

b A

Press

b

*

*To rotate further, press d z. Each press rotates image by 90 degrees.

9-18

Moving Photo

Frame

Add Moving Photo Frame to JPEG images to create animations

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Picture Effect

A

Moving Photo Frame

Select a frame

A

Press

b twice

C

To view file animation alone, select one

A

Press e 9

B Press e W to return to Moving Photo Frame list.

^ Animations are saved as E-Animation files with a .nva extension.

+

Moving Photo Frame size is W 120 X H 130 dots. For images larger than this size, Moving Photo Frames appear centered. Resize or crop images to fit frame

(see P.9-14).

Change File

Format

Convert image format to JPEG (s) or PNG (w)

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Change File Format

Select a format

A

Press

b

^ Apply to images smaller than 120 x 160 dots.

^ The original format cannot be selected.

,

Changing file format may affect image quality.

Combining Images

Some images may not be combined and menu items may vary by file type.

Split Screen

Combine up to four reduced images into one.

^ Apply to JPEG images including Burst Shot files.

^ Make sure there is enough free memory.

^ Images are placed in the upper left, upper right, lower left and lower right in numerical order.

J q

Q n E

9

Resize Menu

Split Image

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

1

Select an image for upper left and press

b

^ To use a Burst Shot image for upper left, select any standard image temporarily and change it to a Burst Shot image later (see Step 10 on P.9-20).

9-19

9

2

Press

d I

3

Select

5Composite and press b

4

Select

1Split Image 120 x 160 or 2Split Image 240 x 320 and press b

5

Enter name and press

b

^ Enter up to 32 single-byte characters. Name is mandatory.

6

Select a number and press

b

Data Folder opens.

7

Select a folder and press

b

8

Select an image and press

b

^ Some images may not be selected.

C

To change the image, press d X.

C

To start over from selecting a number, press e W.

9

Press

b

10

Repeat Steps 6 - 9 to add images

C

To preview Split Image, press d I A

Select

1Split Screen A

Press b

B To return, press d W A

Press i

C

To change images, select one

A

Press d I A

Select

2Change A

Press b A

Start over from Step 7

C

To delete images, select one

A

Press d I A

Select

3Delete A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

J

Q

Split Picture n

E

File Name[MyPhoto ]

1*5-*9-2*_15-17

2*5-*9-2*_15-18

3Sleepy

4*5-*9-2*_15-2*

Set Select Menu

11

Press

e j when finished

C

To send Split Image via Long Mail, select

2Attachment A

Press b A

Perform from

Step 2 on IP.3-3

12

Select

1Save and press b

Image is saved as a new entry.

Using a Single Image of Burst Shot File

C Follow these steps after Step 6.

Select Burst Shots

A

Press

b A

Select a Burst Shot file

A

Press

b A

Use

F to select an image A

Press

b A

Perform from Step 10 above

^ 1/4 - 4/4, etc. is added to the file name.

C Index Image can be used ( x is added to the file name).

Panorama Images

Combine two images into one.

Select two images

Panorama Image Effects:

Merge Panorama

Standard

Near View

Document

Applicable to all kinds of shots

Best suited for close-up shots with parallax correction

Use for images with text

^ Use JPEG images between W 48 x H 64 and W 120 x H 160 dots/W 160 x H 120 dots.

^ Some portions may be cropped to adjust two images to the same size.

^ The result may not be satisfactory if color tones are different between two images.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

1

Select an image and press

b

2

Press

d I

^ For Burst Shot images, skip ahead to Step 4.

3

Select

5Composite and press b

4

Select Merge Panorama and press

b

The first selected image appears on the left when combined.

^ Merge Panorama can be selected only for compatible files.

5

Select from

1Standard to 3Document and press b

6

Select

2 and press b

Data Folder opens.

7

Select another image and press

b

9

9-20 9-21

9

8

Press

b

The selected image appears on the right. Two images are set.

^ If the image is too large or too small, select another.

C

To change the image press d X A

Start over from Step 7

9

Press

e j when finished

Combined image appears.

^ Use

G to scroll the image.

C

To switch the positions, press d r.

10

Press

b

Image is saved as a new entry.

J

Q

1*5-*9-2*_15-17

2*5-*9-2*_15-18 n E

Merge Panorama

Effect[Standard ]

Set Select

Combining Split Mail Images

Use one of four Split Mail images to combine them all into one.

^ Images may not be combined properly if file names of Split Mail images are changed, or the same file name exists.

^ When combined, image quality may change.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

A

Open a file

A

Menu (

d)

A

Composite

1

Select

3Combine Split Mail and press b

2

Press

b

Image is saved as a new entry.

Melody Files

Some functions may not be available and menu items may vary by file type.

Playback Volume

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Melodies

1

Select a file and press

d I

2

Select

1Playback Volume and press b

3

Use

E to adjust level and press b

9-22

Using for Incoming Tone/Sound Effects

Files cannot be used if the file name exceeds 24 single-byte characters.

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Melodies

1

Select a file and press

d I

2

Select

2Incoming Tone or 3Sound Effects and press b

^ Incoming Tone or Sound Effects can be selected only for compatible files.

3

Select an item and press

b

Editing Melodies & Adjusting Tone or Loudness

C Press b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

1Data Folder A

Press

b A

Select Melodies

A

Press

b A

Select a melody

A

Press

d I

B To edit melodies, select

5Edit A

Press b A

Perform from Step 3 on P.8-14

B To adjust tone, select

6Tone A

Press b A

Perform Steps 10 - 13 on P.8-12 - 8-13

B To adjust loudness, select

7Adjust Loudness A

Press b A

Perform Steps

15 - 18 on P.8-13

^ Melody format files are saved as Original Ring Tone format after Edit.

Editing Files & Folders

To change folder names, set folders to appear from Display Settings (see P.9-5).

Changing Folder/

File Name

Rename folders (except Folder 0) or files

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

Folder Names

Select a folder

A

Press

b A

Select from Folder 1 to Folder 9

A

Press

d I A

Select

2Folder Name A

Press

b A

Enter name

A

Press

b

File Names

Select a folder

A

Press

b A

Select a file

A

Press

d I A

Select Change File Name

A

Press

b A

Enter name

A

Press

b

,

^ Changing names does not affect titles of sound files.

^ When you attach a file to Long Mail, single-byte katakana used in the name change to double-byte, and Pictographs are deleted.

^ Some single-byte Symbols may not be used for file names.

9

9-23

9

Restrict access to folders (except Folder 0)

Secret Mode

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

Select from Folder 1 to Folder 9

A

Press

d I A

Select

3Secret Mode A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

1On

or

2Off A

Press

b

^ Enter Security Code to open folders set to On.

,

Secret Mode is not available for Camera folder (shortcut).

Copy/Move

Copy or move files to other folders within each Data Folder

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

A

Open a folder

Select a file

A

Press

d I A

Select Copy or Move

A

Press

b

A

Select a destination folder

A

Press

b

Delete

Delete a single file or all files at once

Index Menu

H

My Files

A

Data Folder

Deleting Single Files

Select a folder

A

Press

b A

Select Delete

A

Press

b A

Press

b

Select a file

A

Press

d I A

Delete?

*

appears

A

Choose

1Yes A

*If the file is used for Incoming Tone, Picture Call/Mail, Useful Diary, etc.,

File in Use Delete? appears.

Deleting All Files

Select a folder

A

Press

d I A

Select

3Delete All A

Press

b

A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

9-24

V-Applications

This product is equipped with JBlend designed to accelerate the performance of Java Application.

Powered by JBlend! Copyright 1997-2005 Aplix Corporation.

All rights reserved. JBlend and JBlend-related brands are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aplix Corporation in Japan and other countries.

Java and Java-related brands are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun

Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

10-1

MEMO

10-2

V-Application Basics

10-3

Getting Started

Network V-Applications

10

Network V-Applications require a network connection. Before downloading an application, check its properties for network connection information (see P.10-5).

^ Before using a Network V-Application, a message appears indicating that a network connection is required. To skip this confirmation, see P.11-4.

^ For connection fees, contact Vodafone Customer Center, General Information (see P.16-15).

Downloading V-Applications

^ User authentication may be required before download.

^ Make sure signal is strong.

1

Open a Mobile Internet site offering V-Applications

2

Select a V-Application and press

b

After V-Appli Received Data Analyzing..., properties (see P.10-5) appear.

C

When a V-Application is paused (F), choose

1Yes A

Press b

3

Press

e i

Download starts.

^ Download may take time.

C

To return to the site, press d c.

4

V-Application is automatically saved after download (see sample screen shot shown to the right)

^ When you download a new version of V-Application set for

Standby, a confirmation appears and Standby V-Application may be canceled.

5

Press

e i

V-Appli Library opens.

C

To return to the site, press d c.

C

Starting V-Applications: see P.10-5

J

Q n

GOLF is Saved

Exit and Return to

V-Appli Library?

E

Yes No

Properties

V-Application properties appear before download. Check information and start.

J

Q

GOLF n

Download

Download Size: 3

*KB

Save Size: 45KB

Continue?

Network Connection

Required

Yes No

Name

Download Size

Save Size

Network Information

Start download:

Press e i

Cancel download:

Press d c

10

Starting V-Applications

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

1

Select

1V-Appli Library and press b

C

When a V-Application is paused (F), choose

1Yes A

Press b

2

Select a V-Application and press

b

V-Application starts (G appears).

^ For operations, refer to the source Mobile Internet site, etc.

^ V-Applications are enlarged twice vertically and horizontally when activated.

Starting Network V-Applications

C After Step 2 above, select

1Connect A

Press

b

B When

1Connect is selected in Off-Line Mode (see 6P.3-6), Establish Network

Connection? appears. Choose

1Yes or 2No and press b.

Opening Java! License Information

C Press b A

Select Vodafone live!

A

Press

b A

Select

4V-Appli A

Press

b

A

Select

2V-Appli Settings A

Press

b A

Select

5Other Settings A

Press

b

A

Select

4Copyright A

Press

b

Memory Status

C Press b A

Select My Files

A

Press

b A

Select

8Memory Status A

Press

b

10-4 10-5

10

+

^ When receiving calls, mail, etc., a running V-Application pauses. To set it to remain active, see "Incoming Settings" (P.12-2 "General Settings").

^ While using a V-Application, press j for 1+ seconds to activate or cancel Manner Mode.

Exit, Pause & Resume

Exiting or Pausing V-Applications

1

Press

g while using a V-Application

2

Exiting V-Application

1 Select

3End and press b

V-Appli Library returns (G disappears).

Pausing V-Application

1 Select

1Pause and press b

Handset returns to Standby (F appears).

^ V-Application resumes from where it was paused.

Resuming V-Applications

1

While a V-Application is paused, press

b in Standby

^ F appears while a V-Application is paused.

2

Select

1Resume and press b

C

To end the V-Application, select

2End A

Press b

C

To open Index Menu and keep the V-Application paused, select

3Cancel A

Press b

Opening V-Appli Library while V-Application is Paused

C When V-Appli Paused Exit? appears, choose

1Yes A

Press

b

^ Paused V-Application ends.

10-6

Using V-Applications

11-1

11

Managing V-Applications

Opening V-Application Properties

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Library

1

Select a V-Application and press

d I

2

Select

1Property and press b

C

To read the rest, press

D. (Press C to scroll back.)

C

To return to V-Appli Library, press b or A.

Vendor

Version

Size

Network Connect

StandbyDisp

Name of the distributor (or supplier/manufacturer)

Version of the V-Application

Downloaded file size

Network connection required or not

Compatibility with Standby V-Application (see P.11-3)

Deleting V-Applications

Preloaded V-Applications can be deleted.

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Library

1

Select a V-Application and press

d I

2

Select

2Delete and press b

If the V-Application is set for Standby (see P.11-3), Cannot Delete Application set as

Standby V-Appli appears and Menu returns. To proceed, cancel the setting and try again.

3

Choose

1Yes and press b

^ Security Code may be required.

Standby V-Application

Set a V-Application to activate when handset enters Standby.

^ Only one V-Application can be set at a time, and some do not run in Standby.

^ This setting is not available when a V-Application is paused (F).

^ Standby V-Appli is Off by default.

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Settings

1

Select

1Standby V-Appli and press b

C

For network connection confirmation, select

2Network Connection A

Press b A

Select

1Connect (default; confirmation appears) or 2Stay Off-line (disable confirmation)

A

Press b

2

Select

1On/Off and press b

3

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel Standby V-Application, choose

2Off A

Press b (Omit the next steps.)

4

Select a V-Application and press

b

5

Press

g to exit

,

^ V-Applications may not start when an external device (hands free kit, etc.) is connected to handset.

^ V-Application set for Standby that also responds to incoming communications may take priority over incoming settings set in Call Functions.

11

11-2 11-3

11

Network Connection Confirmation

A confirmation appears before starting Network V-Applications, which can be disabled. Connect is set by default (confirmation appears).

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Settings

A

Other Settings

A

Confirm Network

1

Select

1Connect and press b

C

To disable the confirmation, select

2Stay Off-line A

Press b

+

When a V-Application set for Standby starts automatically, confirmation does not appear regardless of this setting. Activate confirmation from Network Connection in

Standby V-Appli menu (see P.11-3).

11-4

V-Application Settings

12-1

12

General Settings

Incoming Settings

Select a handset response to incoming calls, etc. while a

V-Application is active

KPause Application

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Settings

A

Incoming Settings

Select from

1Incoming Call to 6Alarm A

Press

b A

Select a handset response

A

Press

b

Pause Application

Show Message

V-Applications pause for incoming calls, mail, etc.

A message appears for incoming calls, mail, etc. For example,

090392XXXX1 appears. Press f to answer the call or read the message.

^ For V-Applications started from Standby, a message appears regardless of the setting.

Playback Volume

Adjust the volume of V-Application sounds

KLevel 3

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Settings

A

Volume/Vibration

A

Playback Volume

Use

E to adjust volume A

Press

b

^ In Manner Mode, volume set in Manner Settings (see 6P.3-5) applies.

Vibration

When activated, handset vibrates while compatible

V-Applications play

KOn

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Settings

A

Volume/Vibration

A

Vibration

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

^ In Manner Mode, vibration set in Manner Settings (see 6P.3-5) applies.

Backlight

Select a Backlight status for V-Applications

KNormal

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Settings

A

Backlight

A

On/Off

Select from

1Always Active to 3Normal A

Press

b

Always Active

Backlight remains on while V-Applications are running

Always Inactive

Backlight does not turn on while V-Applications are running

Normal

Backlight turns on or off depending on Light Settings (see 6P.7-7)

12-2

Set to Flash

Backlight flashes while playing compatible V-Applications

KOn

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Settings

A

Backlight

A

Set to Flash

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

Resetting V-Appli & Center Address

Reset

Reset V-Application settings

Refer to P.16-3 for the settings affected by Reset

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Settings

A

Other Settings

A

Reset V-Appli

Enter Security Code

A

Select

1Reset A

Press

b A

Select

1OK or

2Cancel A

Press

b

12

Clear Memory

Restore V-Appli Library to default setting

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Settings

A

Other Settings

A

Reset V-Appli

Enter Security Code

A

Select

2Clear Memory A

Press

b A

Select

1OK or 2Cancel A

Press

b

^ All V-Application settings will be canceled after Clear Memory.

Center Address

Set V-Application Center Address

K

U7162

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

V-Appli

A

V-Appli Settings

A

Other Settings

A

Center Address

Enter Security Code

A

Enter Center Address

A

Press

b

,

Do not change Center Address unless instructed to do so. Access to the service will be disabled.

12-3

Station

(Japanese Only)

13-1

MEMO

13-2

Station Basics

13-3

13

Getting Started

Use Station to access a variety of area-specific local information, periodically updated automatically. An additional contract is required to use Station service.

Station Content

Station Info Content

Sample Station information page:

Use

E or F to scroll information.

J q

Q

9/22 12:3 n D

* 通常

スポーツニュース

［速報］

腕相撲の世界チャンピ

オンに輝いた石橋さん

が、今度は指相撲のチ

ャンピオンに挑戦。

実現すれば、史上初腕

相撲と指相撲の２冠を

達成することになる。

Back Menu

Received

Date & Time

Continues

Info Type

Content

Subscription Status

Request confirmation after subscribing to or unsubscribing from fee-based information.

To subscribe to fee-based information, contact Vodafone Customer Center, General

Information (see P.16-15).

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

1

Select

8Confirm Request and press b

Original subscription status appears.

!: Subscribed

#: Not subscribed

2

Press

b

3

Choose

1Yes and press b

Confirm Request Accepted appears.

^ Handset returns to Standby.

When Reply from Service Center Arrives

C Delivery Notice appears.

To see the reply, press

b A

Select Station Notification

A

Press

b

B Press g to exit. (Reply will be deleted.)

^ Alternatively, in Station, open New Information to check the reply (see P.13-8 "In

Standby").

13-4

Opening Main List

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

1

Select

2Main List and press b

C

If Main List is empty, choose

1Yes A

Press b

2

Select a topic and press

b

^ Subscription is required for viewing fee-based information.

C

Station Info Content: see P.13-4

+

If title list appears after Step 2, select a title and press b to open information.

3

Press

g to exit Station

Updating Main List

C Main List is updated automatically when:

^ Specified hours pass (see P.15-3)

^ Handset receives different area information

^ An update time for each topic in My List is reached

C To update Main List manually, follow these steps.

Press

b A

Select Vodafone live!

A

Press

b A

Select

3Station A

Press

b

A

Select

4Update List A

Press

b

^ Handset returns to Standby (D appears in gray). When Main List is updated,

Complete appears.

^ Updates may not be received depending on signal strength.

13

13-5

My List

Saving to My List

13

Save topics to My List to receive periodic updates. The information is updated automatically.

^ Save up to 20 topics.

^ Urgent Information is saved automatically.

From Information

1

Open information

2

Press

d I

3

Select Save and press

b

^ Topic can only be saved when Save appears.

4

Select

1Save to My List and press b

^ If the topic is already in My List,

1Save to My List does not appear.

From List

1

Select a topic

2

Press

d I

^ If the topic is already in My List, Saved appears.

3

Select Save to My List and press

b

^ If the topic has more than one information item, handset saves as many items as possible.

+

Follow the same steps to save from title list within a topic.

13-6

Editing My List

Moving Saved Topics

Urgent Information cannot be moved.

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

My List

1

Select a topic and press

d I

2

Select Move and press

b

3

Use

E to move cursor to target location and press b

The topic is moved.

Deleting Topics

^ Urgent Information cannot be deleted.

^ Deleting a topic automatically deletes all information saved under the topic.

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

My List

1

Select a topic and press

d I

2

Select Delete and press

b

Delete? appears.

^ Check the number of information items.

3

Choose

1Yes and press b

Received Information

Unread Information

1

When a topic in My List is updated, animation plays and Delivery Notice appears

D appears in red.

^ When handset is closed, y appears on Sub Display. Open handset to see Delivery Notice.

2

Press

b

3

Select a topic and press

b

Information appears (and is deleted from New Information).

C

Saving Information: see P.14-2

C

To save files within information to Data Folder, see P.14-4 "To

Data Folder."

J

Q

D n

9/22[Thu] 12:3

*

New Information

Show

Delivery Notice

13

13-7

13

Ring Tone Volume

C While handset is ringing, press

C (up) or D (down).

^ Ring Tone Level setting (see 6P.8-2) changes accordingly.

^ Cancel Manner Mode (see 6P.3-3) to adjust the level.

Quick Silent

C Press j to instantly mute incoming information tone for that information only.

In Standby

C Press b A

Select Vodafone live!

A

Press

b A

Select

3Station A

Press

b

A

Select

1New Information A

Press

b A

Select a topic

A

Press

b

+

^ Information may appear automatically without a notice.

^ For Urgent Information, Urgent Information appears even when it arrives with other information.

^ If information is received during an operation, Delivery Notice may not appear.

^ Depending on information type, Ring Tone may not sound or other tone may sound.

^ When Screen Savers is active (see P.15-3), new information appears automatically.

Read Information

^ My List holds up to 100 information items.

^ Urgent information is saved to My List.

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

1

Select

3My List and press b

^ Topics with unread information appear in red.

2

Select a topic and press

b

3

Select a title and press

b

,

When there are 100 information items in My List and new information arrives, the oldest item is replaced. Save important information to Saved Information (see P.14-2).

Even when there are fewer than 100 items, items may be deleted depending on the size or type of information.

13-8

Advanced Features

14-1

14

Saving Information

Saved Information

Information in Main List is updated automatically (see P.13-5).

To protect information, save items to Saved Information.

^ Approximately 375 KB is shared between Inbox (Mail), Storage Type (Web) and Saved

Information (Station).

^ Information in My List can be saved to Saved Information.

1

Open information

2

Press

d I

^ Information can only be saved when Save appears.

3

Select Save and press

b

^ Information can only be saved when Station Info Log appears.

4

Select Station Info Log and press

b

^ When memory is full, delete entries (see below) and try again.

+

Information may not be saved if memory is low (used for Inbox, Storage Type or

Saved Information).

Checking Information

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

1

Select

6Saved Information and press b

^ Received date and time appear in [ ].

2

Select a title and press

b

C

To save files within information to Data Folder, see P.14-4 "To Data Folder."

Deleting Selected Information

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

Saved Information

1

Select a title and press

d I

2

Select Delete and press

b

3

Choose

1Yes and press b

14-2

Deleting All Information

C Press b A

Select Vodafone live!

A

Press

b A

Select

3Station A

Press

b

A

Select

6Saved Information A

Press

d I A

Select

2Delete All A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Choose

1Yes A

Press

b

Using Linked Info

Use numbers, addresses or URLs (http:// ) to place calls, send messages or access

Mobile Internet sites.

^ Available only when number, address or URL is underlined with a dotted line.

^ Words may be substituted for the numbers, addresses and URLs.

1

Open information containing a phone number, mail address or URL

2

Phone Numbers

1 Highlight a number and press b

2 Select Dial and press b

The number is dialed.

Mail Addresses

1 Highlight an address and press b

2 Select Send and press b

3 Select

1Send Long Mail or 2Send Sky Mail and press b

C

Creating & Sending a Message: see P.3-3

URLs

1 Highlight a URL and press b

Handset connects to the Network.

14

Saving to Phone Book

C To save as new entry, open information and follow these steps.

Select a phone number or mail address

A

Press

b A

Select Save

A

Press

b

A

Select

1New Entry A

Press

b A

See 6P.5-4 - 5-5 for more about Phone

Book

C To save as new item, open information and follow these steps.

Select a phone number or mail address

A

Press

b A

Select Save

A

Press

b

A

Select

2New Item A

Press

b A

Select an entry (see 6P.5-13)

A

Press

b

A

See 6P.5-4 - 5-5 for more about Phone Book

14-3

14

Files within Information

Use information in My List or Saved Information.

To Data Folder

Save images and other files within information to Data Folder

Open information and select a file

A

Press

b A

Select XTo Data

Folder

A

Press

b A

Perform Step 4 on P.8-6

^ Files can only be saved when XTo Data Folder appears.

^ Some files may not be saved to Data Folder.

Wallpaper &

Display Images

Save images as Wallpaper or as Display Images

Open information and select an image

A

Press

b A

Select Save As

Wallpaper or To Display Images

A

Press

b A

Perform Step 3-1

(Wallpaper) or 3-2 (Display Images) on P.8-6

^ Images can only be used when Save As Wallpaper or To Display Images appears.

^ Some images may be too large to use as Wallpaper or Display Images.

^ Image files saved as Wallpaper or Display Images are not saved to Data Folder.

Weather Indicator

Activating Weather Indicator

The weather forecast for your current location (sent via the Center) appears as

Weather Indicator in Standby.

^ Subscription to fee-based information is required to use this service.

^ Off (no Weather Indicator) is set by default.

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

Weather Indicator

A

Standby Display

1

Choose

1On and press b

C

To cancel, choose

2Off A

Press b

2

Press

b

Weather Indicator appears when forecast is updated.

+

After you subscribe to fee-based information, Weather Icon Set Now? appears.

Choose

1Yes and press b, then follow onscreen prompt to see the indicators.

On is set for

2Standby Display automatically.

14-4

Indicators & Updates

J n

JPK

J:Clear Skies (Day)

N:Clear Skies (Night)

K:Cloudy

L:Rain

M:Snow

O:Thunder Showers

切替 選択 チェック

W:Partly/Chance of

P:Then

Example

：KWL

APartly cloudy with

a chance of rain

Weather Indicator is updated when: eWeather Indicator update time arrives fA different area forecast is received gMain List update time arrives (see P.15-3) hManually updated (see P.13-5)

14

Weather Forecast

See a more detailed weather forecast.

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

Weather Indicator

1

Select

1Weather Forecast and press b

Information appears.

Changing Weather Indicator Info Number

C Do not change Info Number unless instructed to do so.

Press

b A

Select Vodafone live!

A

Press

b A

Select

3Station A

Press

b

A

Select

5Weather Indicator A

Press

b A

Select

3Set Info Number A

Press

b A

Enter Security Code

A

Enter a new Info Number

A

Press

b

^ 57451 is set by default.

Location Info

Checking Location Info

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

1

Select

7Location Info and press b

Location Info Log opens.

C

When Location Info is protected (see P.14-6), enter Security Code.

C

To update Location Info, press d I A

Select Update Location Info

A

Press b

C

To clear Location Info, press d I A

Select Delete All

A

Press b A

Choose

1Yes A

Press b

2

Select Location Info and press

b

C

To delete Location Info, press d I A

Select Delete

A

Press b

14-5

14

Using Location Info

^ Send via One-Shot Mail (see P.3-16)

^ Share on BBS (see P.6-6)

^ Send via Web (see P.9-4)

^ Copy and paste into messages (see below)

Pasting into Messages

C In a text entry window, move cursor to the paste location and follow these steps.

Press

d I A

Select XSaved Info

A

Press

b A

Select

3Location

Info

A

Press

b twice A

Use

G to move cursor A

Press

b

^ Location Info is inserted to the left of the cursor.

+

Up to five locations, including the current one, are saved in Location Info Log. When this limit is exceeded, the oldest Location is replaced with the newest.

Protecting Location Info

Restrict access to Location Info Log by making Security Code required to open

Location Info.

No (Security Code not required) is set by default.

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

Location Info

1

Press

d I

2

Select Set Security Code and press

b

3

Select

1Need Setting and press b

^ Handset is set to ask for Security Code.

C

To cancel, choose

2No A

Press b

14-6

Station Settings

15-1

15

Sub Menu Settings

Set Display Size

Change font and image size

KMedium Font/100%

Open information and press

d I A

Select Set Display Size

A

Press

b A

Select a size

A

Press

b

,

^ Some images always appear at 100% depending on the original size.

^ Select 100% if information does not appear properly at 200%.

+

Press k to toggle size as follows: Medium Font/200% % Small Font/100% %

Small Font/200% % Medium Font/100%. (q appears for 100% and p for 200%.)

Screen Scroll

Select from three scroll units

KLine

Open information and press

d I A

Select Screen Scroll

A

Press

b A

Select from

1Full Screen to 3Line A

Press

b

Save to

Text Memo

Copy text and save to Text Memo (see 6P.4-18)

Open information and press

d I A

Select Save

A

Press

b A

Select Save to Text Memo

A

Press

b A

Use

E to underline the first

line of the text block to copy

A

Press

b A

Use

E to specify text A

Press

b A

Select a number

A

Press

b

C

To overwrite, choose

1Yes A

Press b

^ Text can only be saved when Save to Text Memo appears.

Copy

Copy text

Open information and press

d I A

Select Copy

A

Press

b A

Use

E to underline the first line of the text block to copy A

Press

b

A

Use

E to specify text A

Press

b

^ Text can only be copied when Copy appears.

Property

Open information details

Open information and press

d I A

Select Property

A

Press

b

C

Press b again to return to information.

^ Check Reception No. The smaller the number, the later the information is received.

15-2

Basic Settings

Screen Savers

Set new information to automatically appear in Standby

KOff

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

Station Settings

A

Screen Savers

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

^ When there are multiple pages/information items, they appear in turn every five seconds.

(As for images, only those in the latest information appear.)

^ When Web Screen Savers is On, Station Screen Savers appears afterward.

^ While information appears in Standby, press b to open it.

, ^ Battery runs out faster with Screen Savers.

^ While information appears in Standby, Wallpaper does not appear. When a

V-Application is set for Standby, information does not appear in Standby.

^ Full information may not appear in Standby.

15

Update Frequency

Set an interval for Main List automatic update

K4 Times/Day

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

Station Settings

A

Update Frequency

Select from

14 Times/Day to 3Off A

Press

b

^ Main List is updated automatically when not updated by other means (see P.13-5) within the set interval.

Save Info Number

Save topics to My List directly using Info Number

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

Station Settings

A

Save Info Number

Enter Info Number

A

Press

b

^ When 20 topics are saved in My List, No Space Cannot Save appears. Delete topics (see

P.13-7) and try again.

Image Link

Select whether to update Wallpaper automatically when the source image is updated

CImage Link is available only when the information containing the image used as Wallpaper is saved to My List (see P.13-6).

KOff

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

Station Settings

A

Image Link

Choose

1On or 2Off A

Press

b

,

^ When Wallpaper is updated, the original image used as Wallpaper is deleted.

^ Station Image Link and Web Image Link cannot be set On at the same time.

When either is set on, the other one turns off automatically.

^ Wallpaper is updated automatically only when the image is saved as

Wallpaper directly from opened information, not from Data Folder.

15-3

15

Resetting Station & Center Address

Reset Station

Reset Station settings

Refer to P.16-3 for the settings affected by Reset

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

Station Settings

A

Reset Station

Enter Security Code

A

Select

1Reset A

Press

b A

Select

1OK or

2Cancel A

Press

b

Clear Memory

Delete all information in Station

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

Station Settings

A

Reset Station

Enter Security Code

A

Select

2Clear Memory A

Press

b A

Select

1OK or 2Cancel A

Press

b

+

^ All files in the following locations will be deleted:

B New Information B Main List

B My List

*

B Saved Information B Location Info

*Urgent Information remains.

^ When Clear Memory is performed, ongoing Main List update (see P.13-5) will stop.

Center Address

Set Station Center Address

K

U7052

Index Menu

H

Vodafone live!

A

Station

A

Station Settings

A

Center Address

Enter Security Code

A

Enter Center Address

A

Press

b

,

Do not change Center Address unless instructed to do so. Otherwise, access to the service will be disabled.

15-4

Appendix

16-1

Reset Settings

Mail Settings

16

See P.6-7 for resetting Mail Settings.

2-Touch Mail

Auto Send

Security

Auto Retrieve

Mail Notice

Confirm Delivery

PIN Setting

PIN Filter

Reject List

Address Filter

Set Priority

Sender

Custom Fixed Text

Sound Auto Play

Add Address: all deleted, Save & Send Image: On

On

0000

Off (all)

Deleted

Off

Manual

Name

Off

Normal

Deleted

Deleted

Off

Auto Delete Old

List

Access

Points

Off

Pattern 1

Server Address

Server Address: 5000, Sub Address: none

Center Address

1

2

BBS

Scroll Unit

Line

Layout

Set Folders

Display Size

One-Shot Mail

3

Designate Folder

List (all)

Folder Name: all deleted, Secret Mode: Off (all)

Medium Font/100%

Recipient and message text: deleted

Confirm Delivery and Send Location Info: Off

Off

1

Short Message: U7032, Data Access: U7132, Long Mail Line: U7042

2

Settings: Off, New Message: deleted ( 掲示板データなし

3

When Side Key Settings (see 6P.12-3) for Standby is One-Shot Mail, the setting automatically returns to Off after resetting Mail Settings.

+

Sky Melody Center Address returns to

U

1790.

16-2

Web Settings

See P.9-5 for resetting Web settings.

Screen Savers

Text Only

Auto Retrieve

Image Link

Server Address

Location Info

Set Display Size

Screen Scroll

Off

Acquire Image: On, Acquire BGM: On

Auto Retrieve

Off

U7122

On

Medium Font/100%

Line

V-Application Settings

See P.12-3 for resetting V-Application settings.

Incoming Settings

Playback Volume

Vibration

Backlight

Center Address

Confirm Network

Pause Application (all)

Level 3

On

On/Off: Normal, Set to Flash: On

U7162

Connect

Station Settings

See P.15-4 for resetting Station settings.

Screen Savers

Update Frequency

Center Address

Image Link

Weather Indicator

Off

4 Times/Day

U7052

Off

Off

16-3

16

16

Display Messages

Mail

Out-of-Range

Cannot Send

Delivery Rejected

Cannot Send

Confirm

Send failed due to weak signal.

A

Make sure signal is stable and try again.

The message was not delivered to the recipient.

A

Check the handset number and try again.

The Center is undergoing maintenance.

A

Wait and try again.

Unknown if the Center received the message.

A

Confirm delivery (see P.4-18).

No response

Connection interrupted

Connection

Interrupted

Cannot connect to

Network

J

Q

Connection

Interrupted

Reconnect?

1Yes

2No n

E

Unknown if the Center received the message.

A

Wait and try again.

The Center did not receive the message.

A

Wait and try again.

Disconnected due to weak signal.

A

Choose

1Yes and press b to reconnect.

Select

?

The message was not delivered to the recipient.

A

If recipient is using PIN Filter, enter the matching PIN and resend (see P.3-10).

A

The recipient may be using Address Filter for security.

A

If included, remove 184 or 186 from the recipient number and try again.

Sha-mail Cannot be Sent

Possible causes include the following. For details, contact Vodafone Customer

Center, General Information (see P.16-15).

^ Recipient does not subscribe to Super Mail or Long Mail.

^ Recipient handset is not JPEG-compatible.

B Convert JPEG files to PNG files before sending to PNG-compatible handsets (see 6P.9-19).

When Handset Memory is Full

New messages cannot be delivered to handset. Undeliverable mail is saved at the

Center for up to 30 days.

^ Delete messages to free memory for new ones (see P.4-10).

When memory is available, new messages are delivered automatically.

^ Delete unprotected messages automatically to receive new ones (see P.4-11 "Auto Delete").

^ Even if memory is not full, handset cannot receive new messages larger than remaining memory.

Web

Cannot connect to

Network

No response

Connection interrupted

J

Q

I

Connection

Interrupted

Reconnect?

1Yes

2No n

E

The Center did not respond.

A

Wait and try again.

Server Address is incorrect.

A

Correct Center Address and try again. See "Server

Address" (P.9-5 "Reset & Changing Center Address).

You are out-of-range.

A

Try again where signal is stable.

The Center did not respond, or time limit passed.

A

Establish a connection within the time limit.

Disconnected due to weak signal.

A

Choose

1Yes and press b to reconnect.

16

Select

16-4 16-5

16

V-Applications

J

Q F

V-Appli

V-Appli

Paused

Exit?

n E

A V-Application is paused.

A

Close the application and try again.

1Yes

2No

Select

L

Q

GOLF n C

Download

Download Size: 30KB

Save Size: 45KB

Continue?

Network Connection

Required

Battery Low

Download May Fail

Yes

J

Q

No n

Memory Low

Cannot Download

Download may fail due to low battery.

A

Charge battery beforehand.

Library memory is full.

A

Delete files/applications in File Cabinet (see 6P.9-2) and try again.

No Space

Cannot Save

J

Q

New Version Found n

Application will be

Updated

Continue Download?

100 V-Applications are already saved.

A

Delete applications (see P.11-2) and try again.

You are downloading a new version of the saved application.

A

Press e i to continue downloading or press d c to cancel.

Yes No

+

V-Applications cannot be downloaded when the following messages appear:

^

Improper Data Cannot Download Application

^

Application Size too large Cannot download

^

V-Appli already saved

16-6

Station

Cannot connect to

Network

Cannot Update

Service unavailable in this area

You tried to update Main List or Location Info out-of-range.

A

Try again where signal is stable.

Location Info cannot be received from the Center.

A

Try again.

You tried to update Main List or Location Info outside the

Service Area.

A

Try again within the Service Area.

16

16-7

16

Pictograph List

Open Pictograph Code mode and press d a.

Use

G to select a Pictograph and press b to enter it.

C Pictograph Code 1

Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

17

18

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

*

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

35

36

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

*

*

*

*

49

50

51

52

45

46

47

48

53

54

41

42

43

44

37

38

39

40

67

68

69

70

63

64

65

66

71

72

59

60

61

62

55

56

57

58

*

*

*

*

*

*

85

86

87

88

81

82

83

84

89

90

77

78

79

80

73

74

75

76

C Pictograph Code 2

Pictographs in 2 are animated.

Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

07

08

09

10

01

02

03

04

05

06

*

33

34

35

36

29

30

31

32

25

26

27

28

19

20

21

22

23

24

*

*

51

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

43

44

45

46

37

38

39

40

41

42

69

70

71

72

65

66

67

68

61

62

63

64

55

56

57

58

59

60

*

*

87

88

89

90

83

84

85

86

79

80

81

82

73

74

75

76

77

78

16-8

C Pictograph Code 3

Pictographs in 2 are animated.

Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph

12

13

14

15

08

09

10

11

16

17

18

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

30

31

32

33

26

27

28

29

34

35

36

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

48

49

50

51

44

45

46

47

52

53

54

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

66

67

68

69

62

63

64

65

70

71

72

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

84

85

86

80

81

82

83

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

C Pictograph Code 4

Pictographs in 2 are animated.

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph

*

29

30

31

32

25

26

27

28

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

45

46

47

48

41

42

43

44

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

49

50

51

52

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

65

66

67

68

16

,

^ Pictographs do not appear in e-mail or on incompatible Vodafone handsets.

^ Pictographs with

*

appear with background animation in received messages when

Mail Background (see 6P.7-9) is On. (When more than one is included in a message, animation for first entered Pictograph appears.)

16-9

16

C Pictograph Code 5

Pictographs in 2 are animated.

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph

29

30

31

32

25

26

27

28

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

*

45

46

47

48

41

42

43

44

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

49

50

51

52

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

65

66

67

68

*

C Pictograph Code 6

Pictographs in 2 are animated.

Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph Code Pictograph

07

08

09

10

01

02

03

04

05

06

11

12

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

13

14

15

16

31

32

33

34

25

26

27

28

29

30

35

36

*

43

44

45

46

37

38

39

40

41

42

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

,

^ Pictographs do not appear in e-mail or on incompatible Vodafone handsets.

^ Pictographs with

*

appear with background animation in received messages when

Mail Background (see 6P.7-9) is On. (When more than one is included in a message, animation for first entered Pictograph appears.)

Memory List

Sent

Outbox

Inbox

Mail

Approximately 120 KB

Approximately 100 KB

Approximately 375 KB

*

*Shared with Storage Type (Web) and Saved Information (Station).

Overwrite Type

Storage Type

Work Type Information

Bookmarks

Internet

Web

Up to 15 information items

Approximately 375 KB

*

Approximately 32 KB

Up to 30 links

Up to 30 URLs

*Shared with Inbox (Mail) and Saved Information (Station).

Main List

Saved Information

My List

Location Info

Station

Up to 63 titles

Approximately 375 KB

*

Up to 20 topics (100 information items)

Up to 5

*Shared with Inbox (Mail) and Storage Type (Web).

V-Appli Library

V-Application

Up to 8 MB (100 items)

*

*Shared with File Cabinet (see 6P.9-2).

16-10 16-11

16

Index

Numbers

16 2-Touch Mail ....................................... 3-12

A

Attach 1/4 Size...................................... 3-8

Acquire List .......................................... 5-2

Add Address (2-Touch Mail) ............. 3-12

Address Filter....................................... 6-4

Attach Original ..................................... 3-8

Attachment (attaching images, etc.).... 3-7

Attachment (changing sound format) . 3-8

Attachment (saving) .......................... 4-20

Auto Delete Old .................................. 4-11

Auto Delivery Service ........................ 7-10

Auto Retrieve................................. 6-3, 9-3

Auto Send ............................................. 6-2

B

Backlight (V-Application) ................. 12-2

BBS ....................................................... 6-5

Bookmarks ........................................... 8-2

Bookmarks (accessing from).............. 8-3

Bookmarks (deleting from) ................. 8-4

Bookmarks (saving to) ........................ 8-2

By Express .................................. 3-11, 6-5

C

Call ........................................................ 4-8

Call Text Memo..................................... 3-4

Cancel Delivery .................................. 4-18

Cc .......................................................... 3-6

Center Address ........... 6-7, 9-5, 12-3, 15-4 chat group .......................................... 4-12

Chat Mail Log ..................................... 4-13

Clear Memory ..................... 9-5, 12-3, 15-4

Clipboard .............................................. 3-9

Combine Split Mail............................. 4-22

Confirm Delivery ......................... 4-18, 6-2

Confirm Network ................................ 11-4

Confirm Request ................................ 13-4

Convert Sky Mail .................................. 3-7

Copy .................................... 4-23, 9-2, 15-2

Copyright (V-Application) ................. 10-5

Cursor....................................................7-8

Custom Fixed Text ...............................6-2

D

Data Access ..........................................6-7

Delete All (mail messages) ..................6-7

Delete All Mail (Server Mail).................5-2

Delete all Mail (Unretrieved List) .........5-3

Delete Item

(Unretrieved List message)..............5-3

Delivery Report .....................................2-4

Dictionary files......................................8-8

Display Images .................. 4-21, 8-6, 14-4

F

Favorites................................................ 8-2

Favorites (canceling)............................8-3

Favorites (deleting entries)..................8-4

Favorites (opening information) .........8-3

Favorites (saving to) ............................8-2

Fixed Text..............................................3-6

Folder Name........................................ 4-14

Forward .................................................4-6

G

Greeting........................................1-2, 3-17

I

Image Link....................................9-4, 15-3 images (saving) ...........................8-5, 14-4

Inbox ...................................................... 4-2

Inbox Auto Sort................................... 4-17

Incoming Mail........................................4-4

Incoming Settings .............................. 12-2 information content.....................7-4, 13-4

Input Memory ........................................7-9

Internet ..................................................7-7

16-12

L

Layout (Mail) ....................................... 4-14

Link Limiter ........................................... 9-4

Link Limiter Code ................................. 9-4

Location Info ................................6-6, 14-5

Location Info (Web) .............................. 9-4

Long Mail........................................1-2, 3-2

Long Mail (retrieving) ....................2-7, 5-3

Long Mail Line ...................................... 6-7

Long Mail Notice................................... 2-7

M

Mail......................................................... 2-1

Mail (checking messages) ................... 4-2

Mail (checking new messages) ........... 2-4

Mail (copying message text).............. 4-23

Mail (creating & sending)..................... 3-3

Mail (deleting messages) ................... 4-10

Mail (disabling) ..................................... 1-5

Mail (editing messages) ....................... 4-2

Mail (entering message text) ............... 3-4

Mail (entering recipient) ....................... 3-4

Mail (entering subject) ......................... 3-4

Mail (protecting messages) ................. 4-9

Mail (resetting) ...................................... 6-7

Mail (saving to Outbox)...................... 3-10 mail address

(customizing handset address) ....... 1-4

Mail Box................................................. 4-2

Mail Box (changing List view) ........... 4-23

Mail Box (contents) ............. 2-5, 4-4, 4-13

Mail Notice............................................. 6-2

Mail Request ......................................... 5-2

Mail Templates.................................... 3-14

Main List .............................................. 13-5

Melody Format ...................................... 3-8

Memory List ...................................... 16-11

Memory Status.............................1-5, 10-5

Message Contents.........................2-6, 4-5

Message Folder (deleting information) ..8-4

Message Folder (opening information) ..8-3

Mobile Internet (accessing) ................. 7-6

More (Long Mail)................................... 2-7

Move to Folder .................................... 4-16

Multi Selector............................................ i

My List................................................. 13-6

My List (checking information) ......... 13-8

My List (deleting information)........... 13-7

My List (saving information) ............. 13-6

N

Network V-Applications..................... 10-4

New Information ................................. 13-7

Next (Unretrieved List)......................... 5-3

O

One-Shot Mail ..................................... 3-16

Open Link.............................................. 4-8

Option Settings .................................. 3-10

Outbox.......................................... 4-2, 4-19

Overwrite Type ..................................... 7-5

P

Pause Application .............................. 12-2

Phone Book (saving to) ....................... 4-7

Pictograph List ................................... 16-8

PIN ....................................................... 3-10

PIN Filter ............................................... 6-3

PIN Setting ............................................ 6-3

Playback Volume (V-Application) ..... 12-2

Polling .......................................... 3-11, 6-6

Privacy Level ...................................... 3-11

Protect Message................................... 4-9

R

Reacquire.............................................. 9-2

Recipient Type.................................... 3-11

Reject List ............................................. 6-4

Reply to All ........................................... 4-6

Resend .................................................. 4-7

Reset ............................6-7, 9-5, 12-3, 15-4

Retrieve All (Server Mail)..................... 5-2

Retrieve all Mail (Unretrieved List) ..... 5-3

Return Mail............................................ 4-6

16-13

16

16

S

Saved Information.............................. 14-2

Save & Send Image.............................. 6-3

Save As Wallpaper............. 4-21, 8-6, 14-4

Save Auto Send.................................. 3-12

Save Dictionary .................................... 8-8

Save Info Number .............................. 15-3

Save to Accumulate............................. 8-2

Save to Text Memo ..................... 9-2, 15-2

Saved Information (checking)........... 14-2

Saved Information (deleting) ............ 14-2

Saved Information (saving)............... 14-2

Screen Savers ............................. 9-3, 15-3

Screen Scroll ............................... 9-2, 15-2

Scroll Unit ............................................. 4-5

Secret Mode........................................ 4-15

Select Icon ............................................ 8-4

Send Mail .............................................. 4-8

Sender................................................... 6-5

Sent ....................................................... 4-2

Sent Auto Sort.................................... 4-17

Sent Mail ............................................... 3-5

Server.................................................... 3-6

Server Address ............................. 3-6, 9-5

Set Display Size .......................... 9-2, 15-2

Set Info Number ................................. 14-5

Set Priority................................... 3-11, 6-5

Set to Flash (V-Application) .............. 12-3

Sha-mail Shoot..................................... 3-9

Short Message ..................................... 6-7

Show Address .................................... 4-23

Show Message ................................... 12-2

Side Key.....................................................i

Sky Mail.......................................... 1-2, 3-3

Sky Melody .................................... 1-2, 2-7

SMAF (MA-2) Format ........................... 3-8

SMAF (MA-3) Format ........................... 3-8

Sound Auto Play ................................ 4-22 sound files (saving) ............................. 8-7

Space Town .......................................... 8-2

Standby Display ................................. 14-4

Standby V-Application....................... 11-3

Station................................................. 13-4

Station (disabling)................................ 1-5

Station (resetting)............................... 15-4

Storage Type..................................7-6, 8-2

Sub Address .........................................3-6

T

Text Only ...............................................9-3

To Long Mail .........................................3-7

U

Unread Messages (Web) .................... 7-10

Update Frequency .............................. 15-3

URL log (accessing from) ....................7-7

V

V-Application ...................................... 10-4

V-Application (deleting) ..................... 11-2

V-Application (downloading)............. 10-4

V-Application (exiting or pausing) .... 10-6

V-Application (resetting).................... 12-3

V-Application (resuming)................... 10-6

V-Application (starting)...................... 10-5

Vibration (V-Application) .................. 12-2

Vodafone live! (disabling)....................1-5

Vodafone Web.......................................7-6

W

Web ........................................................7-4

Weather Forecast ............................... 14-5

Weather Indicator ............................... 14-4

Web (disabling).....................................1-5

Web (resetting) .....................................9-5

Work Type information (Web) ............. 7-6

16-14

Customer Service

If you have questions about Vodafone handsets or services, please call General

Information. For repairs, please call Customer Assistance.

Vodafone Customer Centers

From a Vodafone handset, dial toll free at

157 for General Information or

113 for Customer Assistance

C Call these numbers toll free from landlines

Service Center Subscription Area

Hokkaido, Aomori, Akita, Iwate, Yamagata, Miyagi,

Fukushima, Niigata, Tokyo, Kanagawa, Chiba,

Saitama, Ibaraki, Tochigi, Gunma, Yamanashi,

Nagano, Toyama, Ishikawa, Fukui

General Information

Customer Assistance

Aichi, Gifu, Mie, Shizuoka

Osaka, Hyogo, Kyoto, Nara, Shiga, Wakayama

Hiroshima, Okayama, Yamaguchi, Tottori, Shimane

Tokushima, Kagawa, Ehime, Kochi

General Information

Customer Assistance

General Information

Customer Assistance

General Information

Customer Assistance

General Information

Customer Assistance

Fukuoka, Saga, Nagasaki, Oita, Kumamoto, Miyazaki,

Kagoshima, Okinawa

General Information

Customer Assistance

Phone Number

G 0088-240-157

G 0088-240-113

G 0088-241-157

G 0088-241-113

G 0088-242-157

G 0088-242-113

G 0088-259-157

G 0088-259-113

G 0088-247-157

G 0088-247-113

G 0088-250-157

G 0088-250-113

16

16-15

V302SH Instruction Manual

Vodafone live!

October 2005, First Edition

Vodafone K.K.

For additional information, please visit a Vodafone shop.

Model: V302SH

Manufacturer: SHARP Corporation

Please help the mobile industry maintain high environmental standards. Recycle your old handsets, batteries and charger units (all manufacturers and brands). Before you recycle, please remember these important points:

^Handset, batteries and chargers submitted for recycling cannot be returned.

^Always be sure to erase all data recorded on old handsets (Phone

Book entries, call records, mail, etc.) before recycling.